Home

form 1700, the PAC Control User`s Guide

Contents

1. It Counter dialog box in the If Greater Than 4 Previous Counter trat Then Enter Text String Variable Warning Notice strategy Put Status In Integer 32 VaridN Count Status T Add Instruction Subroutine file name Instruction Variable Increase Notifics Comment Prompt and Type parameters from the subroutine define the instruction in the strategy ype Integer 32 Variable If Counter v If Greater Than i nteger 32 Variable Previous_Counter v Then Enter Test String Variable Warming N otice v Then Enter Test Integer 32 Variable v Count Status v Adding Commands and Local Variables Adding commands instructions to subroutines is exactly like adding instructions to charts For help see Adding Commands on page 235 If you are using OptoScript code within a subroutine see Chapter 11 for help on creating code You can copy and paste instructions from one block to another within the same subroutine if you have trouble copying and pasting instructions from one chart or subroutine into another simply paste the entire block and then modify it You may also need to add local items to be used in the subroutine only and discarded when the subroutine is finished Adding variables to subroutines is also like adding variables to charts For help see Adding Variables on page 221 Remember that the subroutine is separate from any str
2. Requests directory listing nStatus SendCommunicationHandleCommand chFTP dir returns number of listings Makes sure dir if nStatus gt 0 then worked firmware must nFileCount nStatus be version 7 1 or greater Reads in listings to stList Set the EOM character to 00 SetEndOfMessageTerminator chFTP 0x00 NOTE Each listing from an nStatus ReceiveStrTable nStatus 0 stList chFTP Opto 22 device server ends with these hex bytes OD vo dotab scer po celis OA and is delineated from the next by a 00 Optional parses each for nlIndex 0 to nFileCount 1 step 1 listing into separated GetSubstring stList nIndex 0 17 stDateTimeStamps nIndex tables for GetSubstring stList nIndex 18 21 sTemp 1 date time stamp first 17 characters 2 file size next 21 characters 3 filename remaining characters and removes ntSizes nIndex StringToInt32 sTemp GetSubstring stList nIndex 39 1000 nLength GetStringLength stFilenames nIndex GetSubstring stFilenames nIndex 0 nLength 2 stFilenames nIndex stFilenames nIndex next the OD OA left over on the end of the filename Further parsing could be endif done on the date time endif stamps depending on how those values will be used endif CloseCommunication chFTP Using Serial Communication Handles to Communicate with 266 Serial Devices Serial c
3. PAC Control User s Guide 311 STRING COMMANDS 312 Convert to String Commands The five convert to string commands are typically used when printing a number to a port The ASCII table on the followi Som ng the following page shows how various parameters affect the string as it is converted Note e commands add leading spaces to achieve the specified length These spaces are indicated with underscores _ e Floats if used are automatically rounded to integers before conversion except when using the command Convert Number to Formatted Hex String Command Convert to String Commands Parameters E e2 ke 3 28g LES S S S 58 55 BG5_ f Bp 23 2 o o xov o0 o gt gt E Eoos uc 55 5L ss ot os a Sr o rs zo zo zu 58 59 F202 9 tX r Loa o oo Ss fos amp gt o2 os o Eo 2 orbe Eg gt I gt 0 gt 2 532 Eo gt a Or o E o zo 2r SES o s ge 8 3 ood S 16 0 1 4 41800000 16 0 10 1 6e 01 1 6e 01 16 0 2 4 41800000 eee 10 1 6e 01 1 6e 01 a 16 0 1 4 C1800000 ges FFFFFFFO 1 6e 01 1 6e 01 G o i 1 23 1 4 3F9D70A4 1 2 1 1 23e 00 1 23e 00 12 3 1 4 4144CCCD 12 3 C 1 23e 01 1 23e 01 0 0 1 4 00000000 _0 0 0 0 0e 00 0 0e 00 16 1 4 0010 16 0 10 __16 16 16 2 4 0010 anes 10 __16 16 EJ 16 1 4 FFFO s FFFFFFFO _ 16 16 T 0 1 4 0000 0 0 0 ___0 0 1000 1 2 s s 3E8 1000 1000 Indicates an overflow The whole number portion
4. To search for blocks that are not connected to other blocks click Missing Connections To search for condition blocks that have no instructions click Empty Cond Blocks 4 Click Find The dialog box expands and the search results appear at the bottom Search Scope Global O Local Search For OOperand Instruction Missing Connections Empty Cond Blocks Acton Condition l Instruction Delay mSec Chart Block Name Flag_Example_Chart Delay 1 msec 5 Delay mSec Simple Error Handling C Delay 100 msec 3 Delay mSec Se arc h 2 occurrence s found results Block ID Command For more information on any item in the search results try double clicking the item 5 To save the search results to a file or to print them click Print In the window that opens click the Disk button to save or the Print button to print your search results 6 When you have finished your search close the Find dialog box Replacing You can also replace any operand instruction or tag with a similar item As in searching you can replace items in a strategy or one of its charts or you can replace items in a subroutine 1 Open the strategy or subroutine and select Edit gt Replace The Find and Replace dialog box appears PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 1 Find and Replace Search Scope O Loca Alarms Search For Operand O Instruction OTag Typ
5. Operation performed successfully Close See also A Troubleshooting on page 361 for additional help in resolving errors Types of Errors As you work in PAC Control you may see three types of errors e PAC Control Errors appear in dialog boxes on the computer screen e Queue Messages both errors and other messages appear in the control engine s message queue e Status Codes appear in variables or as returned values in OptoScript PAC Control Errors PAC Control errors indicate a problem within PAC Control that may have been reported by the control engine or may have occurred before control engine communication PAC Control User s Guide 371 TYPES OF ERRORS PAC Control errors appear in dialog boxes on the computer running PAC Control Some of these errors appear as numbers some as text and some show both numbers and text An example of a PAC Control error is Timeout No response from device Another example is TCP IP Cannot error with an error code of 412 Queue Messages Queue messages indicate an error or other message during strategy operation and they appear in the PAC Control message queue For information on viewing the queue see Viewing the Message Queue on page 103 Here s an example of a message queue View Message Queue for Cookie Controller DER Refresh Copy All Pop Top Message gt lt Clear All Messages Code Severity Description Chart
6. To sort by block number instead click the Block Id column label Center On Block Action SpeedOK Condition Drop Dough Action Drop Chips Action Start Conv OptoScript Back to Continue To sortin the opposite order descending numbers instead of ascending numbers click the Block Id column label again Some dialog boxes don t allow custom sorting If you click a column label in these dialog boxes nothing happens PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL Customizing PAC Control for Your Needs Setting Decimal Binary or Hex Display Mode You can set up PAC Control to show the values of all integers and integer tables in decimal the default binary or hexadecimal hex format Binary and hex formats help you use masks Hex view is available in all modes Configure Debug and Online The default view is in decimal notation as shown in the following figure 3 4 nCookie_Counter scanning Decimal Name nCookie_Counted view Maeno To view integers and integer tables in binary view choose View gt Binary Integer Display or click the DEC button and choose Binary The integers appear as shown below nCookie Counter scanning Name nCookie_Counter Binary view All the bits Value 00000000 o0o000000 00001110 00001000 l cannot be shown at once Maeiio F To view integers and integer tables in hex view click BIN in the dialog box and then
7. ssssssssssssssssssssssssee 249 Opening and Closing TCP IP Communication Handles n asaue 252 TCP Communication Handle Examples 000 c cece cece cece e eee eens 253 Using Flowcharts to Control TCP IP Communication eee eee e eee 254 Ethernet CONNeCLIONS arid POMS ics see Ue dete ations Hebden arr Pedes 256 Using the Control Engine s File System cesses eere teme e ee eme 257 PAC Control User s Guide Using a File On amicroSD Card estere repr er Pte e teme detects 258 Working with Files in Your Strategy ssssssssssssss eens 259 Moving Elles VialE TP 2 toc cats ebore tob Ut UD tabbiadereuniam ade iaaehegetns 263 FTP Communication Handle Examples s sss 263 Using FTP Communication Handles in Your Strategy 00 cece eee eee 264 hetrieving a Directory LISTING eode date e PRU HER ERREUR bees 265 Using Serial Communication Handles to Communicate with Serial Devices 266 Serial Communication Handle Examples sss 267 Using Serial Communication Handles in Your Strategy 0 0 0 cece eee 269 Senidirig ahErtiall Sec cin seien ciet erroe posee Meas eh epe aah 269 Obtaining a Root Certificate for Gmail or Yahoo Mail 0208 270 Registering a Root Certificate on a SNAP PAC Controller s c cece cece 270 Send Email with Attachments Example lisse 271 Setting Timeouts for the Send Email Comman
8. 3 diDoughLevelSwitch scanning Mame diDoughLevelS witch Type Digitallnput G More Info On Latch Wig Off Latch agg Counter 0 Communication 120 Unit E Open Parent wach Fo F Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost Use the Clear button to immediately clear the field Asterisks in a field indicate an out of range value Dashes in an XVAL field indicate a communication error Change the fields as necessary A State The point s current internal value Switch between On and Off then click Apply B XVAL The point s current external value Switch between On and Off then click Apply C On Latch Off Latch The state of the point s on and off latches D cCounter Internal and external feature values if the point has been configured with any special features such as a counter E Enable comm Current point status Yes on a green background means enabled No on a red background means disabled To change the status click one of the arrows then click Apply To add the point to a watch window click Watch and see page 157 To view configuration information for the variable click More Info To inspection I O unit s configuration click Open Parent Pro only To add a plot control click Plot PAC Control User s Guide 143 INSPECT
9. beam the digital I O module tells the control engine it is off and the control engine responds as programmed to stamp the sheet The pump is an example of a digital output device Based on information from the tank level input the control engine turns the pump on or off as programmed Analog points have a range of possible values Temperature and pressure are examples of analog information Temperature might be any number in a range 2 or 31 65 or 70 1 or many other possible numbers In the Control System Example on page 44 the tank level sensor is an analog input device It registers the changing level of water in the tank and reports the level to the control engine which responds by turning the pump on or off The fuel pump is an example of an analog output device Based on information about the temperature in the furnace the control engine adjusts the pressure of fuel through the pump as programmed SNAP Special Purpose I O Modules In the PAC Control system some I O modules do not contain standard analog or digital input output points but are used for special purposes SNAP serial communication modules provide two channels of serial data Through these channels data can be sent to and received from a serial device In the Control System Example on page 44 the barcode reader is an example of a serial device SNAP high density digital HDD modules provide 32 channels of digital input or 32 channels of digital output in o
10. 0 60 ccc cece teen eet eee 239 Commenting Out a COMMANG in 2a s tidcewndiis dalee RI Ee ed data dasa Re RIA teas QS 240 CUEING OF Copyihg a COITimlanQos vus oreet rete pese UI guns UL nete re d reds 240 Pastinc a COMMANG xy eco qe cote evitar e Dates exti toe reb qur qi viagra 241 Configuring a Continue Blocks is Loop tbe vu S dU etta dut qoe Vanda eds dotes 241 Viewing and Printing Chart Instructions ssssssssssssssssss nnrir rreren 241 Chapter 10 Programming with Commands cee eee cece eee eeeeeees 243 HIM OCUIC OM ies eters E E MORTCM 243 Imtis Chapter veis ta brc deme dase dope Ue dbase tae dak ddddadsg Tb OPOd e Pedo s 243 Analog Point Commands 6 cece eee e ens 244 Offset and Gain Commands 0 00 cece cece cece ttt tennis 244 Minimuim Maximum Values sereis ei wees bene MESUCHRUONIT E PUR P ads 245 Analog Points and OptoScript Code iss eere m eb tete OR I b ee 245 headitig or Writing Analog Poirts oos prr eer er RERO Hed 245 Chart Command Sarnen ranee naai dU rude E bud uU e e AU M 246 About the Task Quelle is iii csse os ette e dM eo aiid ead aided tendons 246 Communication Commands isssssssssssssssssssssssssss e e eee nen 247 COMMUNICATION HANES 5505 erede tus sere ehe a e oot de Gured TA Ense Q3 247 Adding Communication Handles 0 0 0c cc cece cece cece eee e 248 Using TCP Communication Handles 1 ote tbt e RPoR uos Dee ene dems ee 249 Incoming and Outgoing Communication
11. Delete 1 0 Points PID Loops 116 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O 2 To configure a new O unit click Add or double click anywhere in the box below any listed units The Add I O Unit dialog box appears tAdd 1 0 Unit Information A Name B Description Type C Type SNAP PAC AI Addressing D Primary Address 0 0 80 C Local loopback E Secondary Address F Ethemet Pott 2000 Communication from control engine G Enable communications from control engine H Timeout and disable communications after 3 tries of second s each Device Options l For temperature points use degrees Fahrenheit Celsius J C Watchdog timeout after second s of no communications 3 Complete the fields as described in Add I O Unit Dialog Box below Add I O Unit Dialog Box Use this dialog box to add a new I O unit to the strategy or edit an existing unit For information on saving the I O Unit Configuration see Inspecting I O Units and Saving Settings to Flash on page 140 A Name Enter a name for the I O unit The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores B Description Optional Enter a description of the unit C Type When adding an 1 0 unit select the type of I O unit from the drop down list When upgrading an older I O unit to a SNAP PAC brain po
12. Move String From To Append String to String Append To Append String to String Append To Convert Humber to String Convert Put Result in Append String to String Append To Append String to String Append TU lt M ae Jf er lt 3 Shortcuts ISDN Chart plane sVehicle What type of Request sVehicle Request is in stall Request nStall I Instructions String Hzndler Parse response i Building a string using standard PAC Control can require several commands If substrings or individual characters within a string must be handled a standard PAC Control block can become quite large x Get Substring From String Start at Index Hum Characters Put Result in Get Substring From String Start at Index Hum Characters Put Result in Convert String to Integer 32 Convert Put Result in Response 1 1 Classification Response 2 2 Model Model Model Humber Add Nest Block Previous Block The OptoScript version of the String Handler flowchart is more compact The string request can be built more easily and parsing the response takes up much less space If you handle more complex serial data than in the String Handler example you will find OptoScript code even more useful 320 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 US
13. Resolving TCP IP Cannot Connect Errors 412 Many problems with Ethernet connections return a TCP IP Cannot Connect error Cannot connect errors are probably the most common communication problem with control engines They indicate that a TCP IP connection could not be made to the control engine within the specified time interval If you receive this error first check the following e Make sure the control engine has been turned on e Verify that the correct IP address appears for the control engine e Make sure your control engine has been assigned a valid IP address These controllers and brains come from the factory with a default IP address of 0 0 0 0 which is invalid For help in assigning an IP address see the PAC Manager User Guide e Make sure you have up to date drivers installed on your computer s Network Interface Card NIC Contact your system administrator or the manufacturer of the card for help e If problems persist you can increase the length of time before a timeout occurs Choose Configure gt Control Engines and change the Timeout mSec field to a larger number Pinging the Control Engine If you still cannot communicate with the control engine after you have checked these items try to reach it using the PING protocol Choose Start gt Programs gt MS DOS Prompt At the prompt type ping control engine s IP address For example type ping 10 192 54 40 If data is returned from the control engine it can
14. STEPS TO DESIGN Breakdown the larger process task into sub process tasks Breakdown the sub process tasks into detailed steps e estthe steps Next build the strategy e Configure hardware Control Engines Ounits O points Determine necessary variables and configure them e Create charts one for each sub process and add instructions Compile and debug each chart e Compile and debug the whole strategy Finally use and improve the strategy Now let s take a look at each of these steps in order Solving the Problem You can avoid a lot of extra time and rework if you define and solve your problem before you ever start building a flowchart in PAC Control Defining the Problem Suppose for example you want to automate a simple lawn sprinkler system Start by asking yourself or others questions about the control process you re trying to do What are you trying to do Start with the big picture and work down to the smaller details e Big picture l m trying to control this sprinkler system Smaller details The sprinklers should turn on every Sunday and every Wednesday They should not turn on if it s raining hey should start at six o clock in the morning They need to run for 15 minutes What inputs and data do you have to work with List all the inputs Describe the data they provide Check for any inputs or data you need but don t have Inp
15. Changing the Control Engine that Receives the Downloaded Strategy on page 100 Once you have changed the address when you enter Debug mode you are communicating through the address you chose Downloading the strategy to a SNAP PAC controller through one of its Ethernet interfaces replaces any strategy that was downloaded earlier through its other interface Using Redundant Controllers The SNAP PAC Redundancy Option allows you to configure two redundant SNAP PAC S controllers that use the same PAC Control strategy By utilizing sync blocks in the strategy and persistent redundant variables critical data is synchronized in both controllers so that the inactive controller can take over at any time and become the active controller To learn more about the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option and how to set up a strategy using sync blocks and persistent redundant variables see form 1831 the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option User s Guide NOTE If your system has redundant controllers you cannot use link redundancy between PAC Display Pro and the controller Changing or Deleting a Control Engine See the following topics to change or delete a control engine e Changing a Control Engine5 Definition below e Changing the Control Engine that Receives the Downloaded Strategy on page 100 e Removing a Control Engines Association with a Strategy on page 100 e Deleting a Control Engine from Your PC on page 100 Changing a Control Engine
16. Counter Digital Output Analog Input Deg Chart OFF 272 9154 PAC Control User s Guide 159 USING WATCH WINDOWS FOR MONITORING 160 To rearrange elements in the watch window list click the item you want to move and drag it to a new location or right click it and choose Move Up or Move Down from the pop up menu You can also sort elements in the window by clicking on the column label For example to sort by Type click the label Type in the column heading Click again to change the order from ascending A Z to descending Z A To move an element from one watch window to another open both windows and drag the element where you want it To copy an element to another watch window so it will appear in both windows hold down the CTRL key while you drag it To delete an element right click it and choose Delete from the pop up menu To inspect an element double click it The inspect dialog box opens For information on using it see Inspecting Control Engines and the Queue on page 101 PAC Control User s Guide 7 Working with Strategies Introduction A strategy is the software program you create in PAC Control A strategy is similar to a file in any Microsoft Windows program You use standard Windows menu items to create a new strategy to open an existing strategy or to save a strategy The strategy includes all the definitions and instructions necessary to control your process This chapter is a step by
17. Declared Name String 1 e Declared Width 22 e Maximum Possible Width 1024 e Bytes of Memory Required Declared Width 4 22 4 26 lt Width is gt String_1 Length is 0 A string is referred to by its name Initially the previous string is empty giving it a length of zero Later during program execution seven characters are added to String_1 increasing its length to seven lt Width is s String 1 OJ P T O 2 2 Lengthis gt Sample String Table e Declared Name Promo Messages e Declared Width 26 e Maximum Possible Width 1024 e Declared Length Number of indexes or items in table 5 e Maximum Possible Length Size 1 000 000 308 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS e Bytes of Memory Required Declared Width 4 x Declared Length 26 4 x 5 150 lt Width is gt Index 0 OIPI T 2 2 S N A P PAC S YISITIEMS Index 1 n njo vja ijvije II O Index 2 Die lji v eir s cloinitirio l Index 3 pirioigiraimim a iylyiftty a njd Index 4 ein tleir pirjii sje cjo ninyjejc tyijvyjiljtyy A string table is a collection of strings Each string is referred to by the name o
18. Note that file is all lowercase Open modes are r Opens a file for reading If the file does not exist or cannot be found the open call fails Ww Creates a new file and opens it for writing If the file already exists its contents are destroyed a Opens a file for writing at the end of the file appending If the file doesn t exist it is created Here are some examples of file communication handle values Creates the file myfile txt and opens it for writing file w myfile txt Opens the existing file myfile txt so data can be appended to it file a myfile txt Creates the file Temperature data txt in the directory Data_files and opens it for writing If the directory doesn t exist it is created file w Data_files Temperature data txt Opens the file Temperature data txt in the directory Data files for reading file r Data files Temperature data txt To add a communication handle see the steps starting on page 248 In the Add Variable dialog box enter the communication handle value in the Initial Value field PAC Control User s Guide 257 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 258 Add Variable Name Comm H andle File Description Ippe Communication Handle v Initialization O Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run Persistent Communication Initial Value file w myfile txt handle value Keep the followi
19. Now we re going to add the integer 32 variable to increment which will be called nCookie Counter PAC Control User s Guide ADDING A COMMAND 10 Click the arrow in the Name field which currently reads bStartFlag The drop down list shows all variables currently configured as integer 32 variables Add Instruction Instruction Increment Variable Comment Increment a counter of cookies produced Type Name Integer 32 Variable mu nChartStatus hs nCookieCounter nCookieMotionPreset nLoopCounter nCookie Counter is not in the list because we never needed it before so we never created it We ll create it now using what we call on the fly configuration 11 Highlight bStartFlag and type the new variable name nCookie Counter right over it As soon as you try to do something else such as click OK to close the dialog box the following message appears PAC Control Professional The object you have specified does not exist Do you wish to add it now Yes No Cancel 12 Click Yes Add Variable Name nCookie_Counter Description Type Integer 32 Initialization O Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run Persistent Redundant Initial Value 0 Notice that the name nCookie_Counter and type Integer 32 have already been filled in 13 Add a description if you wish Leave the initial value at zero which is the default Then click OK to
20. OPE pha Meout this parameter out to use the default of 30 seconds Here are two examples of FTP communication handle values ftp 10 22 55 35 21 jsmith 2towers 60 timeout increased to 60 seconds ftp 10 192 54 195 21 m m no timeout specified To add a communication handle see the steps starting on page 248 In the Add Variable dialog box enter the communication handle value in the Initial Value field PAC Control User s Guide 263 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS Add Variable Name Comm Handle FTP Description Type Communication Handle w Initialization O Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run Persistent Communication Initial Value ftp 10 22 55 35 21 jsmith 2towers 60 handle value Cancel Help Using FTP Communication Handles in Your Strategy Suppose you have data you need to send via FTP to a device on the network whose IP address is 10 192 56 45 Your username on this device is JoeG and your password is hello You expect the default timeout of 30 seconds to be adequate There are two ways you can send the data all at once or in pieces over time If your data file is less than 1 MB in size you can send it all at once If it is larger or if you want to append additional data to a file that already exists you send it in pieces Sending or Retrieving the Data All At Once This method is better for small data files files larger than 1MB may take a long
21. cece cece eee teen ences 365 PINGING THE Control Engllte cierres tere Raed woe pO E Lane oun eres 365 Other Troubleshooting TOIS ii vies 229 Seiad Can a deas Woh Gian b ee eaters 366 Checking Detailed Communication Information Using PAC Message Viewer 366 Checking File Versions for Opto 22 Software was acia da cca i bane daa Qao dades d 368 Problems with Permissions in Windows ics 369 Appendix B Errors and Messages esee 371 IMU OCUCTION ECCE 371 jd MCCC HET 371 PAC CORBLUOLEITOIS i acdvnsingsid Pret Reb UID dare eta M re deeds 371 Queue MESSAGES POET 372 Using QUEUE Messages eem neret rer Ep epe n reete bcr e Pn eda 373 Status C Odes cseteris mere r ntebhes vetas tdaneetest datei be verbe de egenis 373 Naming MIN erm e MEDIEN E EEUU 373 SET COMMIS SACS Las agio VR Ra eto Roa Bone OK ah eles on nd 373 Appendix C PAC Control Files lt cs sasneises cede VERA EYE ET E ERES VER 381 IAL OCUCTION prr 381 niles Related toa Strategy cic cme cna ver tece daere verte Paper qe veio Pads the Hee 381 PIES ASSOCIATE witha SUDIOULING i carne EIER OPERE DISSR A PPS Yi eeke EES 382 Files in the PAC Control Directory sssssssssssss e eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 382 PAC Control User s Guide Appendix D Sample Strategy cece cece e cece cece cece enne 383 W e tate ether Rei he oe ian Peete tii te width aa AC at 383 Factory Sene maian a e co p oed gei red artius eir 383 D scription ot the
22. eee 67 About PAC Control PAC Control is a programming language based on flowcharts Whether you have PAC Control Basic or PAC Control Professional you use PAC Control to develop software that monitors and controls all kinds of equipment and sensors from a simple heating system to a complex factory The software you develop controls the Opto 22 hardware that runs your heating system or factory The diagram below shows how PAC Control on your PC can work with the hardware in your control system This example shows a small system yours may be even smaller or considerably larger and more complex The diagram uses a SNAP PAC S1 as the control engine Input output I O points on the subordinate SNAP PAC I O units monitor and control the analog digital and serial devices connected to them All these terms are defined in the following pages PAC Control User s Guide ABOUT PAC CONTROL Control System Example PAC Display Viewing Trending Alarming PAC Control Programming Debugging SNAP PAC S series if controller if Runs strategy i controls all 1 0 SNAP PAC A 1 0 unit lt A Fuel Pump alog output Furnace Temperature SNAP PAC Thermocouple 1 0 unit Analog input Pump On or Off Digital output SNAP PAC 1 0 unit PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL General Control Concepts Automation Automation is a way of adding intelligence
23. ie Ethernet switch network 2 Ethernet switch network 1 SNAP PAC S series controller controls all I O units x gu and actuators location 3 Sensorsandactuators location 2 Sensorsandactuators location 1 Configuring Ethernet Link Redundancy Ethernet link redundancy from PAC Display Pro to a control engine is easy to configure First make sure the secondary IP address has been assigned to the controller in PAC Manager Then in PAC Control just enter both the primary and secondary IP addresses when you configure the control engine see page 89 Once you have set up link redundancy for the control engine you are using in your PAC Control strategy it works automatically in PAC Display To configure link redundancy from the control engine to I O units enter both the primary and secondary IP addresses when you configure the I O unit see Adding an I O Unit on page 116 EJ PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES Using Strategies with Link Redundancy Although PAC Display and OptoOPCServer as the PAC Display Pro scanner automatically shift to the secondary address when the primary address is not available the PAC Control debugger does not In PAC Control you control which address receives communication so you know exactly how communication is occurring during debugging To change between primary and secondary control engine addresses follow the steps in
24. lt strategy gt lt control engine gt cdf lt chart name gt cht lt chart name gt ccd lt chart name gt con lt chart name gt cxf lt filename gt wth lt filename gt otg lt strategy date time gt zip PAC Control strategy database Controller Run File compiled file that is sent to the control engine Intermediate run file compiled file that is sent to the control engine Intermediate run file component of the run file Intermediate run file component of the run file Intermediate run file component of the run file Initialization data for variables with Init on Download option com ponent of the run file Strategy configuration information Temporary PAC Control strategy database file PAC Control strategy database lock file Persistent variable definitions Control engine download file for special circumstances see page 172 Chart Compiled chart code component of the run file Online compiled chart code Exported chart file Watch window file you name the file Exported I O configuration file you name the file Strategy archive file automatically named see Archiving Strate gies on the Computer on page 166 for file name formats PAC Control User s Guide 381 FILES ASSOCIATED WITH A SUBROUTINE Files Associated with a Subroutine lt subroutine name gt isb Subroutine lt subroutine name gt ini lt subroutine name gt isc lt subroutine name gt lisb Subroutine lock file Files
25. oh L 0 oh g uU g zu u gzu jueuuuBisse oueuinu Il Il i Il jueuiuJo9 aui Ie al e qejie e JON Ie d JUBLULUOD 490 q V i e qejeAe JON ia JojoeJeuo 01194 4Oll9u Ol 9U Oll9u Buys Ly 3v 7L LV 3v 2 V 8L43v 2 L LVe3v ZL 9ynueros yeoy vec vez vez vez pyepuejs eoj OAVETL PILDAVETLXO Jo TIOGVETLXO e qeireAe JON PIIOAVETLXO jeuoepexeu 9 1e6ejut cl POIETL Jo VIEZLI e qejie e JON votez ieuuroep v9 1e5e1ul oO8VEcL OAVETLXO O8VECLH OAVETLXO jewloepexey ze 1e6ejut EZL EZL EZL EZL ewp ze 1963 uosueduio uon unj ie ES OO 2A D e pe i o CJ UO e APPENDIX E OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE e x YS X 444400009 pue x Z gt gt X 444340000X0 9 X e qeje e ON 44440000H puy x Zl gt gt X 44440000X0 pueyg x suoisseJdxe esiwiq A Jus x lt lt X 9 qe IeAe JON lt lt X juBu yys s myq us x X aiqeyiene ON X Y PYS esiwiq K 10X X yX K 10X X 10X q X YOX esimyiq pue x ARX puy x A pueilq x QNV esq JO X K x KJO X JOjq X 30N 88S YO BsSIM IG X Jou X X JON X Jou q LON 95IAulq g lt gt A 40 0 lt x ou g A pue 0 lt x i A Il 0 lt x i g A 99 0 lt Xx lt gt A 10 0 lt X 19N A puy 0 lt x g A Jou s0 Q lt x Jou A pue 0 lt x suoissaJdxo e2180 Ajuo suee
26. sGreeting Hello sGreeting 5 sGreeting 6 sGreeting 7 sGreeting 6 A character element of a string variable may be treated like an Integer 32 value nNumber sString2 1 sString2 2 The operator is used to paste strings together There is no limit to the number of operators you can use ona line The operator must be used in an assignment statement sStringl Hello sString2 world sString3 I After the three lines above same result the following two lines would produce the sString4 sStringl sString2 sString3 sString4 sStringl world sString3 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT Use the operator to append one string to another and change the value of one of them into the result In the following example the value of sName would change to Smith John sName Smith sFirstName John sName sFirstName The Chr keyword can be used to convert a numeric value into a one element string sString5 sStringl sString2 Chr sString5 sStringl sString2 Chr 33 Working with Pointers The use of pointers is an advanced programming technique that is very powerful For more information on using pointers see Pointer Commands on page 303 NOTE Except for the equal operator the comparison operators see page 334 can be used only with anumeric expression They cannot be used with a null whic
27. Description Iype Communication Hande Initialization O Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run Persistent Initial Value ser 0 115200 n 8 1 Communication handle value Method 2 Using keywords this method offers more flexibility For example use this method if you want to specify RTS CTS on a serial port on a SNAP S series or R series controller Keywords may be used in any order Each keyword must be lowercase and followed by an equal sign and a value with no spaces even after commas as shown in the following examples ser port 0 baud 115200 data 8 parity n stop 1 rts cts 0 ser baud 115200 data 8 parity n rts cts 1 stop 1 port 0 timeout 1 5 In the Add Variable dialog box enter the communication handle value in the Initial Value field Due to the long value part of the value is hidden Add Variable Name Comm H andle FTP Description Type Communication Handle v Initialization O Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run O Persistent Communication handle value Initial Value serport 0 baud l 15200 data 8 parityzn s NOTE You must include at minimum the port number and at least one parameter Otherwise it will not Work The keywords and possible values are The ports available depends on the controller type For a list of port 0 1 2 3 available ports see the documentat
28. Err TermP Err TermI TuneI ScanTime Integral TermD TuneD ScanTime PV PV1 Ideal or ISA Algorithm Output Span Gain TermP TermI TermD Parallel Algorithm Output Span Gain TermP TermI TermD Interacting Algorithm Output Span Gain TermP TermI 1 TermD 302 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Pointer Commands The following commands are used with pointers Clear Pointer Move to Pointer Clear Pointer Table Element Move to Pointer Table Get Pointer From Name Pointer Equal to NULL Move from Pointer Table Element Pointer Table Element Equal to NULL See also Understanding Pointers on page 303 Advantages of Using Pointers on page 304 Referencing Objects with Pointers on page 304 Understanding Pointers Like integer and float variables a pointer variable stores a specific number However the number is not data it is the memory location address of data The pointer points to data rather than containing the data A pointer in PAC Control can point to many different types of objects e Another variable e A digital point or object e An analog point or object Anl Ounit e Achart Pointers cannot point to other pointers however If you try to move a pointer to a pointer PAC Control just duplicates the existing pointer The following table lists the objects that point
29. munication handle you are using Unable to lock a resource such as a variable for exclusive 37 Timeout on lock i iS writing within the timeout period 38 Timeout on send Unable to send communication in the timeout period 39 Timeout on receive Unable to receive communication in the timeout period Invalid limit on string index task state prior A character number greater than the length of the string was 42 ity etc used or the string had a zero length or an invalid value Deep was passed when setting the state of a chart running etc String less than 8 characters used to read time 44 String too short hh mm ss or not 8 or 10 characters for a date or zero length on a string function 45 Null string Attempted to use an uninitialized string String not 8 characters long when setting time or invalid for 46 Invalid string mat when setting date or invalid communication handle string or comm handle command such as a missing colon 47 Invalid connection Devige drivers might be Attempted to open an already open connection missing or not loaded running 49 No more connections aa available Maxi No more sessions available for Ethernet mum number of connections already in use Open connection timeout Could not estab aai 50 ZA i Unable to open a connection in time lish connection within the timeout period Attempted to close a connection that wasn t opened Com 52 Invalid connection not opened muni
30. system INIT NZA N A aiven 15 02 03 08 05 07 700 Warming PID Loop 0 has been configured outside of system _INIT_ N A N Mixed L 15 02 03 09 05 07 13 Error Overflow error Dough Chip Co 17 N null 15 02 21 09 05 07 13 Error Overflow error Dough_Chip_Co 17 N A nul 15 02 21 09 05 07 Number of messages 12 2 To see all the information in the column drag the edge of a column heading See Message Queue Information below 3 To see all of the information for one message double click the message PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES View Message Queue for Cookie Controller Refresh 3 Copy all Pop Top Message gt lt Clear All Messages Code Severity Description Block Line Object Time Device has powered up Power JN A N A Local 1 16 20 26 1 700 Warning PID Loop 0 has been confiaured ok N A N A Local l 16 20 26 539 Info 140 error pey 539 Info 120 error pe 58 Error No data reca Message Details moe wh 534 Info Attempt s to CODE 4 93 Info 120 Unit not SEVERITY Info DESCRIPTION Device has powered up Powerup clear expected message received Number of messages 7 CHART system INIT I0 L BLOCK N LINE N OBJECT Local IO I 70 Unit 127 0 0 1 TIME 16 20 26 DATE 09 25 07 4 To refresh the display with the latest messages
31. 961 ABC 965 would expand to something like aaABC_473 Click OK In the Configure I O Points dialog box click the plus sign next to the new module to expand it PAC Control User s Guide 123 ADDING 1 0 POINTS Notice that the module icon is color coded to reflect the type of module being configured white for digital DC input red for digital DC output yellow for digital AC input and black for digital AC output Configure I O Points 1 0 Unit Sprinkler Control Type SNAP PACRT Module icon Expand or collapse points on the module by clicking the or sign in the box Points Copy To gt Expand All Collapse All 10 Highlight the point you want to configure and click Add 11 Complete the fields as described in Add Digital Point Dialog Box below 12 When you have completed the fields click OK The new point appears in the list Here is an example of how it might look on a SNAP I O unit 1 Configure 1 0 Points 120 Unit Sprinkler Control SNAP PAC R1 Modules and Points Features Subty E Lt 00 SNAP IDC5D 2 5 28 VDC Digital Input re Switch DO ENENENNLCUTNNESNO C0 ru Not ed Delete I lot Used J ed Move To CopyTo gt Expand All Collapse All NOTE If you need to add several similar points see Copying a Configured I O Point on page 131 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O Add Digital Point Dial
32. Block 1 If the conditions in Block 1 are true Block 2 is executed next If the conditions in Block 1 are false Block 0 is executed next PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 8 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS New_Chart G Shortcuts 100 v Adding Text One of the best places to put comments about a strategy is directly on its flowcharts Start with the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode 1 To add text to a chart click the Text tool 4 When you move the mouse onto the chart a rectangle representing the text area appears 2 Click the mouse button and type your comments If you type in more text than the text frame holds it expands in length 3 When you have finished typing click anywhere on the chart outside the text frame The frame becomes invisible and only the text appears To change the size or shape of the text block see Resizing Blocks or Text Blocks on page 212 4 Click in another location to create another text frame or release the tool by right clicking in the chart or choosing another tool from the toolbar Editing Text 1 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the Select tool L 2 Double click the text block you want to change A blinking cursor appears at the beginning of the text 3 Change the text as needed You can use any standard Windows CTRL key combinations when editing including CTRL arrow keys and CTRL HOME or END for navigation You
33. Close the dialog box Click inside the Oven Inspection Control chart to make it the active chart and then click the Auto Step Chart button You see three blocks being processed Speed OK Oven On and Reject Cookie The strategy doesn t move into the Blow Off block That s because an inspector has to flag bad cookies but we don t have an inspector right now So we ll simulate what would happen by tripping the digital input that flags a bad cookie In the Oven Inspection Control chart click the Auto Step Chart button again to stop auto stepping Step Auto changes to Step Off in the status bar Click the Pause Chart button Step Off changes to Step On Click the Breakpoint tool and click once on the Blow Off block A breakpoint hand appears on the block Click the right mouse button or press ESC to release the tool Notice that Break On now appears in the chart status bar Click the Breakpoint tool and click once on the Blow Off block A red box appears around the Blow Off block and Break On now appears in the chart status bar The Powerup chart starts this chart While conveyor speed is out of spec set oven temperature to 200 degrees Set oven temperature to 450 degrees If inspection station sees a bad cookie open reject valve for 0 5 second G Shortcuts 100 v pip Chart a a ee Dough Chip Control ba ven Inspection Control Click the Dough Chip
34. Each block has only one exit point It is not possible to use return to jump out of the current block More About Syntax with Commands As noted in the previous sample arguments for a command are listed in the parentheses following the command Arguments are listed in order beginning with argument 1 To find out the arguments for any command see the PAC Control Command Reference or online command help SetDownTimerPresetValue 60 0 Minute Timer command argument 1 argument 2 EnableIOUnitCausingCurrentError command no arguments There are two types of OptoScript commands procedure commands and function commands Procedure commands accomplish an action and return no value Here are some examples RemoveCurrentError ClampInt32TableElement 10 0 5 x1 Function commands return a value from their action so the value can be placed somewhere In the following examples the value is placed in the variable at the beginning of the statement nMonth GetMonth fSquare Root SquareRoot 99 nPosition FindCharacterInString S 0 sName When you compare these examples to the identical commands in standard PAC Control you ll notice that the returned value for the standard PAC Control command is an argument In OptoScript the returned value is not an argument thus reducing the number of arguments by one In the first example the standard command Get Month has one argument which is where the result is placed The Op
35. I O Unit Memory Map Commands 22 6 e tenet en ee es 290 I O Unit Scratch Pad Commands isse 291 Logical COMMANS use tie e Ee tO pet etx PRO Pep U prete georted eset 293 Understanding Logical Commands 0 00 nsus 00 cece ccc eee ee 293 Logical True and Logical False eee ete et ens 294 Mathematical Commands osten ta UR edt aestu du ues d eamus d dd dita unti 295 WSU Ite ges eie atre te repite a rte t oe ue etie are e etit rede 295 Controlling ROUnNdiINg s 25 cori uper dede So bnt et Feed ded ue emus 295 Using FLOATS TT IDA 295 Float Issues and Examples 00 ccc cece eect teen nett EN eee 296 Helpful Links for More Information sss 297 Mixing and Converting Integers and Floats 2 2 0 00 ccc cece eee c cee cee neces 297 Miscellaheo s Comards seen iees rene tav tee Reeve reset un tbe Deut to ke 299 PAC Control User s Guide Comment Commands cc cece cece eee eras 299 PID Etlierri E COMMANGS eei rie E aa nites PEERU IRE pis ecole 300 Whatisa PID RERUM 300 PID Loops on VO Unlts z 3 ie REED OPERE HORE 301 Algorithm Choices PID pe 1 ote tte hire a e ph bte ead 301 Pointer Command Se asso ees p ee iet Coe eroi A o botadee ex Dane dd 303 Understanding Poltitels avoue x eei deem ue epar px e TRAMA et did Ud 303 Advantages of Using Pointers 0 0 ccc ccc eee eee eee 304 Referencing Objects with Pointers isis 304 Simulation COMMA
36. If the devices communicating with each other are all SNAP R series be careful not to have one of them send information to another faster than the receiving system can pull it out of its receive buffer When a control engine receives data from the Ethernet network it holds the data in memory the buffer until the PAC Control flowchart removes it with a Receive command If the data is not removed fast enough the receive buffer will fill up You can prevent this problem by transmitting the information less frequently If the same chart is transmitting and receiving you can alter the chart so that it receives more often than it transmits Ethernet Connections and Ports The number of Ethernet connections available varies by hardware type and in some cases firmware version such as 80 on current SNAP R series I O systems The host connection is on port 22000 or 22001 and is used to communicate with the PC that runs PAC Control These port numbers are reserved for this purpose but they can be configured For information see Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide Peer to peer connections can be on any other port number that is not already used on the network these connections are used to communicate with other control engines or other devices on the network When you assign port numbers for peer to peer connections make sure you do not assign port numbers that devices on your network may use for specific purposes For a list of standard
37. PAC Control User s Guide 103 INSPECTING CONTROL ENGINES AND THE QUEUE PAC Control Professional Counter E File Edit Control Engine Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help EETEITTENENE 89 0m 05 03525 Cookies 1 z ga Previous_Count ga Status ga Total_Count String Variables Pointer Variables Communication Handles Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables E 10 units AAR A C3 Points DO_Switch Sprinkler_Switch Alarm LED_DS PID_Output Refrigeration PID_Input Tamnnvak wn Ten a SRE 28 T8 Te JL Next 4r Prev C Program Files Opto22 PAC Project 8 1 Control Pro Examples ioCookies Cookies Er Messages have been placed in the queue To see the message queue 1 Click the INFO WARNING or ERROR box View Message Queue for Cookie Controller P Refresh 3 Copy all z Pop Top Message lt i Clear All Messages Code Severity Description _ thm Block Line Object Time Date 4 Info Device has powered up Powerup clear e system INIT NAA N Mixed 15 02 03 09 05 07 35 Warming 1 0 point mismatch a configured point doe system _INIT_ N N A aoOven 15 02 03 09 05 07 35 Warning 1 0 point mismatch a configured point doe system _INIT_ NZA N A aoConv 15 02 03 09 05 07 35 Warning 1 0 point mismatch a configured point doe
38. Pointer Variables E Communication Handle Numeric Tables String Tables C3 Pointer Tables amp c 1 0 Units gt Jychart JL Next 4 Prev gx Pwu E PAC Control Ready P vV H White tabs show where you ar Gray tabs show open windows Click a when stepping through a chart tab to bring its window into view or subroutine The upper layer of tabs appears when you are stepping through your strategy in Debug mode It acts as a kind of call stack to let you see how you got to the current block or command PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL i File Edit Control Engine Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help Sl x Pi Conic SY debuo 8 0m s 507 5 C3 Sprinker Control Control Engines u Sprinkler Controller Subroutines Included Charts Variables Ej Numeric Variables String Variables Pointer Variables Communication Handles Cj Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables Yo units GA Mixed IO Unit E Points amp PIDs lt gt ES ereak on oe w v Chart Action Block increment Counter Id 7 ubroutine Variable Increase Notification G Shortcuts 4 41 gt IP v Jb Next 4r Pr e Messages k S Variable Increa o Count Watch ee Counter Powerup PAC Control Ready Click the
39. Put Status In Integer 32 Varia Not Available 1 2 3 4 5 5 lt In this dialog box you determine the way the subroutine is called from the strategy 2 From the Group drop down list choose the command group you want the subroutine to appear in For example if you create a subroutine to find the average value of several variables you could choose Mathematical as the command group The default group is Subroutines 3 Optional Enter a comment to explain the purpose of the subroutine 4 Notice that one parameter Put Status In has been automatically entered for you This parameter is used to return status information on the subroutine and it always appears at the bottom of the parameter list A subroutine essentially becomes a command within a chart subroutines are similar to function commands that return a status Since the system itself returns this status parameter the name of the status parameter is not available in the subroutine When you add the subroutine to a strategy you choose the variable the status will be placed in PAC Control User s Guide 351 CREATING SUBROUTINES IMPORTANT Make sure you always check returned status codes for all subroutines Subroutine status codes and their meanings are 0 Success 67 Out of memory 69 Null object error Make sure you are not passing a pointer that points to null 72 Nesting too deep future use 5 For each paramet
40. Renaming a Chart 1 Make sure the strategy is in Configure mode and that the chart you want to rename is the active window 2 From the Chart menu choose Rename I Rename Chart Description Controls sprinklers for the front lawn 3 Enter anew name and description optional Click OK The chart is renamed Deleting a Chart You can delete any charts except for the Powerup chart However you cannot delete a chart if it is called or used by another chart in your strategy 1 2 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode In the Strategy Tree right click the name of the chart you want to delete and choose Delete from the pop up menu Or if the chart is the active window choose Chart gt Delete At the confirmation message make sure you are deleting the correct chart CAUTION You cannot undo a deletion Click Yes to delete the chart The chart window disappears if it was open the chart is removed from the Strategy Tree and the strategy is saved PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 8 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Printing Charts You can print any flowchart To print a chart as it appears on the screen see Printing Chart or Subroutine Graphics on page 184 To print commands instructions for the chart see Viewing and Printing Strategy or Subroutine Commands on page 187 Exporting and Importing Charts To copy a chart to another strategy you must export it as a PAC Control
41. To create a bend or elbow in a connection click wherever you want the bend while drawing the connection For example to draw the connection in the following figure we selected the Connect tool clicked Block 0 moved the cursor out of the block to the right clicked at point A clicked again at point B and then clicked the right side of Block 1 PAC Control User s Guide 207 WORKING WITH CHART ELEMENTS 208 New_Chart G Shortcuts 100 4 While you re still drawing a line to delete an elbow you don t want click the right mouse button once to undo it If you created several elbows you can eliminate them in reverse order with repeated right mouse clicks If no more elbows remain and you right click again you delete the connection Once you have completed a connection however you cannot undo it this way Condition Blocks 1 To connect a condition block to the next block in a program sequence click the Connect tool t Click the source block Select Connection Type True Connection False Connection Cancel Indicate whether you are drawing the True connection or the False connection and then click OK Click the destination block you chose True or False The connection is labeled T or F depending on its type Draw another connection to the second destination block It is labeled the opposite exit type For example the following figure shows the True and False connections from the condition block
42. and ending with an asterisk and a slash This type of comment may span multiple lines Block comments may not be nested Examples i a b determine i by adding a and b together i a b determine i by adding PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX E OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE a and b together i a b determine i by adding a and b together OptoScript Grammar Syntax Reference Tokens are in regular type Keywords and operators are in bold type Syntax Rules are in italic type Program gt StatementList StatementList gt Statement gt StatementList Statement Statement gt AssignmentStatement gt StrAssignmentStatement gt PtrAssignmentStatement gt Procedurecommand gt FunctionCommand gt ConditionStatement gt ForStatement gt WhileStatement gt RepeatStatement gt SwitchStatement Procedurecommand gt CommandProcedureNoArgs gt CommandProcedure ArgumentList FunctionCommand gt CommandFunctionNoArgs CommandFunction ArgumentList ArgumentList NumericExp gt ArgumentList NumericExp Stridentifier gt ArgumentList Stridentifier ObjVarldentifier ArgumentList ObjVarldentifier NumericExp NumericExp NumericExp LogicalExp LogicalUnaryExp PAC Control User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT GRAMMAR SYNTAX REFERENCE gt AdditiveExp gt MultiplicativeExp gt BitwiseExp gt Numidentifier
43. click the Font box In the Font dialog box change the font font style size effects and color The default font is black 10 point Arial bold To change text alignment right click the Font box and choose left center or right from the pop up menu e To change the color of connection lines click a Connection line at the far right Choose the new color from the Color dialog box C Text Define width height and font of text blocks that appear as comments in a chart or subroutine Default width is 192 default height is 128 the minimum for both is 16 The default font is black 10 point Arial bold D Also Apply To To expand the scope of the changes you ve made click these boxes Click PAC Control to apply the changes to all new strategies and subroutines in PAC Control Click Strategy to apply the changes to all new charts in the current strategy Click All Charts to apply the changes to all new charts and all new graphic elements added to the current strategy Depending on which dialog box you are in and what is currently open one or more of these options may be grayed out For example if you are in the Configure PAC Control Default Properties dialog box it is assumed that the changes are to be applied throughout PAC Control and that option is therefore grayed out E Reset All To reset all parameters and options to their factory default settings click Reset All Changing Existing Elements to Match New Defaults Once
44. control engine 89 I O points 122 I O unit 113 mistic I O units 114 PID loop 134 301 serial module 130 subroutine parameters 350 table variables 224 variables 221 connection line changing color or size 203 212 definition 203 deleting 211 drawing 207 moving 210 selecting 210 constant See literal continue block command instruction 241 configuring 241 definition 203 control characters adding to string 308 control concepts 45 control engine active control engine 100 archiving strategies 106 changing definition 99 changing the active control engine 100 commands instructions 280 configuring 89 definition 45 deleting from strategy 100 download file creating 172 hostname 92 PAC Control User s Guide Es inspecting 101 IP address 92 moving to another PC 109 removing association with strategy 100 restoring archived strategies 108 testing communication 364 viewing message queue 103 control network segmenting from company network 93 control structures in OptoScript 336 control system example 44 controller See control engine converting a strategy 373 converting IEEE float 296 copying block 211 chart 213 command instruction 240 241 configured I O point 131 connection line 211 I O configuration 115 text block 211 count variable programming example 81 counter commands instructions 282 CRC commands 280 creating flowchart 201 PID loop 134 strategy 161 subroutine 348 349 watch window 157 See also c
45. e Serial messages sent through a serial communication module to a serial device e Streamed data sent to a device for processing by a software application I O Unit Event Message commands are commonly used to find out the state or text of an event message or to set its state Event messages can be in the following states e Active The message has been triggered by the event If it was configured to be sent just once it has been sent If it was configured to be sent at intervals it is continuing to be sent e nactive The message is not currently triggered by the event e Acknowledged The message has been triggered by the event but has been acknowledged by the receiver so it will not be sent again Acknowledgments occur only if the receiving application writes them to the brain s memory map Acknowledged is functionally equivalent to Inactive but can be useful in some cases to determine whether the receiver has received the message The command Set I O Unit Event Message Text is used to dynamically change a message or to recycle a message if you run out of event messages on an I O unit 128 event messages are available for each I O unit For more information see individual commands in the PAC Control Command Reference or online help PAC Control User s Guide 289 I O UNIT MEMORY MAP COMMANDS I O Unit Memory Map Commands 290 The following commands refer to the memory map in an Opto 22 memory mapped device eithe
46. gt NumericLiteral gt FunctionCommand LogicalExp gt NumericExp and NumericExp gt NumericExp or NumericExp gt NumericExp xor NumericExp gt NumericExp NumericExp gt NumericExp lt gt NumericExp gt NumericExp lt NumericExp gt NumericExp lt NumericExp gt NumericExp gt NumericExp gt NumericExp gt NumericExp gt Stridentifier Strldentifier gt PointerVariable null gt null PointerVariable gt null PointerTable NumericExp gt PointerTable NumericExp null AdditiveExp gt NumericExp NumericExp gt NumericExp NumericExp MultiplicativeExp gt NumericExp NumericExp gt NumericExp NumericExp gt NumericExp NumericExp NotNumExp gt ObjVarldentifier gt Stridentifier BitwiseExp gt bitnot NumericExp gt NumericExp bitand NumericExp gt NumericExp bitor NumericExp gt NumericExp bitxor NumericExp gt NumericExp lt lt NumericExp gt NumericExp gt gt NumericExp AssignmentStatement NumericVariable 2 NumericExp gt NumericTable NumericExp NumericExp StringVariable NumericExp 2 NumericExp PtrAssignmentStatement gt PointerVariable Pointableldentifier 398 PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX E OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE gt PointerVariable PointerTable NumericExp gt PointerTable NumericExp Pointableldentifier Pointableldentifier null amp StringVariable gt
47. may want to see Notes to Experienced Programmers on page 392 In this Chapter About OptoScript nccesesssssssssssesssssseesssessssssssssseeees F17 When To Use DDIGSCHBL ct 318 OptoScript Functions and Commands 326 CDS CEU SW etc 327 OptoScript Data Types and Variables 328 OptoScript Expressions and Operators 333 OptoScript Control Structures 336 Using the OptoScript Editor 340 Troubleshooting Unable To Find Errors 344 Troubleshooting Syntax Errors 344 Debugging Strategies with OptoScript 346 About OptoScript OptoScript is a procedural type of computer language similar to Pascal C or BASIC It can be used within any PAC Control strategy or subroutine to replace or supplement standard PAC Control PAC Control User s Guide 317 WHEN TO USE OPTOSCRIPT commands It does not add new functions but offers an alternative method within PAC Control s flowcharting environment to simplify some common programming tasks OptoScript code cannot be mixed with commands in action or condition blocks it is used in its own hexagonal flowchart block The following figure shows an example of an OptoScript flowchart block and its contents OptoScript editor OptoScript Oven_Control Block 1 ClActions 4 Conditions 4 Variables Test Compile gt LJ Oven Control OptoScript Code if Oven Temperature 450 then Ove
48. or go to the Opto 22 website and search for OptoScript Examples PAC Control User s Guide OptoScript CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT Working with Tables Following are some examples for using numeric string and pointer tables Numeric tables ntTablei 0 1 ntTablei 1 2 0 ntTablei 2 nVarl ntTablei 3 ntTable1 2 ntTablei 4 ntTablel ntTable1 0 ntTablei 5 nVarl ntTable1 2 3 1 nVarl ntTable1 0 nVarl ntTable1 0 ntTablel1 1 ntTable1 2 String tables stStrT1 0 Hello stStrT1 1 world stStrT1 2 stStrT1 0 stStrT1 1 Chr sStringl stStrT1 2 Pointer tables ptTable6 0 amp pVariable2 ptTable6 1 amp nVarl ptTable6 2 amp stStrT1 0 StStrT1 0 ptTable6 2 Pointer tables Note that types are not checked when putting pointers into a pointer table However when a pointer is moved from a pointer table element into a pointer variable the types are checked at runtime by the control engine and must match For example assume that the following elements have been placed in table ptPointT ptPointT 0 null ptPointT 1 amp nLED A ptPointT 2 amp fTemp ptPointT 3 amp sStringl ptPointT 4 amp Powerup Based on this information the first two of the following statements are good The third one is bad and will cause a control engine error because the element at ptPointT 3 is a string and therefore does no
49. variable If they are passed by value the updated value is not passed back to the strategy by the subroutine For more information see the next section Data Types for Subroutines When the subroutine ends the float variable will contain a new value Passed in items are called subroutine parameters and you can use up to 12 of them in a subroutine e Local items are created when a subroutine begins and they are destroyed when it ends For example a subroutine could take a passed in item copy it to a local variable and add 3 0 to that local variable for use within the subroutine The local variable is created when the subroutine is called and it disappears when the subroutine ends Data Types for Subroutines The following data types may be used in subroutines for both passed in items and local items umeric variables integers floats and timers umeric literals integers and floats Other types can be passed into the subroutine through iterals however see below for more information umeric tables String variables e String literals String tables e Communication handles The following data types are also supported e For passed in items I O points I O units and pointer tables e Forlocal items pointer variables The following data types are not supported in subroutines PID loops and charts Although most variables passed in and out of a subroutine must be of a specific type literals that are pass
50. 4 View Chart Status Name Status Mode Breakpoint Status Paused t Digital Control Running Step Off Break Off Flag Example Chart Stopped Step Off Break Off Powerup Stopped Step Off Break Off Sample Stopped Step Off Break Off Simple Error Handli Stopped Step Off Break Off Sprinklers Running Step On Break Off Turn off sprinklers Timer Example Chart Stopped Step Off Break Off 2 Tochange the status of a chart double click the chart name The View Chart dialog box appears showing the chart name chart status run mode and breakpoint status If the chart is paused mode is Step On the block at which it is paused is shown in the Paused At field In the figure below the chart is not paused PAC Control User s Guide 183 VIEWING AND PRINTING S Alarms View Chart scanning Chart Flag Example Char Status Stopped Mode Step Off E Breakpoints Break Off Paused At The title bar shows whether scanning is occurring Scanning stops when you click one of the changeable fields Status Mode and Breakpoints and resumes once you click Apply another button or one of the other fields If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost To stop run or suspend a chart click an arrow in the Status field to select the option Click Apply To turn pausing on or off click an arrow in the Mode field to select Step On or Step Off Click Apply To observe
51. B Input Setpoint 1125332990 c Channel Style 3 v Value X Y m a Flip Alignment Delta Y Data p J Input Axis b Output Axis gt Time Axis gt 16 To measure the system lag the time between the change in output and the change in input click and drag the first vertical red bar to just after the output change Drag the second bar to just before the change in input Plot 1 0 Details Misc Details VAL Velocity Algorithm Type B The Delta X cursor displays the time difference E puti between the two vertical i bars Drag the first bar into position after the Output change Drag the second bar to a position just before the Data p J Input Axis gt J Output Axis gt Time Axis gt J change in Input If you are unable to get the precision you want you can view the plot at a lower time span such as 10 seconds You will need to reposition your plot and the measurement bars of the Delta X cursor The example above shows a system lag of 1 88 seconds Generally a suitable scan rate can be anywhere from one third the system lag to two times the system lag Considerations in setting scan rate are e Slower scan intervals may be easier to tune The PID controller has time to see the effect of the previous output before calculating a new output 150 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O e Faster scan rates may be necessary to achieve the desired response
52. Box n 6 ccc ccc cect eect e 25 Adding an Analog I O Polnt euet etd a bete baa e dip 25 Add Analog Point Dialog BOX 0 0 ccc cece cect e 28 Configuring a Serial Module 0 cece cece cece eee n 30 Changing Point Configuration 2c cess dis ys eae NEN E UTE ee eG Rees 30 Moving a Configured I O Point 2 0 0 0 ccc c cece cee e e 30 Copying a Configured VO POINT 2 2225 2 9 Sten dhs hne te dai oer be E Pdl da 31 PAC Control User s Guide Changing a Configured l O Point 6 00 cece cece e 34 Deleting d Configured OPONT Laos apte oen e RC ea tudo aane qas oaa 34 Conngunng pPID OODS scatet E detenta te Proc testes tube eMe Ue 34 PIS ANG SHALEQIES Sri cen oH EPOR UOI ERO ERIS 34 Ad amp irig a PID LOOD ssi e trente pte eb E tie tbe ese DR 35 Add PID Loop DialogiBOX preiero ytkostbe Hp piepen he RU PX Rer rtReieRRidh 37 Changing PID MOOD 45 d rnc E e c e e be e ee ero roo edo dots 39 Deletingsa PID LOOP comicdin tard adesse d da done Cad tct o Prts ed date Gomes 40 Inspecting I O in Debug Mode 6 ccc cece I e 40 Inspecting I O Units and Saving Settings to Flash 40 Irispecting Digital VO POINTS uirinn ER LS ITE Ue DURO UG Ue OG 42 Inspecting Analog I O POINTS Jo Pere rae ee teret tero Fere ERE Or S 44 Inspecting and TUNING PID LOOPS i esiri eir t be Velewune DIE Cerere 46 Inspecting adllD assie reps kr ehse x eb teet ax eis EEEN Poo Re er n 46 Determining System AG ecu ue ve e
53. Conditions Like loops and case statements conditions can be simpler when done in OptoScript code f then it then else and if then elseif statements can all be mixed and nested as needed Here s an example of a simple if then else statement as it could be done in standard PAC Control commands and in OptoScript rer HEN In standard PAC Control commands even a simple MON SOM if then else statement requires three blocks In OptoScript a single block contains the statement OptoScript Powerup Check Oven Temp C3 Actions 4 Conditions gt Variables Test Compile Belna a pi ptoScript Code if Oven Temperature gt 450 then Oven larm 1 Set the oven alarm else Oven larm 0 Clear the oven alarm endif TOptoScript Temperature Control Temperature Control Actions Conditions Variables 4 Test Compile OptoScript Code L if Temp Probe 80 then Fan 1 1 Turn on fan 1 if Temp Probe 95 then Fan 2 1 Turn on fan 2 too if Temp Probe 105 then Alarm 1 Send alarm temperature too high endif In OptoScript all the condition and action blocks and their MEE ie TS commands are consolidated Fan 1 a into one block endif DelaySec 60 77 Wait 1 min before checking temp again LJ gt PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT For Combining
54. Configuration File When you import the I O configuration file it does not delete any I O units or points that are already there If the import file contains I O units with the same names as those already in the strategy you can choose whether to update them Updating changes points that have the same name and adds new points but does not delete points 1 2 3 Open the strategy into which you want to import the I O configuration In the Strategy Tree right click I O Units and choose Import from the pop up menu Navigate to the location of the export file you created Highlight its name and click Open The I O units and points are updated from the configuration file To see them click the plus sign next to the I O Units folder on the Strategy Tree Adding an I O Unit In PAC Control the term O unit usually refers to a mounting rack with a brain or brain board and up to 161 O modules attached NOTE If you have already configured I O in PAC Manager you can also add 1 0 units or points if necessary from within PAC Control as you add commands to the blocks in your strategy 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree double click the I O Units folder You can also select Configure gt 1 0 The Configure I O Units dialog box opens showing all configured I O units I Configure 1 0 Units Port Address Watc Enabled RefC Descri Add Ethern 127 0 Disabled Enabled 12 Modify
55. Configure menu choose Control Engines to open the Select Control Engine dialog box Skip to step 3 Using PAC Control With a strategy open in Configure mode or Online mode double click the Control Engines folder on the Strategy Tree You can also select Configure gt Control Engines or right click an individual control engine on the Strategy Tree and select Configure The Configure Control Engines dialog box appears Active Engine Cookie Controller Engines Associated with Strategy jntrof 2 Click Add The Select Control Engine dialog box appears Configured Control Engines This dialog box lists all the control engines configured on your system whether or not they are associated with your strategy 3 If the control engine you want appears in the list it has already been defined on this PC click to highlight the control engine s name and then click OK Then skip to Associating the Control Engine with Your Strategy on page 93 EJ PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES If the control engine you want is not in the list click Add The Control Engine Configuration dialog box appears mon Complete the fields as described in Control Engine Configuration Dialog Box below Click OK In the Select Control Engines dialog box the control engine appears in the list In the Select Control Engine dialog box hi
56. Control tab at the bottom of the PAC Control main window The chart appears Click the Pause Chart button to pause the chart PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL This chart runs continuously once the program has been started Drop the dough Drop the chips Xn SR ES Back to Xo Speed OK SAAS 3 Shortcuts Using a Watch Window To see clearly what we re doing we ll create a watch window to monitor cookie production 1 Inthe Strategy Tree double click nCookie Counter s nCookieCounter scanning Value 74 The value is frozen at some number such as the 74 shown above Since the counter is no longer increasing we can see that cookie production has temporarily stopped 2 Maximize the dialog box Zs nCookie_Counter scanning Name nCookie_Counter Value 74 3 More Info 3 Click Add Watch 4 Click Watch PAC Control User s Guide USING A WATCH WINDOW Add Watch Entry Name nCookie Counter Select Portions To Watch Value Since there is no watch window available to select we ll create one 5 Click New Create New Watch Window Look in C3 My Cookies File name Files of type PAC Control Watch Window Files wth 6 Make sure the My Cookies directory appears in the Look in field Type a name for the watch window in the F
57. Copy To gt T v Expand gt If necessary expand an individual module by clicking its plus sign or expand all of the modules by clicking Expand All Highlight the point you want to move and click Move To 1 Move Point Select a target 1 0 Unit Select a target channel Mixed IO_Unit roo 00 Switch DO ESD CCN 00 01 Not Used 00 02 Not Used 00 03 Not Used 01 00 Not Used 01 01 Not Used 01 02 Not Used 01 03 Not Used In the Select a target channel area of the Move Point To dialog box highlight the location you are moving the point to Then click OK You return to the Configure I O Points dialog box and the point has been moved Copying a Configured I O Point If you have several points on a SNAP I O module that are the same you can copy a configured point To fill empty points on the same module To fill all empty points on the I O unit To another other point on the same or a different I O unit With the strategy open in Configure mode double click the I O Units folder on the Strategy Tree to open the Configure I O Points dialog box Click Expand All so you can see the points PAC Control User s Guide 131 CHANGING POINT CONFIGURATION I Configure 1 0 Points 1 0 Unit Lights B Type SNAP PAC AI Modules and Points Features 00 SNAPIDCSD 2 5 28 VDC Digital Input w 0 DO Switch EEIT Ly z a
58. D SNAP ADV 2 2 0 10VDC 2 10 10 VDC 2 D 20 m 2 5 60 VDC TPO r DR SNAP ADA 28 D SNAP AOD 29 Si C Automatically create points within the new module _ 2_ 3 4 In the Add Module dialog box choose the module type and then the exact module from the lists Click OK If you want to add points automatically select Automatically create points within the new module Use the Name format text field to create a format for the point names Enter any combination of text and the following format codes 961 point type for example ai or do 962 O unit name 963 module position 964 channel position 965 a unique identifier that is generated automatically Example 961 962 963964 would expand to something like di MyloUnit 0801 Example 961 ABC 965 would expand to something like aoABC 473 In the Configure I O Points dialog box click the plus sign next to the new module to expand it Notice that the module icon is color coded to reflect the type of module being configured blue for analog input green for analog output PAC Control User s Guide 127 ADDING 1 0 POINTS Expand or collapse points on the module by clicking the or sign in the box 128 I Configure 1 0 Points 10 Unit Sprinkler Control Module icon D0 SNAPADCSD 2 5 28 VDC Digital Input 1 Not Used 02 SNAP ADV 27 Analog Output Points 9 Highlight the point you want to c
59. Dough Action Speed OK Condition Start Action Start Conveyor ptoScript 14 Select the Speed OK block by clicking it once and then click OK When the program reaches the continue block it returns to the Speed OK block We haven t changed the way the program works we ve just done the same thing in a different way Continue blocks are useful in a complex chart to avoid crossing connection lines PAC Control User s Guide ADDING A COMMAND Adding a Command Now we re going to add a command or instruction to a block in the Dough_Chip_Control chart We ll add the command so we can keep track of the number of cookies we produce Double click the Drop Dough block l Instructions Dough Chip Control Drop Dough R nCookieMotionPreset Modify dtCookieMotionTimer Open the dough valve Turn On Next Block doDoughDispenseValve Previous Block For animation in ioDisplay Ladd Keep the dough valve open for 2 seconds Delay Sec 2 0 Close the dough valve Turn Off AaNnannhNinnannntinhen We ll add the new instruction command between the Turn On and Delay Sec commands Click anywhere on Delay Sec to highlight this command This highlight indicates the position where the next command is added Click Add to open the Add Instruction dialog box Add Instruction Instruction Absolute Value Comment Type Name of Al Valid Types aD oughVesselPressure Put Result
60. Elements 1 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the Select tool i 2 To move any action OptoScript condition continue or text block click it Then click and hold the mouse button anywhere on the selected item except on its handles and drag it to the position you want You can also use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move a block in any direction Note that when you move a block any connections attached to it also move 3 To move a connection click it Then click and drag any handle in any direction You can also move an end point from one block to another as long as the result is a valid connection A disallowed move is ignored 4 Tomove several elements at once select them and then click and drag them PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 8 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS If elements end up stacked on top of each other you may need to change their z order before you can move them See the following section Moving Elements in Front of or Behind Other Elements Changing Z Order If elements are stacked on top of each other you can select only the one in front To change their position z order follow these steps 1 2 Click the element to select it Right click the element From the pop up menu choose Z order From the sub menu choose the action you want to take Bring Forward moves the element one position closer to the front Bring To Front moves it all th
61. Get Period Get Period Measurement Complete Status IVAL Set Analog Filtered Value IVAL Set Digital Binary DEPRECATED IVAL Set Frequency IVAL Set Mistic PID Control Word IVAL Set Mistic PID Process Term IVAL Set Off Totalizer IVAL Set On Totalizer IVAL Set Period Mistic PID Loop Communication Enabled Read Event Reaction Hold Buffer Set Analog Totalizer Rate Set Digital I O Unit from MOMO Masks DEPRECATED Set Mistic PID Control Word Set Mistic PID D Term Set Mistic PID Term Set Mistic PID Input Set Mistic PID Mode to Auto Set Mistic PID Mode to Manual Set Mistic PID Output Rate of Change Set Mistic PID P Term Set Mistic PID Scan Rate Set Mistic PID Setpoint Transmit Receive Mistic I O Hex String PAC Control User s Guide 199 LEGACY OPTIONS 200 PAC Control User s Guide 8 Working with Flowcharts Introduction This chapter shows you how to work with flowcharts the building blocks of your strategy When you create a new strategy one chart is created for you the Powerup Chart You must create all the other charts to do the work of the strategy In this Chapter Creating a New Capt 1e 201 Working with Chart Elements 202 Opening Saving and Closing Charts 212 Copying Renaming and Deleting Charts 213 FORSE COPVAEERS atte tentat 215 Exporting and Importing Charts 215 Creating a New Chart 1 With your strategy open and in Configure mode select C
62. Host or PID Output e Ifthe PID s process variable comes from an I O point on the same unit select I O Point Choose the point from the drop down list or type a point name to configure a new point e Ifthe PID S process variable comes from the PAC Control strategy select Host Enter an initial value for the input e Ifthe PID s process variable is the output of another PID on this brain a cascading control loop select PID Output Choose the PID from the drop down list D Square Root Optional If you chose I O Point or PID for step C check this box if the error should be calculated based on the square root of the process variable applies to flow control systems where volumetric flow is proportional to the square root of a signal from a flow transducer PAC Control User s Guide 137 CONFIGURING PID LOOPS 138 E Low High Range Set the valid range of the process variable by entering the low range and the high range See Output Options for optional responses to out of range input F Setpoint Choose the source for the setpoint I O Point Host or PID Output e To control the setpoint using a device on the same brain such as a potentiometer select I O Point choose an I O point from the drop down list or type a new point name e To control setpoint using PAC Control or PAC Display select Host For Initial Value enter the most common operating value e If another PID loop will con
63. Low Bits of Integer 64 Greater Than Numeric Table Element Greater Than or Equal to Numeric Table Element Greater Than or Equal Greater Less Than Numeric Table Element Less Than or Equal to Numeric Table Element Less Than or Equal Less Make Integer 64 Move 32 bits NOT Not Equal to Numeric Table Element Not Equal NOT Numeric Table Element Bit Clear Numeric Table Element Bit Set Numeric Table Element Bit Test OR OR Set Variable False Set Variable True Test Equal Test Greater Test Greater or Equal Test Less Test Less or Equal Test Not Equal Test Within Limits Variable False Variable True Within Limits XOR XOR Understanding Logical Commands For condition blocks the Instructions dialog box provides options to designate AND or OR for multiple commands If you have more than one command in the same condition block and you choose the AND option all of the commands must evaluate true for the block to exit true If you have more than one command in a condition block and choose the OR option the block exits true if any of its commands evaluates true Logical actions and conditions work with integers individual bits within an integer a single digital I O point or a digital I O unit These values are treated as Boolean that is they are either True or False For complex logical operations you may find OptoScript code easier to use than standard PAC Control commands See Using Logi
64. Output Analog Input C Analog Output Channels Type s 10 3 CWAC 2 5 16 VDC 18 32VDC 25 28VDC 10 32 VDC VAC Man Auto Switch Dry Contact Switch 4 24 VDC 35 75 VAC VDC 15 32VDC Dry Contact Switch 10 32VDC 25 28VDC 10 32VDC 10 32VDC 90 140 VDCAVAC 180 280 VDC VAC 90 140 VDC VAC Man Auto Switch 30 140 VDC VAC 180 280 VDC AVAC an 14n nr A c F OSNAP IDCS SNAP IDCS FAST SNAPIDCSFAST SNAP IDCSD SNAP IDCEMA SNAP IDC5 Sw SNAP IDC5Q SNAP IDC5G SNAP DCS HT SNAP IDC5 SW NC SNAP IDCEFM SNAP IDCSDFM SNAP IDC 32 SNAP IDC 16 SNAPJACS a SNAP IAC5A ag SNAPJACSMA OU SNAPHACSFM C SNAPHACBAFM 2 SMAPIACAE qe de de dm dm DO ee Se dw d EA 2 e 2 o od dd n J Automatically create points within the new module In the Add Module dialog box choose the module type and then the exact module from the lists If you want to add points automatically select Automatically create points within the new module Use the Name format text field to create a format for the point names Enter any combination of text and the following format codes 961 point type for example ai or do 962 O unit name 963 module position 964 channel position 965 a unique identifier that is generated automatically Example 961 962 963964 would expand to something like di MyloUnit 0801 Example
65. P Prev PAC Control Ready Configure NUM To change the docked position click and drag the window s title bar to any edge of the main window To change the docked window s width or height click and drag the edge of its frame in the direction you want To free the window from its docked position click the docking icon Sin its title bar Zooming in a Chart or Subroutine Window You can change the scale of any chart or subroutine window by using the zoom feature There are several ways to zoom Hold down CTRL key and move the mouse wheel up and down Press the or keys on the keyboard Right click anywhere on a chart or subroutine window to display a pop up menu Select Zoom and choose In Out or Reset to return the zoom to 100 percent From the View menu choose Zoom In Zoom Out or Zoom Reset To pick the zoom percentage you want click the zoom field at the bottom right of the window and choose one of the preset zoom levels The Zoom to fit option resizes the chart to fit in the window NOTE Zooming always takes place with reference to the center point of the window Here is a window at 50 percent zoom E PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL Oven_Inspection_Control Til ohartmaintain c te oven temperature and rejeot cookie c tatdo no tpa cc vi qual In peoton The Powerup ohart cirte tic ohart Botovi 360 degree c Itinpeoton chton coc a bad oookle open re
66. PAC Control an integer 32 is a 32 bit signed number ranging from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 2 billion An integer 64 ranges from 9 223 372 036 854 775 808 to 9 223 372 036 854 775 807 An integer can only be a whole number 1 0 1 2 3 etc In other words integers do not include a decimal point The result of an integer operation is always an integer even if it is placed in a float variable For example if 9 is divided by 10 the result is zero 0 9 truncated to an integer To receive a float result at least one of the operators would have to be a float Use the Truncate command to round down to the nearest whole number Controlling Rounding Use the Round command to round up or down to the nearest whole number Note that 1 50 rounds up to 2 0 and 1 49 rounds down to 10 Using Floats While computers CPUs and electronic devices such as Opto 22 controllers store numbers in binary format most often they represent real numbers as floating point numbers or floats For example in industrial automation applications all analog values read from an I O unit are floats Floats represent real numbers in scientific notation as a base number and an exponent The IEEE Standard for Binary Floating Point Arithmetic IEEE 754 is the most widely used standard for floating point computation It defines how to store real numbers in binary format and how to convert between binary and float notations PAC Control User s Guide MAT
67. PAC Control item such as a chart an I O point or a PID loop You can perform any operation on the pointer that you could perform on the object the pointer points to Pointers are an advanced programming feature and are very powerful but they also complicate programming and debugging PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL Because pointers can point to any data type pointer tables can store an assortment of data types in a single table Pointers allow one level of indirection within PAC Control a pointer cannot point to another pointer After you add a pointer through the Add Variable Dialog Box on page 222 you can use it wherever the object itself would be used strategy The software program you create using PAC Control Basic or PAC Control Professional The strategy includes all the definitions and instructions commands necessary to control the process that one Opto 22 controller handles Since most control processes are complex the strategy typically consists of a series of process flowcharts that all work together with each chart controlling one piece of the automated process You may have several PAC Control systems each controlling a different process and therefore running different strategies Or you may have two or more PAC Control systems controlling identical processes in different areas and running the same strategy variables A variable is a holding place that represents a piece of informat
68. PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS 3 Use the command Send Communication Handle Command to specify the filename and retrieve the file in one step Use the communication handle command get lt remote filename gt lt local filename gt as follows get GetThisData txt HunkoData txt If the local filename already exists it is overwritten 4 When you have finished retrieving data from the file use the command Close Communication to close the communication handle Sending the Data in Pieces To append data to an existing file or to send a very large file larger than 1 MB you can send data in pieces Suppose you want to append data from a strategy variable or table to an existing file named HunkoData txt on the device Heres how you would send the data 1 Usethe command Open Outgoing Communication to open an FTP communication handle The value of the handle would be tp 10 192 56 45 21 JoeG hello 2 Usethe condition Communication Open to make sure the communication handle opened 3 To specify the filename on the remote server use the command Send Communication Handle Command The communication handle command you send is dest HunkoData txt 4 Usea Transmit command such as Transmit String or Transmit Numeric Table to send the data In the command use the name of the FTP communication handle you just opened The data is appended to the file If the remote filename is new the file is created and the data placed in it 5 When you hav
69. Result in Float Variable fSetpointMinusDeadband If the argument type is a literal or constant you must type it in You can use either decimal or hexadecimal form PAC Control User s Guide 237 ADDING COMMANDS If you type in the name of an item that doesn t exist for example a variable or I O point you are prompted to add it to the strategy Each command requires a certain number of arguments from zero to eight For help in completing arguments see the PAC Control Command Reference or the online help for the specific command you re using 9 When the arguments are complete click OK You return to the Instructions dialog box which now shows the command you just added Notice that the comment you entered appears just above the command The arguments you entered appear as part of the instruction The highlight shows where the next command will be placed if you add another command to this block Here is an example of an Instructions dialog box for an action block I Instructions New Chart Block 0 Comment Command Arguments Set ovento 325 degrees 325 Oven Temperatur Highlight L 10 To add another command click to place the highlight where you want the command to appear Click Add and repeat the steps in this section If you highlight a command that s already in the dialog box the new command will appear just before it TIP If you are adding commands to several blocks at on
70. Save Strategy As dialog box navigate to where you want the new strategy to be Create a new folder if necessary Remember that each strategy must be in its own directory 3 In the Strategy Name field enter the new strategy name Click Save The strategy and all its charts are saved under the new name in the new directory Saving Before Debugging When you change to Debug mode you are prompted to save a strategy you have modified If you don t want to be prompted to save before entering Debug mode choose Configure gt Options and dick to remove the check box for Prompt To Save Strategy Before Running Debugger Closing a Strategy To close a strategy click the close box in the Strategy Tree or choose File gt Close Strategy NOTE Since only one strategy at a time can be open in PAC Control creating a new strategy or opening an existing strategy automatically closes any current strategy first If you ve made changes to the current strategy you are prompted to save them PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Saving a Strategy to Flash When you finish working on your strategy and have downloaded it you should save it to the control engine s flash memory By default a strategy is downloaded to the control engine s RAM Saving it to flash protects the strategy in case of a power loss You can save it to flash just once when needed or save every time the strategy is downloaded Saving to Flash Once You
71. Support If you cannot find the help you need in this book the PAC Control Command Reference or the SNAP PAC Brains User Guide call Opto 22 Product Support See Product Support on page 4 for contact information Strategy Problems 362 If You Cannot Delete an Item Sometimes when you try to delete an item in a strategy a variable a chart an I O unit or point you receive a message saying You cannot delete an item with a reference count greater than zero This message means you cannot delete the item because other elements in the strategy use it You can use Find to locate all references to the item you want to delete For help in using Find see Searching on page 192 Sometimes the reference counts can become incorrect due to cutting and pasting variables or importing charts into a strategy If a reference count appears to be incorrect you can rebuild the strategy database by following these steps 1 Click in the Strategy Tree to make it the active window 2 Press CTRL R PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Choose Compile gt Compile All 4 Choose File gt Save All The strategy database is rebuilt and the reference counts should be correct If You Have Memory Problems Control engine memory is allocated as shown in the following table You can see the total amount of RAM and the amount of battery backed RAM available for use by inspecting the control engine in Debug mod
72. Switch 163 Counter No module existed in this slot 7 06 SNAP IDCSD 2 5 28 VDC Digital Input w 0 DD Switch 192 Counter Both the points and the module Te B E pomt ang og w 1 DO_Switch_193 Counter were copied from the original 89M 2 DO Switch 194 Counter Expand All Tt 3 DO_Switch_195 Counter v Collapse All gt To copy the point to one other point either on the same or a different I O unit choose To Specific The Copy To dialog box opens I Copy Point To 140 Units Mixed ID 00 Q0 DI Sprinkler Control 00 01 Not Used Sprinkler Control DO 02 Not Used 00 03 Not Used 02 01 Not Used 02 02 Not Used 03 01 Not Used 03 02 Not Used 03 03 Not Used In the left column choose the same or another I O unit In the right column choose the location of the point to copy to Available points are shown in black Already configured points points on a different type of module digital output instead of digital input for example and point numbers not on the rack such as point 40 on an 8 module rack are grayed out If the point is copied to an empty module slot the module part number from the copied point is added too 4 After you copy a point change the new point as needed by double clicking its point name In the Edit Digital Point dialog box type the new name and make any other changes PAC Control User s Guide EE CONFIGURING
73. Timer Timers come in two forms e Up timers count up from zero and are generally used to measure how long something takes e Down timers count down to zero from a number you set and are frequently used to determine when events should begin Here s an example of a down timer This process starts every 1 5 seconds The starting value for the timer is set in Block 0 x Instructions Timer_Example_Chart Block 0 a A Timer Example Chart SEE Set Down Timer Preset Value Add Target Value 15 7 Down Timer Process Timer Modif Start Timer Dele Timer Process_Timer Nent Block Ulnstructions Timer Example Chart Process Timer E amp Down Timer Process_Timer Add Down Timer Expired M Next Block The condition block checks whether the timer has reached zero If it hasn t the chart loops until it has When the timer has expired it is restarted and the process begins Instructions Timer Example Chart Start Process Ti When the process ends the logic loops back to check whether the timer has expired again Start Timer Add Timer Process Timer 3 Shd BER Nest Block Previous Block Close Help For additional details see Using Timers on page 315 Using a Flag Lock The Flag Lock and Flag Unlock commands allow you to give a task exclusive access to one or more objects s
74. When you use a command such as Get O Unit as Binary Value the only I O units shown for Argument 1 will be SNAP PAC I O units SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC R2 SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB2 SNAP PAC SB1 and SNAP PAC SB2 Commands that are used only with legacy hardware such as Enable Communication to Mistic PID Loop or Clear HDD Module Off Latches wont be listed Since some Opto 22 customers work with multiple systems legacy options can be set individually for each strategy or subroutine If you are using legacy hardware you can choose the options that apply to each strategy you re working with without affecting other strategies IMPORTANT Once you have enabled a legacy option for a specific strategy or subroutine you cannot disable it later for the same strategy or subroutine Enabling Legacy Options Here s how to set legacy options 1 In PAC Control open the strategy or subroutine for which you want to change options 2 ChooseFile Strategy Options Click the Legacy tab Depending on the hardware you re using you can set one or more of the following options Enable Ethernet Ultimate and Simple I O units and commands see page 197 Enable high density digital commands see page 198 Enable mistic I O units and commands PAC Control Pro only see page 198 3 Clickthe option you want to enable At the confirmation dialog box make sure it is correct and then click Yes Repeat to enable other options The options a
75. Z x NeIqeLAW Z 12 HeiqeLAw v 30N ees doo 104 aped eol uid Berri iio deis G oL 0 404 deis 0 0 140 pue es o Bulyyewos op es o Bulujawos op uiBeq eso eso J pug Jipue pue es o Bulujowos op es o Bulujawos op es o Bulyyewos op es o Duiujeuuos op 9si3 ale uBed eso Buiujeuuos op eso Buiujeuos op jueuJajeJs JI esjo JI 6 lt 1 11 osjo 6 lt nesie ueu S lt S F usu G lt 1 Jiesie lt J BSH Bulyjyewos op Bulyjyowos op pua z udu z yi Buly ewos op Buiujeuuos op c uMH UG dt uiBeq Z 3 Z j pue ese Buiujeuos o esje Bulujawos o l lyy ed l Iur p E j pug jipue oso asia es o Bulujawos op es o Bulujawos op i6 esi3 eso jueuiejejs es o JI p Buiujeuios op Buly ewos op Buiujeuuos op Buiujeuuos op uiBeq ueu Z 4 ueu Z J ueu Z 1 JI c 2201 puo jl pug jipu Bupawos pa ee acl op S BuiujeuJos op Buiujeuios op Il jueuJajels JI ueu z i u gz iu ueu Z 4 ueu Z yi v pE 5 I Nn oO N 2 o uw x e APPENDIX E OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE ull eie esse JUO AjUO Sa U2DIdUISOIdQ S sebenue 19010 YM uouJuJo S se doo e Ul PUBLULUOD Jo ad yealg e aAeu 3ouue 1du2gOldO p 9n se anjeA o19z uou e pue as ej se NJLA oJaz e eal pue 1du so1dQ sJeDa1ul asn X pue 1du5501dQ ed e1ep Ue9 o0g e ALY je seg pue 5 Svg D pue 1du s01dQ ur uey J
76. a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric licensed to the Modbus Organization Inc Wiegand is a registered trademark of Sensor Engineering Corporation Nokia Nokia M2M Platform Nokia M2M Gateway Software and Nokia 31 GSM Connectivity Terminal are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation Sony is a trademark of Sony Corporation Ericsson is a trademark of Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson CompactLogix MicroLogix SLC and RSLogix are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley and ControlLogix are a registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation CIP and EtherNet IP are trademarks of ODVA groov includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Opto 22 Automation Made Simple PAC Control User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 1 Welcome to PAC Control cece cece ccc cece eene 1 MOGUO PEDEM 1 ADOUL UNS Gud Erana LL 1 CHOOSING DOCUMENTALION so ccadenucieniennn ette ceste citet EEEE E ERTS 3 Document CONVENTIONS s c poe t en eii ap o e n a NER ORE hey 3 Documents and Online Help 2 recte reme re eere dese eerewenhnnsen a 3 Product SUPPO yipek epe d mrt ree epe b n Reb E EOD E es 4 Installing PAC CONUO cu et vetet erm erbe cave EE EE peatefut pene
77. a SNAP R series controller has a total of 16 MB of RAM on the control side 2 MB of which is battery backed Volatile RAM shows the amount of total RAM available for use Battery backed RAM shows the amount available in battery backed RAM where persistent variables variables initialized on download the autorun flag and the strategy archive are stored File Storage RAM shows the space available in the control engine s file system See the PAC Manager Users Guide for more information about the file system See also form 1646 the SNAP PAC Memory Usage Technical Note D Up Time Total time that the control engine has been running since powerup E Device Time Current date and time recorded on the control engine PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES F Sync time to PC Click to synchronize the control engine s time and date to that of the PC running PAC Control G Message Queue Number of messages information warning and error messages encountered when attempting to run the strategy on the control engine up to a maximum of 1000 messages See Viewing the Message Queue below Click to open the View Messages dialog box listing the details of any information warning or error messages H Active Name of the strategy currently running on the control engine the date and time it was downloaded and the number of charts currently running I Archive Information about the strategy currently arch
78. a m 1 Checkthe day and the weather 3 Ifit sthe right day and it s dry turn them on 2 If it s raining leave the sprinklers off 1 Check the day and the weather Read the day of the week the hygrometer If it s Sunday or Wednesday read 2 If it s raining leave them off If the hygrometer says 100 check to make sure sprinklers are off If they re on turn them off 3 If it s the right day and it s dry turn them on If it s Sunday or Wednesday and if the hygrometer says 9996 or below turn sprinklers on Start the timer When they ve been on for 15 minutes turn them off If a human being were doing this job this level of instruction would probably be just fine With a computer however the instructions need more detail For example the first instruction Every day at 6 00 a m would have to be expanded more like this a Read the hour b If the hour equals six go on to the next step c If the hour does not equal six go back to step a Testing the Steps Now that you have your steps in place run through each sub process in your mind to see if anything is missing Is there an answer for every if Are all the possibilities taken into account It may help you to draw out your control process as a flowchart Often it is easier to see decision points and responses to decisions in a flowchart You re still working at the human level at this point jus
79. a numeric variable can be used For example you can turn a point off by assigning it a value of zero or turn it on by assigning it a non zero value You can also use standard digital points directly in mathematical expressions and control structures For more information see Using I O in OptoScript on page 326 Reading or Writing Digital Points The Move command is the main command used to read or write digital points PAC Control User s Guide ERROR HANDLING COMMANDS Error Handling Commands 286 The following commands refer to handling errors Add Message to Queue Get Error Code of Current Error Add User Error to Queue Get Error Count Add User I O Unit Error to Queue Get ID of Block Causing Current Error Caused a Chart Error Get Line Causing Current Error Caused an I O Unit Error Get Name of Chart Causing Current Error Clear All Errors Get Name of I O Unit Causing Current Error Copy Current Error to String Get Severity of Current Error Disable I O Unit Causing Current Error Remove Current Error and Point to Next Error Enable I O Unit Causing Current Error Stop Chart on Error Error on I O Unit Suspend Chart on Error Error All good programmers must deal with errors These error handling commands are used to monitor errors figure out which I O unit caused an error disable or re enable communicatin to the 1 0 unit and clear errors and other messages from the message queue For a simple example of an error handler ch
80. address The control engine doesn t know what type of data is in any particular address so it cannot convert the data type Since these are I O unit commands remember to check all return values and errors to make sure the command was successful If a command variable contains a value that is obviously wrong for example a memory map address in an incorrect format communication to the I O unit will be automatically disabled See the OptoMMP Protocol Guide Opto 22 form 1465 to determine the memory map addresses and data types you need to use PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS I O Unit Scratch Pad Commands The following commands are used for peer to peer communication for sharing strategy data with other Opto 22 memory mapped controllers on the network These commands are used by PAC Control to read or write to the Scratch Pad area in the memory map of a SNAP PAC controller Since each read get or write set command is completed before another occurs commands cannot interfere with each other For example a get command won t read a partial string while a set command is writing the string Get I O Unit Scratch Pad Bits Set I O Unit Scratch Pad Bits from MOMO Mask Get I O Unit Scratch Pad Float Element Set I O Unit Scratch Pad Float Element Get I O Unit Scratch Pad Float Table Set I O Unit Scratch Pad Float Table Get I O Unit Scratch Pad Integer 32 Element Set I O Unit Scratch Pad Integer 3
81. apart to easily see the flow and if possible design the chart so its entire flow can be seen within one window If a chart becomes too complex split it into smaller charts e When you use OptoScript code remember that it is not self documenting Be sure to add comments so that you or others can easily see what the code is doing Similar comments are also useful in other PAC Control flowchart blocks Use OptoScript blocks within a flowchart for operations they make easier such as string handling and math calculations but keep the logic and purpose of the strategy clear in the flowchart e Within a chart leave Block 0 empty This makes it easy to insert logic at the beginning of the chart by adding a block between Block 0 and the next block If a block contains more instructions than can be easily traced and debugged break it down into two or more sequential blocks Never place another block in the flowchart before Block 0 Charts always start with Block 0 which cannot be deleted Naming Conventions To save trouble in the long run it s wise to establish naming conventions for charts blocks variables O units and points control engines subroutines and so on If you name these elements in a consistent way from the beginning it is easier to find them in lists to see related elements and to know their functions without opening them Since PAC Control automatically alphabetizes these names you can plan naming schemes to place
82. arrow buttons to see tabs that are not visible or are only partly visible Docking Windows Debug NUM This white tab shows you are stepping inside the Variable_Increase_ Notification subroutine which was called by the Increment Counter action block on the gray tab at left The gray Chart tab farther left shows the chart this action block is in Click any tab to see how you got to where you are You can place the strategy Tree and watch windows where you want them dock them in the PAC Control main window Docked windows do not have tabs but are contained in their own frames PAC Control remembers their position the next time you open that strategy To dock a window click the docking icon s in the window s title bar The window moves to its own frame Compare the following figure with the one on page 52 to see the difference in the Strategy Tree window PAC Control User s Guide WINDOWS AND DIALOG BOXES IN PAC CONTROL Docked strategy Tree IPAC Control Professional File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help EETCEMEERNMHERSESER 0 00 05050 An 50205995955 Sprinkler Control x Sprinkler_Control 4 E Control Engines C3 Subroutines Included Ri Charts C3 Variables E Numeric Variable String Variables Pointer Variables IC Communication F Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables C3 I O Units db Next
83. b da E qs 4 System Requirerfielits irinna gasi bci erre taf eratis V wire av rede drain na 5 Installation Requirements sssssssssssssssssss ens 5 Compatible Control Engines and I O Units ssssssssssssssssssssss 5 Important Note on Disk Drives 0 0 2 0 cece ccc cee cect n 6 Chapter 2 PAC Control Tutorial 25 esse ee ner rev enn ese vn EREET 7 POGUCTON PE MUT 7 ICIS Capten C RET 7 Opening tie Strategy see seat areca caters ens dee Rer Une etd duum suite nde at aere duis RS 7 SAVING THE Strategy uo ces utete Feo M te dole ved tds dert tie ele diia t qtii te 9 EXAMINING THE Strategy 1 creek EUER UON REN EYE EEG Opec erbe 0 The Strategy MEE 12st cdecuseradatdre aa Cab rodeo oett t bed 0 Docking thE Strategy lee ia eccesso tb e ERR DERRDUUEROIHMREIB N NE PES 1 Using QUICKIFING E TET 2 OPENING a Chart asso eo et Quite odds a et dde cei he be tees edd 3 OPINI BIO CK NER NER TT TTE 4 Rading a SORTS I ERE RHET 8 Corfiguririg a Control ENGINE eror erret IR erre RE mecaadayagens eds 22 COMPU ING TNE Hate y aeaa brem Uc add Un aeaurntanaaa aces E PRSE RUNE 24 Running tne Strategy Js usse btt eene tae tib ed ne emi ed abe dni eR dee deb gai 26 INSPECTING Messages iiiaio t Get ete EE RR LED pU ete peid pels 28 Stepping lhrough the Chatt d axes scadercdaden coe rox cob E RRRE I D Reb Pens 28 Penis ac 30 Compiling and Downloading the Change sssssssssssssss een e eee e eee 33 Using a Watch WINGO
84. can also use CTRL X cut CTRL C copy and CTRL V paste 4 When you have finished changing text click outside the text frame The text block stays the same width but changes length to accommodate additional or deleted text To change the size or shape of the text block see Resizing Blocks or Text Blocks on page 212 PAC Control User s Guide 209 WORKING WITH CHART ELEMENTS PAKO Selecting Elements Before you can manipulate most elements you need to select them Start with the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode 1 Click the Select tool 4 2 To select an action OptoScript condition continue or text block click the block Handles appear around the block NH O B uE die Handles P fi 3 Toselect a connection click it Handles appear at the elbows and end points of the connection i Fowo Handles 4 To select all connections entering or exiting a block click the block click the right mouse button and choose Select Connections from the pop up menu 5 To select more than one element do one of the following Select the first element hold down the SHIFT key and select additional elements Clickand drag the mouse to draw a rectangle completely around the elements you want to select To select all items of the same type right click anywhere in the window and choose Select from the pop up menu From the sub menu choose the item type you want Moving
85. can save the strategy to flash at any time when you are in Debug mode To do so choose Control Engine gt Save Strategy to Flash Saving to Flash on Every Download CAUTION It is possible to wear out flash memory if you save to it many many times Use the following steps only when your strategy is finished 1 When you have finished the strategy and are in Configure mode choose File gt Strategy Options In the Strategy Options dialog box click the Download tab Check Save strategy to flash memory after download Strategy Options Archive Download Legacy Serial 1 0 Ports Flash Memory Save strategy to flash memory after download Set autorun flag after download Background Downloading v se background downloading and fast strategy updating The controller must be configured for this feature using PAC Manager Download Compression None Full If a control engine loses power and then restarts the autorun flag tells the control engine to automatically start running the strategy that is in flash memory If the autorun flag is not set the strategy must be started manually after power is restored to the control engine To have the strategy run automatically after a control engine restarts check Set autorun flag after download Click OK PAC Control User s Guide 165 ARCHIVING STRATEGIES ON THE COMPUTER Archiving Strategies on the Computer Archiving strategies to the computer helps yo
86. change Similarly an off latch is set when the value of a digital point changes from on to off and it remains set until cleared To read a latch and clear it at the same time use the command Get amp Clear On Latch or Get amp Clear Off Latch Counters Most standard digital inputs can be used as counters to count the number of times the input changes from off to on The availability of counters depends on the brain s capabilities and the speed of counters depends on the module For information on brain capabilities see form 1689 the SNAP PAC Brains Data Sheet For more information on module counting speed see the module s specifications on the Opto 22 website www Opto22 com On the website select Products gt SNAP PAC System gt Brains and I O gt Digital I O NOTE You can use counters on high density modules with SNAP PAC R1 controllers and SNAP PAC EB1 and SNAP PAC SB1 brains with firmware 8 1 or newer Before using a counter you must configure the point as a counter See Adding a Digital I O Point on page 122 or use PAC Manager Counters on Ethernet and SNAP PAC I O units do not need to be started and they cannot be stopped Therefore do not use the Start Counter and Stop Counter commands with SNAP PAC I O units However you can use Get Counter and Get amp Clear Counter PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Quadrature Counters Quadrature counters require a special module and c
87. chart export file cxf file and then import it into the strategy where you want it Exporting a Chart 1 With the strategy open and in Configure or Online mode choose Chart gt Export The Export Chart dialog box appears Export Chart Sprinkler Control Desctiption Description Controls sprinklers for the front lawn 2 Inthe From section of the dialog box select the chart to be exported from the Name drop down list 3 Inthe To section of the dialog box click Select Select Destination for Export File Save in O PAC Control Save as type PAC Control Chart Export Files c f v PAC Control User s Guide 215 EXPORTING AND IMPORTING CHARTS 216 4 Navigate to where you want the exported chart file to be saved In the File name field enter a name for the exported chart Click Save You return to the Export Chart dialog box which now shows the path and file name in the To section Optional Enter a description for the new chart Click OK The exported chart is saved You can import it into any PAC Control strategy See the next section for information on importing charts Importing a Chart Use the Automatic Chart Import dialog box to import a chart previously exported Also see Exporting a Chart on page 215 With the strategy open and in Configure mode choose Chart gt Import The Automatic Chart Import dialog box appears Autom
88. configure mode choose Edit gt Find 73 select Global and Operand and then click Find to search for objects with the same name as the subroutine Rename any objects that you find Drawing the Flowchart 1 Inthe PAC Control main window with or without a strategy open choose Subroutine New The Create New Subroutine dialog box appears Create New Subroutine Files of type PAC Control Subroutine Files isb v 2 Enter a subroutine name The subroutine name will become a command instruction in PAC Control It s a good idea to make it a descriptive name indicating the purpose of the subroutine for example Variable Increase Notification You cannot use the name of any existing command for example Add 3 Navigate to the directory where you want to store the subroutine and click Open Unlike strategies multiple subroutines can be saved to the same directory A new subroutine window is created PAC Control User s Guide 349 CREATING SUBROUTINES Variable Increase Notification SEE 3 Shortcuts 4 Add blocks and connections and name the blocks as you would in a chart as shown in the example below Variable Increase Notification SEE You can also copy existing flowchart blocks from another subroutine or chart and paste them into the new subroutine See Cutting Copying and Pasting Elements on page 211 5 Save
89. drops the dough and chips on the conveyor belt amp Charts The belt must be running between 50 and 65 of max rpm E 95 Alarms amp By Dough Chip Control The Powerup chart starts E 95 Dough Vessel Pressure this chart E RB Dven Inspection Control 95 Powerup a C Variables E C Numeric Variables aa bStartFlag 132 PE diCookieMotionTimer This chart runs bal fDoughPressureSetpe continuously once the 8 8 tRampValue program has been started FLT Gal fSetpointMinusD eadb FLT 12 nChartStatus 132 na nCookieMotionPreset v 2 nLoopCounter A fl gt v JLNext 4 Prev PAC Control Ready Configure 2 Click and drag the title bar of the chart window if necessary to see the maximize button at the upper right Click the maximize button PAC Control User s Guide OPENING A BLOCK The chart now covers the whole frame Notice the tabs at the bottom of the main window the white tab tells you you re viewing a chart and the gray tab shows the chart s name IPAC Control Basic Dough Chip Control DER RE File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help x Tn Od 0550 An 5009005202896 gt Em Cooki This chart drops the dough and chips on the conveyor belt a ey Cookies The belt must be running between 50 and 65 of max rpm C3 Control Engines Subroutines Included The Powerup chart starts amp Ey Charts this chart E B Alarms E B Do
90. editor and verifying there is only one line that says BEGIN CERTIFICATE Follow the steps below to place the root certificate in pki root certs on the SNAP PAC controller Make sure to execute the Save Files to Flash command and restart the device For more information see Moving Files to the SNAP PAC Controller or I O Unit in form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide Open PAC Manager and Click the Maintenance button 1 2 Select the Upload File to I O Unit command 3 Inthe Command list highlight Upload File To I O Unit 4 Nextto Filename field click the browse button El and locate the Base64 ASCII root certificate file 5 Inthe Destination field enter pki root certs lt filename gt where filename is the desired filename for this file on the SNAP PAC device 6 Inthe IP Addresses list select the IP address of the SNAP PAC device 7 Click Execute 8 Repeat steps 3 7 for each CA root certificate required 9 Select the Save Files To Flash command 10 Click Execute 11 Restart the SNAP PAC device for the newly installed root certificates to be registered Send Email with Attachments Example The simple example strategy below demonstrates how to use OptoScript to create and send an email using the Send Ernail with Attachments command You can of course use the PAC Control versions of the Send Email commands However with OptoScript you can more easily see and edit each ofthe email components the Server in
91. eem 356 DEBUGGING SUbroUtiries voe e mienia rin cmi vac Poe pde eres enr eer ies 358 Viewing SUBROUTINES 1 11 dde eU ER HEP OP UR de WIRE Ret EAR MSV Rees 358 Viewing All Subroutines in a Strategy 359 Printing SUBIOULINES u c sect prd E dangddd epe dd ds tap T pid ig bis dre ds 359 Appendix A Troubleshooting eese 361 How to Begin Troubleshooting ure tbe eet e tene qe d va 361 1 Read Any Error Message BOX ssssssssssssssssssss enne 361 2 Check Communication with the Control Engine 0 cece eee eee 361 a Checktne Message QUSS ree qe rese Ye ED EDO ROCHE ETE EDEPOL HER 362 4 Check Status Codes in Your Strategy ssssssssssssssss cece eect eee eeees 362 5 CallIPrOdUGL SUPPOME 345 43 Deus sei IRR EUER us 362 Strategy Problems cci nena caginad reser sex dah vete E EEE lt qe aub ebree 362 If You Cannot Delete an ESI 43 cx ine dco dte beatus dci ROI Paral oh ab a da bed 362 Tae Eta ve MEMORIES us dia apad UR BORA AG Rer s RS aod a n e 363 Archiving Strategies to Battery Backed RAM ssssssssssss 363 DO VOW SE Online Mde ay uses ce t arto ten e een ae e ve Rad 363 Checking Communication with the Control Engine 0 0 2 cece cece e eee 364 Resolving Communication Problems ric bere UR RE RR Se o red dad sade bed enews 365 Matching PAC Control Configuration to the Real World ccc cee ee eee e ees 365 Resolving TCP IP Cannot Connect Errors 412 2 0 0 2
92. features in SNAP PAC I O units such as ramping and pulsing and offers additional data types in subroutines PAC Control Professional also provides a migration path for Opto 22 FactoryFloor customers by adding support for serial based mistic I O units and by including a conversion utility to help customers move older OptoControl strategies to PAC Control PAC Control Professional includes about 500 commands For information on features supported by a specific controller see the controller documentation About this Guide This user s guide not only teaches you how to use PAC Control but also provides programming instruction and tips The separate PAC Control Command Reference describes in detail all PAC Control programming commands and instructions This guide assurnes that you are already familiar with Microsoft Windows on your personal computer including how to use a mouse standard commands and menu items to open save and close files If you are not familiar with Windows or your PC refer to the documentation from Microsoft and your computer manufacturer PAC Control User s Guide ABOUT THIS GUIDE amp Ge This guide covers both PAC Control Basic and PAC Control Professional Features that are available only in PAC Control Professional are marked with The Basic icon indicates features or functions that apply only to PAC Control Basic The Professional icon indicates features or functions that apply only to PAC Control
93. for most systems Your system may require a larger or a smaller change to stay within safety constraints Wait for a discernible change in the Input axis 148 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O Plot 1 0 Details Misc Details IVAL Velocity Algorithm Type B Input Setpoint Dutput The Input axis indicated by the upper white arrow added to this picture begins to respond to the change in output lower white arrow Data p Input Axis gt Dutput Axis Time Axis gt 12 Increase the resolution of the Time Axis by clicking the Time Axis button and choosing a lower percentage such as View 1 Minute Span 13 Scroll the Time Axis to locate the point at which you changed the Output Both the time and input axes should display the point at which the Output changed the lag and the point the input changed If not adjust the Input axis and Time axis until this information is displayed Plot 1 0 Details Misc Details VAL Velocity Algorithm Type B 78 00 f Data gt Input Axis gt Dutput Axis p Time Axis gt J 14 From the Data menu select Cursor The data cursor a line with a value bar attached to it appears on the plot 15 Right click the data cursor and choose Delta X from the Style submenu as shown below PAC Control User s Guide 149 INSPECTING AND TUNING PID LOOPS Plot 140 Details Misc Details IV L Velocity Algorithm Type
94. gt View Print gt Database 2 To view the same summary for a subroutine open the subroutine window and select Subroutine gt View Print gt Database The View Print Database dialog box appears View Print Database Include Numeric Variables Numeric Tables String Variables String Tables Pointer Variables Pointer Tables 1 0 Units amp Points Communication Handles PID Loops Event Reactions C Descriptions 3 Make sure all element types you want to include are checked Click to uncheck any elements you do not want 4 To include descriptive comments associated with the elements click to put a check mark next to Descriptions 5 Click OK PAC Control processes the database and puts the data in the Database window 188 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Save Search Print Sprinkler_Control Database TITLE Strategy Database STRATEGY Sprinkler Control DATE 08 21 04 TIME 12 49 44 NUMERIC VARIABLES ME OOO e o U UU U U UU U UMMM Day_of_the_Week Packer_Busy INT Status INT Sum INT Timer DN TIMER RUN COMMUNICATION HANDLES You may need to resize the window and use the scroll bar to see all the data For each element the name and reference count that is how many times the element is used in strategy commands are shown plus other information depending on the element type The figure above shows numeric variables and communication handles 6 To print th
95. in Data Types for Subroutines on page 348 Adding Variables This section includes steps for adding numeric string pointer and communication handle variables For numeric string and pointer tables see Adding Tables on page 224 1 With the strategy or subroutine open in Configure mode choose Configure gt Variables The Configure Variables dialog box opens I Configure Variables Xi Numeric Variables Scope Global v Name Type Init Type Init Value Description Ref Count bStartFlag Integer 32 Download dtCookieMotionTi Down Timer Run For animation in io fDoughPressureS Float Persistent Desired dough ve fRampValue Float Run For ramping the c fSetpointMinusDe Float Run Dough vessel pre nChartStatus Integer 32 Persistent nCookieMotionPre Integer 32 Run For animation in io nLoopCounter Integer 32 Run lt NON P nP This dialog box lists all the variables in the strategy or subroutine that are of the type shown in the Type field You can sort the data in this dialog by clicking any one of the column header buttons 2 Inthe Type drop down list choose the type of variable you want to configure w If you are adding the variable to a subroutine select Subroutine in the Scope drop down list 4 loadda new variable click Add PAC Control User s Guide 221 ADDING VARIABLES The Add Variable dialog box appears 5 Complete the fields as described
96. in AI Valid Types acConveyorS peedControl If you knew the exact name of the command to enter you could type it over Absolute Value which is first in the alphabetical list of commands As you typed the first command that matched the pattern you entered would be filled in automatically For example if you really wanted to enter Absolute Value you would start typing abs Another way to add a command is to click the down arrow just to the left of the Select button You could scroll through the resulting list of commands to find the right one The third way to enter a command is the one we ll use here 4 Click Select PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL I Select Instruction Groups Instructions Analog Point ESIISA Chart Add Communication Arecosine Control Engine Arcsine Deprecated Arctangent Digital Point Clamp Float T able Element Error Handling Clamp Float Variable Event Reaction Clamp Integer 32 Table Element High Density Digital Module Clamp Integer 32 Variable 140 Unit Complement 1 0 Unit Event Message Cosine 140 Unit Memory Map Decrement Variable 170 Unit Scratch Pad Divide Logical Generate Random Number CE Hypetboic Cosine Miscellaneous Hyperbolic Sine PID Ethernet Hyperbolic Tangent All PAC Control command groups are listed on the left and commands in the highlighted group are listed on the right The command we want has something to d
97. in the PAC Control Directory Subroutine configuration information Compiled subroutine component of the run file 382 lt xxx gt io def ioCtrl exe PAC Control cnt PAC Control GID PAC Control hlp PAC ControlCommands cnt PAC ControlCommands GID PAC ControlCommands hlp ioCtrlTools dat ioSnif log OptoScriptTemp txt Readme txt PAC Control User s Guide Object definition files commands I O points and I O units You must not modify these files PAC Control executable file PAC Control help contents file PAC Control help support file created when you launch the help file PAC Control help file Commands help contents file Commands help support file created when you launch the help file Commands help file File that lists software applications you ve configured in the Tools menu to launch from PAC Control PAC Message Viewer log file A temporary file README text file containing information about PAC Control D Sample Strategy Introduction Chapter 2 introduced the Cookies strategy a sample project used to illustrate how PAC Control works Although this strategy is based on a mythical factory you may want to know more about the factory its process and its hardware This appendix gives you that information Factory Schematic The following schematic drawing summarizes the cookie factory PRESSURE CONTROLLER 1 PLANT N o AIR DOUGH LOW LEVEL VESSEL LOW LEVEL PLANT ALARM
98. input to a particular value To do so you must disable the input first You can disable an I O point or unit in two ways The more common way is from within Debug mode by double clicking a point on the Strategy Tree and modifying the point s settings and values through the Inspection dialog box The second way is from within the strategy using commands such as Disable Communication to Digital Point Disable Communication to Analog Point or Disable Communication to I O Unit See Simulation Commands on page 305 Additional Commands to Use with Standard Digital Points Although not listed under Digital Point commands several other commands can be used for digital operations e Use Move to cause an output to assume the state of another input or output A digital input or output that is on returns a True non zero A True non zero sent to a digital output turns it on e Use NOT to cause an output on one I O unit to assume the opposite state of an input on another I O unit e Use Get I O Unit as Binary Value to get the state of all points at once Then use Bit Test to determine the state of individual points This method is much faster than reading each point individually e Use Set I O Unit From MOMO Masks to control all outputs at once PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Standard Digital Points and OptoScript Code In OptoScript code a standard digital I O point can be used directly wherever
99. later errors are often a result of earlier errors To check a command place the cursor anywhere in the command name and click the Command Help button If you need to add variables or other items that don t exist in the strategy do so after step 12 13 When you have finished with the code in this OptoScript block click OK to save your work and close the editor You return to the flowchart Troubleshooting Unable To Find Errors See also Troubleshooting Syntax Errors below If you test compile an OptoScript block and receive unable to find errors try the following suggestions For Commands Check the exact spelling of the command including upper and lower case OptoScript commands are similar to standard PAC Control commands but contain no spaces and some abbreviations Also check that the command is necessary in OptoScript Some common commands including comparison commands such as Less and mathematical commands such as Add are replaced with operators built into the OptoScript language Check Appendix E OptoScript Language Reference for equivalent OptoScript commands The easiest way to make sure the command you enter is valid is to enter it by clicking one of the Insert Command buttons in the OptoScript Editor and choosing the command from the Select Instruction dialog box PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT For Variables or Other Configured Items Variables I O units and points count
100. navigate to it When the filename appears in the File to Download field click OK The file is downloaded to the control engine Using Command Lines or a DOS Batch File to Perform PAC Terminal Tasks If you do not want your end user to have to use PAC Terminal you can use DOS level commands or create a DOS batch file to download a cdf file In addition to downloading a cdf file the DOS commands can also run or stop a strategy or define the control engine on the PC that will download the file PAC Terminal must be installed on the PC where the batch file is used The following table lists actions you may want to take within PAC Terminal Show help information for termcl h control engine name Download the specified file to the specified controller Compression can be between 0 none and 10 max d control engine name filename z compression Run the strategy in the specified control engine r control engine name PAC Control User s Guide 173 COMPILING AND DOWNLOADING Stop the strategy in the specified control engine s control engine name Send a Forth command to the control engine Add a control engine definition to the system Does not modify an existing definition Example a MyCE tcp 10 20 30 40 22001 0 2000 c control engine name Forth command a control engine name tcp ip addr port retries timeout ms Download the encrypted SSD file to the controller dp control engine name ssd file
101. of the text in any block 1 Click the Select tool L and click the block to select it 2 Right click the block and choose Font from the pop up menu 3 Inthe Font dialog box make the changes you want Click OK 4 To change whether text appears at the left the center or the right of a block select the block and click the right mouse button From the pop up menu choose Justify from the sub menu choose Left Center or Right Changing an Element Back to the Defaults 1 Select the item and click the right mouse button 2 Fromthe pop up menu choose Properties From the sub menu choose Copy from Default To change defaults see Changing the Appearance of Elements in a Chart Window on page 203 Opening Saving and Closing Charts 212 Opening a Chart Make sure the strategy is open In the Strategy Tree double click the chart you want to open You can also open a chart by selecting Chart gt Open and then double clicking the chart name in the Open Chart dialog box which lists all charts that are not currently open If a chart is open but not visible on the screen click the chart s name tab at the bottom of the window to make it visible PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 8 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Saving a Chart 1 Make sure the chart is open and is the active window 2 From the Chart menu choose Save Charts are automatically saved when you choose File gt Save All If you choose File gt Save Strategy or
102. on See 9 Using Variables and Commands for more information Action blocks can have more than one entrance but only one exit Condition Blocks are diamonds containing questions that control the logical flow of a strategy Condition blocks can have many entrances but only two exits True and False OptoScript Blocks are hexagons containing OptoScript code a procedural language you may want to use to simplify certain tasks See 11 Using OptoScript for more information OptoScript blocks can have more than one entrance but only one exit PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 8 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Continue Blocks are ovals that contain no commands but simply route chart logic to a new location such as to the top of a chart These blocks help keep charts neat by avoiding awkward connections between two blocks that are far apart Sync Blocks are used in charts that control systems with controller redundancy When a sync block is encountered the redundant controllers are synchronized For more information see form 1831 the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option User s Guide Connections are lines with arrows that connect one block to the next directing the flow of strategy logic Text explains the chart s purpose and elements for anyone who needs to understand them later Using the Drawing Toolbar The drawing toolbar includes tools for each of the elements plus a Select tool or pointer for manipulating elements Action block OptoS
103. only supported in standard confgurations not redundant ones In order to use a hostname your network must have a domain name server DNS and the hostname must already have been entered in your DNS either by you or someone in your IT department e For Standard Enter the IP address or hostname of the control engine e For Redundant Networks PRO only Enter the Primary and Secondary IP addresses The Primary address is ETHERNET 1 on a SNAP PAC controller and the Secondary IP address is ETHERNET 2 Both IP addresses use the same port number See Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Control on page 94 for more information Go e For Redundant Controllers PRO only For the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option Enter addresses for Controller 1 Controller 2 and Arbiter For more information on setting up the Redundancy Option see form 1831 the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option User s Guide 6 D Port Enter the control engine s IP port number The default of 22001 is the port of the host task on the control engine this default normally should not be changed E Retries Retries indicate the number of times PAC Control will reattempt communications with the control engine Since retries are automatically handled by the protocol TCP IP enter zero here F Timeout Enter the timeout value in milliseconds Timeout value is the length of time PAC Control tries to establish communication through the port If it fails it tries again as many time
104. ports on the controller or communication handles using these ports NOTE Once you have configured a serial port for use with an I O unit do not configure a communication handle on the same port 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode 2 Choose File gt Strategy Options then click the Serial I O Ports tab Strategy Options Archive Download Legacy Serial 1 0 Ports The SNAP PAC S1 and SNAP PAC S2 controllers may use serial 1 0 units such as the B3000 or SNAP PAC SB1 The port type must first be set to RS 485 either by using default ports or by PAC Manager You must also configure which ports will be used for 1 0 within this strategy C Use port 0 for 1 0 using 4 baud and mode SNAP PAC S2 only C Use port 1 for 1 0 using 40 baud and mode SNAP PAC S2 only C Use port 2 for 1 0 using 401 baud and mode SNAP PAC 52 or 51 C Use port 3 for 1 0 using 4i baud and mode SNAP PAC S2 only Serial ports may also be used for communicating with other devices by using PAC Control communication handles 3 Select the correct port for the controller and then choose the correct baud rate from the drop down list and click OK NOTE If you are configuring a SNAP PAC S1 controller you must use port 2 If you are using a SNAP PAC S2 see Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager User Guide for the default serial port assignments or to change a serial port assignment Changing the Baud Rate and Mode f
105. s Definition Whenever necessary you can change a control engine s definition on your PC its name the port the PC uses to communicate with it or the PC port setup such as timeouts and retries These changes can be made either in PAC Control or in the PAC Terminal utility 1 Chooseone of the following In PAC Control With the strategy open in Configure mode or Online mode right click the control engine name on the Strategy Tree and choose Modify from the pop up menu In PAC Terminal Choose Start gt Programs gt Opto 22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt Tools gt PAC Terminal From the Configure menu choose Control Engine Select Control Engine dialog box appears PAC Control User s Guide ES CHANGING OR DELETING A CONTROL ENGINE 100 2 Inthe Select Control Engine dialog box click the control engine you want to change and click Modify 3 Make the necessary changes following the same steps you would for configuring the control engine initially For help see Defining a Control Engine on Your PC on page 90 Changing the Control Engine that Receives the Downloaded Strategy You can configure several control engines for a strategy but only one at a time can receive the downloaded strategy The control engine that receives the strategy is called the active engine NOTE In PAC Control Professional you can also configure a control engine for Ethernet link redundancy see Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Contro
106. s part of a chart showing how you would use a count variable in this way Shipping_Area tInstructions Shipping Area Set count to 1 RERET 1 a Wt ow Bag Count Increment Variable Bag Count T instructions Shipping Area Count 12 STIEST i i l Is Bag_Count Se NL SL Next Block Previous Block perator AND If you are an experienced programmer you ll notice that this example is a ox loop You can use the following OptoScript code within a single OptoScript block to accomplish the same result for Bag Count 1 to 12 step 1 Count 12 items dropped into box Bag Dropper 1 Turn on bag dropper next See Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for more information on using code to streamline control structures in your strategy PAC Control User s Guide INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES Programming Case Statements A frequent need in programming is to create case statements also called switch statements if then else statements or nested if statements These statements create multiple decision points if the condition is A then X will happen if the condition is B then Y will happen and so on This example uses regular PAC Control commands see Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for another option that takes up less space in your flowchart For example suppose you have a conveyor with three speeds high 3 low 2 and stopped 1 Somet
107. scroll bar to see all the data 2 To print the data click the Print button on the toolbar To save it to a text file click the Save button To search the data click the Search button When finished close the window Viewing and Printing I O Point Mappings You can view and print a report that shows the location and mappings of I O points You can use this report as a look up table for programming purposes This can be useful with some commands that use different point mappings such as Move I O Unit to Numeric Table Ex Move Numeric Table to I O Unit Ex and IVAL Move Numeric Table to I O Unit Ex This report basically provides the same information provided in the appendix Table Index Offset Examples in the PAC Control Command Reference form 1701 but for the actual points in the strategy 1 To produce an I O point mappings report for a strategy open the strategy and select File gt View Print gt I O Point Mappings View Print 1 0 Point Mappings This report shows where all the configured points are located on modules and how they map out to various point mappings This can be useful with some commands that use different point mappings like Move 1 0 Unit to Numeric Table Ex Report Style Formatted Comma separated Options Module Positions 4 channel mappings 16 channel mappings Channel Positions 8 channel mappings 32 channel mappings Cancel PAC Control User s Guide 191 SEARCHING AND REPLACING 2 Onthe V
108. so the sequence ID does not match the current sequence ID Possible problems Network problems Out of sync errors typically occur when communication to the I O unit is via a network with high latency or inconsistent latency such as wireless Ether net radio modem cell modem etc This usually does not occur on a wired network because normal response times are much shorter than the default timeout period for I O Units typically 1 Sec Note If an Ethernet packet from a controller to an I O unit gets dropped you would get a 539 error instead of an out of sync error The timeout interval is too short Increase the timeout value to reduce out of sync errors All 10 000 and 11 000 Various descriptions errors Socket or network problems Check cables and connections to control engine cycle power to control engine PAC Control User s Guide 379 LIST OF COMMON MESSAGES 380 PAC Control User s Guide Introduction C PAC Control Files This appendix lists all of the PAC Control file types and special files You can use this information to determine what types of files are present in your PAC Control project directory Files Related to a Strategy lt strategy gt idb lt strategy gt crf lt strategy gt crn lt strategy gt crn1 lt strategy gt crn2 lt strategy gt crn3 lt strategy gt inc lt strategy gt inf lt strategy gt idb lt strategy gt lidb lt strategy gt per
109. span of the input output and time axes according to how much change you expect from your system To set a span click the axis button and choose from the pop up menu 7 If desired type a new Scan Rate and click Apply For most systems you should use an appropriate scan rate based on the system lag see Determining System Lag on page 147 However you can experiment with Scan Rates before tuning the P and D constants or adjust scan rate after tuning Here is an example for Scan Rate 152 PAC Control User s Guide The lag for this system was determined to be about 2 seconds The left half of the plot reflects a 0 5 second scan rate while the righ half shows a 3 second scan rate Notice both scan rates have the same effect on the input however the 3 second scan rate is using less of the processor s resources CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O 3 TemperatureControl View PID Loop scanning Name TemperatureControl Error None Input 80 24991 Gain 5 Scan Rate 3 Setpoint 80 Tune 1 0 Scan Counts 112783 Enable comm Yes Y Output 0 Tune D 0 Plot 1 0 Details Misc Details IV L Velocity Algorithm Type B Input E int Output E 0 Of 0 Data p Input Axis gt Output Axis Time Axis gt Experiment with gain settings by typing a new value in the Gain field and clicking Apply The easiest way to tune most PIDs is to experiment with the gain constant first Tr
110. step 5 for each parameter To change a parameter highlight it and click Modify To change the order of a parameter in the list highlight it and click the up or down arrow button in the dialog box To delete a parameter highlight it and click Delete NOTE You cannot delete the Put Status In parameter or change its order in the list and you cannot delete a parameter that has a reference count greater than zero indicating that it is used in the subroutine Also ifyou add or delete parameters after including a subroutine in a strategy you may receive an error and will need to add the subroutine to the strategy again 7 When the parameters appear the way you want them in the list click OK The parameters you have named can now be used in the subroutine s commands Configured Parameters Example Here s an example of a completed Configure Subroutine Parameters dialog box showing three parameters to be passed into the subroutine When the subroutine is called from the strategy these parameters appear in the Add Instruction dialog box PAC Control User s Guide 353 CREATING SUBROUTINES I Configure Subroutine Parameters Subroutine Name Group Variable Increase Notification Subroutines v Subroutine s OptoScript Name Names used in the subroutine may differ from those used in the strategy Variable Increase Notification Comment Add Edit Instruction Prompt
111. string A string with a width of 100 may currently be empty which means its length is zero A string with a width of 10 containing the characters Hello has a length of six five for Hello and one for the space after the o Although a strings length may change dynamically as the string is modified by the program its width remains constant When you configure a string variable or string table you set the width of the string All the strings in a PAC Control string table must be of the same width PAC Control supports a maximum string width of 1024 For applications requiring wider strings you can use several strings to hold the data use string tables or use numeric tables as described in the next section Using Numeric Tables as an Alternative to Strings Since a string is nothing more than a sequence of characters you can store a string in a numeric table with each table element holding a character The advantage of using numeric tables for strings is that a numeric table can store strings of any size The disadvantages are e Memory usage is much greater e Nostring conversion functions are available for numeric tables An intermediate temporary string would be required to use string commands for these tables Strings in PAC Control can have a width of up to 1024 Strings and Multitasking Although string commands are completed before the current task loses its time slice it is important to note that a string that is con
112. table may be 1 FH DstStrTblBody E 4 0 for non secure lt gt 0 for SSL 4 DstStrTbiHdr strCmd 77 URI nHttpStatus Status returned by HTTP server E nPortSSL 4 Port to which you want to connect H HTTP srcStrTbiBody _ StrURL 7 7 Address numeric or www google com v db Next 4 Prev PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Make sure to assign to the controller an IP address as well as the appropriate Subnet Mask DNS and Gateway for the network For more information on how do this see form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide In order to retrieve HTTPS content from www google com you will need to obtain the root certificate used by the target website to validate an SSL secure connection You must obtain the root certificate and then register it on your SNAP PAC controller as described below NOTE Ifyou are using a SoftPAC controller root certificates are not needed for using HTTP Get to retrieve HTTPS content because Windows already has those certificates installed Obtaining an Equifax Root Certificate Many secure websites including www google com require the Equifax Secure Certificate Authority DER encoded X 509 root certificate which is available on our website www opto22 com Go to Support gt Downloads and then search for Equifax Root Certificate in Samples and Freeware Registering a Root Certificate on a SNAP PAC Con
113. the folder for the chart that calls it Sprinkler Control Sprinkler Control C3 Control Engines Subroutines Included 5 Variable Increase Notification Charts e EN Subroutines Used Variable Increase Notification 2 Messages As Powerup m5 Temperature Control C variables Numeric Variables String Variables Pointer Variables Ej Communication Handles Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables Yo Units PAC Control User s Guide In the Subroutines Included folder In the calling chart folder CHAPTER 12 USING SUBROUTINES You can view add and change variables in a subroutine from the Strategy Tree just as you would for a chart Viewing All Subroutines in a Strategy To see all the subroutines in a strategy double click the Subroutines Included folder on the Strategy Tree All subroutines associated with the strategy are listed in the Subroutine Files dialog box Click and drag the right side of the box to see all the information The path filename and reference count how many times the strategy refers to the subroutine are shown for each subroutine Printing Subroutines For steps to print a subroutine s graphics see Printing Chart or Subroutine Graphics on page 184 To view and print instructions in the subroutine s blocks see Viewing and Printing Strategy or Subroutine Elements on page 188 PAC Control User s Guide 359
114. the active one but not yet running Cancel aborts the new download The controller is left as it was before the download occurs When the download is complete you are in Debug mode If you receive errors see A Troubleshooting After switching strategies you can switch back to the original strategy by choosing Control Engine gt Inspect in Debug mode and use the Switch and Run or Switch button in the Inspect Control PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Engine dialog box or you can use PAC Terminal When the strategy is switched back the persistent variables are created and compared Switching the Strategy If there is already an active strategy which is set up to have an alternate strategy as described in Background Downloading on page 170 and you want to switch strategies do the following 1 In Debug mode choose Control Engine gt Inspect to open the Inspect Control Engine dialog box 2 Choose either the Switch and Run or the Switch button The Switch amp Run button stops the active strategy and runs the strategy you just downloaded The Switch button stops the active strategy and makes the new strategy the active one but not yet running When the strategy is switched as described in the previous steps the following operations occur e Persistent variables are compared If the type and size of the persistent variable are consistent the contents are copied If the type and siz
115. the fans With Pointers and Indexing The second way uses pointers and indexing to accomplish the same result in a smaller space using less control engine memory and fewer programming steps The fan outputs and the temperature inputs are referred to by pointers The setpoints instead of requiring individual variables are simply numbers in a table EJ PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY The flowchart sets initial values for the Instructions FanCtrl Load Pointers fx pointers and then cycles through the pointer Move from Pointer Table Element tables to control the fans Tables have already indies FanCtrlndex been initialized in the Powerup chart Of Table ptMotors To Pointer pMotor E Move from Pointer Table Element PP GP ED OA O O eee Index FanCtrlindex LJ Next Block va mew xt 3 Of Table ptTemps To Pointer Previous Block V Instructions FanCtrl Too Warm Is Greater Than Numeric Table Element MER DER At Index FanCtrlindex ie is ob SEM ies Bs Gn ay m Of Table ftSetpoints oco o cc M o l Instructions FanCtrl Turn Fan On Ed PS M EROS Lm SETE ES n P S E E E E E T d MMC Next Block Previous Block Using OptoScript The third way also uses pointers and indexing but places all the action in an OptoScript block See 11 Using OptoScript for more information on using OptoScript 1 OptoScript Alarms Stop Co
116. the strategy to find the PAC Control command that caused the error The easiest way to find a block is to open the chart or subroutine then choose Center on Block from the View menu You can click the Block column to sort the blocks by number and locate the one with the problem To see which line within a block is causing the error in PAC Control Configure mode choose Configure gt Full Debug When the error appears in the queue it will include the line number of the command as well as the block ID Status Codes Status Codes indicate the success or failure of a PAC Control command instruction and they are reported by the control engine to a variable in your PAC Control strategy or as a returned value in OptoScript The status code is either zero indicating a successful command or a negative number indicating an error For example suppose you use the command Transmit Numeric Table You create a variable named Transmit Status to put the status of the command in In Transmit Status you receive either a zero indicating that the table was successfully transmitted or you receive a negative number such as 37 or 42 Status codes that may be returned are listed for each command in the PAC Control Command Reference and in online help Naming Conflicts During various procedures PAC Control checks for duplicate names of objects such as variables charts subroutines strategy variables OptoScript instruction names and reserved keyw
117. there We recommend you archive both to the computer during strategy development and to the control engine when the strategy is completed Archiving to the control engine as well as the computer makes sure that an older strategy can always be found and updated even after personnel changes occur and years pass See also Archiving Strategies on the Computer on page 166 Archive files are date and time stamped and zipped for compact storage The archive file name on the control engine is in one of the following formats PathVFilename Download D02282000 T 114351 zip Path Filename Online D02282000 11 14351 zip The date stamp D is in the format mm dd yyyy In the examples above the date is February 28 2000 The time stamp T is in the format hh mmy ss In the examples above the time is 51 seconds past 11 43 A M PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES Make sure the control engine has sufficient memory available to store the archive file Since only one strategy can be on the control engine at any time only the latest archive for that strategy is on the control engine Other archives are erased during strategy download In addition to the archived strategy the archive file also stores persistent variables and variables that are initialized on strategy download Follow these instructions to archive a strategy to the control engine 1 In PAC Control choose File gt Strategy Options Strategy O
118. time to transfer and the control engine may become unresponsive during the process For Sending Suppose you want to send the data currently in the file SendThisData txt on the control engine to a file HunkoData txt on the device Heres how you would send the data in your PAC Control strategy 1 Use the command Open Outgoing Communication to open an FTP communication handle The value of the handle would be tp 10 192 56 45 21 JoeG hello 2 Usethe condition Communication Open to make sure the communication handle opened 3 Usethe command Send Communication Handle Command to specify the filename and send the file in one step Use the communication handle command send local filename remote filename as follows send SendThisData txt HunkoData txt If the remote filename already exists it is overwritten 4 When you have finished sending data to the file use the command Close Communication to close the communication handle For Retrieving Suppose you want to get the data from the file GetThisData txt on the device and retrieve it to the file HunkoData txt on the control engine Heres how you would retrieve the data in your PAC Control strategy 1 Usethe command Open Outgoing Communication to open an FTP communication handle The value of the handle would be tp 10 192 56 45 21 JoeG hello 2 Usethe condition Communication Open to make sure the communication handle opened PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10
119. to an industrial process When you automate a process you are less dependent on human action to carry out the process The process generally becomes faster more accurate and more reliable For example take a look at the tank level and pump combination in the diagram on the previous page Instead of having a person watch the level in the tank and turn the pump on or off when the level gets too low or too high you can automate the process by installing a processor and I O The processor and I O respond in milliseconds and are on the job 24 hours a day Control Engines In an Opto 22 PAC Control system the control engine is the programmable component in Opto 22 controllers that provides the intelligence required for automation Using PAC Control you create a software program a strategy that tells the control engine how every aspect of a process should work You download the strategy to a Opto 22 control engine which runs it as a stand alone application On a SNAP PAC controller the strategy is stored in the controller s electronic memory the development PC can be turned off or used for other operations while the control engine runs the program Whenever necessary you can modify the strategy and download it again to the control engine In the diagram on the previous page one SNAP PAC S series controller runs the program that controls the three areas of automation Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs An industrial process can include ma
120. to run in any strategy is the Powerup chart so we ll look at it first 1 Double click the Powerup chart on the Strategy Tree When it opens notice that it says Stopped at the bottom left 2 Click the Run Strategy button p A dialog box asks if you are sure you want to run the strategy 3 Click Start Strategy A progress window appears perhaps only briefly And at the bottom of the chart window the word Stopped changes to Running Let s try pausing the program to see where we are 4 Clickthe Pause Chart button m PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL IPAC Control Professional Powerup DER 1 File Edit ControlEngine Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help X Ci confio Debus Di or 5 0m u 25 Cookies a Cookies Control Engines u Cookie Controller Subroutines Included amp Charts E D Alarms amp Bs Deugh Chip Control do Wait until start flag is set B Dough Vessel Pressure 5 Yn true non zero E B Interrupt D Oven_Inspection_Control E B Powerup Gm amp Variables Start the alarm monitoring a C3 Numeric Variables dough chip control pressure Oa bChipDispenseValve control and oven inspection El bChipLevelSwitch charts 132 18 BDoughDispenseVah 132 18 bDoughLevelSwitch 132 HE bDoughPressureCont sv EE G Shortcuts 96 lt i m v db Next P Prev Powerup PAC Control Ready This c
121. units unable to communicate The solution is to connect all these devices on two networks if one network goes down devices can communicate on the other Note that each computer has two network interface cards NICs 1 0 units are controlled by the controller Each I O unit is connected to its own group of sensors and actuators but all are connected to the same two networks If one network needs maintenance for example to replace a switch you can safely shut it down using the Set Target Address commands in PAC Control and options in PAC Display Professional PAC Control User s Guide USING ETHERNET LINK REDUNDANCY IN PAC CONTROL PC with two NICs PC with two NICs Opto 22 Redundant Network running PAC Display Pro running PAC Display Pro Ethernet switch running OptoOPCServer Ethernet switch network 1 as PAC Display scanner network 2 Sensors and Sensors and actuators actuators location 1 location 2 Example 2 Ethernet Link Computer and Software Redundancy The second example of link redundancy illustrates concern not only about the stability of the Ethernet network but also about the computers and the software run on them Any of these things the network a computer or the OptoOPCServer or PAC Display Professional software running on the computer may need maintenance or may fail The solution here is to provide duplicate computers and software and connect all devices on two networks Each c
122. upper right corner of the Strategy Tree window The Strategy Tree moves into its own frame at the left side of the main window PAC Control User s Guide EXAMINING THE STRATEGY IPAC Control Basic File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help TE 00004 0005 8 0 MR 00m m 9 5o 99s Bcomplea Docked Cookies Strategy Tree se amp E Control Engines Subroutines Included a amp Chats E ZT Alarms 2 Dough_Chip_Control 9 Dough Vessel Pressure Cor t7 9 ven Inspection Control E 2 Powerup S Variables E C Numeric Variables 8 bStartFlag 132 DE diCookieMotionTimer TMR fDoughPressureS etpoint fRampValue fSetpointMinusD eadbanc QE nChartStatus 132 ga nCookieMotionPreset pa nLoopCounter String Variables Pointer Variables E Communication Handles Ey Numeric Tables String Tables IC Pointer Tables gm E 1 0 Units DEDE i Jl Next 4r Prev 2 Tochange the width of the Strategy Tree s frame move your mouse over the right side of the frame When the cursor changes click and drag the side to make the frame wider or narrower Using Quick Find The quick find tool at the bottom of the strategy tree enables you to find items quickly in the tree Use the Next and Prev buttons or F3 and SHIFT F3 to find multiple matches Any partial match will work Cookies o DER a c Cookies amp G Control Engines Subroutines Inclu
123. used for clarity Fach statement is followed by a 4 fPressure 300 0 semicolon nTotal ntTable 0 ntTable 1 ntTable 2 i Table elements are put in square brackets next to the table name while GetHours gt 8 and GetHours lt 17 Fan A 1 1 Parentheses are used as separators for expressions and operators You can use an unlimited number of parentheses wend Send alarm if oven temperature too hot if Oven Temperature gt 450 then Line comments appear on a separate Oven Alarm 1 Set the oven alarm ine or after a statement They are else preceded by two slashes and a space Oven Alarm 0 Clear the oven alarm Block comments not illustrated are endif preceded by and followed by Parameters arguments for a nCheck GenerateChecksumOnString 0 sMessage 47 f command are listed in order within nError Block GetIdOfBlockCausingCurrentError parentheses following the command R E ENF PE EEE Commands that have no arguments must still include the parentheses sGreeting Hello world nPos FindCharacterInString 0 sGreeting je An individual character can be in single quotes or in double quotes depending on its type A string must be in double quotes PAC Control User s Guide 327 OPTOSCRIPT DATA TYPES AND VARIABLES OptoScript 328 NOTE
124. uses the same timeout value for the first attempt and the 2 retries So 120 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O with a 1 second timeout value and 2 retries it takes 3 seconds before an unresponsive unit is taken offline This means the chart or command that is trying to read or write to that I O unit will be delayed by 3 seconds When using SNAP PAC Ethernet brains SNAP PAC R1 R2 EB1 or EB2 on a wired LAN local area network a timeout value of 0 1 seconds may be fine When using a WAN wide area network a wireless network the Internet or you are not sure what the networking technology is it may be best to use the default value of 1 second However if the controller s message queue shows loss of communication with Ethernet I O units it may be necessary to increase the timeout value For Advanced Users If you are an advanced user with a lot of Ethernet experience you may want to determine normal response times from a brain using an Ethernet capture utility such as WireShark www wireshark org Look for the fastest response time the normal or typical response time and the longest response time Adjust the timeout value to be larger than the maximum observed response time It is best not to use a timeout value that is too short because this will cause unnecessary communication retries and timeouts We recommend making the timeout be at least 50 to 100 longer than the maximum observed response time I
125. venT emperature id aiDoughVesselPressure PIDs v T a i v dL Next 4p Prev 11 Double click dilnspectionPassFailSwitch PAC Control User s Guide 12 13 14 15 16 CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL 4 dilnspectionPassFailSwit x val al Maximize button In the minimized dialog box click the maximize button ps dilnspectionPassFailSwitch Mame dilnspectionPassFailS witch Type Digital Input G More Info WAL VAL State E On Latch Off Latch Communication Point Enabled 2 140 Unit Enabled i Open Parent ua mF NOTE Don t worry if the red error message I O unit not configured or XVAL values appear in this dialog box This occurs because the strategy is configured for sample hardware that probably doesn t correspond to your actual I O units and modules PAC Control can t locate this hardware That s okay for this example When an inspection finds a bad cookie the on latch attached to the I O point dilnspectionPassFailSwitch is supposed to go on We re going to trip it manually Click one of the arrows in the On Latch IVAL field to change it to On Also make sure that the Enable comm field says No The dialog box should look like this dilnspectionPassFailSwitch Mame dilnspectionPassFailSwitch Type Digital Input G More Info IVAL XVAL On latch On J otae ERE Communication v Poi
126. with troubleshooting Message 2 above is an example of a message the user placed in the Temperature Control chart Severity The Severity column indicates the type of message information warning or error Chart Block Line Object f a PAC Control command in the strategy caused an error the chart name block number and line number if you are in Full Debug mode where the command appears are listed Message 3 above is an example an invalid table index was used in block 19 of the Temperature Control chart The Object column shows the table name If an error did not occur in a strategy chart the Chart column shows system Messages 1 and 2 occurred when the strategy was unable to initialize an I O unit so the Chart column shows system INIT 1O Block and Line do not apply but the Object column shows the name and IP address of the I O unit If an error was caused by a subroutine the Chart column shows the name of the chart that calls the subroutine and the Block column shows the name of the subroutine and the block number where the error occurred in the format lt subroutine name gt lt block number Messages 4 5 and 6 372 PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX B ERRORS AND MESSAGES are examples these errors occurred in block 1 of the subroutine Variable_Increase_Notification which was called by the Temperature_Control chart Using Queue Messages If a block number is listed for the error look in that block in
127. x File Edit Format View Help S2 M Control Engine 0 0 0 0 10 195 56 102 0 0 0 0 O S1 M Control Engine 0 0 0 0 10 195 56 101 0 0 0 0 O 4 Copy the list of control engines from the source PC file and paste them to the end of the list of control engines in the target PC file PAC Control User s Guide 109 DOWNLOADING FILES USING PAC TERMINAL Target and Source merged on target PC E File Edit Format View Help S2 M Control Engine A 0 10 195 56 102 x 12 S1 M Control Engine 0 10 195 56 101 7 R2 Control Engine 0 10 195 55 112 R1 Control Engine 0 10 195 55 111 Cookie Controller 0 127 0 0 1 lt 5 Save the target ControllerNames ini file on the target PC before closing it All of the control engines in the merged file will now be available in PAC Control Downloading Files Using PAC Terminal Using the PAC Terminal utility you can download PAC Control strategies or Forth files related to the strategy such as library or initialization files directly to a control engine without having to open each program For information on using the brain file system to store data and manipulate it within your strategy see Using the Control Engine s File System on page 257 NOTE If you are downloading a PAC Control strategy that requires other files be sure to download the files in the correct order for example library file then strategy file then initialization file If you need to set initial val
128. you have changed the defaults for the way elements appear in a chart you can update existing blocks connections and text to match CAUTION When you update existing objects to match you cannot undo the update 1 Right click on an empty space in the chart whose elements you want to change Choose Select from the pop up menu From the sub menu choose the item type you want For example to select all action blocks choose Select gt Action Blocks 2 Right click again in the chart and choose Properties gt Copy from Default from the pop up menu The color size and font of all selected items change to match the flowchart defaults Drawing Blocks Action condition OptoScript and continue blocks are all drawn the same way 1 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the tool you want to use m foran action block fora condition block PAC Control User s Guide WORKING WITH CHART ELEMENTS for an OptoScript block fora continue block As you move the mouse into the window you see an outline representing the block 2 Click where you want to place the block The new block appears New Chart 3 Click in another location to place other blocks of the same type When you have finished using the tool click the right mouse button click another tool in the toolbar or press ESC Naming Blocks 1 2 3 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Onli
129. zero and Down Timers start from a value you set and count down to zero Timers can range from 0 001 to 4 611686 x 10 A string stores text and any combination of ASCII characters including control codes and extended characters For instance a string variable might be used to send information to a display for an operator to see A string variable is also used to set parameters for peer to peer communication When defining most string variables you must specify the width of the string The width is the maximum number of characters that the variable may hold A string variable can contain numeric characters but they no longer act as numbers To use them in calculations you must convert them into floating point or integer numbers Conversely a numeric value to be displayed on a screen must first be converted into a string A pointer does not store the value of a variable instead it stores the memory address of a variable or some other PAC Control item such as a chart or an I O point You can perform any operation on the pointer that you could perform on the object the pointer points to Pointers are an advanced programming feature and are very powerful but they also complicate programming and debugging A communication handle stores information used to communicate with other entities for example other devices on the network or files that store data The communication handle s value is a string containing the parameters needed to make a conne
130. 0 baud and mode SNAP PAC S2 only C Use port 1 for 1 0 using baud and mode SNAP PAC S2 only 115200 v baud and Binary wv mode SNAP PAC S2 or 51 C Use part 3 for 1 0 using 200 baud and mode SNAP PAC 52 only Serial ports may also be used for communicating with other devices by using PAC Control communication handles 3 Selectthe correct ports for the controller and then choose the correct baud rate and mode from the drop down lists and click OK If you are configuring a SNAP PAC S1 controller you must use port 2 for serial I O units If you are using a SNAP PAC S2 see Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide for the default serial port assignments or to change a serial port assignment In addition make sure to jumper the non SNAP PAC brain for the correct setting either Binary CRC cyclic redundancy check or ASCII CRC Although at the brain level you can choose Binary ASCII and CRC Checksum independently the Opto 22 drivers only support binary CRC or ASCII CRC ASCII CRC is only for mistic brains If a port is set for ASCII but has a SNAP PAC SB1 2 on it the compiler will generate a warning Tuning the I O Unit Timeout Value for Ethernet I O Units The default I O Unit timeout value is 1 second However for best overall performance you can tune the value for your system A SNAP PAC controller automatically retries 2 times before disabling communication to an I O unit that is unresponsive and it
131. 000 cece cece 66 Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts isssssssssssssssssssssssss e e e ese 67 Online AS Be oce rct rea b ore Oed ve eb bread QU vue reni eas 67 Chapter 4 Designing Your Strategy ccc cece cece eee nnn 69 ITROGUCLION MER EE MEL te Eben Ce ener eeids 69 li PIAS MALE MS eter ee ia eere veter Redit Mares meter angie oa ee dicis 69 Steps to DeslQna osse b oet eed EEE San E EA ENA Cabodaneda Ra D abeans 69 Solving the Problemi uero o rr UPS da P T TESTE PR MEE e E EXE Nd qa dU ge 70 Defining the Problem iz casicdadwudedugeunaedammnad e wale dd Saude dhs P dp TOS Od 70 Designing a Logical Sequence of Steps to Solve the Problem 5 71 Testing tlie Steps cns ecciesie bte vett be a dod toa ed dah a da ca rud ede Ss 7 Simple Sprinkler System Process Flowchart 0000 cece cece cece cere ees 72 Building the Strategy axis tha ta tee tot ait eaten thea dead eta ROM vH e ES 72 Configuring Hardware 2 0 0 0 ccc cece ccc cece e e ea 72 Determining and Configuring Variables sss 73 Creating PAC Control Charts and Adding Instructions 000 e eee eens 73 Compiling and Debugging the Strategy 0 0 eee eee eee e cece cece ees 75 Using ana Improving the Strategy estes UE ieee e ES 76 secet c reheat anges EE namnehindeani nn ieamaghatonmngadannaienras 76 Chatt Guidelines ice pe DER et E beoe eta edhe kd dee dlls 76 Naming Convents excess dnavamitene tem CUR CAN RUD
132. 01 SN4P ODCS5SSAC 5 60 VDC Source Digital Output ix D Alarm 1 Copy To gt v Benda o0 iea 3 Highlight the point you want to copy and click the Copy To button From the pop up menu choose one of the following To copy the point to fill empty points on the module choose Fill In Module The point is copied to the other empty points on the same module I Configure 1 0 Points 120 Unit Lights B Type SNAP PAC R1 Feaues Add 7 00 SNAPIDC5D 2 5 28 VDC Digital Input Original point w 0 DO Switch Counter Modify w 1 DD Switch 1 Counter Delete Copied points w 2 DD Switch 2 Counter T 3 DD Switch 3 Counter Bl 01 SNAP ODCSSRC 5 50 VDC Source Digital Output T 0 Alam 1 None v Benda o0 Comen To copy the point to fill all empty points on the I O unit choose Fill In I O Unit The point is copied to all empty points on similar modules for example to all empty points on digital input modules whether they are the same or a different part number and to all compatible slots without configured modules E PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O I Configure 1 0 Points 120 Unit Lights B This module was already configured The copied point filled in all empty 5 D5 SNAPADCS 10 32 VDC VAC Digital Input points even though the module is a T 0 DO Switch 150 Counter different part number ded 1 DO Switch 161 Counter w 2 D Switch 162 Counter w 3 DO
133. 2 Element Get I O Unit Scratch Pad Integer 32 Table Set I O Unit Scratch Pad Integer 32 Table Get I O Unit Scratch Pad String Element Set I O Unit Scratch Pad String Element Get I O Unit Scratch Pad String Table Set I O Unit Scratch Pad String Table Because these are I O unit commands in order to use these commands with a SNAP PAC S series or SoftPAC controller first you need to create an I O Unit of the type Generic OptoMMP Device to represent the controller Use the controller s IP address or the loopback address 127 0 0 1 Also because these are I O unit commands remember to check all return values and errors to make sure the command was successful If a command variable contains a value that is obviously wrong for example a memory map address in an incorrect format communication to the I O unit will be automatically disabled Each controller running a PAC Control strategy can place data in its own or another s Scratch Pad area and each can retrieve data that has been placed in the Scratch Pad area by other devices using other applications Using these commands eliminates the need to open communication handles see Communication Commands on page 247 thus speeding up peer to peer communication The memory map Scratch Pad area supports four data types bits integer 32s floats and strings e For details on the Scratch Pad area see Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide e Forthe complete memory map see form 1465 th
134. 44 chart commands 246 communication commands 247 control engine commands 280 error handling commands 286 I O unit event message commands 289 I O unit memory map commands 290 I O unit scratch pad commands 291 logical commands 293 mathematical commands 295 miscellaneous commands 299 PID Ethernet commands 300 pointer commands 303 simulation commands 305 string commands 306 time date commands 314 timing commands 315 in OptoScript 326 function 328 procedure 328 printing 187 comment 240 299 in OptoScript 343 396 communication Fthernet link redundancy 94 287 I O memory map commands instructions 290 I O unit event message commands in structions 289 I O unit scratch pad commands 291 incoming 251 outgoing 249 PC and control engine 89 peer to peer 249 291 TCP IP 247 249 with serial communication module 249 253 255 communication commands 247 communication handle adding 221 definition 49 219 247 examples File 259 FTP 263 serial 267 TCP 253 254 File 257 FTP 263 port numbers 250 serial 266 serial Communication modules 253 TCP 247 249 types 247 viewing 230 comparison operators 334 compiling copy errors and warnings 167 strategy 24 166 strategy without downloading 169 subroutine 355 condition block definition 202 condition command definition 49 condition in OptoScript 324 configuration mode toolbar 54 Configure mode definition 53 configuring continue block 241
135. 5 j g Next Block converting it to a string and i 1 appending it to the string you Put Result in Current Temp String Previous Block Just created NAppend String to String Append Current Temp String To Current Temp Message Append String to String 3 If needed append another Tes To Current Temp Message literal string Alternatively you can create the message by placing the following OptoScript code within a single OptoScript block FloatToString Current Temp 5 1 Current Temp String PAC Control User s Guide INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES Current Temp Message Current temperature Current Temp String E E OptoScript can be more efficient for string handling than standard PAC Control commands See Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for more information Interrupt Condition block determines whether an I O unit has generated an interrupt Action block clears latches and interrupts Condition blocks determine whether an lt event has occurred Action blocks take necessary action a when event occurs G Shortcuts 100 Error Handling Every strategy should have a way to handle errors It s important to check values and errors that are returned from the commands in your strategy Communication to an I O unit for example will be automatically disabled if a command sends it variable values that are clearly wrong such as a memory map address in an incorrect format Counting
136. 5 111 E Status Scan amp Scan Al 43 Scan Selected 2 Right click the control engine and choose Upload gt Strategy Archive from the pop up menu 3 In the Save PAC Control Strategy Archive As dialog box navigate to the folder where you want to save the archive file Keep the file name as it is so you can see the date and time it was originally downloaded to the control engine Click Save A dialog box shows progress as the archive file is uploaded to the computer 4 Navigate to the zipped archive file Assuming you are using WinZip double click the file name Highlight all files and click Extract Extract them to the location you want 5 When all files are extracted double click the idb file to open the strategy If necessary re link subroutines and files run before or after a strategy Re linking may be necessary because the directory structure in the zip file may not match what was originally on the computer The zip file structure is as follows Root idb chart files inf Subroutines Control engine files Control Engine Name 1 Before run file After run file Control Engine Name 2 Etc 108 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES Moving Control Engines from One PC to Another Sometimes it s necessary to transfer a strategy to another computer such as when the computer has to be replaced or when another PC will be used to run the control application Instead of t
137. 51 33 3 83 53 S 115 73 S 20 14 T DC4 52 34 4 84 54 T 116 74 t 21 15 AU NAK 53 35 5 85 55 U 117 75 u 22 16 V SYN 54 36 6 86 56 V 118 76 v 23 17 W ETB 55 37 7 87 57 Ww 119 77 w 24 18 X CAN 56 38 8 88 58 X 120 78 x 25 19 Y EM 57 39 9 89 59 Y 121 79 y 26 1A AZ SUB 58 3A 90 5A Z 122 7A z 27 1B AT ESC 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B 28 1C FS 60 3C lt 92 5C 124 7C 29 1D GS 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D 30 1E A RS 62 3E gt 94 5E A 126 7E 31 1F 27 US 63 3F 95 5F 127 7F DEL 313 TIME DATE COMMANDS Time Date Commands The following commands refer to time dates and days Copy Date to String DD MM YYYY Copy Date to String MM DD YYYY Copy Time to String Convert Date amp Time to NTP Timestamp Convert NTP Timestamp to Date amp Time Get Date amp Time Get Day Get Day of Week Get Hours Get Julian Day Get Minutes Get Month Get Seconds Get Seconds Since Midnight Get System Time Get Time Zone Description Get Time Zone Offset Get Year Set Date Set Day Set Hours Set Minutes Set Month Set Seconds Set Time Set Time Zone Configuration Set Year Synchronize Clock SNTP These commands can be used for timing a process or for making sure things happen according to a set schedule For example you could use the command Get Seconds Since Midnight at the beginning of a process and again at the end of the process and then subtr
138. 9 230 232 configuring 221 definition 51 217 deleting 229 in strategy design 73 literal constant 221 monitoring in a watch window 157 230 232 naming 78 329 OptoScript compared to other languages 392 persisent data in 220 pointer definition 303 table 219 types of data 218 types in PAC Control 219 viewing all in a strategy 188 189 velocity algorithm for PID 301 version checking with OptoVersion 368 subroutine viewingviewing See also inspecting viewing all operands 189 all variables and I O 188 PAC Control User s Guide KAE 414 another window or chart 57 bill of materials 190 191 chart 183 chart instructions 241 communication handle variable 230 message queue 103 numeric table variable 233 numeric variable 230 PID loop 146 pointer table variable 235 pointer variable 232 string table changing numeric table 233 string variable 230 subroutine 358 warning copy compile warnings 167 PAC Control User s Guide viewing 103 watch window creating 157 docking 59 159 monitoring pointer variable 232 monitoring table variable 233 235 monitoring variable 230 opening 158 while loop 322 338 Windows permissions 369 X XVAL 284 Z zooming in or out 60 z order changing 211
139. A without error checking might look like this As you can see PAC R A uses the Set I O Unit Scratch Pad Peer ERE Scratch Pad command to write the data from Lb ono xo 4 o Oboe eae xo Wm xod its own table to its own memory map Ce ee LECHE RON M PAC_R_A also reads data from PAC R B s Jozana P a memory map and places it in table B_Data m HB ee gt tlnstructions Scra h_Pad_ Peer Write Data to Scratch Pad Set 1 0 Unit Scratch Pad Integer 32 Table VO Unit PAC_R_A ue Supe uou duds Length 600 Bee To Index 9 From Index 9 From Table A Shared Data b Put Status in Scratch Pad status Previous Block structions Scratch Pad Peer Read PAC R B data Get 1 0 Unit Scratch Pad Integer 32 Table VO Unit PACRB ins Length 600 A similar flowchart would be in TERRIA i PAC_R_B s strategy to handle To Index 0 slete ae To Table B Data writing to its own Scratch Pad Pac tidie Dias mm area and reading from PAC R A PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Logical Commands The following commands perform logical functions AND AND Bit AND Bit AND Bit Clear Bit NOT Bit NOT Bit Off in Numeric Table Element Bit Off Bit On in Numeric Table Element Bit On Bit OR Bit OR Bit Rotate Bit Set Bit Shift Bit Test Bit XOR Bit XOR Equal to Numeric Table Element Equal Get High Bits of Integer 64 Get
140. AC Control or in PAC Manager IMPORTANT For E1 and E2 I O units you must use PAC Manager See form 1576 Technical Note I O Configuration for E1 and E2 Brain Boards for instructions For mistic I O units PAC Manager cannot be used for configuration Use PAC Control For most I O units if you are already in PAC Control configuration is easier there and you can use the loopback IP address for SNAP PAC R series I O units controlling themselves However some functions for I O units cannot be configured in PAC Control If you use PAC Manager you can save your configuration to a file load it to multiple I O units at once and use it for referencing points in OPC However you cannot use the loopback address in PAC Manager and you cannot use PAC Manager for mistic I O units Choose your configuration tool based on what you need to do You have only one I O unit or I O unit You have multiple I O units whose configurations are different configurations are exactly the same or similar You are configuring mistic I O units You are configuring an E1 or E2 I O unit The strategy will run on SNAP PAC R series or You are using a modem connection PPP or I O units that are controlling themselves using SNMP the loopback IP address 127 0 0 1 You are using event messages or email You are using an Ethernet network for Youare configuring events and reactions on the communications or using a SNAP PAC I O unit in addition to strateg
141. AP SCM Serial Device Communication Handle value tcp 127 0 0 1 22507 Ortcp 10 192 59 45 22507 l Il IP xdi Port number NOTE For port number information see Establish an Ethernet Connection in Opto 22 form 1191 the SNAP Serial Communication Module User s Guide To a Serial Module on a Different Rack SNAP R series I O SNAP EB series I O IP address 10 192 59 45 IP address 10 192 59 62 Serial Device mm Ethernet network zd 7 7 SS 4 7 snap scm N ta v iss ea port 22507 VA qo qo Communication Handle value tcp 10 192 59 62 22507 L Ip TW Portnumber NOTE For port number information see Establish an Ethernet Connection in Opto 22 form 1191 the SNAP Serial Communication Module User s Guide Using Flowcharts to Control TCP IP Communication When a control engine is communicating with another device using TCP IP it runs a PAC Control flowchart or charts to control communication e For outgoing communication on controller COM ports and serial modules the flowchart uses the command Open Outgoing Communication to request a connection e For incoming communication on controller COM ports which is requested by another device the flowchart must first use Listen for Incoming Communication and then use Accept Incoming Communication to establish a connection e For incoming communication on serial modules which is requested by another device the flowchart use
142. Block Line Object Time Date 4 Info Device has powered up Powerup clear e system _INIT_ N A N Mixed_l 15 02 03 09 05 07 35 Warning 1 0 point mismatch a configured point doe lt system INIT_ N N aoOven 15 02 03 09 05 07 35 Warning 1 0 point mismatch a configured point doe lt system INIT N N A aoConv 15 02 03 09 05 07 INIT_ N N A ai0ven 15 02 03 09 05 07 700 Warning PID Loop 0 has been configured outside of system _INIT_ N A N Mixed 15 02 03 09 05 07 13 Error Overflow error Dough_Chip_Co 17 N nul 15 02 21 09 05 07 0 1 2 3 35 Warming 1 0 point mismatch a configured point doe system 4 5 B 13 Error Overflow error Dough Chip Co 17 N A null 15 02 21 09 05 07 Number of messages 12 This queue shows several types of messages that you might see To see all the information in a column drag the edge of the column heading to the right Code Queue errors generated by the system are shown as negative numbers in the Code column For example if you specify a table index that is greater than the number of elements in the table an error 12 Invalid table index appears as in message 3 above Common queue errors for each command are listed in the PAC Control Command Reference and in online help If the Code column indicates User the error is one you have placed in the queue using the command Add Message to Queue User messages can help
143. Command d Find Conditions Insert Conditions Command pe Replace Variables Insert Conditions Command Toggle Bookmark 4 Test Compile Test Compile Clear All Bookmarks amp Cut 0 Next Bookmark Copy d Previous Bookmark E Paste a b Toggle Whitespace e Undo iE Increase Indent Cx Redo E Decrease Indent Begin typing OptoScript code in the top area You ll notice that what you type is automatically color coded to help you Blue operators and control structures Purple values Green comments bBlack commands and names of variables I O points charts and other items Red string literals If you want to see white space marks to help line up code click the Toggle Whitespace button in the toolbar To hide the marks click the button again To use a command place your cursor in the OptoScript code where you want the command to appear Click the Insert Actions or Conditions button in the toolbar PAC Control User s Guide 341 USING THE OPTOSCRIPT EDITOR I Select Instruction Groups Instructions Chart 3 Communication Control Engine Deprecated Digital Point Error Handling 1 0 Unit 1 0 Unit Event Message 170 Unit Memory Map 170 Unit Scratch Pad Logical Mathematical Miscellaneous PID Ethernet CalcSet amp nalogG ain CalcSetAnalogD ffset GetAnalogMaxValue GetAnalogMinValue GetAnalogT otalizerValue BetClear amp nalogM as alue
144. D appears in the Configure PID Loops dialog box When you have finished configuring PIDs click Close PIDs appear in the Strategy Tree under the I O unit Master Temperature Control C3 Control Engines Subroutines Included Charts variables po units x GOI Mixed IO Unit E B Sprinkler B He om Sprinklers Hj wp Sprinkler_Control v dL Next PAC Control User s Guide PID loops CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O Add PID Loop Dialog Box Add PID Loop A Name B Description Cc Input 1 0 Point v C Square Root E Low Range 0 High Range 10 F Setpoint 140 Point G Output 1 0 Point v H Lower Clamp 0 Upper Clamp p l Min Change 0 Max Change 0 0 disables min max change Output options for when the input is out of range C Switch to manual mode when input goes out of range J EM C Force output when input is out of range auto mode only K Algorithm Velocity Type B Gain Fd Fwd Initial L Mode Auto v Tune I Fd Fwd Gain M Scan Rate 1 sec Tune D Enable communication A Name Type a unique descriptive name for the PID The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores spaces are converted to underscores B Description Optional Enter a description of the PID C lInput Select the type of input I O Point
145. DstStrTblBody Return body data dest string table DstStrTblHdr Return header data dest string table E HTTP SrcStrTblBody Source body data string table may be empty F 1 0 for non secure lt gt 0 for SSL strCmd URL nHttpStatus Status returned by HTTP server nPortSSL Port to which you want to connect StrURL Address numeric or www google com etc lt atts r A MoveToStrTableElements These lines ensure that the tables are empty B Web address The text string used for argument 7 For example www google com C Sub page A forward slash indicates the root level D Port number 80 is the standard port if you want to retrieve HTTP content 443 is the standard port if you want to retrieve HTTPS content E Timeouts Use element 0 of the table for Argument 2 to change the timeouts for transmitting receiving and connecting For details see Setting Timeouts for the HTTP Get and HTTP Post from String Table Commands on page 279 F Security mode Use 0 to retrieve non secure connection HTTP content Use a number other than zero such as 1 to retrieve secure HTTPS content 10 Click Debug and then click Run Strategy 278 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS 11 Double click the DstStrTbIBody table to see whether the webpage content was retrieved If content was retrieved you will see html code Ke bIBody sca Name DstStrTblBody In
146. E Name Drop Chips Drop Dough Speed OK Start Start Conv Type Continue Action Action Condition Action ptoScript 2 Double click the block you want or click it once and click OK The chart or subroutine is redrawn with the selected block in the center of the window Changing Column Width in a Dialog Box Many dialog boxes include several columns of information To see all the data in some columns you may need to make columns wider e lo widen or narrow a column click the right edge of the column label and drag it horizontally 1 Configure 1 0 Units Name Mixed_ Type SNAP Port Ether Address atc Enabled RefC 127 0 Disabled Enabled Descii Click and drag 120 Points PID Loops Event Reaction Toresize a column to the exact width of its longest entry double click the line that separates the column from the one on its right Sorting Data in a Dialog Box In some dialog boxes with columns of data you can sort the information in the way you want to see it The Center On Block dialog box provides an example The blocks in this dialog box normally appear in alphabetical order by the block name PAC Control User s Guide WINDOWS AND DIALOG BOXES IN PAC CONTROL Center On Block Block Id Name Type Back to Continue Drop Chips Action Drop Dough Action SpeedOK Condition Start Action Start Conv OptoScript
147. Expressions Operators and Conditions The real power of OptoScript can be seen in complex operations bee POU we ee TENURE S This portion of a sprinkler eae ea EE control system uses aD w standard PAC Control blocks GEMES CERIS Ma A d I a a and commands to control bd does watering of grass and trees EG The OptoScript version of Grass Trees Control handles the loops conditions and operator easily in a single block 1 OptoScript Sprinkler_Control Grass Trees Control Actions Conditions f Variables TestComile 2 lt gt 0 gtk 4M A ab oc OptoScript Code 4 Sets Grass and Trees sprinklers to run on Tuesdays and Fridays as long as it s not raining if GetDayOfWeek 2 or GetDayOfWeek 5 and Humidity lt 98 then if Max Temp gt 80 or Max Temp Yesterday Temp 10 then Grass 1 DelaySec 1200 Water grass for 20 mins Grass D else Grass 1 DelaySec 600 Water grass for 10 mins Grass 0 endif while Soil_Moisture lt 30 Trees 1 Water trees wend else DelaySec 3600 77 Wait one hour before checking the day again endif ieu i Generally speaking the more complex the combination of math expressions logical and comparison operators loops and conditions the more convenient it is to use OptoScript code rather than standard blocks and commands PAC Control Us
148. For more information see Associating the Control Engine with Your Strategy on page 93 2 Create a numeric variable and a string variable as follows For more information see Adding Variables on page 221 nResult Integer32 3 Create a string variable as follows CRLF 256 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS 4 Create the following string tables For more information see Adding Tables on page 224 arrstrAttach 10 256 arrstrBody 100 1024 arrstrRecipients 10 256 arrstrServer 10 256 5 To the Powerup chart add an Action Block followed by two OptoScript Blocks and then one more Action Block First Init Tables Action Start Second Init Tables OptoScript Contains the email body Third SMTP Send OptoScript Sends the email and attachments Fourth End Action End 6 Connect the blocks starting with the first Action Block Init Tables contains the email body SMTP Send sends the email and attachments 7 Add code to the InitTables OptoScript Block This block creates the contents of the string tables which includes server information a recipient list the body of the email and a list of attached files The first line in the block defines CRLF as a carriage return linefeed combination chr 13 chr 10 which starts a new line in the email body Defining this value allows you to use CRLF instead of having to spell out th
149. Fthernet port numbers refer to www iana org assignments port numbers IMPORTANT If you are using TCP IP connections consult commercially available texts on TCP IP that discuss client server architectures so you ll understand how the protocol works and what to expect during communication PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Using the Control Engine s File System The memory available for file storage is about 4 MB on a PAC S series controller or 2 MB on a PAC R series controller File storage on a SoftPAC controller is limited only by the size of your hard drive and the volumes available on your network Any types of files can be stored there and files can be sorted into directories or folders just as they can on a PC These stored files are then available for use for example the control engine can read them add data to them and even send data from them via FTP to another device on the network SNAP PAC controllers also allow you to store data or files using a microSD card For more information about using a microSD card see the user s guide for the controller NOTE Certain FTP commands may also be useful when dealing with files even if the files are all local For example the dir command is available with comm handles The file communication handle is used to create write to and read from stored files on the control engine The format for the handles value is ile open mode gt lt filename gt
150. GetClear nalogMin alue GetClearAnalogT otalizer alue Ramp nalog0utput Set4nalogFilterW eight SetAnalogGain Set4nalogLoadCellF astS ettleL evel Set4nalogLoadCellFilterw eight Set amp nalog ffset SetAnalogT otalizerR ate Pointers Y SetAnaloaT poPeriod Include parameter helps 4 In the Select Instruction dialog box select the command group from the left hand column and then select the command name from the right hand column For information on any command highlight it and click Command Help or just double click the command name NOTE Ifyou know the command name you can just type it into the OptoScript code Remember that OptoScript command names may be different from standard PAC Control commands See E OptoScript Language Reference for more information 5 To include information about the instruction in the OptoScript code select Include parameter helps 6 Click OK The command appears in the OptoScript code 7 To use a variable table I O unit or point chart counter timer or similar item place your cursor where you want the item to appear in the code If you know the item s exact name enter it and skip to step 8 If you re not sure of the item s name click the Variables in the toolbar 342 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT Select Variable Type Name All Valid Types All Valid Types Analog Input Analog Output Chart Communication Han
151. H I O In this example an integral constant of 0 1 corrected the offset error Plot 1 0 Details Misc Details VAL Velocity Algorithm Type B The far left side of the plot shows the offset before an integral constant of 0 1 was applied This setting eliminated heoffset In many applications a minor fluctuation around the setpoint is acceptable and hese applications use gain and integral only In some applications however the fluctuations at the setpoint indicate that the gain is too high too much gain makes a System unstable or that a derivative constant is required 10 If derivative correction is needed experiment with the derivative constant in the Tune D field type 1 and click Apply Your PID loop may require a larger number In this example a derivative of 10 makes a noticeable difference in keeping the input near the setpoint PAC Control User s Guide 155 INSPECTING AND TUNING PID LOOPS Many PID systems are effectively controlled with gain and integral constants only and no derivative constant In this example the gain and integral settings are maintaining the temperature at 0 06 from setpoint To demonstrate the effect of the derivative constant the resolution of the input axis was increased to show a 1 percent span At this resolution the plot reveals changes of 0 01 degrees F The left side of the plot shows the effect of gain at 30 int
152. HEMATICAL COMMANDS 296 Opto 22 s SNAP PAC System uses IEEE single precision floats which have 32 binary digits bits The IEEE 754 32 bit float format is as follows 1 bit 8 bits 23 bits X XXXXXXXX X0000000000000000000000 Sign Exponent Significand Float calculation 1 99 x 1 Significand 223 x 2 xponent 127 While this is an excellent standard for the purpose it has limitations that could cause issues if you re not aware of them Squeezing infinitely many real numbers into a finite number of bits requires an approximate representation Most floats cannot be exactly represented using this fixed number of bits in a 32 bit IEEE float Because of this rounding error is inherent in floating point computation In PAC Control and in PAC Manager and the OptoMMP protocol a float is a 32 bit IEEE single precision number ranging from 3 402824 x 10 to 3 402824 x 1099 These single precision floats give rounding errors of less than one part per million 1 PPM You can determine the limit of the rounding error for a particular float value by dividing the value by 1 000 000 This format guarantees about six and a half significant digits Therefore mathematical actions involving floats with seven or more significant digits may incur errors after the sixth significant digit For example if the mn 555444333 is converted to a float the conversion yields 5 554444 8 note the error in the 7 digit Also converting 5 554444e back
153. I EE dV PUER 77 IIS EFUCTIONIEXAIMIDIES 5 usi uet Cope ex ete re e cuti e bre ee ded da rend oe 79 Creating Messages to Display On Screen 00 2 cece cece teen rreren 79 ifs inel tkvdas saved dale dda dened addin A etna wd danadindlsadas cad 80 Sonne P T 80 Using a Count Variable for Repetitive Actions 0 ccc eceeee cece ee eeenneneeees 81 Programming Case Statements 0s rewire tretit i i RIVER Pr ae Rs 82 SEMIS ME cemwbeee tame dau damm bhaen sen E EA dane A den 83 Usinga Flag LOCK iic rot epe boned ie dehy DO DP be UE hup CR tele 83 Flag Lock Timeout Valles cete vtero etr heb amie Rb Rete Ptr teh ens 85 POINTERS ANG Inaexilig essesebercpb dere pepe b rqe bb tre HH Deeper remp dd Maem ep bra 85 Without Pointe Sne ti eter epic equ T EE COUROL ER ded RE 85 With Pointers and Indexing sisse pirne oniu erpiar eens 86 USING OptoSCrIpE eseina tacoma eie exco aet Levit eem wea 87 Optimizing Throdghput ss zo este Goad Goa ag Cand Ub he Au M b ds 87 Chapter 5 Working with Control Engines ccccee cece cece nn 89 guirorelrai ON RERO LETT 89 TOR ATROCI 89 Configuring Control ENGINES aisea der rb Gael ERROR e DI ORIPD S UrR ND UE 89 Defining a Control Engine on Your PC iiis 90 Control Engine Configuration Dialog Box 0 0 0 e eee 92 Associating the Control Engine with Your Strategy sss 93 Using Network Segmenting in PAC Control 0 cece cece eee eet nena 93 PAC Control User s Guid
154. I O Unit Disable Communication to PID Loop Disable Communication to Point Enable Communication to All I O Points Enable Communication to All I O Units Enable Communication to I O Unit Enable Communication to Mistic PID Loop Enable Communication to PID Loop Enable Communication to Point I O Point Communication Enabled 1 0 Unit Communication Enabled IVAL Set Analog Max Value IVAL Set Analog Min Value IVAL Set Analog Point IVAL Set Counter IVAL Set I O Unit from MOMO Masks IVAL Set Off Latch IVAL Set Off Pulse IVAL Set On Latch IVAL Set On Pulse IVAL Set TPO Percent IVAL Set TPO Period IVAL Turn Off IVAL Turn On PID Loop Communication Enabled 1 PAC Control Professional only The Disable commands disconnect the strategy from the real world device so that it can be tested without affecting field devices While the real world devices are disabled or if they don t exist the IVAL commands can be used for testing and simulation For details on individual commands see the PAC Control Command Reference or online Help PAC Control User s Guide STRING COMMANDS String Commands The following commands are used with strings Append Character to String Append String to String Compare Strings Convert Float to String Convert Hex String to Number Convert IEEE Hex String to Number Convert Integer 32 to IP Address String Convert IP Address String to Integer 32 Convert Number to Formatted Hex String C
155. ID output PID Setpoint Analog Input Output Output M Scan Rate Enter a scan rate to determine how often the input is scanned and the controller output is calculated Minimum value is 0 001 1 ms Scan time should be greater than system lag the time it takes for the controller output to have a measurable effect on the system Also consider other PIDs and tasks on the brain competing for processing power N Gain Type a positive or negative value for Gain Heating systems usually require a negative value and cooling systems a positive value NOTE Gain is usually refined during the tuning process O Fd Fwd Initial Fd Fwd Gain Optional Enter Feed forward Initial and Feed forward gain values if you need to offset the controller output in your application These values are constants that are multiplied and added to the controller output often they are not used in PIDs P Tune l Tune D Optional Type Integral and Derivative settings if you know the desirable settings However Integral and Derivative are not essential to basic configuration and are better determined in the tuning process Changing a PID Loop You can change the PID loop s configuration and its position in the I O unit 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree expand the I O Units folder until you see the PIDs folder for the I O unit you want Double click the PIDs folder The Configure PID Loops dialog box op
156. ING I O IN DEBUG MODE A diDoughLevelSwitch scanning Name diDoughLevelS witch Type Digital Input More Info IMAL State On Latch Off Latch Communication 1 0 Unit Enabled E Open Parent Plot lt lt E Data gt TimeAxis _ Include VAL The Data button allows you to save copy or print the current plot Use the Time Axis button to adjust the resolution Click Include IVAL to see a concurrent plot of the IVAL Inspecting Analog I O Points You can review an analog point s data modify its status or set its internal values or external values in Debug mode To monitor the point in a watch window see page 157 To change th these steps 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click the I O point on the S double click an I O unit in the Strategy Tree click the Points Compact tab of Unit dialog box and then double click the I O point e point follow trategy Tree Or the Inspect I O The small dialog box that appears shows the IVAL and XVAL as well as the unit S The XVAL or external value is the real or hardware value as seen by the I O unit This value is external to the control engine The VAL or internal value is a logical or software copy of the XVAL that is in the control engine The IVAL may or may not be current since it is updated to match the XVAL only when a strategy in the control engine reads or writes to an I O point 3 PID Inp
157. ING OPTOSCRIPT OptoScript String Handler Build amp send request x 9 Actions 4 Conditions Variables ES Test Compile BS A c ae OptoScript Code Request hin String Handler ap gt In OptoScript code several strings and variables can be combined to build the request in one line In OptoScript code the commands used to parse the response take up less space so they all can be seen at once Hpt String Handler Receive amp parse response gt Actions Conditions C Variables Test Compile X FR c 15 OptoScript Code ReceiveStringViaSerialPort Response 1 GetSubstring Response 1 1 Classification GetSubstring Response 2 2 Model GetSubstring Response 2 3 Model Temp Model Model Temp Model Number StringToInt32 Model v lt gt 3 Shorteuts 100 v Ds To o Chart PAC Control User s Guide 321 WHEN TO USE OPTOSCRIPT 322 For Complex Loops Strategies that use complex loops for example to repeat an operation while a condition remains true are easier to create and take up less space in a flowchart when done in OptoScript While loops repeat loops and for loops are all available e While loops repeat a process while a test is true the test comes at the beginning of the process e Repeat loops repeat a process until a test is false the test comes at the e
158. M Move I O Unit to Numeric Table 1 PAC Control Professional only CAUTION Write O Unit Configuration to EEPROM is not the recommended method for saving configuration to flash memory If it is used too often or is in a loop within a strategy flash memory can literally wear out Instead of using this command in the strategy it is better to store configurations to flash manually using either PAC Manager see the PAC Manager User s Guide for instructions or PAC Control in Debug mode see Inspecting I O Units and Saving Settings to Flash on page 140 Commands for Ethernet Link Redundancy The three target address commands Get Target Address State Set Target Address State and Set All Target Address States are used to manually change the path of communication between the controller and the I O unit s based on the IP address used for the I O unit These commands let you switch communication from a primary to a secondary IP address or vice versa or enable or disable communication to the primary or secondary address Ethernet link redundancy to I O units is available only in PAC Control Professional The secondary IP address for an I O unit may be for the second Ethernet network interface on a SNAP PAC R series controller or it may be for a separate I O unit If it is a separate unit the primary and secondary I O units must be the same type for example SNAP PAC EB1 and have exactly the same points because they are configured toget
159. Most standard digital inputs can be used as counters to count the number of times the input changes from off to on The availability of counters depends on the brain s capabilities and the speed of counters depends on the module For information on brain capabilities see form 1689 the SNAP PAC Brains Data Sheet EJ PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY For more information on module counting speed see the module s specifications on the Opto 22 website www Opto22 com On the website select Products gt SNAP PAC System gt Brains and I O gt Digital I O NOTE You can use counters on high density modules with SNAP PAC R1 controllers and SNAP PAC EB1 and SNAP PAC SB1 brains with firmware 8 1 or newer Before using a counter you must configure the point as a counter See Adding a Digital O Point on page 122 or use PAC Manager Counters on Ethernet and SNAP PAC I O units do not need to be started and they cannot be stopped Therefore do not use the Start Counter and Stop Counter commands with SNAP PAC I O units However you can use Get Counter and Get amp Clear Counter Using a Count Variable for Repetitive Actions A numeric variable for counting is useful when the same action needs to be repeated a specific number of times For example suppose your process includes filling a packing box with a dozen bags of cookies You can use a count variable to track how many bags are dropped into the box Here
160. NA S kerensia pibe orte rca tes pee wade idarntuld adams Db tomen 305 String COMMANGS sequ ot tr edere cues eC ureters pO edi bd espe edat rie dee 306 ESTIS SIGS cate REESE RP ERR REPRE 306 String Men gth and WAGs oido cutd ira tte bodies Eae urbe adito eui a cea 307 Using Numeric Tables as an Alternative to Strings 307 Strings and Multitasking 2 cbe hes wave reed e pe ea EE dee Meee cde Eden ds 307 Adding Control Characters to a String 2 0 0 cece ccc ccc cece nec e e 308 Sample String Vatiable i ec enraiar d ve TENE edd taa Du Cb vu UM 308 Sample String Table eared Ue tot IRR EN UTER RUE n GUM ee e EE 308 String Data Extraction Examples 4 etie ve er ee hr Or ee oed 309 Find Substring in String Example 1 0 2 2 cece ence e eens 309 Find Substring in String Example 2 2 2 2 2 cece eect teeta es 309 String Building EXamMple cse oot P RRIOEPUURPIe ED OD UU Er ed 310 Move SUING uc ce eene it onerehst bea er eve dee IRE Ur DURER P qu ERU d 310 Append Character tO String cese ze rero ee reete ede tien 310 Append String to STING sese ecu cem eh vise ger rele SOUS RP et 310 Append Characterto String ies neo Pepe UI e OH Rit be bine UR Pla s 310 Comparison to Visual Basic and C sersrississiaki cerere iesin annia tan ee 311 Convert to Stririg COMMANGS areire p tE weeded edet iuda 312 Da P enteiching dp EE E CT EE OCE ET EE OEE 313 Time Date COMMANGS rasons nanoen ove aed Od ve dut ette tg veda UR Wedd Hate qa 314 Timi
161. NG INITIAL VALUES IN VARIABLES AND TABLES DURING STRATEGY DOWNLOAD Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables During Strategy Download 226 When you are adding table variables in PAC Control you can set all table elements to one initial value in the Add Variables dialog box If you want to set each individual table element to its own value however you need to create an initialization file and download it with your PAC Control strategy In addition to setting initial values for table elements sometimes it is easier to initialize all variables during strategy download using an initialization file This section shows you how to create an initialization file and download it with your strategy Creating the Initialization File A sample initialization file INIT TXT is included with PAC Control You can open this file with a text editor to see the proper syntax for each initialization entry and then modify it as necessary for your strategy IMPORTANT Every initialization file should include the following line near the top X DOWNLOAD COMPRESSION OFF Make sure to enter a backslash and a space at the beginning of the line Download compression removes the newlines necessary for string initialization This line tells PAC Control to turn off download compression so strings can be initialized IMPORTANT Each file must end with a carriage return so that the last line in the file is blank and each line within the file must end
162. NTE 50 OULDUC POINT iecit te e prend ouatniia ve socie ex d te vacui ur bue qi rur gane 50 ejes PEUT MM PACEM 50 unico Ee p DIU 51 variables ae leeena ai nini a AEE A a a I I e e esee 51 PAG Control Main MID dOoWs oci e cored iota n E E A EET 52 IRURE 53 lC M awa 53 loser ce EMT 53 Mode Selection ToOlDal 2 oo ts ressorts Hameed kiitan avt dis game 54 Configure Mode and Online Mode Toolbar 0 cece cece cece e eect eens 54 Depug Mode Tool bai merri 9 ero eletto eee eh oreet oo meade sagas ahh Fede 55 QIEIG AIC D 55 Windows and Dialog Boxes in PAC Control 2 2 e tenet e es 57 Using Tabs to View Open Windows sss 57 BIere ore Mad are o IDEE IIT PT 59 Zooming in a Chart or Subroutine Window iissssssssssssss eee n neces 60 Panning a halt aeaa oconesaedis vea etre asian d Vtde aia RA RA a Veste ER adt 61 Redrawing a Chart or Subroutine Window sss 62 Changing Column Width in a Dialog Box 0 2 eee cece teen cece ees 63 soning Data in Dialog BOX sc ds ceva breue tie id REP de Gan Side dus OS donc dai dea tds 63 PAC Control User s Guide Customizing PAC Control for Your Needs i i cireres eeror cerecos DUCERE Ere 65 Setting Decimal Binary or Hex Display Mode ssssssssssssssee 65 Setting Hex String VIEW eens cede rere ect con DH e e POP E DRE POP tb eR 65 Setting Up Applications to Launch from PAC Control 0 00
163. O Point 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode double click the I O Units folder not the individual unit s icon on the Strategy Tree PAC Control User s Guide 125 ADDING 1 0 POINTS 2 In the Configure I O Units dialog box highlight the I O unit the points are on and click I O Points The Configure I O Points dialog box appears Go 3 Pro only If you are using a non SNAP I O unit not including the B3000 double click the channel you want to use Skip to step 8 4 If you are using a SNAP I O unit including the B3000 notice the module icons in the Configure I O Points dialog box 1 Configure 1 0 Points DEAR 120 Unit Sprinkler Control SNAP PAC R1 Modules and Points Features Subty Add td 00 SNAP IDC5D 2 5 28 VDC Digital Input 7 Modify Delete v a gt NOTE In this example a digital module has already been added in position zero This example shows a SNAP PAC I O unit so both digital and analog modules can be configured on the same rack 5 Highlight the number of the analog module s position on the rack then click Add 126 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O tAdd Module Type Digital Input Digital Output Analog Input Analog Output Module Part Channels Type s DE SNAP ADA 3 1 4 20 m DESNAPADA346 1 4 20 m M SNAP AOV 5 1 0 10 DC ab SNAP ADV 7 1 30 10 VDC DM SNAP 0A 23 2 4 20m DR SNAP ADA 2345RC 2 4 20m
164. O Points Before you add an individual I O point such as a sensor or a switch you must add the I O unit the point is on See Adding an I O Unit on page 116 Adding a Digital I O Point 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode double click the I O Units folder not the individual unit s icon on the Strategy Tree The Configure I O Units dialog box appears I Configure 1 0 Units Address Watc Enabled RefC Add SNAP PAC R1 Ethem 127 0 Disabled Enabled 0 Sprinkler SNAP PAC R2 Ethem 10 123 Disabled Enabled 0 Modify 1 0 Points PID Loops 2 Highlight the I O unit the points are on and click I O Points The Configure I O Points dialog box appears 3 Ifyou are using a G4EB2 or other non SNAP 1 0 unit not including the B3000 double click the point you want to use Skip to step 10 4 Ifyou are using a SNAP I O unit including the B3000 notice the module icons in the dialog box I Configure 1 0 Points DER 1 0 Unit Sprinkler Control Type SNAP PAC R1 Modules and Points Features Subty Module icons IT 122 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O NOTE This example shows a SNAP PAC I O unit so both digital and analog modules can be configured on the same rack Highlight the number that represents the module s position on the rack then click Add A list of available modules appears tAdd Module ut OO Digital
165. OE E nb bb enini 338 Repeat LOOPS M 339 FOMMOODS sisirin eeni tiiri iienaa EE ETE E Vanes haa O E E es 339 Using the OptoScript EOILOT sce e bier ete e det a a a a 340 Troubleshooting Unable To Find Errors 344 Troubleshooting Syntax EMOMS ies iue cies ce t ee aio dak chm PR ERR i RARE amet 345 Debugging Strategies with OptoScript 0 6 ccc t EREE 346 Chapter 12 Using Subroutines 5cili rrr ehe RR RR he ePTR E E Ee ESS 347 IMTOCUCTION LL 347 In TAIS Chapter ssec seater DR O CEE ex COR pese hdc ber ta a as 347 About Subroutines oi ove to te ote QU ede teh Qs eap Data qoe qr dut e hib va 347 D t Typ s f r SuBr tines 4 5nd nnn ny PO Mon UR wd UMOR GR ans 348 Creating SUBLOUTINGS 2x sseeolisd reddes RUPTA PDA d E Edd eue delp ise dodi ud 348 TIPS TOF SUDTOLLITIQS sise bees PDF PIED aereo epe drepurb o epe eH egt pp 348 Drawing the Flowchart csi cased x at e chron e Ob pee ade ie xe edis e 349 Configuring Subroutine Parameters scuro S URP EE PINE PEE OR AERORX E HERR UG 350 Configured Parameters Example sisse 353 Adding Commands and Local Variables sss 354 Compiling and Saving the Subroutine 0 0 2 2 0c cece cece eee eee eens 355 USING SUBIOUTINGS aces 1 c hee Shas whe did dae PAs oid bare ToS Dado endi d ds 355 PAC Control User s Guide Including a Subroutine in a Strategy 2 0 6 eee eee cece cece eect eee ionini 355 Adding a Subroutine Instruction ccc cece scot
166. ONTROL HA Float Table PID Loop T ID E r mu Pointer Variable Windows and Dialog Boxes in PAC Control Windows and dialog boxes in PAC Control follow Microsoft Windows standards You can minimize maximize move resize and tile them as needed See your Microsoft Windows documentation for information on how to do these things The following topics describe other useful features in PAC Control Using Tabs to View Open Windows on page 57 Docking Windows on page 59 Zooming in a Chart or Subroutine Window on page 60 Redrawing a Chart or Subroutine Window on page 62 Changing Column Width in a Dialog Box on page 63 Sorting Data in a Dialog Box on page 63 Using Tabs to View Open Windows When multiple windows are open especially if they are maximized it can be difficult to know where you are and windows can become lost behind each other However you can click the tabs at the bottom of the main PAC Control window to move among chart windows subroutine windows watch windows and blocks you may be stepping through for debugging PAC Control User s Guide WINDOWS AND DIALOG BOXES IN PAC CONTROL IPAC Control Professional Dough_Chip_Control BAR 1 File Edit ControlEngine Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help m 44 Cookies se amp E Control Engines Subroutines Included amp Cj Charts C Variables amp C3 Numeric Variables String Variables
167. P PAC system see form 1688 SNAP PAC System Migration Technical Note For information on how to enable legacy functionality in PAC Control for a specific strategy see Legacy Options on page 196 Document Conventions The following conventions are used in this document e The Pro icon next to text indicates that a feature is available only in PAC Control Professional not in PAC Control Basic e talic typeface indicates emphasis and is used for book titles Example See the PAC Display User Guide for details Names of menus commands dialog boxes fields and buttons are capitalized as they appear in the product Example From the File menu select Print File names appear either in all capital letters or in mixed case depending on the file name itself Example Open the file TEST1 txt Key names appear in small capital letters Example Press SHIFT e Key press combinations are indicated by plus signs between two or more key names For example SHIFT F1 is the result of holding down the shift key then pressing and releasing the F1 key Similarly CTRL ALT DELETE is the result of pressing and holding the CTRL and ALT keys then pressing and releasing the DELETE key e Click means press and release the left mouse button on the referenced item Right click means press and release the right mouse button on the item e Menu commands are referred to with the Menu gt Command convention Fo
168. PAC CONTROL USER S GUIDE PAC CONTROL USER S GUIDE Form 1700 150413 April 2015 OPTO 22 Automation made simple 43044 Business Park Drive Temecula CA 92590 3614 Phone 800 321 OPTO 6786 or 951 695 3000 Fax 800 832 OPTO 6786 or 951 695 2712 www opto22 com Product Support Services 800 TEK OPTO 835 6786 or 951 695 3080 Fax 951 695 3017 Email support opto22 com Web support opto22 com PAC Control User s Guide Form 1700 150413 April 2015 Copyright 2006 2015 Opto 22 All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America The information in this manual has been checked carefully and is believed to be accurate however Opto 22 assumes no esponsibility for possible inaccuracies or omissions Specifications are subject to change without notice Opto 22 warrants all of its products to be free from defects in material or workmanship for 30 months from the manufacturing date code This warranty is limited to the original cost of the unit only and does not cover installation labor or any other contingent costs Opto 22 I O modules and solid state relays with date codes of 1 96 or newer are guaranteed for life This lifetime warranty excludes reed relay SNAP serial communication modules SNAP PID modules and modules that contain mechanical contacts or switches Opto 22 does not warrant any product components or parts not manufactured by Opto 22 for these items the warranty from the original manufacturer ap
169. PAC Control Professional Dough_Chip_Control E File Edit ControlEngine Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help ERNEITTENENE A i 05 50355 Cookies This chart runs amp C3 Cookies continuously once the amp Control Engines program has been started Subroutines Included amp amp Chats 3 E By Alarms Drop the dough a 95 Dough Chip Control E 95 Dough Vessel Pressu co iig Drop the chips E B Oven_Inspection_Conl H B Powerup Variables Numeric Variables ga bStartFlag DL diCookieMotionTir HR 2 Shortcuts v a ji gt v db Next P Prev Doc ked Wa tch nCookie_Counter window Name Type nCookie Counter Integer 32 Variable 74 PAC Control Ready Now we ll trip the latch that signals a bad cookie 9 On the Strategy Tree under the I O Units folder at the bottom of the window expand Mixed IO Unit by clicking the plus sign at the left of the name You see a folder named Points 10 Expand the Points folder to display the digital I O points configured for this I O unit Cookies DER amp C5 Variables amp 1 0 Units amp Hl Mixed IO Unit amp amp Points Points folder TA diDoughLevelSwitch WA diChipLevelSwitch ie dilnspectionPassF ailS wi w diEStop M doDoughPressureContrc Ez doDoughD ispenseValve im doChipDispenseValve im doRejectValve as ao0venT emperatureCor as aoConveyorSpeedContr d ai
170. PID LOOPS Changing a Configured I O Point 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode expand the I O Units folder on the Strategy Tree until you can see the I O point you want to change Double click the I O point name 2 In the Edit Analog Point or Edit Digital Point dialog box make the necessary changes Click OK to save Deleting a Configured I O Point You cannot delete an I O point that is referred to in the strategy CAUTION Be careful when deleting I O points You cannot undo a deletion 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode expand the I O Units folder on the Strategy Tree until you can see the I O point you want to delete 2 Right click the I O point s name and choose Delete from the pop up menu You can also delete an I O point from the Configure I O Points dialog box by highlighting its name and clicking Delete Configuring PID Loops PID loops or simply PIDs are used to drive an input a process variable toward a particular value the setpoint and keep the input very close to that value by controlling an output For example consider temperature control where the input is a measurement of ambient temperature the setpoint is the desired temperature and the output is a heater The PID for this system will use a mathematical formula that controls the output to maintain a desired temperature efficiently adjust to changes in setpoint and compensate for changes in load such as the influx of cold air In this
171. PIOGCeSS 1siu casein mie dh epa e qun a a a ved danngaeadean ea 384 Doug Vessel iu cssscnteexeieteee zeit hehe Un banat Meena eoe Ebr qd 384 CHIP HODDER E EUM 384 SUECIAE EROR a aae a a 384 Inispectiori SLALOM TE E E E E T A ETTE 384 CONVEYOR ratit ayarini Er N a EEE EE EE 384 Emergency StODS Marz sien eise cavreoe serrer Sev OU Iq e D SE TONO E Met 384 Reguifed I O unitis nob qat eee bk ade dre pedea erledigen ie dre e 385 Xo OPO pst ETE 385 Digital 385 Appendix E OptoScript Language Reference 387 E EN e a MEME CE TTL 387 OptoScript Comparison with Standard Programming Languages i issues 387 Funcion ompa ON eers 5e pbi ee bbhpe metr cag Depbten mobi d dus eb ee E 388 Variable COMPaniSON Tsesspbberegereviredzbdeiedupb phuoueeedieames P RRUERPM eU PME 392 Notes to Experienced Programmers isssssssssssssssssssss t tent toorena 392 Variable Database and Other Surprises 0 0 00 ccc cece cece eee n cece nee eeeeees 392 PAC Control s Target Audience 0 cect e tence ene 392 Langdage Syntax osc Sandan dans aiosane Tor Sand dahemaaded hare OP P EU Eve Re dU Palat 393 OptoScript Lexical Reference creien eperera nn Ei emen 394 token Syntax bi EET 394 L iterals atd Nares oirro esc UM peri EE DONREG eR En RR EE td ites 394 Keywords Reserved Words o asco icc baton do etd esrb o itp es ies 395 OpGralOls ceti cie Dada stre obe rp eher ble apices ets n tet 395 COMMEN S 2a ca aside
172. PRINTING SUBROUTINES 360 PAC Control User s Guide A Troubleshooting This appendix provides general tips for resolving problems you may encounter while running PAC Control or communicating with your hardware If you encounter problems with permissions in Windows see page 369 For information about types of errors and lists of error codes see B Errors and Messages Also check troubleshooting information in your controller s user guide See also Opto 22 form 1690 the SNAP PAC Brain User s Guideform 1 How to Begin Troubleshooting You ve built your strategy but now you get errors when you try to download it or it won t run properly How do you begin to figure out what s wrong The problem may be in communication with the control engine in communication between the control engine and I O in a command or in the strategy logic Following are some steps to help you discover the cause 1 Read Any Error Message Box If an error message box appears on the computer running PAC Control it s probably a PAC Control error Here s an example of a PAC Control error message Opto Error Timeout while connecting to device Check hardware connection address power and jumpers Code 10038 2 Check Communication with the Control Engine If there is no error message box or the error indicates that there may be a communication problem check whether the PC running PAC Control is communicating with the control engine
173. Printing Chart or Subroutine Graphics on page 184 Viewing and Printing Strategy or Subroutine Commands on page 187 Viewing and Printing Strategy or Subroutine Elements on page 188 Viewing and Printing a Cross Reference on page 189 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES e Viewing and Printing a Bill of Materials on page 190 e Viewing and Printing I O Point Mappings on page 191 For information on viewing and changing I O units see Inspecting I O in Debug Mode on page 140 For variables see Viewing Variables in Debug Mode on page 230 Viewing Strategy Filename and Path To see an open strategy s filename and path choose File gt Strategy Information A dialog box appears showing the path and filename Viewing an Individual Chart or Subroutine To view an individual chart or subroutine double click its name on the Strategy Tree or choose Chart gt Open or Subroutine gt Open You can open as many of these windows as you need The names of open windows appear on tabs at the bottom of the PAC Control main window Click a tab to bring its window into view Viewing All Charts in a Strategy You can see the status of all charts at once and change a chart s status without having to open it 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Debug mode On the Strategy Tree double click the Charts folder The View Chart Status dialog box appears showing every chart in the strategy 3
174. Professional Here s what is in this user s guide 1 Welcome to PAC Control Information about the guide and how to reach Opto 22 Product Support 2 PAC Control Tutorial A tutorial designed to help you use PAC Control as quickly as possible The chapter leads you through a sample strategy that you can manipulate download and run in Debug mode 3 What Is PAC Control An introduction to PAC Control key terminology and the main windows and toolbars 4 Designing Your Strategy Programming in PAC Control how to get from your real world control problem to a working strategy 5 Working with Control Engines How to configure and communicate with control engines 6 Working with 1 O How to configure and communicate with input output I O units I O points and PID loops 7 Working with Strategies Detailed steps for creating compiling and running strategies 8 Working with Flowcharts Detailed steps for creating and working with the flowcharts that make up your strategy 9 Using Variables and Commands Steps for configuring the seven types of variables you can use in programming communication handle numeric string pointer numeric table string table and pointer table variables Also shows how to use the commands that control the I O and variables you ve configured 10 Programming with Commands mportant tips on using PAC Control commands to accomplish what you want in your strategy 11 Using OptoScrip
175. Receive String Table Send Communication Handle Command Set Communication Handle Value Send Email Send Email with Attachments Set End Of Message Terminator Transfer N Characters Transmit Character Transmit NewLine Transmit Numeric Table Transmit Pointer Table Transmit String Transmit String Table Transmit Receive Mistic I O Hex String Transmit Receive String PAC Control Professional only mistic I O units only Communication Handles A communication handle is a variable in PAC Control that stores the parameters needed to connect to a specific entity the entity may be another device on the network a file located on the control engine or some other thing that stores or transfers data The value of the communication handle variable is a string consisting of the communication parameters separated by colons Typically a communication handle is used to open communication to transmit and receive data and to close communication For example you might use the TCP communication handle to communicate with another device on the network via TCP IP or the FTP communication handle to send data from the brain to a file on a PC In many cases you ll define a communication handle variable and never change it because the same parameters are always needed However in some cases it might be useful to change it For example if you use the same process to send serial data through two different serial communication modules you can use
176. SER Ar dee Ua AT ne E ME 396 OptoScript Grammar Syntax Reference 0 0 00 0 cece cece eee eee eee e 397 WES 64 ci kp Id ad RE tax hs n he hie a 403 PAC Control User s Guide PAC Control User s Guide 1 Welcome to PAC Control Introduction Welcome to PAC Control Opto 225 visual control language for Opto 22 SNAP PAC control systems and the input output I O units that work with them PAC Control makes it easy to write control applications with little or no programming experience If you know how to design a control application and can draw some flowcharts to describe it you already know the basics of PAC Control At the same time PAC Control provides a complete and powerful set of commands as well as the OptoScript programming language to meet your most demanding industrial control needs PAC Control comes in two forms PAC Control Basic and PAC Control Professional e PAC Control Basic is included in the purchase of an Opto 22 SNAP PAC controller and is also available as a free download from our website www opto22 com PAC Control Basic includes both flowchart and OptoScript programming subroutines a graphical debugger and about 400 commands e PAC Control Professional is available for purchase either separately or as part of the complete PAC Project Professional software suite The Professional version of PAC Control adds Ethernet link to controllers and I O units controller level redundancy supports additional
177. SWITOH nee ALARM SWITCH SOLENOID SV aX Xs SOLENOID VALVE 1008 VALVE CONVEYOR OVEN INSPECTION TT TY STATION 102 103 TIC 102 WASTE BIN TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER PAC Control User s Guide 383 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROCESS Description of the Process Dough Vessel The first station in our process is the dough vessel This tank contains a pre made cookie dough mix Dough is dispensed onto the conveyor belt through a valve SV 100B at the bottom of the vessel The dough being somewhat viscous must be kept under low pressure to dispense properly To monitor the pressure we have included a pressure transmitter PT 100 in the vessel Our control engine a SNAP PAC R series I O system maintains the vessel pressure through a plant air valve SV 100A The vessel also includes a level switch LAL 100 to tell us when the dough level is low When it is the process is halted so that an operator can refill the vessel Chip Hopper The chip hopper supplies chocolate chips A chip dispenser valve SV 101 controls the number of chips dropped on each cookie Like the dough vessel this tank also includes a level switch LAL 101 to stop the system when the chip hopper needs refilling Oven After the dough and chips have been dropped onto the conveyor the conveyor sends the cookie into the oven and the oven bakes it Inspectio
178. See Checking Communication with the Control Engine on page 364 PAC Control User s Guide 361 STRATEGY PROBLEMS 3 Check the Message Queue If communication with the control engine is OK check the message queue To open the queue see Inspecting Control Engines and the Queue on page 101 In the List of Common Messages on page 373 look up any errors you find in the queue Errors are listed in numerical order Queue errors may indicate problems with a command or with communication to I O Check the possible causes for help in fixing problems e Forhelp with a command look up details about the command in the PAC Control Command Reference or online help e Forhelp with communication to I O see Resolving Communication Problems on page 365 Many of these suggestions apply to I O as well as to control engines 4 Check Status Codes in Your Strategy If all is well up to this point double check Status Codes in your strategy Status Codes are responses to a command that appear in a variable within your PAC Control strategy or as returned values in OptoScript Your strategy should routinely check status codes and adjust logic as necessary to respond Status codes may indicate problems with a command or communication to I O or they may indicate a problem in the strategy logic See List of Common Messages on page 373 for more information Again look at the possible causes for help in fixing problems 5 Call Product
179. Set Communication Handle Value to switch to the other module Advanced users may also want to use pointers Set Communication Handle Value also allows you to retrieve the communication timeout value for some types of communication handles and you can specify the communication timeout value in seconds Several types of communication handles are available For Ethernet communication For communication with serial modules See page 249 Tem See page 253 PAC Control User s Guide 247 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 248 File For creating a file to be stored on the control engine and reading or writing to a file stored on the control engine S65 PAGO Ai FTP For accessing files on the local file system or another FTP server including transferring files between the two servers Sen Reges Serial For using the RS 232 connectors on a SNAP PAC controller to com municate with serial devices Not used for serial communication See page 266 modules or serial based I O units Adding Communication Handles Using the Add Variable dialog box you can create a communication handle for each of the four types TCP File FTP and Serial mentioned in the previous section For more information on adding variables see Adding Variables on page 221 To add a communication handle 1 In the Strategy Tree under Variables right click Communication Handles then choose Add to open the Add Varia
180. String Width This field varies depending on the variable type 222 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS Table variables only In the Table Length field enter an integer between 1 and 1 000 000 representing the number of elements in the table The greater the number the more memory required to store the table String variables and string tables only In the String Width field enter the maximum number of characters permitted in the string The number must be an integer between one and 1024 The greater the number the more memory required to store the string Pointer variables only From the Pointer to Type drop down list select the type the pointer points to Note that void pointers are not allowed a pointer must point to a specific type Also note that you cannot point a pointer to another pointer PAC Control has only one level of indirection for pointers If you try to point to a pointer PAC Control assigns to the new pointer the address of the object being pointed to E Initialization For all variables except up timers and down timers Select one of the following Initialize on Strategy Run Sets the variable to the initial value F each time the strategy is run either manually from the debugger or automatically via the autorun flag Initialize on Strategy Download Sets the variable to the initial value F only when a strategy is downloaded The variable retains its current value when th
181. TER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS If no root certificate is required for the connection use none for element 4 of the server information table and the connection will not be authenticated If the target mail server doesn t require SSL or TLS the login will succeed However if it requires SSL or TLS the login will fail Most servers require encryption so unless you re using an in house server you ll probably need a root certificate For a Gmail account use these values Server smtp gmail com Port 587 Security t S For a Yahoo Mail account use these values Server smtp mail yahoo com Port 465 Security ssl B Recipients Enter the email address for each recipient Make sure the recipients list contains at least one valid entry C Message Body Flement zero is always the subject line Fach line is entered as a separate string However they will be concatenated in the body of the email The email body starts with element one and continues to the first empty element or the end of the table whichever comes first Note that a blank line is not the same as an empty element D Attachment File Names Files specified in the attachments table must exist on the controller s file system RAM flash or SD card and must include the full directory specification For example if a file is in the root directory just use the filename However if it is in the temp directory of
182. Table to 20 ge ae a A adu for nIndex 0 to 4 step 2 arc C E 7 ntTable nIndex 20 next next Predefined values can be a numeric expression but they are evaluated only at the beginning of the loop For instance the following example will loop 0 to 15 because the upper limit of nSide 3 is evaluated only at the beginning of the loop not each time through the loop nSide 5 for nLength 0 to nSide 3 step 1 nSide 1 next For loops can be nested and can contain other types of statements Each for requires a next at the end Using the OptoScript Editor 340 1 To use the editor create an OptoScript block in the flowchart where you want the code to appear For more information on creating charts and blocks see 8 Working with Flowcharts Double click the OptoScript block to open the editor The editor is similar to the editor for Microsoft Visual Basic You can resize the editor window as needed to see the code 1 OptoScript Oven_Control Block 3 Toolbar Type OptoScript code in this area See results of test compile in this area Actions 4 Conditions C Variables lt lt Test Compile ptoScript Code Column oc _ Cancel Help elp Command Help Help and ne numbers PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT The following tools are provided in the Optoscript toolbar 3 Actions Insert Action
183. That way if one peer goes offline and then comes online you can have the flowchart logic set up to immediately open communication again In some cases however one of the devices may be incapable of requesting communication A serial device such as a barcode reader attached to a serial communication module on a SNAP PAC 1 0 unit is an example The serial device is incapable of requesting Ethernet communication essentially it acts as a slave device and can only wait until it is asked for data For serial devices attached to serial communication modules the control engine needing the serial data must request communication using Open Outgoing Communication For serial devices attached directly to a serial port on a SNAP PAC controller or brain see Using Serial Communication Handles to Communicate with Serial Devices on page 266 Outgoing Communication For outgoing communication communication you request the communication handle5 value is in the format tcp IP address gt lt port gt Note that tcp is all PAC Control User s Guide 249 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS lowercase letters The following table shows examples of communication handles for outgoing communication Communication Handle Value Outgoing Communication Protocol IP Address Port Ethernet TCP to another control engine tcp 10 192 56 185 22004 Ethernet TCP to a serial communication module on another tcp 10 192 54 10 22506 rack Ethernet TCP to a seri
184. UAayIp Anueourubis si e seg pue Disyg ur SJUaWATe s je250 jo sn y E ebenbue je segi efqo spuejiog uo peseg e aBenbuey seg jensiA SHOS UO paseg L 9 ON ojMspue yeelq 4 iid Z 02 21 yess pug z 02 21 pua gnejep 7 0221 Y 3inejop 7 0221 t yeeuq es 43 ese2 yeoJq esie A 02 243 I 0221 Koz A 0c 4 9 NI G3MOTIV LON Z ese5 Z ese 238p T4 Jeeuq X 027 1 yeeJq X 0221 X021 ese Xx 0z21 iL z eseo 1 eased 1 ejlesS eseo IM 1 yous 1 yams 391 PAC Control User s Guide NOTES TO EXPERIENCED PROGRAMMERS Variable Comparison n integer 32 Dim n as Long long n n Integer nn integer 64 Not available LONGLONG d d Int64 f float Dim f as Single float f f Single S string Dim as String char s 128 s ShortString p pointer not available long pn pn Integer nt integer 32 table Dim nt 10 as Long long i 10 nt array 0 9 of Integer ft float 32 table Dim ft 10 as Single float f 10 ft array 0 9 of Single st string table Dim st 10 as String char s 10 128 st array 0 9 of ShortString pt pointer table not available void pt 10 pt array 0 9 of Integer Notes to Experienced Programmers 392 Experienced programmers especially those who are new to PAC Control may be interested in the following notes Variable Database and Other Surprises PAC Control maintains a database of all declar
185. W sawdust reet tnd wed eid Ix pee dab breues dva uda 35 PAC Control User s Guide EE ERES rM 42 Chapter 3 What Is PAC Control lseeeeeeeeeeeee eee ehh hh 43 IMUOQUETION cm 43 inthis CRADLE ch UMS 43 About PAC COnLFOIL a ici UR t eat pecs Renae 43 Control System Example si ect db teeth Ute tank rebote eL OE PARIS 44 General Coritrol Concepts 252 1o edu tais ehe CHE Ux e a Aen d d dde ti bo eR debida tod 45 PUI OM AU OIA sgt etna me STURM MEME MU ed UNE E M 45 Control ENGINES uius ses des o tee eR S E i be debe eati ta re dec ew b d 45 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 00 0 0 cece cece eee teen eee ees 45 SNAP Special Purpose l O Modules cn terere herr teretes 46 Key Feature S scl 46 PAC Control Lenminology sssaaa aa a E A E E AEAN 47 ACHON DIOCK SR 47 SIATE 018110107 a a AAN EE E A A E EO E ETT 47 sos cL 48 yel PM 48 senes des TT 48 COBUUSDIOGK sioe sti sesto Eos M s aa C iss 48 digital POINT dee 48 external value 2 ce eee nee nnn nn ee nn ee ene ceeded nb ens 48 MS RII iuran E A o 0L 10 0501 05 0 0 EMT 48 HjorgeeM 49 instructions Commands 225 ect be ete gia Mahala E e tb a ed ERR dus 49 internal value 2 cee cee ene ee II esa ere 50 multitasking seco der qed ue Due PEDE edad RP RD PERS BEER EN dai dos 50 ejtos dlojnla loro PATE
186. When scan intervals are shorter than the system lag tuning must compensate for any over correction from the controller output Tuning a PID Loop Tuning a PID involves manipulating the P and D constants in real time The following steps should be viewed as general suggestions to show you features that are available for tuning We highly recommend Opto 22 form 1641 OptoTutorial SNAP PAC PID for more detailed information Form 1641 is available for download from our website at www opto22 com CAUTION Before following these procedures make sure you know the limits of the equipment being controlled and monitored by your PID loop Also make sure that these points are configured properly Any values suggested in these steps are for example only and must be modified according to the capabilities and constraints of your system 1 Make sure the following PID features have already been configured Scan Rate Input Input low range and high range Output Output lower and upper clamp Algorithm Setpoint If your setpoint changes during normal operation tune your PID with the setpoint configured to host so you can simulate setpoints from an input point or from another PID Gain A final gain constant will be determined by tuning but before you can tune your PID your gain constant must be either a positive or negative number according to the type of system you have For example a heating system reports a negative error when heat needs
187. above the control engine was unable to communicate with I O unit EIO C The unit s IP address is shown for easy reference Time and Date When the error occurred PAC Control User s Guide 105 ARCHIVING STRATEGIES ON THE CONTROL ENGINE Inspecting Control Engines from the PAC Terminal Utility You can also inspect control engines from the PAC Terminal utility 1 Click the Windows Start menu and select Programs gt Opto22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt Tools gt PAC Terminal The PAC Terminal window appears File Tools Configure View Help Control Engines Controller Name System Type Address 1 Address 2 G re Control Engines Cookie Controller Standard 4127 0 0 1 Lr iQ Add df R1 Controller Standard 4 10 195 55 111 Status Scan amp Scan Al 93 Scan Selected 2 Double click the control engine you want to see or right click it and choose Status from the pop up menu The Inspect Control Engine dialog box appears The dialog box is explained on page 101 Archiving Strategies on the Control Engine 106 Archiving strategies on the control engine provides a backup in case original strategy files on the computer are lost When you archive a strategy to the control engine on an Opto 22 controller a zipped file is saved in battery backed RAM On a SoftPAC controller a zipped file is saved on the PC s hard drive In either case if power to the control engine is lost the archive is still
188. accept the data and close the dialog box 14 In the Add Instruction dialog box click OK The new instruction appears in the Instructions window for Drop Dough PAC Control User s Guide 15 16 17 18 CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL UInstructions Dough_Chip_Control Drop Dough For animation in ioDisplay Move From nCookieMotionPreset To dtCookieMotionTimer Open the dough valve Turn On doDoughDispenseValve Increment a counter of cookies produced Increment Variable nCookie_Counter Keep the dough valve open for 2 seconds Delay Sec a Add Modify Delete Next Block Previous Block But maybe it makes more sense to start the counter at the beginning of the process rather than in the middle after some dough has already been dropped With the Increment Variable command highlighted press the right mouse button and select Cut from the pop up menu You can also use CTRL X to cut Cutting puts the instruction in the Windows Clipboard Now click Turn On to highlight it Click the right mouse button and select Paste from the pop up menu You can also use CTRL V to paste The Increment Variable command is pasted above the highlighted instruction like this l Instructions Dough Chip Control Drop Dough Increment a counter of co Increment Variable nCookie Counter Open the dough valve Turn On doDoughDispenseValve Keep the dough valve open for 2 se
189. ack in the Drop Dough block s Instructions dialog box move your cursor to the bottom right edge of the dialog box When your cursor changes to a bidirectional arrow you can resize this dialog box by clicking and dragging any edge Close the Instructions Dough Chip Control Drop Dough dialog box by clicking Close or by pressing ESC Before we leave the Dough Chip Control chart let s make a cosmetic change We noted earlier that we didn t have any continue blocks in this chart Let s add one to replace the long connection that loops from the Drop Chips block up to the Speed OK block PAC Control User s Guide OPENING A BLOCK 6 Select the connection line by clicking it at a bend or junction point and delete it by pressing DELETE Click the down arrow at the bottom right of the chart window once to scroll down a little 7 Now click the continue block tool in the toolbar When you bring the mouse back into the chart area an oval outline appears representing the new continue block 8 Position the oval about half an inch below the Drop Chips block and click your mouse button once A continue block appears with the default name Block 19 The number on yours may be different If you move the mouse again a new oval outline follows Deactivate the continue block tool by clicking the right mouse button or by pressing ESC Your screen should now look like this The Powerup chart starts this chart This chart runs co
190. ackground Downloading Download Compression None Full Q PAC Control User s Guide 171 COMPILING AND DOWNLOADING 172 6 Optional To have the strategy run automatically after a control engine restarts select Set autorun flag after download 7 Click OK PAC Control is now set to download the strategy in the background when you click the Debug mode button HB Next see Compiling and Downloading on page 166 See also Switching the Strategy on page 169 Downloading Without Using PAC Control If you are creating strategies for users who do not have PAC Control on their systems for example if you are an integrator or OEM you can make a control engine download file that can be downloaded to a SNAP PAC controllerusing either the graphical interface in PAC Terminal or the command line interface with a batch file This one download file is built for a specific control engine but can also be downloaded to other similar control engines It contains everything PAC Control would download including per inc and crn files control engine specific files and initialization information In most cases you will want the downloaded strategy to be saved to flash memory and to start automatically autorun when power is cycled to the control engine Before you create the download file follow the steps in Saving to Flash on Every Download on page 165 Check the boxes to have the strategy saved to flash memory
191. act the two numbers to find out how long the process took You can set the time and date on the control engine by synchronizing it with the PC in PAC Control Debug mode choose this option while viewing the control engine Control Engine gt Inspect You can also use these commands to set the time and date on the control engine Commands with NTP in the name refer to the Network Time Protocol PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Timing Commands The following commands are used for timers and delays in a strategy Timers Stop Timer Continue Timer Timer Expired Down Timer Expired Up Timer Target Time Reached Get amp Restart Timer Pause Timer Delays Set Down Timer Preset Value Delay mSec Set Up Timer Target Value Delay Sec Start Timer Delay Commands Delay commands are used frequently in strategies to pause the logic Here are two reasons to use Delay mSec or Delay Sec e Toallow time for the state of an input to change before it is checked again For example a delay could give an operator time to release a button before the state of the button is rechecked or allow time for an alarm state to change before rechecking e Toleta chart give up the remainder of its time slice when its logic does not need to run constantly For more information on using delays in this way see 1776 Optimizing PAC Project System Performance Using Timers Timers are a special type of numeric va
192. actice to save each initialization file to the directory of the strategy that references it Downloading the Initialization File To use the file you need to download it with your strategy 1 With the strategy open in Configure or Online mode choose Configure gt Control Engines or double click the control engine s name 2 Highlight the control engine and click the Download Options button The Download Options dialog box appears The initialization file must be downloaded immediately after your strategy is downloaded 1 Download Options Files To Download After The Strategy 3 Click Add 4 Navigate to the initialization file you created Double click the file name 228 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS The file appears in the Download Options dialog box Click OK The initialization file sets values for the variables and table elements immediately after your next full strategy download IMPORTANT When you create each variable in the strategy you must check Initialize on Strategy Download in the Add Variable dialog box Since download options are specific to each control engine make sure you set the initialization file as a download option for every control engine on which the strategy will run Because control engines have separate initialization files you can use the same master strategy for two or more control engines and configure differences in variables by
193. address as well as the appropriate Subnet Mask DNS and Gateway for the network For more information on how to do this see form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide e The Send Email commands require you to use an existing email account You might be able to use a corporate email account but check with your network administrator first Your email server must support either AUTH LOGIN or AUTH PLAIN authentication neither AUTH MD5 nor AUTH CRAM MD5 can be used with the Send Email commands Or you can use a free email account such as Gmail or Yahoo Mail If you will be using a corporate email account ask your network administrator for the following information about the email server Outgoing SMTP server name or IP address Port Security type Choices are ssl tls or none SSL Secure Sockets Layer and TLS Transport Layer Security are standard security technologies for establishing an encrypted link between a web server and a browser If no root certificate is required for the connection use none and the connection will not be authenticated If the target mail server doesn t require SSL or TLS the login will succeed However if it requires SSL or TLS the login will fail Most servers require encryption so unless you re using an in house server you ll probably need a root certificate Root certificate if applicable A root certificate which is used to validate an SSL or TLS secure connection may be required for your
194. adecimal For numeric tables you can select Decimal Hexadecimal or Binary 3 To view the configuration information click More Info PAC Control User s Guide 233 VIEWING VARIABLES IN DEBUG MODE 3 1 Days Tabl lt Days_Table scar yY ave x NAME Days Table DESCRIPTION TYPE String Table 7 Name Days Table Index Value 2 Tuesday 3 WVednesday INITIALIZED Run 4 Thursday INITIAL VALUE 5 Friday B Saturday e ino 4 To change a table entry click its index number highlight the value and type in a new value Click Apply 5 To monitor the table in a watch window click Watch The Add Watch Entry dialog box appears T Add Watch Entry Name Days_Table Length 7 Select Indexes To Watch Out O Single Index C Range from Select Watch Window J Cie e 6 In the Add Watch Entry dialog box do one of the following Ifthe watch window you want to use to monitor the table variable is open choose it from the Select Watch window drop down list Ifthe watch window you want is not open click Open Navigate to it and double click it to open it Ifyou want to monitor the variable in a new watch window click New For help see Creating a Watch Window on page 157 7 Selectthe indexes you want to watch 8 When the Add Watch Entry dialog box shows the correct items to watch and the watch window you w
195. after download and to set the autorun flag after download This information will become part of the download file Creating the Control Engine Download cdf File With the strategy open in PAC Control in Configure mode right click the name of the control engine in the Strategy Tree and choose Compile Control Engine Download File from the pop up menu You can also choose Compile gt Compile Control Engine Download File The file is created in the same folder as the strategy with a cdf extension and a filename consisting of the strategy s name and the control engine s name for example MyStrategy MyEngine cdf Once the control engine download file is created it can be downloaded using either the graphical interface in PAC Terminal or the command line interface with a batch file you create Downloading the cdf File using PAC Terminal 1 Click the Windows Start menu and choose Programs gt Opto22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt Tools gt PAC Terminal PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES File Tools Configure View Help Control Engines Controller Name System Type Address 1 4f Cookie Controller Standard 4127 0 0 1 3 R1 Controller Standard 410 195 55 111 2 Right click the name of the control engine you want to download the file to 3 Inthe pop up menu choose Download Control Engine Download File 4 Enterthe path and filename ofthe cdf file or click the Browse button and
196. al communication module on the same tcp 10 192 55 90 22511 rack uses SNAP PAC R series IP address or loopback IP or address tcp 127 0 0 1 22511 To add a communication handle see the steps starting on page 248 In the Add Variable dialog box enter the communication handle value in the Initial Value field Add Variable Name TCP Comm Handle Outgoing Description Type Communication Handle v Initialization O Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run Persistent Communication handle value Initial Value tcp 10 132 56 185 22004 Cancel Help Port Numbers If you are talking to other control engines or other peers on the network you can use any port number that is not already in use by that device For example you can safely use ports 22004 and 22005 which have been assigned to Opto 22 by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA Opto 22 has allocated these Ethernet TCP port numbers for customer use In general anything below 1024 is already predefined and shouldn t be used unless you are implementing one of the predefined protocols that already has a reserved port The following port numbers are reserved by Opto 22 devices for the purposes shown 20 FTP file transfer protocol for get send and dir functions 21 FTP file transfer protocol 25 SMTP simple mail transfer protocol 161 SNMP based enterprise management systems 502 Modbus TCP 2001 Main
197. alls to the control engine therefore leaving more processing time for other tasks In addition a slower setting may be useful when checking communication using PAC MessageViewer see page 366 If you don t want the debugger to follow auto stepping deselect When stepping make sure the active block is visible To change debugger speed follow these steps 1 With the strategy in Configure mode choose Configure gt Options Alternatively in Debug mode choose Debug gt Options 2 Inthe PAC Control Options dialog box click the Debugger tab PAC Control User s Guide Status bar Step On CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES PAC Opus Workspace Debugger Debugger Performance Hi tJ V When stepping make sure the active block is visible ok Cm Me Low 3 Click and drag the slider to the speed you want The default speed is shown in the figure above Since performance varies depending on your hardware and software you may need to experiment to find the most efficient speed Pausing a Chart or Subroutine You can temporarily stop any running chart or subroutine by pausing it When you pause a chart or subroutine it finishes the instruction it was executing then stops at the next block in Minimal Debug or the next line in Full Debug To pause the chart or subroutine in the active window click the Pause Chart or Pause Subroutine button Ill or press F7 o
198. amp NumVarldentifier gt amp ObjVarldentifier StrAssignmentStatement gt StringVariable StrExp gt Stringlable NumericExp StrExp gt StringVariable Stridentifier gt StringVariable Chr NumericExp StrExp StrAdditiveExp Stridentifier Chr NumericExp StrAdditiveExp gt StrExp StrExp Stridentifier StringVariable gt StringLiteral gt Stringlable NumericExp Numidentifier gt NumvVarldentifier gt Numlableldentifier gt StringCharldentifier NumVarldentifier gt NumericVariable ObjVarldentifier gt ChartVariable gt DigloUnitVariable gt MixedloUnitVariable gt Tableldentifier gt CommunicationHandle Numlableldentifier NumericTable NumericExp Tableldentifier NumericTable gt StringTable StringCharldentifier gt StringVariable NumericExp NumericLiteral gt Integer32Literal PAC Control User s Guide 399 OPTOSCRIPT GRAMMAR SYNTAX REFERENCE gt Integer64Literal gt FloatLiteral LogicalUnaryExp gt not NumericExp ConditionStatement gt Statement StatementListOrEmpty EndifStatement gt fStatement StatementListOrEmpty ElseStatement StatementListOrEmpty EndifStatement gt Statement StatementListOrEmpty Elselfl ist EndifStatement gt Statement StatementListOrEmpty Elselfl ist ElseStatement StatementListOrEmpty EndifStatement IfStatement if NumericExp then ElseStatement e
199. analog value read from an I O unit and put into an integer is converted from float to integer automatically PAC Control User s Guide 297 MATHEMATICAL COMMANDS To maintain the integrity and accuracy of a numeric type float or integer keep all item types the same For example use the Move command to copy an integer value to a variable float when you want float calculations 298 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Miscellaneous Commands The following commands are used with tables and for other purposes Many of them are commonly used Comment Block Get Value From Name Comment Single Line Move Flag Lock Move from Numeric Table Element Flag Unlock Move Numeric Table Element to Numeric Table Float Valid Move Numeric Table to Numeric Table Generate Reverse CRC 16 on Table 32 bit Move to Numeric Table Element Get Length of Table Move to Numeric Table ElementsShift Numeric Table Elements Get Type From Name Comment Commands The comment commands listed above are used with standard PAC Control commands in action blocks and condition blocks For information on using comments in OptoScript blocks see step 10 in Using the OptoScript Editor on page 340 Comment Single Line and Comment Block commands are used in two entirely different ways e Comment Single Line enters a comment to help explain a block or an instruction within a block Usually block names and comments within
200. angent Digital Point Clamp Float Table Element Error Handling Clamp Float Variable Event Reaction Clamp Integer 32 T able Element High Density Digital Module Clamp Integer 32 Variable 120 Unit Complement 1 0 Unit Event Message Cosine 1120 Unit Memory Map Decrement Variable 1 0 Unit Scratch Pad Divide Logical Generate Random Number EEN Heoi Cosine Miscellaneous Hyperbolic Sine PID Ethernet ww Hyperbolic Tangent Click the name of a command group in the left column to display all the commands in that group In the right column click the command you want For more information on any command click the command name and click Command Help to open online help You can also look up the command in the PAC Control Command Reference When the command you want is highlighted click OK to return to the Add Instruction dialog box Optional Enter a comment about the purpose of the instruction Comments help explain the command s purpose in this block and are helpful to anyone who debugs or updates the strategy later Complete each argument for the command by typing in the Type and Name fields or by choosing from the drop down lists I Edit Instruction Instruction mm Comment Open pressure valve when vessel pressure is less than setpoint of 0 5 psig Type Name Float Variable v ID oughPressureS etpoint Minus Float Literal 05 Put
201. ans enabled No on a red background means disabled To change the status click one of the arrows then click Apply To add the point to a watch window click Watch and see page 157 To view configuration information for the variable click More Info To inspect the I O unit s configuration click Open Parent Pro only To add a plot control click Plot 2 ai16 Pot scanning Name ail5 Pot Type Analog Input 3 More Info WAL 433 0768 AVAL 420 1997 Communication Pont SS 1 0 Unit BAe S Open Parent G 14 04 40 14 04 50 14 05 00 Apply Watch Plet FS Data gt Value Axis p TimeAxis p Show IVAL The Data button allows you to save copy or print the current plot Use the Time Axis and Value Axis buttons to adjust the resolution Click Include IVAL to see a concurrent plot of the IVAL PAC Control User s Guide INSPECTING AND TUNING PID LOOPS Inspecting and Tuning PID Loops In Debug mode you can view PID loops and tune them This section gives you basic steps for inspecting PIDs determining system lag and tuning PIDs See also Opto 22 form 1641 OptoTutorial SNAP PAC PID which we highly recommend Form 1641 is available for download from our website at www opto22 com Inspecting a PID 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click the PID on the Strategy Tree 3 pido Name Input Setpoint Output Click a
202. ant click OK The table variable appears in the watch window PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS Viewing Pointer Tables 1 Make sure the strategy is running in Debug mode On the Strategy Tree double click the pointer table you want to view The View Table dialog box appears showing the pointer table s name length and the items pointed to You cannot change a pointer table entry in this dialog box Pointer_Table scanning Name Pointer Table Index Value D Total Count 1 1 1 1 1 1 Previous Count 2 Status 3 Alarm gt L MODE More Info 2 To view the status or value of the item pointed to highlight it in the table and click More Info If you need help follow the steps in Viewing Numeric and String Tables on page 233 Adding Commands To make a block in a strategy flowchart do the work it s intended to do you add one or more commands Commands use the I O points and variables you ve already configured as well as other elements in your strategy A command for example might turn on a digital point move a value to a variable or check to see whether a chart is running PAC Control contains more than 500 commands you can use A command in PAC Control is often called an instruction You can add commands to action blocks condition blocks and OptoScript blocks Continue blocks just move flowchart logic to another block See Configuring a Continue Block
203. ara koe tage dg dase tied das Bide dang gabe Ee dad de Ged wan 64 Saving a Strategy to las room oa pomme tesis caterers mda rte tud tuned eR 65 Saving te Hash ONCE ueque itin cover te eese ERU Dre Rr idis 65 Saving to Flash ori Every Download isses p Re eee e RR REO 65 Archiving Strategies on the Computer issssssssssssssssssssssss eee 66 Compiling and Downloading is sistat eu sehr Sarda Ree Rte e dad domed eda Qoi da 66 Compiling and Downloading in One Step sssssssssssse 67 Switching the Strategy ioi atate tete ur uu qe tib eere b qae tb d re deed od 69 Compiling without Downloading sss 69 Compiling the Active Chart or Subroutine 0 ccc ccc ccc cence ences 69 PAC Control User s Guide vii viii compiling CHANGES Only 4 iises onere te per pote ter er veperegnremede Compiling the Entire Strategy iss cce viec EHE pads UC Rt pH RS khan neat phot des Downloading Only iie cod rete eee de rt ee ette e DRM Pee T EA Background Downloading sss Downloading Without Using PAC Control 0 0 cece eee ee eee eee I Creating the Control Engine Download cdf File 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee Downloading the cdf File using PAC Terminal 0 000 cc ceeeeeee ees Using Command Lines or a DOS Batch File to Perform PAC Terminal Tasks Changing Download Compression ssssssssssssssssss e eect enn n eee es Running a strategy Manually 5 2 toii beta te
204. arning Center For more information go to the Opto 22 website www Opto22 com and search on the part number SNAP PACLC 1 Click the Debug mode button EE on the toolbar or select Debug from the Mode menu 2 Inthe Save Strategy dialog box click Yes to save the strategy 3 If you see a Powerup Clear Expected message click OK You may see a Download Warning message like this one PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL Download Warning A Strategy Mismatch The strategy to be downloaded does not match the strategy already in the control engine Strategy To Download wv Name Cookies Checksum 84D9073CC5C4F42COF7B7004FCF2FCBD Timestamp 06 04 09 12 29 33 Strategy in the Controller Name Cookies Checksum 577EF49E0D7899DA3EFBEAS9B 3CF3031 Timestamp 06 03 09 17 07 54 If you choose to continue the strategy that is in the control engine will be replaced by this strategy Do you want to continue the download Or you may see a message that the control engine s memory has been cleared Click Yes to proceed Two additional dialog boxes appear The first dialog displays the progress as the strategy is compiled The second dialog shows progress as the strategy is downloaded to the control engine T Strategy Download a Downloading your strategy Download stratecy NERRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRNI Cancel Assuming the strategy was compiled and downloaded successfully you are now in Debu
205. art see page 80 For more on the message queue see Queue Messages on page 372 You can use the command Add User Error to Queue to add your own information warning or error message to the queue This command can be helpful in troubleshooting IO Enabler Sample Strategies Sample IO Enabler strategies are available on the Opto 22 website The logic in these sample strategies is designed to automatically recover communications to any I O unit that temporarily goes offline that is has communications disabled for any reason Choose a sample that is compatible with your system configuration Each sample has the same basic code www opto22 com site downloads dl drilldown aspx aid 3605 www opto22 com site downloads dl_drilldown aspx aid 3603 www opto22 com site downloads dl_ drilldown aspx aid 3604 PAC Control User s Guide I O Unit Co CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS mmands The following commands are used to communicate with an I O unit which controls a group of I O points Clear I O Unit Configured Flag Move I O Unit to Numeric Table Ex Get I O Unit as Binary Value Move Numeric Table to I O Unit Get I O Unit as Binary Value 64 Move Numeric Table to I O Unit Ex Get Target Address State Set All Target Address States I O Unit Ready Set I O Unit Configured Flag IVAL Move Numeric Table to I O Unit Set Target Address State IVAL Move Numeric Table to I O Unit Ex Write I O Unit Configuration to EEPRO
206. as encountered that cannot be used when Contact Product Support See page 4 compiling 66 Requested item in protected dictionary Attempted to remove a strategy when there was no strategy in the control engine Out of memory To minimize the size of your strategy reduce the number and size of vari No room left to create any variables or save any data on the 67 ables especially tables You can also shrink stack Or an attempt was made to save the strategy to flash your strategy by using subroutines to per without enough room in flash to save it form common tasks 69 Invalid parameter null pointer passed to Attempted to use an uninitialized pointer or a null pointer command was received by a command 70 Not enough data supplied Table index given is larger than the size of the table X P Too many persistent variables variables initialized on down Out of persistent memory If applicable P 71 load or too large a strategy archive to fit in battery backed check length of tables RAM Communication to I O unit not enabled Pre vious communication failure may have dis Communication to the I O unit may have been disabled by a 93 igne ERAN f X abled communication to the unit communication failure that happened earlier automatically Re enable it and try again 95 Stack not empty Contact Product Support See page 4 Port could not be unlocked Task attempting 103 to unlock the port does not match the task AR E to unloc
207. ategy and can be called by any strategy I O units and points are specific to a strategy so they cannot be added to a subroutine Also note that commands and OptoScript code within a subroutine can use only the passed in and local items in the subroutine not items in the strategy that calls the subroutine PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 12 USING SUBROUTINES Compiling and Saving the Subroutine 1 With the subroutine open select Compile gt Compile Subroutine When the subroutine has finished compiling the cursor returns to its normal form 2 Select Subroutine gt Save Using Subroutines To use a subroutine in a strategy you include it in the strategy and then add it as a command instruction so it can be called from a chart Including a Subroutine in a Strategy Since subroutines are independent of strategies you must include the subroutine in the strategy before you can use it 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode double click the Subroutines Included folder on the Strategy Tree or select Configure gt Subroutine Included The Subroutine Files dialog box appears listing all subroutines currently included in the strategy The example below shows no subroutines currently included I Subroutine Files Cookies Subroutine Filename 2 Click Add PAC Control User s Guide 355 USING SUBROUTINES 356 3 Select Subroutine File Look in Subroutines v 35 fi y in
208. atic Chart Import O Replace existing chart To Name Description D escription At the top of the dialog box click Create new chart or Replace existing chart CAUTION If you choose Replace existing chart the old chart will be completely overwritten with the chart you are importing Click Select Navigate to the exported chart Click OK In the To section of the dialog box enter a name for the new chart If you wish enter a description If you are replacing an existing chart select it from the list To copy the imported chart description select the text in the left description field copy it and paste it in the right description field Click OK The chart is imported A Chart Import Report window shows you how the tags in the chart match with those already in the strategy Any tags from the chart that do not already exist in the strategy are created and added PAC Control User s Guide 9 Using Variables and Commands Introduction This chapter discusses the seven types of variables used in PAC Control numeric string pointer numeric table pointer table string table and communication handle variables This chapter also shows you how to use the commands or instructions in PAC Control and discusses the mechanics of adding commands to your strategy flowcharts For command information to help you program your strategy effectively see Chapter 10 To find out how to use commands in OptoS
209. atting gloves 2 Batting gloves Catcher s mitts 3 Catcher s mitts 5 Use the command Close Communication to close the communication handle Reading a File As another example suppose you have a file on the control engine that was placed there via FTP See the next section for details on using the FTP communication handle You PAC Control User s Guide 259 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 260 want to read this file New_Data txt and place the data in it into a string table Data_Table in your strategy 1 Use Open Outgoing Communication to open a file communication handle The value of the handle would be i1e r New Data txt 2 Usethe condition Communication Open to make sure the handle opened 3 Use the command Set End Of Message Terminator to indicate what character in the New Data txt file should be read as the delimiting character In the example shown below it s a slash TIP If the lines of data in the text file end with LF line feed set the EOM end of message terminator to 10 decimal which is the ASCII code for LF 4 Use the command Receive String Table to receive the data from New Data txt directly into Data Table To read the whole file use a value of 1 for the Length parameter Control Engine File System Strategy New Data txt Data Table o 485 485 622 35 56 7841 20 1 622 2 35 3 56 4 7841 5 20 Notice th
210. b ee buque eM echo taeda eui piden Cas 220 PAC Control User s Guide ISTE RP RR 221 Adding Vatlables sce pros cree Ebert edo epu RECO RR bets 221 Ada Variable Dialogi BOX occ eee oee teer aanrementeniaacenarennid 222 Adding TAD nae ebaae 224 AadingJTableVariablest s soa dete scam ne T utor tue dais Er 224 Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables During Strategy Download 226 Creating the Initialization File sssssssssssssss 226 TEXUEXAM PICS HET 226 Downloading the Initialization File sss 228 Starting the Strategy Automatically 00 0 ccc eee ee teen ee eee 229 Changing a Configured Variable eder RIDRe RUINA i dan be ons 229 Deleting Variables i et cet ro tetro tbe dea reb ett ter To Ue b RU bie bah 229 Viewing Variables in Debug Mode ssssssssssssssssssI e 230 Viewing Numeric String and Communication Handle Variables 08 230 Viewing Pointer Variables stas veta te eate Re RR Od EYE e QA br v de Ra Qe a 232 Viewing Numeric and String Tables 0 0 000 cece cece cece cece n eee n rnrn 233 Viewing Pointer Tables 5e iae eae de e ER DR e PP dad Od weds dank 235 Adding COMMANGS uie rete eco Or eeu pbbo e P e tERDU ER Ue 235 Changing a COmlmlalid eccsc ceste exert dane devra teen re bem tU I REA a cnad entra 239 Deletinig a Gormmarnas nuca esee Gee ed bb exui qa ebd ded E A OSA 239 Permanently Deleting a Command
211. be found on the network If the PING command cannot be found Verify that the PC has TCP IP bound to and configured on the network adapter If you are running Windows 95 or Windows 98 follow these steps 1 Choose Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and double click Network 2 Highlight the adapter in the list Make sure both NetBEUI and TCP IP appear just below the name of the adapter Click Properties 3 Highlight TCP IP and click Properties Verify that the IP address and subnet mask are appropriate for your network If you are running Windows NT follow these steps 1 Choose Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and double click Network PAC Control User s Guide OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS 2 Click the Protocols tab Make sure both NetBEUI and TCP IP are listed Highlight TCP IP and click Properties 3 Highlight the adapter name in the list Verify that the IP address and subnet mask are appropriate for your network If you are running Windows 2000 follow these steps 1 Choose Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and double click Network and Dialup Connections 2 Right click your network card and choose Properties from the pop up menu Make sure that TCP IP is present and checked 3 Highlight TCP IP and click Properties Verify that the IP address and subnet mask are appropriate for your network If you see the message Destination host route not defined the control engine probably has an IP address and sub
212. be true to exit True or whether any one condition must be true to exit True continue block Continue blocks are oval shaped blocks in a flowchart that route the flow of execution to an action condition or OptoScript block They do not contain any instructions but store only the name of the next block to execute Continue blocks can have many entrances but no exits since the exit is defined within the block Continue blocks avoid awkward connections between two blocks that are far apart digital point Digital points can be either on or off true or false Push buttons and LEDs are examples of digital devices an LED is either on or off it has no other possible state Digital points can be either inputs such as a photo sensor or outputs such as a pump external value The external value XVAL is the real world value measured or set by an I O point The PAC Control strategy reads and writes only to internal values and transfers internal values to external values if communication to the associated O unit is enabled flowcharts Since most control applications are complex the strategy typically consists of a series of process flowcharts or charts that all work together Fach chart controls one aspect of the strategy one PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL piece of the automated process Together all the charts constitute the strategy The total number of charts in a strategy is limited only by
213. bit integer a floating point value to an unsigned 64 bit integer an ASCII value to a float NOTE In OptoScript an If Statement expects an 32 bit number and will automatically convert any other type such as 64 bit integer or float value to a 32 bit number To avoid this overflow error a slight change to the code can avoid this problem For example if your int 64 here then becomes if your int 64 here lt gt 0 then Also math functions such as multiply exponentiation hyperbolic sine hyperbolic cosine function x to the y add subtract modulo negate move assign Time date functions setting a month not in the range 1 12 a day not in the range 1 31 hours not in 0 23 min utes 0 59 seconds 0 59 Number entered on host port for example through PAC Terminal was too big for data types 14 Invalid number Math resulted in an invalid number like infinity or an imagi nary number natural log of the floating point number square root arc sine arc cosine of float function x to the y with negative x 15 Cannot divide by zero Attempted to divide a number by zero 16 Bus error Contact Product Support See page 4 17 Port already locked on PAC Control engine Attempted to lock a connection that s already locked Device busy May be in use by another user or another application A resource is already acquired by another task or process Had t
214. bit operating system select Edit gt Permissions The Registry Key Permissions dialog box opens Make sure that Opto22 appears next to Registry Key at the top of the window 8 Click Add 9 Inthe Select Users Computers or Groups dialog box select the name of the appropriate group or domain from the Look In drop down list 10 In the Name list select the name of the user or group that should have control engine access and then click Add 11 If itis not already selected check Full Control in the Permission area Make sure Allow inheritable permissions from parent to propagate to this object is checked PAC Control User s Guide 369 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS 12 Click OK 13 Select Registry gt Exit to close the Registry Editor 14 Restart the computer The user or group you added can now use control engines without having administrator access 370 PAC Control User s Guide B Errors and Messages Introduction This appendix discusses errors and messages you may see in PAC Control and their possible causes Errors and messages may appear with text only or with a negative number and text The more common errors and messages are listed in this chapter in numeric order starting on page 373 To look up an error in PAC Control select Help gt Error Lookup In the Error Lookup dialog box enter the error code and then click Get Error Error Lookup Error code 0 Error Description
215. ble dialog box Variables Numeric Variables String Variables C3 Pointer Variables EE Communication Handles Numeric Tables Laat y C3 String Tables Configute C3 Pointer Tables 2 Atminimum enter the following things Name Create an appropriate name such as ICP Handle Type Select Communication Handle Initial Value Varies with type For TCP see page 249 For File see page 257 For FTP see page 263 For Serial see page 266 Add Variable Name Description Type Type Communication Handle v Initialization O Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run Persistent Initial Value Initial Value Cancel Help PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Using TCP Communication Handles The TCP communication handle is used for most Ethernet communication Any device on the network accessible via TCP IP can be communicated with using communication commands For example data from a serial device can be received through a serial communication module or communication can be established with a PC on the network NOTE If the two devices that are sharing data are both control engines it may be easier to use the Scratch Pad areas on each to transfer data rather than using communication commands See I O Unit Scratch Pad Commands on page 291 for more information NOTE Be sure to use a separate TCP communication handle fo
216. ble of all PAC Control commands and their OptoScript equivalents In addition OptoScript equivalents for each command are shown in the PAC Control Command Reference and in the online command help Using I O in OptoScript One advantage of OptoScript is that any named I O point can be used directly wherever a numeric variable can be used rather than requiring a variable Digital points behave like integer variables that have only two possible states zero off or non zero on Analog points behave like float variables For example you can turn a digital point off by simply assigning it a value of zero PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT Light Switch 0 You can turn a digital point on by assigning it any value other than zero Light_Switch 1 Light Switch 1 Light Switch 486 You can use I O points directly in mathematical expressions fLimit Pressure Input 50 Or use them directly in control structures for example to turn off the light if the door is closed if not Door then Light Switch 0 endif You can set an output based on the value of an input or a variable LEDO1 Switch A Proportional Valve fPressure Control You can use a point directly with a command fRange GetAnalogMaxValue Temp Input GetAnalogMinValue Temp Input TurnOn Fan A IsOn Fan A OptoScript Syntax Here is a sample section of OptoScript code to illustrate syntax Indentation is not required but is
217. ble s name or by highlighting it and clicking Modify Deleting a Variable You cannot delete a variable that is referenced within the strategy or subroutine Be careful when deleting variables since you cannot undo a deletion 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode PAC Control User s Guide 229 VIEWING VARIABLES IN DEBUG MODE 2 On the Strategy Tree expand the Variables folder until you see the name of the variable you want to change Right click the name and choose Delete from the pop up menu The variable is deleted You can also delete a variable from the Configure Variables dialog box by highlighting the variable s name and clicking Delete Viewing Variables in Debug Mode While the strategy is running in Debug mode you can view its variables and modify the value of a variable or of entries in a table You can also view several variables at once as well as other strategy elements by putting them into a watch window Viewing Numeric String and Communication Handle Variables 1 Make sure the strategy is running in Debug mode On the Strategy Tree double click the variable you want to view The Inspect Variables dialog box opens The animated icon at the upper left assures you that the data is fresh The title bar includes the name ofthe variable and indicates whether scanning is occurring nCookie Counter scanning Value 42896 Maximize button 2 nCookie C
218. bles O units and points and PIDs PAC Control User s Guide PAC CONTROL MAIN WINDOW Strategy tree Sprinkler_Control DER o E Control Engines P d Sprinkler Controller Subroutines Included Charts C3 Variables C5 Numeric Variables String Variables Pointer Variables C3 Communication Handles C3 Numeric Tables String Tables C3 Pointer Tables JO units GA Mixed IO Unit Cj Points PIDs vi Jb Next 4 Prev The Strategy Tree works just like Windows Explorer you can expand or collapse folders to view or hide what is in them You can easily see what is in your strategy open elements to change them by double clicking them or open a pop up menu by right clicking on an element Each element in the strategy is represented by a button shown just to the left of its name The table below shows the buttons and what they represent a Control Engine HH Integer 32 Table Ta Chart Integer 64 Table Is4 ab Subroutine H String Table STR 12 Integer 32 Variable Pointer Table Isz PTR Integer 64 Variable cru Digital I O Unit Iet D aH Float Variable ini Mixed I O Unit FLT AFD a Down Timer Variable pd Analog Input Point THE It E Up Timer Variable Digital Input Point THE p String Variable wa Analog Output Point TF n f Communication Handle Digital Output Point CH o PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC C
219. bles See page 263 for information on FTP PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS This section of the PAC Control strategy reads the variable names from the text file in the control engine s file system and places the names in a string table Product Names Next the strategy uses the command Get Value From Name to place the values of the variables into another table Product Info The data from this table is then written to another text file ProductInfo txt on the control engine which can later be sent via FTP to the person who requested the data The whole operation including the FTP portions which are not covered in this code example might look like this Requestor Control Engine Li File System ProductRequest txt ProductRequest txt FTP Num Widgets Num Widgets o Num Gadgets Num Gadgets Num Thingies Num Thingies Num Whatnots Num Whatnots ProductSales txt 9556 10867 Productinfo txt 5432 23 9556 10867 FTP Q 5432 23 PAC Control Strategy 0 Product Names String Table Num Widgets 1 Num Gadgets 2 Num Thingies Num Whatnots Get Value From Name Product Info String Table o ese o 1 10867 2 5432 3 23 PAC Control User s Guide 261 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS The OptoScript code in this example also makes use of
220. cal Operators on page 335 for more information PAC Control User s Guide 293 LOGICAL COMMANDS Logical True and Logical False PAC Control always returns a value of 1 to indicate True in an integer variable A digital input or output that is on also returns a True 1 Any non zero value sent to a digital output turns it on False is defined as zero 0 For individual bits within an integer variable bits that are set 1 indicate on Bits that are cleared 0 indicate off While floats can be used in logic integers are strongly recommended whenever any bits are referenced Since PAC Control does not permit bits in a float value to be altered float values must be converted to integers before bits can be evaluated See Mathematical Commands on page 295 for further information on integers and floats PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Mathematical Commands The following commands perform mathematical functions Absolute Value Raise to Power Add Round Clamp Float Table Element Seed Random Number Clamp Float Variable Square Root Clamp Integer 32 Table Element Subtract Clamp Integer 32 Variable Truncate Complement Decrement Variable Trigonometry Divide Arcsine Generate Random Number Arccosine Increment Variable Arctangent Maximum Cosine Minimum Hyperbolic Cosine Modulo Hyperbolic Sine Multiply Hyperbolic TangentSine Natural Log Tangent Raise e to Power Using Integers In
221. cation handle may have been closed by a previous command that failed 57 String not found Substring not found in the string being searched F Attempted to read an empty buffer or a connection with no No data received Ds 58 or characters waiting or the I O unit may be turned off or unreachable or when searching a string for a particular Character not found 3 character the character wasn t found Command may not apply to the type of communication han gt dle you are using for example Receive commands cannot t Could nat receive date be used with ftp comm handles Use the get option with Send Communication Handle Command instead Empty stack error PAC Control engine attempted to perform an operation that 60 expected data on the PAC Control engine Contact Product Suppor See pagad stack 376 PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX B ERRORS AND MESSAGES PAC Control User s Guide A number of things can reduce the amount of dictionary ae space such as Dictionary full error PAC tonta engine dic Too many blocks or variables in a strategy 61 tionary is full and no more words can be defined Too many large tables Using background downloads which cuts available memory in half 62 Stack full error PAC Control engine stack The PAC Control engine stack is full has grown too big Execute only error A command or word 64 w
222. cause all available socket resources to enter this time period When this occurs any attempt to open an outgoing communication will fail with this error code because there are no available sockets to use for this attempt When an error occurs when trying to open a TCP communi cation handle the strategy should back off for a significant amount of time before reattempting Subsequent failures should have additional delays applied These delays slow the consumption of TCP resources 440 Could not bind socket Another device such as the I O on the brain is already using the port If you are using the Modbus toolkit make sure to use PAC Manager to set the brain s Modbus port to a number other than 502 Try 0 442 Could not accept on socket Ethernet accept failed 443 Could not receive on socket Ethernet receive failed 444 Could not send on socket Ethernet send failed 446 FTP Login failed Incorrect user name or password The maximum number of login attempts on the server has been exceeded 531 Buffer full 534 Attempts to communicate with I O unit failed 539 I O error performing retry Attempted to write to a full buffer For a serial communica tion handle data is being sent faster than the serial port can send and buffer it Use a faster baud rate or a delay between Transfer Transmit commands I O unit may have lost power or network connection I O unit may have l
223. ce you can quickly move from block to block in the chart by clicking the Next Block or Previous Block buttons in the Instructions dialog box If you re working with a condition block clicking Next Block opens a dialog box so you can select which block to choose since condition blocks have two exits The same dialog box appears if you click Previous Block and the block you re working with has connections coming from more than one block 11 If you put more than one command in a condition block complete the Operator group as follows f both commands must be true to exit the block true click AND If only one of the commands must be true to exit the block true click OR Here is an example of an Instructions dialog box for a condition block with two commands In this case the block will exit true if either of the commands is true 238 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS tInstructions Sprinklers Sunday or Wednesday x Day_of_the_Week 3 Day_of_the_Week Either the first command OR the second command can be true for BR this condition block to exit true Operator Changing a Command 1 With the strategy open in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block containing the command you want to change NOTE To change commands in OptoScript blocks see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 340 In the Instructions dialog box double click any li
224. ce of the application may open It depends on the application some check to see whether the application is already running and some do not 1 With PAC Control open choose Tools gt Customize The Customize dialog box appears Customize Menu Contents 2 Click Add 3 Inthe Menu Text field type the name of the application as you want it to appear in the Tools menu 4 In the Command field type the path for the application s executable file or click the browse button and navigate to the file 5 Optional In the Arguments field type any necessary command line parameters 6 Optional In the Initial Directory field type the directory the application should default to when it runs 66 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL For example this is the directory the application would show when you open or save files 7 Repeat the steps to add other applications To change an application s position in the menu list highlight it and click the Move Up or Move Down keys 8 When you have finished adding applications click OK You return to the PAC Control main window and the applications you ve added now appear in the Tools menu Keyboard and Mouse Shortcuts Use the following keyboard and mouse shortcuts to view and navigate a chart Center on Block 0 0 or Numeric Keypad 0 Move to Bottom Left Numeric Keypad 1 Move to Top Left Numeric Key
225. cessfully PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Running a Strategy Manually 1 With the strategy open choose Mode gt Debug 2 Click the Run Strategy button p or press F5 or select Debug gt Run You can also run a strategy from the Inspecting dialog box See Inspecting Control Engines in Debug Mode on page 101 Running a Strategy Automatically Autorun You can set the strategy to run automatically autorun if the control engine loses power and then restarts In traditional Opto 22 controllers the OptoControl autorun function was controlled by a jumper For PAC Control it s controlled by the autorun flag If the autorun flag is not set the strategy must be started manually after power is restored to the control engine The strategy must be saved in flash memory for autorun to work You can set the autorun flag in two ways e In Configure mode save the strategy to flash memory and set the autorun flag every time the strategy is downloaded Be careful you do not save to flash too often as flash memory eventually wears out See Saving to Flash on Every Download on page 165 e n Debug mode save the strategy to flash memory by choosing Control Engine gt Save Strategy to Flash Then right click the control engine in the Strategy Tree and choose Inspect from the pop up menu In the Inspect dialog box enable Autorun See Inspecting Control Engines and the Queue on page 101 for more on the I
226. cking buttons at the right of the title bar or you can reshape it by dragging any edge in any direction PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL However the Strategy Tree window is unique in that it must remain open since closing it is equivalent to closing the strategy The Strategy Tree works like Windows Explorer you can expand and collapse folders to show or hide what is in them e c Subroutines Included Expanded L amp 3 Chats Charts folder m To Alarms amp Bp Dough_Chip_Control D Dough Vessel Pressure E D Oven_Inspection_Control m D Powerup amp C Variables amp Cy Numeric Variables String Variables C3 Pointer Variables Cy Communication Handles E Numeric Tables Cy String Tables C3 Pointer Tables a E 1 0 Units iH v Next 4 Prev A quick look at the tree reveals that our strategy includes five flowcharts in the Charts folder eight Numeric Variables and one Mixed I O Unit with both analog and digital points The Strategy Tree not only shows you all components of the strategy but also provides shortcuts to many common PAC Control activities for example opening flowcharts Docking the Strategy Tree Since the Strategy Tree is so useful you ll probably want to keep it visible while you create and debug your strategy To keep the Strategy Tree window always visible you can dock it in a separate frame 1 Click the docking icon S in the
227. click Refresh 5 To copy all messages in table format for transfer to another program such as Excel click Copy All 6 To delete the top oldest message on the list click Pop Top Message 7 To delete all messages click Clear Messages 8 Close the dialog box to return to the Inspect Control Engine dialog box Any changes you have made to the queue are reflected there Message Queue Information Each message in the View Messages dialog box includes the following information Code The message or error code number see List of Common Messages on page 373 or User if the message was placed in the queue using the command Add Message to Queue Severity Information Warning or Error Chart and Block The chart and block being executed when the error occurred If the error occurred someplace outside the strategy for example when trying to connect to an I O unit Chart shows system If the error occurred in a subroutine Chart shows the chart that called the subroutine and Block indicates the name of the subroutine plus the block number in the format sub name gt lt block number For example error 4 above Cannot divide by zero occurred in block 1 of the subroutine Variable Increase Notification which was called by the Temperature Control chart Line If you are in Full Debug mode the line being executed when the error occurred Object The table I O unit or other object affected by the message In errors 1 and 2
228. click the Save Strategy button gd on the toolbar you can choose which charts to save in the Save Strategy dialog box Closing a Chart To close a chart click the close box in the upper right corner of the chart s window not the PAC Control window You can also close a chart by pressing CTRL F4 when the chart window is active If you have made changes to the chart you are prompted to save them Copying Renaming and Deleting Charts Copying a Chart If an existing chart is similar to one you want to create it is easier to copy it than to create a new one from scratch To copy a chart in the same strategy follow the steps in this section To copy a chart to another strategy see Exporting and Importing Charts on page 215 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode select Chart gt Copy The Copy Chart dialog box appears Copy Chart Description Description Check the E Stop button the two level alarms 2 In the From field choose the chart you want to copy from the drop down list 3 In the To field enter a name for the new chart The name must start with a letter and include only letters numbers or underscores Spaces are converted to underscores 4 Optional Enter a description for the new chart PAC Control User s Guide 213 COPYING RENAMING AND DELETING CHARTS 5 Click OK The new chart is created and appears as the active window on the screen
229. command processor OptoMMP based also used by SNAP PAC controllers and brains 250 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS 2222 44818 Ethernet IP 22000 Opto 22 controllers and brains Host port for information on configuring the host 22001 port see form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide 22002 Opto 22 controllers and brains 22003 Opto 22 controllers and brains 22500 Serial communication modules 22531 i TUM 50000 Internal messagin 50999 M Note that port numbers on the SNAP PAC controllers and brains are the default ports some may have been changed for security reasons See the section on Security in form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide If you do not know what port number to use ask your network administrator or check the list of standard reserved Ethernet port numbers at www iana org assignments port numbers to see ports that may apply to your devices on your network Incoming Communication For incoming communication communication requested by another device the communication handle value includes just the protocol and the port number Protocol Port ICP automatically tracks senders so there is no mix up in the data sent and received Here are a couple of examples of communication handles for incoming communication Communication Handle Value Incoming Communication Protocol Port Ethernet TCP from another control engine tc
230. conds Delay Sec 2 0 Click Close to return to the chart Add Modify Next Block Previous Block You ve just added a cookie counter On the Strategy Tree open the Numeric Variables folder in the Variables folder The new numeric variable is there Save the changes you ve made by clicking the Save Strategy button gj on the toolbar Click OK to save Now we re ready to download the strategy to a control engine But first we have to tell PAC Control that we have a control engine PAC Control User s Guide CONFIGURING A CONTROL ENGINE Configuring a Control Engine Up to this point we ve been able to play around in PAC Control without hardware Now it s time to configure a control engine 1 Ifyou have a PAC Control compatible control engine and O unit you can use make sure they are on the same network as your PC and make sure you have loaded the most recent firmware For a list of compatible control engines and I O units see page 5 For instructions to load firmware see Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide 2 Turnthe I O unit off and then back on again 3 Double click the Control Engines folder on the Strategy Tree or select Configure gt Control Engines The Configure Control Engines dialog box appears Active Engine Engines Associated with Strategy Delete Download Options Since we haven t configured a control engine yet there are no control e
231. cript block i block HY block pre t ut Changing the Appearance of Elements in a Chart Window You can change the background appearance of charts or subroutines the color and size of blocks and text and the color of connection lines Depending on the scope you want to affect you can change these window properties at three levels e Across PAC Control to change the appearance of all new charts in all new strategies and all new subroutines e Across a strategy to change the appearance of all new charts in the open strategy e For the open chart or subroutine to change the appearance of all new elements in the open chart or subroutine window IMPORTANT Note that most changes affect only new charts and their elements Existing charts subroutines and elements are not changed To avoid having to go back and change each item individually make sure you set the defaults the way you want them before you create new charts Once you have changed the defaults see Changing Existing Elements to Match New Defaults on page 205 to change existing elements to match the new defaults To change the appearance of charts and elements follow these steps 1 Chooseone ofthe following depending on the scope you want to change To change all new charts in all new strategies and all new subroutines choose Configure gt Default Properties to open the Configure PAC Control Default Properties dialog box o change all new charts in the
232. cript code see Chapter 11 For a list of all standard PAC Control commands and their OptoScript equivalents see Appendix E In this Chapter PRINT Variables cete mme 217 Variables in PAC Control ss 219 Adding Variables e Adding Tables Changing a Configured Variable 229 Viewing Variables in Debug Mode 230 Adding Commands s Changing a Command us Deleting Command Cutting or Copying a Command 240 Configuring a Continue Block 241 Viewing and Printing Chart Instructions 241 About Variables As Chapter 2 mentions variables store pieces of information in a strategy You create a variable for each piece of information in your control process that must be acted upon These pieces of information might include the name of a chart the on or off state of a switch communication parameters for a peer on the network or a table that holds a series of numbers Each variable has a name and a value You assign the variables name in plain English so you know what it is The variable s value is the current information it represents As a strategy runs the PAC Control User s Guide 217 ABOUT VARIABLES 218 variables name remains the same but its value may change For example the name of the variable Oven Temperature stays the same but its value the temperature of the oven may change several times while th
233. cript logical operators return an Integer 32 value of zero false or of non zero true OptoScript sup ports the following logical operators for numeric values Operator and Meaning Example and Result is true if both values are true nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 or Result is true if at least one value is tue nVarl nVar2 or nVar3 xor Result is true if only one value is true nVarl nVar2 xor nVar3 not invert the logical value nVarl not nVar2 Logical operators are left associative For exam Any number of logical operators can be ple these two lines are equivalent chained together nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 or nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 and nVar4 nVar4 nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 or nVar4 nVarl nVar2 and nVar3 or nVar4 The following two lines are equivalent nVarl not nVarl and not nVar2 nVarl not nVarl and not nVar2 The not operator precedes a value it only takes a value on its right hand side nVarl not nVar2 Logical operators can be combined with comparison operators to create complex logical expressions nVarl nVar2 1 and nVar3 6 5 nVarl nVar2 1 and sStringl abc nVarl nVar2 lt 1 and nVar4 xor nVar5 or not fFloati fFloat2 nVarl not nVar2 lt 5 same as nVarl nVar2 gt 5 When you use a logical operator in an f statement it isn t necessary to put the result in a variable because the result is used consumed by the if if Motor 1 or Motor 2 th
234. ction with a specific entity For outgoing Ethernet communication for example these parameters usually include the protocol the IP address of the device you are communicating with and the port number used on the device After the initial connection is made the communication handle is referenced during communication with the entity and then used to close communication Variables in PAC Control In PAC Control there are seven types of variables numeric numeric table string string table pointer pointer table communication handle Numeric string and pointer variables contain individual pieces of data Numeric table string table and pointer table variables contain several pieces of related data in the form of a table Communication handle variables contain parameters used by PAC Control for communicating with other devices and files Table Variables In a table variable the variable name represents a group of values not just one Table variables are one dimensional arrays which means that each table is like a numbered list of values You refer to each item in the list by its number or index Indexes start at 0 not at 1 Here are two table examples PAC Control User s Guide 219 ABOUT VARIABLES 220 In a float table values are floating point numbers 0 82 0 1 86 1 2 85 0 3 74 8 4 72 3 5 72 7 In a string table values are strings 0 Maria 1 Tom 2 Siu 3 An
235. customizing the initialization files Starting the Strategy Automatically If you want your strategy to start automatically as soon as the strategy finishes downloading to the controller using PAC Control Debug mode modify the INIT TXT file as follows 1 Add the following to the end of the INITTXT file RUN 2 Add 1 or more blank lines after the _ RUN line This is required it won t work without at least 1 blank line at the end of the file If you are not using the other features of the Init txt file to initialize variables after strategy download you can delete the rest of the content of the file Changing a Configured Variable You can change a variable but you cannot change a variable type 1 To change a configured variable make sure the strategy or subroutine is open and in Configure or Online mode If you are working in a strategy on the Strategy Tree expand the Variables folder until you see the name of the variable you want to change Double click its name to open the Fdit Variable dialog box If you are working in a subroutine choose Configure gt Variables In the Configure Variables dialog box double click the name of the variable you want to change In the Edit Variable dialog box make the necessary changes and click OK If you need help see Adding Variables on page 221 or Adding Tables on page 224 You can also change a variable from the Configure Variables dialog box by double clicking the varia
236. d Ethernet port numbers refer to http www iana org assignments port numbers See also Opto 22 form 1940 TCP and UDP Port Assignments If you are using the Accept Incoming Communication command to listen for communication requests leave out the IP address and use the following format tcp port For tables each value in the table is set to the initial value If you need to set individual table elements to differing values intially you can do so in the Powerup chart If you need to use an initialization file to set values on strategy download contact Opto 22 Product Support Adding Tables See the following topics to add numeric string and pointer tables Adding Table Variables below Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables During Strategy Download on page 226 Adding Table Variables 1 With the strategy or subroutine open in Configure mode choose Configure gt Variables The Configure Variables dialog box opens listing all variables of one type in the strategy PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS I Configure Variables Ive EEA v Name bStartFlag dtCookieMotionTi fDoughPressureS fRampValue fSetpointMinusDe nChartStatus nCookieMotionPre nLoopCounter Type Scope Global v Integer 32 Down Timer Float Float Float Integer 32 Integer 32 Integer 32 Init Type Download Run Persistent Run Run Persistent Run Run D
237. d Up One Level File name Files of type PAC Control Subroutine Files isb v Navigate to the directory containing the subroutine you want to add and double click the subroutine I Subroutine Files Sprinkler _Control Subroutine Filename Ref Co C Program Files Opto22 PAC Project 9 0 Cont 4 When the full path to the subroutine appears in the Subroutine Files dialog box click OK The new subroutine appears in the Strategy Tree in the Subroutines Included folder Adding a Subroutine Instruction You use a subroutine just like a PAC Control command by adding the subroutine instruction to a block in the chart NOTE Subroutines are located in the Subroutine group by default Ifyou want subroutines in a different group you must change the group when you configure the subroutine s parameters See Configuring Subroutine Parameters on page 350 1 2 With the strategy open in Configure mode open the chart that will use the subroutine Double click the block that will call the subroutine If it is an OptoScript block list parameters arguments in order within parentheses the same way you enter parameters for PAC Control commands see OptoScript Syntax on page 327 Be sure to use the subroutine s OptoScript name using underscores instead of spaces The Put Status In return value can be consumed by a variable as shown below such as a mathematical expression or a control structu
238. ded amp Charts amp Variables amp 5 1 0 Units Quick find tool vy dLNext F Prev For example if you enter the word setpoint when you click Next the first match is found PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL Cookies o DBR C Variables amp C Numeric Variables 18 bStartFlag DE diCookieMotionTimer TMR Match bal fDoughPress 34 fRampValue Fu bal fSetpointMinusD eadband pa nChartStatus 18 nCookieMotionPreset 132 iH eme lt ll setpoint v db Next P Prev When you click Next again the next match is found Opening a Chart Every control process can be planned and mapped out using one or several PAC Control flowcharts or charts Because flowcharts are easy to follow PAC Control strategies are easy to understand For an example let s take a look at the Dough_Chip_Control chart 1 With the Charts folder expanded double click the Dough Chip Control chart name on the Strategy Tree You can also open a chart by selecting Chart gt Open and navigating to the chart name The chart appears somewhere in the large frame of the main window IPAC Control Basic T File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help Maximize Dicono Josuo oo 0 52 0550 nA 5500900558026 button Cookies E C3 Cookies Dough Chip_Control DER Control Engines C3 Subroutines Included This chart
239. dex Value 0 lt doctype html html itemscope itemscope itemtype http schema org WebPa 1 02693 4004334 4004844 4004949 4005865 4005875 4006426 4006442 4006727 400705 2 mers google startTick function a b google timers a t start google tim 3 position absolute top 999px visibility hidden z index 998 right 0 gbto g 4 0 fgbg gbm right 0 gbxms background color ccc display block position abs 5 moz box shadow 0 2px 4px rgba 0 0 0 2 webkit box shadow 0 2px 4px rgba 0 6 4c4c4c background image none background image none background position 0 1 7 background url ssl gstatic com gb images b 8d5afc09 png background url 8 bmt focus background feee cursor pointer outline 0 solid black text decorati 9 c gbps gbpc gbps2 display block margin 0 20px gbmplp gbps margin 90 10px 10 8px 20px 10px gbmpiawi display inline block padding right 10px margin botto 11 x ipx rgba 0 0 0 1 box shadow inset 0 0 O 1px fff 0 1px 1px rgba 0 0 0 1 12 lorStr 4787ed border lpx solid 3079ed color f ff important margin 0 0 13 ge ms linear gradient top 5 5f5 1f1f1 background image o linear gradi 14 d image ms linear gradient top fff fbfbfb background image o linear gra 4 oply More Info Setting Timeouts for the HTTP Get and HTTP Post from String Table Commands The default timeout for transmitting receiving and connecting is 10 000 milli
240. dle Counter Digital Input Digital Output Down Timer Variable Float Table Float Variable Frequency Generic OptoMMP Device Integer 32 Table Integer 32 Variable Integer 64 Table Integer 64 Variable Off Pulse Off Totalizer On Pulse On Totalizer Period aiD oughVesselPressure ail venT emperature aoConveyorSpeedControl ao0 venT emperatureControl bStartFlag diChipLevelS witch diDoughLevelS witch diEStop dilnspectionPassF ailS witch doChipDispenseV alve doDoughDispenseValve doDoughPressureControlValve doRejeclValve Dough Chip Control Dough Vessel Pressure Control dtCookieMotionT imer fDoughPressureS etpoint fRamp alue fSetpointMinusD eadband nChartStatus nCookieMotionPreset 8 In the Select Variable dialog box select the variable type from the left hand column and then select the variable name from the right hand column The item appears in the code 9 Use the TAB key on the keyboard as you type to indent lines as needed To increase or decrease indentation for a line of code you ve already typed highlight the line and click the Increase Indent or Decrease Indent button in the toolbar 10 Enter comments to document what the code does so anyone who must debug or maintain 11 12 the code can clearly see your intentions Comments appear in green Line comments must be preceded by two slashes for example This is a line comment Block comments must be preceded by one slas
241. downloading it See page 165 for information on saving to flash Archiving Strategies to Battery Backed RAM Strategies are archived to battery backed RAM which is limited to 256KB In addition to an archived strategy battery backed RAM holds persistent variables and variables that are initiated on download If you have an unusually large strategy or large numbers of persistent variables or variables that are initialized on download you may not have sufficient space for an archived strategy See page 166 for more information on archiving Do You Use Online Mode If you frequently use Online mode to change your strategy you may find you are having memory problems When you change a chart in Online mode a new copy of that chart is downloaded to the PAC Control User s Guide 363 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH THE CONTROL ENGINE control engine but the old one is not deleted After you have made a few online changes these additional chart copies begin to take up memory To avoid memory problems stop the strategy after making several online changes Completely compile and download the strategy and old chart copies will be cleared from memory Checking Communication with the Control Engine You can test communication with the control engine by using the PAC Terminal utility 1 From the Start menu choose Programs gt Opto 22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt Tools gt PAC Terminal The PAC Terminal window appears showing all control engines c
242. dre When you define a table you must specify its length which is how many values the table can store The length of a table is NOT the value of the last index Since indexes start at 0 a table with a length of 100 contains indexes 0 through 99 Table length is limited only by the amount of memory in the control engine For more information on the available memory see If You Have Memory Problems on page 363 Numeric tables store either integer values or floating point numbers but not both in the same table String tables store strings Because pointers can point to any data type for example an I O point a chart or even another table pointer tables can store an assortment of data types Persistent Data Most variables can be either global or persistent in scope Global variables are set to an initial value which you specify during configuration either whenever the strategy is run or whenever it is downloaded Persistent variables however are initialized only when the strategy is first downloaded Numeric variables and tables are initially set to 0 String variables and tables pointer variables and tables and communication handles are initialized as blank or empty The key point about a persistent variable is that its value is saved in the controller s memory it does not get initialized when the strategy is run stopped or started and it does not get initialized if the strategy is modified and downloaded again A per
243. ds 0000 cece cece eee ees 276 Retieving Webpage cunei etie Pre UG MIR ne donne iaaerten aad 276 Setting Timeouts for the HTTP Get and HTTP Post from String Table Commands 279 CONWUOKENGING COMM INA Sadana aA SUR MN usd bed dM RH 280 Commands Relating to Permanent Storage ssssssssssssssse 280 Digital Point Commands 066 ccc ccc cence I e ens 281 States Latches and Counters 0 0 cece cece eee ees 281 ALC MOS SMEs 282 COUNTERS EE LUDUM 282 Quadrature COUNTES re cysteines iesi E E E dud add MN upatU RUM US 283 atalizetS 2s cerbesccterete sisti tesexequa E om coe pda tesi sterben ds 283 PUlSgS cuv EO ARR DERE RE URL ES EVE e LH S eens Bes 283 WALANG XVAL MTM 284 Simulation and Test The Real Use for XVAL and IVAL 000 002 eee 284 Additional Commands to Use with Standard Digital Points 0005 284 Standard Digital Points and OptoScript Code ssssssssssssssssssssesse 285 Reading or Writing Digital Points 0 e 285 Error Handling Corimards deu er dut aa vas Past vb tea ehe ti du e Glendive 286 IO Enabler Sample Strategies sssssssssssssssssss 286 O Unit Cor miarids i a ceo ent nee ex REI Re tbt exec rebates a Pobre 287 Commands Tor Ethernet Link Redundancy 4er eed EE PER EA e Reden 287 Table COMMANGS sac ced cone verteret e bed ra ttti trol erecta Urea 288 I O Unit Event Message Commands cssssssssssssssssssseee e emen 289
244. ds With a Watchdog the I O unit monitors activity on the port If no communication is received for the specified interval the unit assumes a Watchdog state All selected outputs will then immediately go to a specified value as configured in the Watchdog field of the Add Analog Point or Add Digital Point dialog boxes See Adding I O Points on page 122 K Maximum Analog and High Density Digital Scantime Ethernet based O units only You can decrease the analog and high density digital scan time to make sure the scanner isn t slowed or stopped by heavy communication on the network The Default is 1000 msec This feature is also available in PAC Manager where you can fine tune the scan time on the fly NOTE Digital Scantime applies only to non PAC I O units PAC I O units use Digital Feature Resolution Value instead PAC Control User s Guide Go CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O See form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide For more information on optimizing scanner performance see Optimizing Throughput on page 87 in this guide Changing the Baud Rate for Serial I O Units NOTE This section is for PAC Control Basic users If you have the Pro version see Changing the Baud Rate and Mode for Serial I O Units on page 119 If the default baud rate shown in the Add I O Unit dialog box not correct you can change it This baud rate is for communication through the RS 485 port to serial I O units It does not affect other serial
245. e Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Control 0 0 cece cence cece eee e eee e teen eens 94 System Architecture for Ethernet Link Redundancy 0 ccscceeeeeeneneeeeeees 95 Example 1 Ethernet Link Redundancy 200 cceeeeeeeee eee teen teens 95 Example 2 Ethernet Link Computer and Software Redundancy 05 96 Example 3 Ethernet Link Redundancy with Serial I O Units 005 97 Configuring Ethernet Link Redundancy sss 98 Using Strategies with Link Redundancy 0 00 cece cece e cece eens 99 Using Redundant Controllers cessere eere ehe mee erem ee bees 99 Changing or Deleting a Control Engine 0 0 ccc cece ccc cence tence een eee e nes 99 Changing a Control Engine s Definition sss 99 Changing the Control Engine that Receives the Downloaded Strategy 00 Removing a Control Engine s Association with a Strategy ssssssssssssusn 00 Deleting a Control Erigine Tom Your PC oscar rr EE UTR E pO ENN Ei a 00 Inspecting Control Engines and the Queue ssisssssssssssssssssss 01 Inspecting Control Engines in Debug Mode ssssssssssssssss 01 Viewing the Message QUEUE c 5 ia1 cis cane oh terrere Rb ER et RUE ceded 03 Mecsas Queue information o xiasteovadoveieincs vissuti pissed ei EENS Belin 05 Inspecting Control Engines from the PAC Terminal Utility 25 06 Archiving Strategi
246. e Find Next Replace Replace All Close Name Find what All Valid Types aiDoughVesselPressure Replace with All Valid Types aiDoughVesselPressure Or if the item you want to find is listed in the strategy tree such as a variable table or point right click the item and select Replace in the pop up menu z Points TH diDoughL evelSwitch Point name x diChipLevelS witch MEME uu dilnspectionPassF w diEStop in doD oughPressure ic doD oughDispense we doChipDispenseV Modify Configure Delete Find The item appears in the Find and Replace dialog box automatically I Find and Replace Search Scope Global OLocak Alarm Search For Operand O Instruction O Tag Type Find Next Replace Replace All Close Name Find what Digital Input v dChiLevelSwich Replace with All Valid Types x ai16_P Point name 2 Under Search Scope to search the entire strategy click Global To search one chart only click Local and choose the chart name from the drop down list If you are searching a subroutine the search is Local and the subroutine s name is shown 3 Under Search For choose one of the following PAC Control User s Guide 195 LEGACY OPTIONS To search for a chart an I O unit or point or a variable click Operand In the Find Type and Name fields choose the operand you want to replace from t
247. e see page 101 Total memory RAM 32 MB 16 MB Memory used for control 32 MB 10 MB Memory available for strategy and variables 16 MB 5 MB Total battery backed RAM 8 MB 2 MB Battery backed RAM for control 8 MB 1 MB Stores persistent variables variables initialized on download autorun flag and strategy archive Note that strategies are not automatically saved in battery backed RAM Save your strategy to flash memory so it will be available if power is lost to the control engine See Saving a Strategy to Flash on page 165 In general if you experience memory problems you can reduce the amount of memory needed by checking strings and tables for lengths and widths that are longer than necessary If you are using subroutines use the minimum number of variables and size of tables that the process requires Also less memory is used if only one chart in the strategy calls subroutines than if multiple charts call subroutines Since the battery backed RAM contains variables initialized on download if you have a large number of these on a smaller controller you can run out of persistent RAM To avoid this problem use as few persistent variables as possible and initialize all other variables on strategy run Although you can archive the strategy the currently running strategy is not stored in battery backed RAM To make sure the strategy will run after a power loss save the strategy to flash memory after
248. e 77 Using Numeric Literals Here are examples of how to use numeric literals in OptoScript Formats are automatically converted if they don t match the variable type For example if a value of 300 2 were assigned to an integer 32 the value would be converted to 300 Decimal Integer 64 Literals assigned to variables Inte ger 64s have an i64 at the end dVariablel 0164 dVariable2 10164 Decimal Integer 32 Literals assigned to variables nVariablel 0 nVariable2 10 nVariable3 123 dVariable3 123i64 Hexadecimal Integer 32 Literals assigned to variables Hex notation starts with Ox Digits A F Hexadecimal Integer 64 Literals assigned may be upper or lower case to variables nVariablel 0x0 dVariablel 0x0i64 nVariable2 0x10 dVariable2 0x101i64 nVariable3 0x12AB34CD dVariable3 0x1234567890ABCDEFi64 nVariable3 0x12ab34cd Float Literals assigned to variables Float literals may use scientific notation fVariablel 0 0 fVariable2 12 3 fVariable3 123 456 fVariable3 1 23456e2 fVariable3 12345 6e 2 Making Assignments to Numeric Variables Values are easily assigned to variables Simple Integer 32 assignments Simple Integer 64 assignments nl 1 nnl 2164 n2 n1 nn2 nn1 Simple assignments between different data types Simple Float assignments Types will be automatically converted to match t nl 4 0 j nnl nl fl n1 PAC Control User s G
249. e BASIC column is based on Microsoft s Visual Basic language 2 he Pascal column is based on Borland s ObjectPascal language 3 The use of logical statements in BASIC and Pascal is significantly different than in OptoScript and C BASIC and Pascal have a Boolean data type OptoScript and C use integers OptoScript and C treat a zero value as false and a non zero value as true 4 n OptoScript you cannot use a break type of command in a loop OptoScript can test only one case in a switch at a time other languages can test more than one PAC Control User s Guide 387 OPTOSCRIPT COMPARISON WITH STANDARD PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES y ols V ols o s u e qeje e JON V ols fo s u suayoereyo Buys shs l Lhs shs l L s Adouys gs 1 Ls shs 1 1hs olay ys olay s Adoas Olay Ls Olley Lis juswubisse ejqej Buys s ohs s Lolis Adoas s 0 is s ols l ZS S Zs sydogs zs s 7S S jueuiuBisse Buns Oll9u S olay S Adouys Ollgu S Olay S z A x u ph Z A x u ph z 4 x u p Z A x u ph suoisseJdxe oueuinu Teh 02 3 Teh 02 3 eh 02 3 Teh 02 3 e h h i m z h 7 m z 1 T Ih juswubisse ejqey oueunu L oh L
250. e Control Output SNAP AOV 27 10 to 10 VDC 0 100 SY 104 Conveyor Speed Control Output SNAP AOV 27 10 to 10 VDC 0 100 Digital I O 0 Closed SV 100A Pressure Control Valve Output SNAP ODC5SRC 5 60 VDC 1 Open 0 Closed SV 100B Dough Dispense Valve Output SNAP ODC5SRC 5 60 VDC 1 Open 0 OK LAL 100 Dough Level Alarm Input SNAP IDC5D 2 5 28 VDC qin SV 101 Chip Dispense Valve Output SNAP ODCS5SRC 5 60 VDC foe 0 OK LAL 101 Chip Level Alarm Input SNAP IDC5D 2 5 28 VDC PE Wan 0 OK XS 103 Inspection Signal Input SNAP IDC5D 2 5 28 VDC 1 Reject 0 Closed SV 103 Reject Valve Output SNAP ODC5SRC 5 60 VDC 1 Open 0 Stop XS 105 Emergency Stop Input SNAP IDC5D 2 5 28 VDC 1 0K 385 PAC Control User s Guide REQUIRED I O 386 PAC Control User s Guide E OptoScript Language Reference Introduction This appendix includes the following reference information about the OptoScript language OptoScript Comparison with Standard Programming Languages 387 Notes to Experienced Programie Sneen einan i na ea 392 OO SoT OL Lexical RETENE ae ssccds teer danawdeuanedaietanadss Rd dp 394 OptoScript Grammar Syntax Reference 397 OptoScript Comparison with Standard Programming Languages The tables on the following pages compare OptoScript functions and variables to those available in Pascal BASIC and C For more information on using OptoScript see 11 Using OptoScript on page 317 General Notes 1 Th
251. e Edi hee dalidacotehetaateueds Running a Strategy Automatically Autorun s s s cece t teen ees Protecting a Running Strategy sie vss Sa sete tdem vue argue quam eds d QR e qM as STOPPING a Strategy coke eese doble rote epe Debe U kon E PON ERE Gega DEBUGGING ERE TETTE Choosing Debudg beVel ri acp ee eter eng vr pere picked ud Changing Debugger Speed os cou poene dresse qr Rr hee y Putas pr ehe rep rn Pausinig a Chart orSubrOUtlnie od v pei tua ve E Net e eti dit t s Stepping Through a Chart or Subroutine sss Single Stepping ode be a Meet pe quadr due d EK E ade e da AUEOISEEDDIBIO E EE ntes etse ted duet ed Hte m RE Dmm E Setting and Removing Breakpoints 0 c cece cece cence cen eee n eee e ene Managing Multiple Breakpoints 0 0c cece eee eect eee e eee nnn e ees Interpreting Elapsed TIMES ii os ius tete des deren trn ey poke rp ER PARE PI qr QS VIEWING ANG Priritifig 2n iie IR ER Oeo eee be e eeu yeild ER den Viewing Strategy Filename and Path 00 ccc cece eect se Viewing an Individual Chart or Subroutine 00 0 cece eect cence eee Viewing All Chartsin a Strategy se crxdcandsrardgaresanad rags chr rer RE ORI bee Printing Chart or Subroutine Graphics 0 ccc cece cece e Sewing Up the Page sies enia a eA M Lt A tes accel iri Previewing a Flowchart Printout ssessssssssssssss ence nee eee Printing One Chart or Subroutine ccc cece cee er
252. e OptoMMP Protocol Guide e For details on using the Scratch Pad for peer to peer communication with a controller see the controller s user s guide The following page shows a simple example of how Scratch Pad area data exchange would work between two SNAP R series I O systems Create two tables for PAC R A one for its own data that will be shared A Shared Data and another for data it will read from PAC_R_B B Data Also create two tables for PAC R B one for its own data B Shared Data and one for PAC_R_A s data A Data PAC Control User s Guide 291 I O UNIT SCRATCH PAD COMMANDS 292 Suppose PAC_R_A and PAC_R_B are sharing 600 integer elements of the 10 240 integer elements available in the Scratch Pad PAC_R_A writes data from its PAC Control Tables Memory Map Scratch Pad own PAC Control strategy table to its own Scratch Pad A_Shared_Data Integer elements indexes 0 599 0 599 ac area which SPAC_R_B can B_Data Y then read amp Meanwhile PAC_R_B writes PAC Control Tables Memory Map Scratch Pad data from its B Shared Data AD Data table to its Scratch Pad area B Shared Data Integer elements 8 which PAC_R_A reads indexes 0 599 0 599 G amp NOTE When the SNAP R series I O unit is writing to its own Scratch Pad use the loopback IP address 127 0 0 1 This portion of the flowchart in PAC_R_
253. e chart or subroutine open its window 2 Fromthe Chart or Subroutine menu select Print Graphics 3 In the standard Windows Print dialog box do one of the following To print to a printer select the printer page range and number of copies Click OK o print to a file select Print to file and click OK In the dialog box enter the file name and location Your chart or subroutine is printed 186 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Printing All Charts in a Strategy CAUTION You can print all charts included in a strategy but be sure that s what you want to do before you begin You cannot cancel once printing has started 1 2 To print all charts within a strategy open the strategy and check the page setup For help see Setting Up the Page on page 184 Select File gt Print All Graphics Printing begins immediately no Print dialog box appears Messages inform you of each chart s printing progress To skip printing a particular chart click Cancel when its message appears Viewing and Printing Strategy or Subroutine Commands You must be in Configure mode to view and print commands 1 To view all commands instructions in a chart or subroutine open its window and select View Print Instructions from the Chart or Subroutine menu Choose whether to sort instructions by block name or block ID number To view all instructions in an entire strategy select File gt View Pri
254. e chr 13 chr 10 combination each time For a double carriage return linefeed combination use CRLF CRLF NOTE If multiple emails with the similar subject and body text are sent through the same email account the emails may be flagged as SPAM by the email service provider and not be delivered To PAC Control User s Guide 273 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS avoid this you may need to add code to the subject and body text that changes the text dynamically with each new email CRLF chr 13 chr 10 For convenience arrstrServer 0 myaccount speedmail com User Account arrstrServer 1 mypassword Password arrstrServer 2 smtp speedmail com Server arrstrServer 3 587 Port arrstrServer 4 tls JI ssl mpg none arrstrRecipients 0 xyz mymail com Recipient list arrstrRecipients 1 abc yourmail com arrstrRecipients 2 This blank ends the recipient list arrstrRecipients 3 johndoe hismail com This recipient will be ignored arrstrBody 0 Opto Email Example Subject line arrstrBody 1 Hello 4 CRLF Body starts here arrstrBody 2 CREB Could have been combined above arrstrBody 3 arrstrBody 4 arrstrBody 5 arrstrBody 9 arrstrBody 10 arrstrBody 11 arrstrBody 12 arrstrAttach 0 arrstrAttach 1 arrstrAttach 2 arrstrAttach 3 arrstrAttach 4 nj This is an example of an email that can be sent from a PAC control
255. e data click the Print button on the toolbar To save it to a text file click the Save button To search the data click the Search button When finished close the window Viewing and Printing a Cross Reference You can view and print a report of every operand in your strategy or subroutine charts I O units analog points digital points communication handles numeric variables string variables pointer variables numeric tables string tables and pointer tables The operands are cross referenced to the charts blocks and instructions in which they are used 1 To produce a cross reference for a strategy open it and select File gt View Print gt Cross Reference 2 To view a similar report for a subroutine open the subroutine window and select Subroutine gt View Print gt Cross Reference PAC Control processes the data and puts it in the Cross Reference window PAC Control User s Guide 189 VIEWING AND PRINTING TITLE Strategy Cross References STRATEGY Unit 3 Monitoring DATE 10 05 06 TIME 14 47 20 Interrupt Not referenced Morning Chart Referenced Block Referenced Instruction Powerup Start Charts Start Chart Powerup Not referenced ANALOG POINTS Refrigeration Chart Referenced Block Referenced Instruction Morning Check refrigeration Line 3 Morning Check refrigeration Line 11 Morning Check refrigeration Line 11 You may need to resize the window and use the scroll bar to see all t
256. e do not match a new persistent variable is created New persistent variables are initialized to zero and new persistent strings are initialized to NULL empty strings O unit configurations are compared If the I O unit configurations match I O will not be initialized e The Powerup chart is called See also Background Downloading on page 170 Compiling without Downloading Sometimes you may want to compile without downloading just to see if a chart subroutine or strategy compiles correctly You can compile the active chart or subroutine only just the changes you have made to the strategy or the entire strategy Compiling the Active Chart or Subroutine Whenever a chart or subroutine window is open and active you can compile just that chart or subroutine To do so in Configure mode click the Compile Active View button on the toolbar or choose Compile gt Compile the Active Chart The menu option shows the name of the chart or subroutine you are compiling As soon as you choose the menu option the chart or subroutine is saved and compiled You are alerted only if errors are found Compiling Changes Only To compile just the changes since the strategy was last compiled choose Compile gt Compile Changes The menu option shows the name of the strategy you are compiling As soon as you choose the menu option the strategy and all modified charts and subroutines are saved and compiled You are alerted only if
257. e finished sending and receiving data use the command Close Communication to close the communication handle Make sure your strategy receives data promptly Incoming serial communication is buffered up to 127 characters If more than 127 characters come in before the strategy receives them the additional characters are lost See the PAC Control Command Reference or online Help for details on using specific commands Sending an Email Use the email commands to have a strategy send an email automatically from your control engine to recipients via SMTP Send Email sends a text only email Send Email with Attachments sends text and one or more attached files such as log files status reports and images The following examples are but a few of the many possible uses for these commands e Send out updates of a system s status e Havea critical system send hourly status emails if no email arrives after an hour it means something is wrong Send an email in case of an alarm condition e Senda daily status report PAC Control User s Guide 269 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 270 For more information on these commands see form 1701 the PAC Control Command Reference An example strategy is available for free on the Opto 22 website www Opto22 com Go to the product page for the PAC Project Software Suite and click the Downloads tab Also see forms 1700 and 1701 Before you begin e Make sure to assign to the controller an IP
258. e finished sending data use the command Close Communication to close the communication handle If you are sending a large file from the control engine to the device you would need to open up two communication handles an FTP handle just like the one in the example above and a File handle for the file on the control engine Then use the Transfer N Characters command to send the file in chunks For another example see the diagram in A More Complex Example on page 260 which shows how FTP communication handles and file communication handles might be used together See the PAC Control Command Reference or online Help for detailed information on commands Retrieving a Directory Listing The OptoScript code in this example makes use of the command Set Communication Handle Value and the dir option to retrieve a directory listing Sets the value for the communication handle chAFile Configure the chFTP comm handle to log into itself The username and password don t matter they just can t be left empty We ll use the loopback address of 127 0 0 1 so this code is more portable SetCommunicationHandleValue ftp 127 0 0 1 21 noimporta whocares chFTP PAC Control User s Guide COMMUNICATION COMMANDS Opens the communication handle and checks to make sure it opened Open the communication handle log in to the local server nStatus OpenOutgoingCommunication chFTP if nStatus 0 then
259. e numbers used in this example These are numbers represented as strings For the purpose of storing and sending data this is the simplest way to represent them If you need to use them in calculations however you must first convert them to numeric values You can do so in your PAC Control strategy by using a command such as Convert String to Float or Convert String to Integer 32 See String Commands on page 306 for more information 5 It might also be helpful to use the command Send Communication Handle Command which provides the following commands that you can use when accessing files find locates data in the file if each line has a unique identifier getpos returns an integer that indicates the current position in the file setpos lt position gt jumps to the specified position within the file find lt mystring gt strings only searches for the string within the file and returns its location as an offset from the current position in the file The file must have been opened in r read mode 6 Finally close the communication handle by using the command Close Communication A More Complex Example Here s a more complex example which shows the actual OptoScript code In this example someone on the network needs the value of several variables in the PAC Control strategy running on the control engine This person has sent to the control engine via FTP a comma delimited text file ProductRequest txt containing the names of the varia
260. e opens in a text editor Logging is turned off when you open the file View or edit the file as needed and then close it You return to the PAC Message Viewer window To resume logging choose File gt Log to File PAC Control User s Guide 367 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS 368 7 Torename the log file or change its location choose File gt Select Log File Navigate to the location where you want to save the file and enter a name Click OK 8 When you have finished monitoring communication close the PAC Message Viewer window If you leave it open it will normally appear on top of other running programs If you don t want it to appear on top of other programs choose View gt Always on Top to toggle that option Checking File Versions for Opto 22 Software Sometimes problems may be caused by older or misplaced files Product Support may ask you to run OptoVersion to check the versions and paths of your Opto 22 dll and exe files Here s how 1 From the Start menu choose Programs gt Opto 22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt Tools gt OptoVersion OptoVersion Utility Fie Version OptoVersion_ Date Location Click Find to search for Opto 22 files on your hard drives Help Save As 2 In the OptoVersion window click Find The utility searches your hard drive and prints a list of Opto related files found 3 Tosee more information on any file double click its name To sort the list in a different orde
261. e strategy is running To illustrate variables suppose you are regulating the amount of water in a tank You must keep the tank filled beyond a minimum level but you cannot let it get too full You ve already configured the I O points Cc Level_Meter is an analog input point that registers Level_ o the quantity of water in the tank Meter Pump 1 q y Tank Pump 1isa digital output point that turns the pump on or off Drain 1isa digital output point that opens or closes the drain Drain 1 Next you configure variables as places to hold information that these I O points must work with e loavoid constantly polling Level Meter to find out the quantity of water in the tank you create a variable called Tank Level Reading in which to store the level The input point Level Meter is periodically checked and the value of Tank Level Reading updated e To establish the maximum and minimum levels you create variables called Tank Max Level and Tank Min Level The value in Tank Level Reading can be compared to the values in these two variables to determine whether the pump should be turned on or off or the drain opened or closed to maintain the proper level You could create constant values called iterals for the minimum and maximum levels but creating them as variables lets you change their values in Debug mode Types of Data in a Variable A variable stores one of six types of data floating point integer timer s
262. e strategy is stopped and then run again either through the debugger or autorun It also retains its value if power is cycled Note that this choice means the variable is stored in battery backed RAM which is limited in size To keep a variable s current value through both power cycles and strategy download make the variable a persistent variable see the Persistent option below and Persistent Data on page 220 See If You Have Memory Problems on page 363 Persistent Data in the variable will be persistent Pointer variables and timers cannot be persistent For more information see Persistent Data on page 220 The following table shows how your choices about variable initialization and persistence affect what happens to variables applies to all variables and tables except up timers and down timers variable infiialiesd on Set to initial value Set to initial value Set to initial value strategy run default Venable initialized on Retains current value Retains current value Set to initial value strategy download Persistent variable Retains current value Retains current value Retains current value F Initial Value For all variables except pointers up timers and down timers Enter the value to which the variable is to be set initially You can use either decimal or hexadecimal form If you leave this field blank the initial value is set to zero For pointer variables only When you have s
263. e that if you use the Move command any value you set using Set Down Timer Preset Value is overwritten and subsequent Start Timer commands start the timer from the value last sent by the Move command To determine if the timer is finished use the condition Down Timer Expired This condition is true any time the down timer has a value of zero Down Timer Expired is much faster than using the condition Equal to compare the timer to a value of zero The Stop Timer command forces the timer to stop and puts its value at zero If you want to halt the timer and have it maintain its value at the time it was stopped use the Pause Timer command instead When you use Pause Timer you can move the timer s value at the time it was stopped to a variable You can also use the Continue Timer command to resume the timer where it left off Up Timer Operation The Set Up Timer Target Value command sets the time for the Up Timer Target Time Reached condition It does not start the timer however and the timer does not stop when it reaches the target value You must start the up timer from zero by using the Start Timer command If you use the Move command to move a value to an up timer the value you moved becomes the target value and the up timer starts timing immediately Note that the timer does not start from the value you moved it always starts at zero The up timer does not stop when it reaches the target value To determine if the timer has reached it
264. e the Windows Classic theme Otherwise a Microsoft bug with how themes are handled may cause the system to crash PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 1 WELCOME TO PAC CONTROL If you have trouble installing PAC Control contact Opto 22 Product Support at 800 835 6786 or 951 695 3080 System Requirements Installation Requirements Heres what you need to install and run PAC Control If you are using PAC Display please note its requirements in the PAC Display User s Guide e A computer with at least the minimum processor and memory required for your version of Microsoft Windows and Fthernet capability Additional memory may be required for some configurations VGA or higher resolution monitor Super VGA recommended Minimum size 800x600 with small fonts e Mouse or other pointing device e Installed Windows printer optional e Microsoft Windows 8 1 Pro 32 bit or 64 bit Windows 7 Professional 32 bit or 64 bit Windows Vista Business 32 bit or Windows XP Professional 32 bit with Service Pack 2 or higher Windows Server 2008 R2 OptoOPCServer and OptoDataLink only NOTE Other versions of Microsoft Windows server and embedded Windows operating systems are not supported In addition Windows Server 2008 is the only Windows Server version supported and it is only supported by OptoOPC Server and OptoDataLink e Foravailable hard disk requirements please see the PAC Project Release Notes e Compatible control
265. e way to the front Send Backward moves the element one position closer to the back Send To Back moves it all the way to the back Cutting Copying and Pasting Elements You can cut copy and paste most chart or subroutine elements Cut or copied elements are placed on the Windows Clipboard and they can be pasted in the same chart or subroutine in a different chart or subroutine or in a different strategy A connection can be cut or copied but it cannot be pasted unless its original source and destination blocks have also been pasted Block 0 cannot be cut 1 2 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the Select tool is To cut or copy element s click them Press CTRL X to cut or CTRL C to copy You can also select the element s and then choose Edit gt Cut or Edit gt Copy or click the right mouse button and choose Cut or Copy from the pop up menu To paste blocks press CTRL Y select Edit gt Paste or right click anywhere on a chart and select Paste from the pop up menu Text blocks are pasted immediately For action condition or continue blocks a message appears asking if you want to keep the original name of the block being pasted If you paste to a different strategy or to a subroutine PAC Control checks the referenced variables to make sure they match Variables that do not exist are created Variables that exist but are different for example a table with the same
266. ece teen eee eee teens 328 Variable Name CONVENTIONS iori uere ee tee emis T Ds raices adis 329 Using Numeric Literals sssssssssssssssssss I n nets n eens 329 Making Assignments to Numeric Variables 00 000 cece cece teen eee e eee e es 329 USINO STNO S E MT 330 Working With POIDIERIS eb eriste i i aa E E mr EEE AE ETRE 331 Using the amp Character to Point to a Tag s Address cari obese edocet ege in 331 Using the amp Character To Move a Pointer 331 Using the Character To Desretererice a Pointer seis secre rere eer 331 Using the Comparison Operator 00 eect eee eee 332 Determining Which Variable To Use ssssssssssssssssss e 332 FOr MOE INFOFMALON cese eee vore et RE NR ES I TUNRIMUPUHKR REESE ES 332 Working with Tables ore eoe DERE UTR UOT ERSTE Ra Uds 333 OptoScript Expressions and Operators 0 2 0 0 cece eect eee e eee eees 333 Using Mathematical EXPressiONs terri nyers Depot RE RD bade ire DI E ERES 334 USING CorparisonmyjOpelid EOS Qva cm eie ar Re ers d a ve endis digo eoa duda 334 Using Logical Operators 4 rent bte Re guia atienden er vede 335 Using Bitwise Operators 2 2 ccc I nne 336 Precedente acetate Da ndhdd dave T 336 OptoScript Control Str ctUres oe rete bb geb UO pee benda e tee 336 jeu T LULA 337 Switch Or Case Statements s cb vocero doter p DURER RH PORC ESED NiS 337 WhilgEQODS 138 eteies tte vo rti tes dit tede eb der
267. ed into subroutines can take several types Using a string literal you can pass in either a string literal or a string variable Using a numeric literal you can pass in an analog point a digital point an integer variable a float variable or a timer variable If you are familiar with other programming languages literals are similar to passed by value parameters while variables are like passed by reference parameters This flexibility in using literals makes it easier to use a subroutine in multiple strategies For example a literal passed into a subroutine from two strategies might be a float value in one strategy and an analog point in the other Creating Subroutines 348 Tips for Subroutines As a general rule keep subroutines as small as possible to do the job they re intended for Extra variables and unnecessarily large table sizes can affect the memory available for running subroutines PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 12 USING SUBROUTINES A Put Status In parameter appears automatically in every subroutine This parameter is used to let you know whether the subroutine was called successfully in the same way that function commands return a status Make sure that you always check the status code after calling a subroutine Subroutine status codes are 0 Success 67 Out of memory 69 Null object error Make sure you are not passing a pointer that points to null Invalid subroutine or parameters In
268. ed variables a notable difference from common procedural languages Variables are not declared in the programming code but in the PAC Control tag database This is a basic concept of PAC Control and how it ties in with PAC Display but may seem odd to experienced programmers using PAC Control for the first time Also all variables and objects are global Local variables do not exist in PAC Control in the way they do in most procedural languages Subroutines in PAC Control contain local variables but those local variables apply throughout that subroutine Most languages allow you to return from a function before it ends but OptoScript does not The same effect can be achieved in other ways however such as introducing tests into the code Some people argue that this limitation produces better programming because each function has only one exit point PAC Control s Target Audience Because PAC Control is based on OptoControl which was conceived as a simple programming tool for non programmers it is designed to be relatively foolproof Even though OptoScript provides advanced functionality this philosophy also influenced the design of OptoScript OptoScript exists only inside OptoScript blocks which can only exist inside a flowchart Flowcharts are the basis of PAC Control Even an experienced programmer may want to think twice before using OptoScript blocks extensively Many programmers like PAC Control s simplicity not for themselve
269. egral at 0 1 and no derivative constant The arrow shows when a derivative constant of 10 was applied The right side of the plot shows how the derivative constant is keeping the input closer to setpoint 3 TemperatureControl View PID Loop scanning Name TemperatureControl Error None Input 90 02628 Gain 30 Tunel 0 1 Tune D 10 ScanRate 1 4 Mode Auto Enable comm Ye Setpoint 90 Scan Counts 61281 Dutput 66 71089 Plot 1 0 Details Misc Details IVAL Velocity Algorithm Type B 90 50 int 30 00 Output 100 Data gt InputAsxis gt Dutput Axis Time Axis gt 11 Click Save Tuning to save your tuning parameters to the strategy database Changes are lost unless you save them You may wish to save your tuning parameters when you see any improvement in performance even if they are not final PAC Control Professional The Following values will be saved to the strategy database Gain 5 000000 Tune I 10 000000 Tune D 200 000000 Scan rate 3 000000 Feed Forward 0 000000 Feed forward gain 0 000000 Output min change D 000000 Output max change 0 000000 Output when input is under range 0 000000 Output when input is over range 0 000000 Saving these values to the strategy will require the strategy to be compiled and downloaded before entering debug mode again Do you want to continue 12 Click Yes Values are saved to the PAC Co
270. elected the Pointer to Type the drop down list in this field shows all the valid objects for that type that are currently defined in your strategy Choose one or leave the initial value as NULL A NULL value means that the pointer is created but does not initially point to anything PAC Control User s Guide 223 ADDING TABLES For communication handles only Enter a string containing communication parameters in the correct format for the type of communication handle you are using The type for example tcp ftp file must be in lowercase letters and parameters are separated by colons and commas according to the format required See Communication Commands on page 247 for information and examples If you are talking to a serial module use the IP address of the brain the module is attached to and use the serial modules port number according to its position on the rack for example tcp 10 192 55 185 22502 For port numbers see Establishing an Ethernet Connection in form 1191 the SNAP Serial Communication Module Users Guide See also form 1940 TCP and UDP Port Assignments If you are talking to another SNAP PAC brain be aware of port numbers that are reserved for a specific protocol For more information see form 1940 TCP and UDP Port Assignments For other peers on the Ethernet network be aware of port numbers they may use for specific purposes Ports 22000 and 22001 are reserved for the control engine For a list of standar
271. election tools are always available Configuration Mode Debug Mode Online Mode Configure Mode and Online Mode Toolbar The following toolbar appears in configure mode and online mode D dW sEa BK MA a E O O O D t A B Compile view H compile Al In a smaller window the toolbar looks like this Quuxae amp xH4usatucsxmooem5musugoo t 3 New Strategy em Pan Tool SF Open Strategy oO Action Block Tool ld Save Strategy C OptoScript Block Tool Cut Qo Condition Block Tool ga Copy e Continue Block Tool B Paste B Checkpoint Block Tool Delete t Connect Tool Find Text Tool Mo Find and Replace amp Compile Active View PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL l Select Tool Compile All Debug Mode Toolbar The following toolbar appears in debug mode B Run Strategy Stop Strategy Pause Chart 4 Into P Over P Out Autostep lj Breakpoint In a smaller window the debug toolbar looks like this gt BH uniri gt Run Strategy ir Over E Stop Strategy IP Out I Pause Chart amp Auto Step PI Into y Breakpoint Strategy Tree The Strategy Tree opens when you open a strategy and closing it is equivalent to closing the strategy The Strategy Tree shows you all the elements of your strategy control engines flowcharts subroutines varia
272. email server If so you must obtain the root certificate and then register it on your SNAP PAC controller as described below NOTE If you are using a SoftPAC controller root certificates are not needed for sending email because Windows already has those certificates installed Obtaining a Root Certificate for Gmail or Yahoo Mail The root certificates for Gmail and Yahoo Mail are both available on our website www opto22 com Gmail requires the Equifax Secure Certificate Authority root certificate Go to Support gt Downloads and then search for Equifax Root Certificate in Samples and Freeware Yahoo Mail requires the Digicert High Assurance EV Root Certificate Go to Support Downloads and then search for Digicert High Assurance EV Root Certificate in Samples and Freeware Registering a Root Certificate on a SNAP PAC Controller SNAP PAC requires the certificate file to be Base64 ASCII format Sometimes certificate files are binary format which SNAP PAC can t use To tell if a certificate file is Base64 ASCII format e Ifthe file has the PEM extension it is Base64 ASCII e If you open the file in a text editor such as Notepad and you see the line BEGIN CERTIFICATE it is Base64 ASCII PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS SNAP PAC requires no more than one certificate per file You can verify there is only one certificate in a Base64 ASCII file by opening the file in a text
273. empty the fields click Clear F Scaling Scalable modules only optional Use to assign custom units and values to the module For example you could scale the readings of a 10 to 4 10 VDC input point to measure its input as zero liters per second when the real world reading is zero VDC and 1000 liters per second when the real world reading is 5 VDC This example would look like this Add Analog Point Name m In this example units are changed Berton to liters second and lower and upper values are changed Although Type the module has an output of 10 to Module SNAP AOV 27 10 10 VDC Scalable v 10volts the device attached to the point outputs only 0 5 volts Scaling Scaling reflects the device s range Full Range Clamping Actual Scaled In this case Clamping protects the Units VDC VDE VDC VDC device b matha J y ensuring tha Lower 10 0 0 0 out of range voltage will never be Upper 10 5 5 1000 sent to it Custom scaled values can be any floating point value as long as the upper value is higher than the lower value Note that inputs typically have under range and over range capability which means you can specify a lower or upper value beyond the standard value Outputs do not have under range or over range capability To return the units and upper lower values to the defaults for the module click Default G Default To set the initial sta
274. en Makes the Productinfo txt d n SetEndOfMessageTerminator chAFile file comma delimited too Writes the data from the Product Info string table into the Productinfo txt file on the control engine status TransmitStrTable 4 0 Product Info chAFile endif endif Deleting Files and Moving Within Them Another command you ll find useful with file communication handles is Send Communication Handle Command Using these commands you can delete files find a position within the file and jump to a specific position within the file See the PAC Control Command Reference or online Help for details For example in order to to find specific data in a file you can use following commands within the command Send Communication Handle Command 262 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS e find lt mystring gt for strings only Use this command to search for a string within the file and return its location as an offset from the current position in the file The file must have been opened in r read mode e getpos Returns an integer that indicates the current position in the file e setpos position Jumps to the specified position within the file Moving Files via FTP As explained in the previous section Using the Control Engines File System starting on page 257 the control engine s memory includes a substantial area available for file storage You can move files to and fro
275. en Motor 3 0 endif PAC Control User s Guide OPTOSCRIPT CONTROL STRUCTURES Using Bitwise Operators All OptoScript bitwise operators operate on integer values OptoScript supports the following bitwise operators bitand bitwise and bitor bitwise or bitxor bitwise xor bitnot bitwise not lt lt left shift SS right shift Use the bitwise and operator to and together the two values bit by bit nl n2 bitand 2 nl n2 bitand n3 Use the bitwise or operator to or together the two values bit by bit nl n2 bitor 2 nl n2 bitor 0x0002 nl n2 bitor n3 Hex literals can be convenient nil n2 bitand 0x0002 Use the bitwise xor operator to xor together the two val ues bit by bit nl n2 bitxor 2 nil n2 bitxor 0x0002 nl n2 bitxor n3 The eft shift operator shifts the left value s bits to the left by the right value nl n2 2 left shift n2 s value by 2 nli n2 lt lt n3 left shift n2 s value by n3 The right shift operator shifts the left value s bits to the right by the right value nl n2 gt gt 2 II right shift n2 s value by 2 nl n2 gt gt n3 lright shift n2 s value by n3 Precedence For a list of operators from highest to lowest precedence see Operators on page 395 OptoScript Control Structures OptoScript provides the following structures to control the flow of logic in the code 336 e If Statements below e Swi
276. en you have finished inspecting the I O unit click Close Inspecting Digital I O Points You can inspect a digital point s data change its status or set its internal values or external values in Debug mode To monitor the point in a watch window see page 157 To change the point follow these steps 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click the I O point on the Strategy Tree Or double click an I O unit in the Strategy Tree click the Points Compact tab of the Inspect I O Unit Dialog box and then double click the I O point The small dialog box that appears shows the IVAL and XVAL The XVAL or external value is the real or hardware value as seen by the I O unit This value is external to the control engine The VAL or internal value is a logical or software copy of the XVAL that is in the control engine The IVAL may or may not be current since it is updated to match the XVAL only when a strategy in the control engine reads or writes to an I O point 2 Sprinkler Switch h sc If the digital point is configured with a counter the counter values appear instead of the point s Status 3 4 DO Switch scanning VAL o XvAL 4 m Maximize 2 To change the value or to view more information click the Maximize button The title bar shows the name of the digital point and whether scanning is occurring PAC Control User s Guide oa Mw OR CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O
277. eneo pem Ix PERS A eU AST EE nU COR ees 212 Changing an Element Back to the Defaults sss 212 Opening Saving and Closing Charts sss 212 Openinga Chart sausas deen cre eco does Hae er edd dat eri pes e ed etd 212 SAVING ACMA eana Aa aE atd hile Ee ad d tM retenti 213 dosing a chart sssseserque edad date cameadonsand Ue son E Ee E acdc 213 Copying Renaming and Deleting Charts lsssssssssssssssss 213 COPYING a CMAN uu eet eode e dst vestis ieri eredi e quee eredi en 213 Reriaming a Chart axem ts EEUU RU P EMT EDS 214 Deleting a Chala cus ssec ei oer e Pee dt ie Vibes EE deos bir e ea tbid 214 Printing Ghaltssss iss da biete ine Cerise Roe ds de qid nid b de oids iria obe 215 Exporting and Importing CHAMMS 1 scere ree ere ERR TEE E iai 215 FXportilg a Chart ceser ond ch trten tenir testetur on coke tex tede rode quete tais 215 Importing Chart acere ouest PUD US DOR IEEE DU ER ERR HR EO es 216 Chapter 9 Using Variables and Commands eee 217 VOCE o MR ODER MIT RU TREND E ER 217 TIS Gael serisini cearense ienten e Dibdus dresden iade Ron 217 About Variables saihe rin D eX PET meunhdar ane y OPEP Ju ELO E Oed tip n 217 Types of Dataima Varia BIE usare qu sorei sancii yat da D CICER GR cun 218 Variables iniPAG Control eus pr EROS OBI UOTE REO UE REIR 219 Table Variables as des died acacia Sh rtt antie Deer ete et aree dia ge edu edes n 219 Persistent Data rsss esu Gl certs u
278. engine and I O unit s as shown in the following section Compatible Control Engines and I O Units The following control engine and I O unit combinations are compatible with PAC Control Basic and PAC Control Professional as shown SNAP PAC S series controller SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC R1 W SNAP PAC R2 SNAP PAC R2 W SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB1 W SNAP PAC EB2 SNAP PAC EB2 W SNAP PAC SB1 SNAP PAC SB2 SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC R1 W SNAP PAC R2 SNAP PAC R2 W SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB1 W SNAP PAC EB2 SNAP PAC EB2 W SNAP PAC SB1 SNAP PAC SB2 SNAP PAC R series controller SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC R2 SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB2 SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC R2 SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB2 PAC Control User s Guide INSTALLING PAC CONTROL SoftPAC controller SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC R1 SNAP PAC R1 W SNAP PAC R1 W SNAP PAC R2 SNAP PAC R2 SNAP PAC R2 W SNAP PAC R2 W SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB1 SNAP PAC EB1 W SNAP PAC EB1 W SNAP PAC EB2 SNAP PAC EB2 SNAP PAC EB2 W SNAP PAC EB2 W Wired Wireless PACs and I O can be used on a wired Ethernet network or on a wireless LAN Important Note on Disk Drives Opto 22 applications including PAC Control perform best when using files from a local hard disk Network drives may be used but performance may suffer and depends upon the speed and reliability of the network While it may be possible to use other drive types such as floppy disks key chain USB dri
279. ens listing all configured PID loops Remember that the number of PID loops available depends on the I O unit PAC Control User s Guide 139 INSPECTING I O IN DEBUG MODE I Configure PID Loops 1 0 Unit Mixed 1D Unit Y Type SNAP PAC R1 Name Setpoint Output Mode Enable Temperature_ Over_T os Oven Autom Ena Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Up and down arrows PID loops are scanned by the I O unit in the order that they appear in this list 2 To move the PID loop to a different position on the I O unit use the up and down arrows in the dialog box 3 Tochange the PID loop s configuration double click its name to open the Edit PID Loop dialog box Change the fields as necessary For help in completing the fields see Adding a PID Loop on page 135 Deleting a PID Loop Only PID loops that have a reference count of zero can be deleted Be careful when deleting PID loops you cannot undo a deletion 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode On the Strategy Tree expand the I O units folder until you see the PID loop you want to delete 2 Right click the name of the PID loop and choose Delete from the pop up menu The PID loop is deleted You can also delete a PID loop in the Configure PID Loops dialog box by highlighting it and clicking Delete Inspecting I O in Debug Mode 140 You may want to inspect or change I O while you are runnin
280. enseValve inm doChipDispenseValve T doRejectValve PES ao venT emperatureContrc TUE CE 499719 813 Sec la Ci Shortcuts EA anfinnveunrSneedControl i Jb Next 4 Prev Watch Window nCookie Counter Integer 32 Variable 02 diInsp a Digital Input On Latch Off Latch PAC Control Ready LN DEG On latch reset to Off Counter decreased by one 21 Click the Auto Step Chart button to go back to auto stepping The counter does not decrease again because the on latch is no longer set But the counter won t increase until we start the Dough Chip Control chart again 22 Click the Dough Chip Control chart tab Click the Pause Chart button to unpause the chart Verify that Step On changes to Step Off in the chart status bar The watch window shows the nCookie Counter value going up again PAC Control User s Guide CLOSING THE STRATEGY AND EXITING Closing the Strategy and Exiting Before we finish this tutorial you may want to explore the sample strategy on your own You can double click items in the Strategy Tree or open up other charts to see what they do You can also double click command blocks to see what they contain 1 What s Next When you re ready to stop click the Stop Strategy button in the toolbar This action prevents the strategy from running continuously unattended on the control engine A dialog box asks if you are sure y
281. ently than variables used by more than one chart or process especially if you have a large chart and want to separate these types of variables For variables used only in a table you can include the table name in the variable name For example you might use the name Fail Count in Config Values for a variable to be used in a table named Config Values The following table shows suggested notation for use in PAC Control integer 32 variable n pointer variable p integer 32 variable used as Boolean b pointer table pt integer 32 table nt digital I O unit dio integer 64 variable nn mixed l O unit mio integer 64 table nnt analog input point ai float variable f analog output point ao float table ft digital input point di down timer dt digital output point do up timer ut chart cht string variable S communication handle cmh string table st In I O point names you may want to indicate the point s function the state of the device when the point is active its location or a schematic reference You can abbreviate names of familiar devices and write out less familiar names Include the information you need in the order in which it will be most useful to you e Heater Switch You have only one heater Htr6 Switch SW23B You have many heaters and the schematic reference is needed Cnywr Speed Encoder BldgA You want all conveyors to appear together BldgA Cnvyr Speed Encoder You wa
282. ents si e e tree a dese bed y qe dee va een dub dele Qe de 202 Chiatt COmpOHernts seo gone d ded Ton Re HR ag OUR RU d OU o UO RR RR Ser 202 Using the Drawing Toolbar sessi c eee e od a eee e ed dere dc a 203 Changing the Appearance of Elements in a Chart Window 00 cece eee 203 Configure Chart Properties Dialog Box iss 204 Changing Existing Elements to Match New Defaults sss 205 Drawing BIOGKS 22 urere ette acr eig eu dedi ud aenea ted dvds 205 Naming Blocks sssssssssssssssse I m ee 206 Renaming Blocks i t b ce t ede eu e Pa a RE ducti aa 206 Connecting BlOCKs sa da arp t E e RO SERERE ACA PC oceania ave 207 Action Blocks and OptoScript Blocks 2 0 0 0 ccc cece ec c eee c eee een e eens 207 COMITIOMABIOCKS EETA TP rr 208 Adding cc MEUM 209 Editing TEXT rM 209 Selecting Elements uero eem em es tempere pee fen E n i E CS 210 Mowvina Elerients see etae eena a a aED po EE EEn ds 210 Moving Elements in Front of or Behind Other Elements Changing Z Order 211 Cutting Copying and Pasting Elements 2 2 2 2 ccc cece cece e eee 211 Deleting Plemet ed sri cash ere eden e ee ben chad someon ver bb vemenedades 211 Charging Element Color arid Size 41 estet eerte ettet tie Pe Rd es 212 Resizing Blocks or l ext Blocks das uerb cement ete tabe exce ieee hae eager ad Ores 212 Changing Block COlOrs lt o ioooe ve toptbe vere Unt ba velas eic Rrte be eher US 212 Changing ext s even eset t
283. er s Guide 325 OPTOSCRIPT FUNCTIONS AND COMMANDS OptoScript Functions and Commands 326 Since functions in OptoScript are provided by commands almost identical to the standard commands in PAC Control you have the same complete range of functions There are no additional functions for OptoScript code and you cannot make your own functions Standard and OptoScript Commands In many cases you can easily recognize OptoScript commands because they are almost the same as standard PAC Control commands All spaces are removed from the OptoScript commands however and in some cases words in the command are abbreviated or left out Commands are case sensitive Here are some examples of the same commands in PAC Control and in OptoScript Get Counter GetCounter Set Down Timer Preset Value SetDownTimerPreset Delay mSec DelayMsec Convert Float to String FloatToString Get Number of Characters Waiting GetNumCharsWaiting Some commands are built into OptoScript functionality Some of these have OptoScript commands and some do not you can use either the built in functionality or the OptoScript commana if it exists Here are some examples Move item1 value Add 1 2 Less lt value1 lt value2 Turn On TurnOn non zero digital3 1 Turn Off TurnOff 0 digital3 0 Comment Single Line Il I comment Set Nth Character SetNthCharacter s1 5 c See Appendix E for a ta
284. er you add do the following steps NOTE What you enter here appears in the Add Instruction dialog box when the subroutine is called from within the strategy See page 353 for an example a Highlight the first empty line below the Put Status In parameter and click Add to open the Add Subroutine Parameter dialog box 1 Add Subroutine Parameter Prompt Name Type b In the Prompt field enter the prompt text you want to show in the Add Instruction dialog box in the strategy This field is limited to 16 characters c Inthe Name field enter the name of the parameter the argument as it will be referred to in the subroutine This name is used within the subroutine only d From the Type drop down list choose the type of item to be passed into the subroutine Use variables for values the subroutine changes passed by reference use literals for values the subroutine uses but does not change read only or passed by value 352 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 12 USING SUBROUTINES e Click OK The parameter appears in the Configure Subroutine Parameters dialog box above the Put Status In parameter I Configure Subroutine Parameters Subroutine Name Group Variable Increase Notification Subroutines Subroutine s OptoS cript Name Variable Increase Notification Refe rence Comment count t Prompt Varia Counter down arrow buttons 6 Repeat
285. eration on the pointer that you could perform on the object the pointer points to e Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables During Strategy Download on page 226 When you are adding table variables in PAC Control you can set all table elements to one initial value Or you set each individual table element to its own value by creating an initialization file to download with your PAC Control strategy e 12 Using Subroutines on page 347 You can use subroutines that are independent from strategies but that can be called from any strategy Subroutines offer two ways to work with variables and other logical elements they can be passed in or they can be local to the subroutine e Configuring PID Loops on page 134 A proportional integral derivative PID control system often referred to as a PID loop monitors a process variable compares the variable s current value to a desired value a setpoint and calculates an output to correct error between the setpoint and the variable Because the calculation is complex it is done by a mathematical formula or algorithm that you can then adjust tune for each PID loop PAC Control Terminology action block Action blocks are rectangular blocks in a flowchart that contain one or more instructions actions that do the work of the strategy such as turning things on or off setting variables and so on Several instructions can be placed in one action block Action bl
286. errors are found PAC Control User s Guide 169 COMPILING AND DOWNLOADING 170 Compiling the Entire Strategy To compile the entire strategy including all charts and subroutines in Configure mode click the Compile All button amp on the toolbar or choose Compile gt Compile All The menu option shows the name of the strategy you are compiling As soon as you choose the menu option the entire strategy is saved and compiled The Compile Progress dialog box appears You are alerted if errors are found Downloading Only If your strategy has been compiled you can download it again quickly Downloading again is useful if you want to run your strategy from a clean slate by reinitializing any variables that are set only on a strategy download To download a strategy that has already been compiled you must be in Debug mode Choose Control Engine gt Download Strategy The Download to dialog box appears and your strategy is downloaded Background Downloading The Background Downloading feature allows you to download an alternate strategy to a controller while the active strategy currently on the controller continues to run With two different strategies downloaded to the controller you can switch rapidly from one strategy to the other This allows you to e Download a new or updated strategy to the controller and then optionally run it with minimal downtime For larger strategies downtime is dramatically reduced e Down
287. ers and other configured items in your strategy as well as charts have usually been created before you use them in OptoScript code Check their exact spelling including underscores and upper and lower case to make sure they are correct in the code The easiest way to make sure spelling is correct is to enter the variable or other item by clicking the Insert Variable button in the OptoScript Editor and choosing the item from the drop down lists Ifthe item has not yet been configured or created use the normal PAC Control methods to do so For help see the chapters in this guide on configuring I O and using variables Troubleshooting Syntax Errors Check for the following common syntax errors Missing Code Check for obvious errors first For example make sure nothing essential has been left out of or unnecessarily added to a statement iTotal x y iTotal x y Z Last operator missing a variable iTotal x y z iTotal x y Z Semicolon missing sGreeting Hello sGreeting Hello First quotation mark missing on the string iTime Get Hours iTime GetHours pides one add x 1 x y x 1 x y Parentheses mismatched last half missing Check to make sure operators are used correctly You may want to review OptoScript Expressions and Operators on page 333 If you are using control structures such as loops or if statements especially if they are nested make su
288. ers can point to Integer Variable snappen Fost ert SNAP PAC R2 ngrana Digital Input Pointer Variable 5e SNAP PAC EB1 Digital Output Analog Input Down Timer Variable SNAP PAC EB2 Chart Counter Analog Output Up Timer Variable Quadrature Counter SNAP PACCO Integer Table aa asus SNAP PAC SB2 3 Float Table String Table Communication Handle PAC Control User s Guide 303 POINTER COMMANDS Advantages of Using Pointers For certain types of operations pointers can speed up programming and make the strategy more efficient Pointers are usually recommended only for experienced programmers however because their misuse can result in unpredictable behavior They also complicate strategy debugging If you use too many pointers it s easy to lose track of what s pointing to what If you choose to use pointers be sure you use the text tool to document your charts in detail Referencing Objects with Pointers There are two types of pointers pointer variables and pointer tables Pointer Variables pointer variable contains a single pointer to a single object You can set the initial value for a pointer variable when you configure it or you can set it later by using the command Move to Pointer Once the initial value is set you can reference it using any command you would use for that type of object For example if the pointer points to a string variable you can use any command for the pointer that yo
289. es Int64Literal 0 xX hex digit i64 Hexadecimal Integer 64 Good examples 0x12ABi64 OX12aBi64 0x0i64 Bad examples x123ABCi64 0123ABCi64 0164 digit i64 non zero digit i64 Decimal Integer 64 Good examples 0164 123i64 7890164 Bad examples 123ABCi64 FloatLiteral digito Ee 4 opt digit opc digit Float Literal Good examples 1 0 2 3 1 2e6 1 2e 6 1 2e6 Bad examples 1 1 e7 1e7 StringLiteral 551 oa String Literal Confined to single line Good examples abc def Bad examples abc def PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX E OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE NumericVariable StringVariable ChartVariable DigloUnitVariable MixedloUnitVariable PointerVariable NumericTable String Table PointerTable CommunicationHandle letter letter digit _ lo A letter followed by mix of letters digits and underscores The name must be found in the PAC Control database Good examples MyInt MyInt2 My Int 3 Bad examples MyInt OMyInt CommandProcedure CommandProcedureNoArgs CommandFunction CommandFunctionNoArgs letter letter digit _ lo A letter followed by mix of letters digits and underscores The name must be a built in command or subroutine Good examples Sine Sine2 Sine 3 Bad examples Sine OSine Keywords Reserved Words if then for to else ste elseif RA endif Operat
290. es not have to be turned off and if communication is lost to the point the point does not remain on PAC Control User s Guide 283 DIGITAL POINT COMMANDS Pulse Measurement commands measure pulses on digital input points For details see the specific command in the PAC Control Command Reference or online Help IVAL and XVAL All I O points have two associated values XVAL and IVAL If you are using PAC Control in Debug mode to manipulate I O values or to disable an I O point or I O unit you need to understand these values XVAL The external value or XVAL is the real or hardware value as seen by the I O unit This value is external to the control engine and strategy logic IVAL The internal value or IVAL is a logical or software copy of the XVAL that is in the control engine The IVAL may or may not be current since it is updated to match the XVAL when strategy logic accesses the I O point If the IVAL does not match the XVAL a mismatch just means that your strategy logic is not reading from or writing to the I O point in question at the moment Simulation and Test The Real Use for XVAL and IVAL To test output performance you may want to force an XVAL for a specific output to a particular value If the program is actively writing to the output you need to disable the output to do so If the program is stopped there is no need to disable it To test program logic you may want to force an IVAL for a specific
291. es on the Control Engine isses 06 Restoring Archived Strategies from the Control Engine 00 sss 08 Moving Control Engines from One PC to Another 0 0 cece cece cece ees 09 Downloading Files Using PAC Terminal csse 10 Chapter 6 Working with 1 0 44d Vox oaa RREREREERERSERXYATAR UA A IRE AGO 113 Jure ree M HL Woe hod hi e ee ER GbE ei a 3 this CNA DUCT tact cos hha dead awen eee cate dome commanded idaieamiad ataamada nee 3 Choosing a Configuration TOO iode sacer tide Sanddadeariadautawedads begin TS 3 Importing I O Configuration into PAC Control 0 0 0 cece ccc eee cece eee e eens 5 Copying VO Configurations x 2 tae titia eti tu eid de bbb cda deed 5 Creating the Configuration Export File sss 5 Importing the Configuration File sss 6 Agdirig and O UNI we sate epo etre rtp ehe eee peer b epp seas 6 Agd O Unit Dialog BOX iii tiere hb cete raed Ohr ROO RP E QE 7 Changing the Baud Rate for Serial I O Units ssssssssssssssss e 9 Changing the Baud Rate and Mode for Serial I O Units isses 9 Tuning the I O Unit Timeout Value for Ethernet I O Units 00 eee eee eee 20 Changing Configured I O Units iiis ttt t teenies 21 Deleting Configured VO Units 2 3 55 39 9 e ope Saver tO dE pr dag eden ed 21 PING Volt Pei sue susct rte hve eed dE van bus dam une dU bars deu e etie 22 Adding a Digital VO POINT 214 4 to ote RM ua zd dre Qe oa e isch e a 22 Add Digital Point Dialog
292. escription For animation in io Desired dough ve For ramping the c Dough vessel pre For animation in io Pho Cn no Se NHN In the Type drop down list choose the type of table variable you want to add If you are adding the table variable to a subroutine select Subroutine in the Scope drop down list To add a new table variable click Add The Add Variable dialog box appears Add Variable Name Description Type Sting v StingWidh 1 Initialization Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run O Persistent Initial Value 1 The figure above shows the dialog box as it appears for string tables Fields are slightly different for other table variables Complete the fields as described in Add Variable Dialog Box on page 222 NOTE If you need to set individual table elements to differing values initially you can do so in the Powerup chart Ifyou need to use an initialization file to initialize the values on strategy download see the next section Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables During Strategy Download To have data in the table be persistent select Persistent Pointer tables cannot be persistent For more information see Persistent Data on page 220 Click OK The Add Variable dialog box closes and the new table variable appears in the Configure Variables dialog box PAC Control User s Guide 225 SETTI
293. ex Error Handler Simple Sinitvariables CjieCookies O OptoScript Examples C SEM File name Save as type PAC Control Strategy Files idb v 4 Type My Cookies to replace New Folder Double click the folder to open it 5 Click in the File name field and type cookies The dialog box now looks like this Save Strategy As Save in CJ My Cookies File name Cookies Save as type PAC Control Strategy Files idb 6 Click Save The strategy is saved as Cookies in the My Cookies directory Examining the Strategy Briefly our cookie factory includes a tank of pre mixed cookie dough a tank of chocolate chips an oven a visual inspection station a conveyor belt and some compressed air to blow rejected cookies off the belt The process starts when a ball of dough drops on the belt It moves along under the chip tank to receive some chips and then it moves into the oven to be baked The next stop is an inspection where rejected cookies are blown off the belt and good cookies move along to shipping Should anything go wrong we also have some alarms built in to stop the process when necessary The best way to see all the components of the strategy is to look at the Strategy Tree The Strategy Tree As with any window in PAC Control you can move the Strategy Tree window by clicking and dragging the title bar you can minimize maximize or dock it by cli
294. example a temperature sensor analog input a thermostat analog input and a heater control analog output are components of one system controlled by a PID loop This guide assumes that you are already familiar with using PIDs PID calculations are complex and the physical qualities of systems suitable for PID control differ greatly This guide includes only basic information for configuring PIDs SNAP PAC I O units support 96 PID loops PIDs can control isolated systems or be part of cascaded systems where one loop controls the setpoints or input variables of others For maximum flexibility any PID input setpoint or output can be determined by PAC Control commands PIDs and Strategies The PID operates at the I O unit independently of the controller However the controller supports logic commands to read and write various PID parameters and modes Once configured and initialized a PID operates until the I O Unit loses power When you change PID configuration in PAC Control remember that changes are not written to the I O unit until the strategy is downloaded and run For a SNAP PAC I O unit be sure to save PID configuration to flash memory following instructions for the I O unit PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O If you subsequently download a different strategy to the control engine you ll receive an error message 700 reminding you that a PID loop is still running and that it may conflict with t
295. existing charts as well as to new ones click All charts in D e To change the chart background color from the default of white click the Background Color box Choose a new color from the Color dialog box e Tochange the chart s grid color from the default of black click the Grid Color box The grid and block ID numbers are displayed by default To remove them click Display Grid or Display Block ID s to remove the check mark e Toenable or disable smooth scrolling in a flowchart click Smooth Scrolling this option is disabled by default B Action Block Parameters Define the appearance of action blocks condition blocks OptoScript blocks and continue blocks in this area These changes affect new blocks only not existing blocks To change existing blocks see Changing Existing Elements to Match New Defaults below e In the Width and Height fields type the block size in pixels For action and continue blocks the default width is 96 and the default height is 48 the minimum parameters are 48 width and 32 height For condition blocks the default height is 64 Note that the numbers you enter are PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 8 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS rounded down to be evenly divisible by 16 for example if you enter 81 click OK and then reopen the dialog box the parameter reads 80 e To change the color of the blocks from the default click the Color box e To change block name text formatting
296. f PAC Control you can safely ignore the message and click Yes E PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL The Cookies strategy opens and the PAC Control window now shows the Cookies strategy yours may look somewhat different IPAC Control Basic File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help TE 4 0550 AY 2k Gweoeret eae 8s Cookies E DR Control Engines Subroutines Included amp E Charts E Variables E C3 Numeric Variables String Variables Pointer Variables IE Communication Handles IE Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables c 1 0 Units Configure NUM Saving the Strategy Now let s save the strategy to a new name so we can change it while leaving the original intact 1 Select File gt Save Strategy As Save Strategy As Save in CJ ioCookies Fi Cookies idb File name Save as type PAC Control Strategy Files idb Since each PAC Control strategy must be located in its own directory you cannot save the strategy to a new name in its current location Click the Up One Level button f to move up to the Examples directory Click the Create New Folder button The new folder appears in the list PAC Control User s Guide E EXAMINING THE STRATEGY Save Strategy As Save in CJ Control Pro Examples Error Handler Compl
297. f the table it is in and the index where it can be found The length of the table is the number of strings it can hold Because string table indexes start with zero indexes can range from zero to the table length minus one The width of each string in the table is the same The length of each string can vary from zero to the configured width of the table String Data Extraction Examples To extract various pieces of information from a string use the command Find Substring in String Consider the following example 012 3 4 5 6 String 1 O P T O One way to get two separate pieces of information from this string is to get characters 0 3 and then get characters 5 and 6 as shown in the following examples Find Substring in String Example 1 String 1 string variable Start At 0 integer literal Number Of 4 integer literal Move To Sub String1 string variable width 5 Results in Sub String1 O P T O Find Substring in String Example 2 String 1 string variable Start At 5 integer literal Number Of 2 integer literal Move To Sub_String2 string variable width 5 Results in 012 3 4 Sub String2 2 2 PAC Control User s Guide 309 STRING COMMANDS 310 String Building Example Strings are assembled using commands Move String Append Character to String and Append String to String Consider the fol
298. firmware files configuration data or strategy files saved to flash they affect only files at the root of the control engine s file system For more information on the file system see Using the Control Engine s File System on page 257 For the specifics on individual commands see online help or the PAC Control Command Reference CAUTION Since these commands write to flash memory use them sparingly within your strategy and make sure they do not end up in a loop You can literally wear out flash memory if you save to it or erase it too many times 280 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Digital Point Commands The following commands are used with digital points Basic Commands Off On Turn Off Turn On Totalizers Get Off Time Totalizer Get On Time Totalizer Get amp Restart Off Time Totalizer Get amp Restart On Time Totalizer Counters Clear Counter Get Counter Get amp Clear Counter Start Counter Stop Counter Period and Frequency Get Frequency Get Period Get Period Measurement Complete Status Get amp Restart Period Set TPO Percent Set TPO Period Latches Clear All Latches Clear Off Latch Clear On Latch Get Off Latch Get On Latch Get amp Clear Off Latch Get amp Clear On Latch Off Latch Set On Latch Set Pulses Generate N Pulses Get Off Pulse Measurement Get Off Pulse Measurement Complete Status Get amp Restart Off Pulse Measurement Get O
299. formation Recipients Message Body and Attachment File Names NOTE An additional example chart is available for free on the Opto 22 website www Opto22 com Go to the product page for the PAC Project Software Suite and click the Downloads tab PAC Control User s Guide 271 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 272 X 5 File Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help amp x Ce 50502 tae x 08 055090o0 9s4u E 3 SMTP E amp Control Engines a PAC RI C Subroutines Included E y Charts amp ds Powerup Subroutines Used c Variables E Cy Numeric Variables Dal nResult Ej C3 String Variables CRLF E Pointer Variables E Communication Handles O Numeric Tables E C3 String Tables ET amsti ttach E arstBody pl arstrRecipients aH arstrServer C3 Pointer Tables 1 0 Units T 3 Shortcuts 100 v lt b Next Prev PAC Control Ready Configure NUM The strategy is comprised of only one chart the Powerup chart which has two OptoScript blocks Init Tables and SMTP Send The first OptoScript block Init Tables contains the email body The second one SMTP Send uses the Send Email with Attachments command to send the email and attachments To send an email and attachments using the example 1 Create a new strategy and then choose Configure gt Control Engine to configure a control engine
300. formation tab and then click the Set button under Stored Configuration Flash EEPROM The following parameters are saved e O module configuration e O module configuration e Initial output settings e Comm link watchdog time e Comm link watchdog time e Temperature conversion type e Input offset and gain settings NOTE Use this option to protect the I O unit configuration information from being lost when the power is turned off You should save the configuration settings to flash when they are final Saving to flash memory this way is the same as saving to flash by other methods such as using PAC Manager see the PAC Manager Users Guide and is preferable to using the command Write I O Unit Configuration to EEPROM To reset saved parameters to their powerup default values click the Clear button To change the I O unit s current status click an arrow in the Enable Comm field Then click Apply Yes on a green background means enabled No on a red background means disabled If you change it the background turns magenta until you click Apply PAC Control User s Guide 141 INSPECTING I O IN DEBUG MODE 142 5 To view an individual I O point highlight its name in the list To add an O element to a watch window click Add Watch See page 157 To open an inspection window to change an I O point click View Then see Inspecting Digital I O Points below for the I O point you are changing analog or digital 6 Wh
301. g changing compression 174 downloading without using PAC Control 172 files 381 including subroutine 355 opening 162 replacing elements 194 restoring archive from control engine 108 running 26 automatically 175 manually 175 saving 163 saving to flash EEPROM 165 searching 192 starting automatically 229 stopping 175 transfer to another PC 109 viewing all operands 189 viewing variables and I O 188 Strategy Tree PAC Control User s Guide definition 55 docking 59 icons 56 string adding control characters 308 building example of 310 commands 306 330 equivalents in Visual Basic and C 311 convert to string commands 312 data extraction example of 309 definition 49 examples 308 330 in OptoScript 330 length and width 307 quotation marks 330 variable adding 221 variable definition of 219 string handling 320 string table adding 224 example 308 subroutine adding commands instructions 354 adding local variables 354 auto stepping 179 breakpoints 180 calling from a chart 356 compiling 355 configuring parameters 350 configuring parameters example 353 creating 348 349 data types 348 debugging 358 definition 347 including in strategy 355 list of files in 382 parameters 347 pausing 177 printing commands 187 printing graphics 184 saving 355 searching 192 stepping through 178 tips 348 viewing 358 viewing all operands 189 viewing variables 188 Switch amp Run 169 Switch statement 323 337 switching strategie
302. g mode In the PAC Control window you ll notice that the Debug toolbar is now available The mode is shown at the bottom of the main window The open chart window shows that the strategy is stopped as shown in the following figure PAC Control User s Guide RUNNING THE STRATEGY Debug toolbar buttons IPAC Control Professional Dough _Chip_Control DER This chart drops the dough and chips on the conveyor belt amp Cookies The belt must be running between 50 and 65 of max rpm amp E Control Engines P 4 Cookie Controller Subroutines Included Charts E 05 Alarms Q5 Dough Chip Control D Dough_Vessel_Pressure_ Interrupt E B Oven_Inspection_Control B Powerup Variables This chart runs E E Numeric Variables continuously once the ng bChipDispenseValve program has been started 8 bChipLevelSwitch gal bD oughDispense al gal bDoughLevelS witch Drop the dough pal bDoughPressureCont 8 bEStop 3 The Powerup chart starts this chart ionPassFailS bReiectValve 1 G Shortcuts gt 7 2 2 v JLNext 4 Prev Mode C Program Files Opto22 PAC Project 8 1 Display Pro Examples ioCookies Contral Cookies Running the Strategy In Debug mode we re going to run our strategy and examine it We ll see how the strategy run affects variables how the command blocks are executed and so on The first chart
303. g tools such as stepping and breakpoints are in effect The chart or subroutine must be running in order to use these tools Choosing Debug Level You can choose one of two levels of debugging e Minimal Debug lets you step from block to block but does not allow you to step into blocks Less information is downloaded to the control engine for minimal debugging so downloading the strategy takes less time and less control engine memory The strategy also runs slightly faster e Full Debug lets you step into blocks so you can step through each instruction in an Action or condition block and through each line of OptoScript code in an OptoScript block If you are using OptoScript you will probably want to spend the additional time to download your strategy at the full debug level To change debug level make sure you are in Configure mode From the Configure menu choose Minimal Debug or Full Debug The next time you enter Debug mode the strategy will be compiled and downloaded with the new level Changing Debugger Speed Before you enter Debug mode you may want to consider changing debugger speed Depending on the number of charts and windows open in PAC Control and depending on other processing your computer is doing at the same time you may find that running the debugger affects the computer s or the control engine s performance of other tasks If necessary you can slow down the debugger by increasing the time delay between debugging c
304. g your strategy in Debug mode This section shows how to view information about I O and make changes while the strategy is running To monitor several I O elements at once in a window you can save with your strategy see Using Watch Windows for Monitoring on page 157 Inspecting I O Units and Saving Settings to Flash 1 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click an I O unit in the Strategy Tree PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O The Inspect I O Unit dialog box appears showing information about the unit and its points The title bar shows the name of the I O unit and whether scanning is occurring 4 Mixed IO Unit scanning Name Mixed IO Unit Error None Enable Comm Yes Points Detailed Points Compact PID Loops Information Module Chit Name Type IAL L3 00 SNAP IDC5D 0 Emerge D Input 1 POS D Input 2 Freezer D Input 3 Photo S D Input BB 01 SNAP ODCSSRC 0 Alarm D Output 1 Freezer D Output 2 Inside L D Output 3 Outside D Output ud 02 SNAP ADV 27 0 Fuel_Dis A Output 1 0 r3 03 SNAP AICTD Store T A Input 0 0000 78 3616 NOTE Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost To save the current configuration of the I O unit to its EEPROM flash memory click the In
305. ghlight the control engine you want to associate with the strategy Click OK Continue with Associating the Control Engine with Your Strategy on page 93 PAC Control User s Guide CONFIGURING CONTROL ENGINES Control Engine Configuration Dialog Box A Control Engine Name Enter a descriptive name for the control engine Valid characters are letters numbers spaces and most other characters except colons and square brackets Spaces cannot be used as first or last characters B System Type Select the system type Standard A normal system not using redundant networks or redundant controllers e Redundant Networks PRO only A system that has redundant networks which is also referred to as link redundancy When selected two IP address boxes are available under Settings for the primary and secondary networks See Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Control on page 94 for more information Go e Redundant Controllers PRO only Use with a system configured with the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option When selected three IP address boxes are available under Settings for Controller 1 Controller 2 and Arbiter For more information on setting up the Redundancy Option see form 1831 the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option Users Guide 6 C IP Address Hostname The IP Address Hostname text boxes available depend on your System Type Fach IP address is entered in decimal notation for example 192 9 200 24 Hostnames are
306. git falls off on left 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Oops Note that moving the point indicator doesn t help because the exponent is separate If the seven digits for the account represent millions of dollars 1 000000 rather than dollars 1 000 000 the 10 cents would be 0 0000001 still too small to be represented by the seven digits Seven digits available 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Amount in account 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 Add 10 cents 0 0000001 digit falls off on right 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add 10 cents 0 0000001 digit falls off on left 010 0 0 0 0 The key is that it is not the size of the numbers that matter but rather their relative size Oops again So if you are accumulating relatively small values in a float variable over a long period of time at some point the float value will stop increasing even though you continue to try to add to it Comparing Floating point Values for Equality Due to rounding errors and the way floating point calculations are performed comparing two floats for equality can yield inaccurate results The precision of comparisons depends on the relative size of the float values as compared to the difference between them For example if 2 097 151 0 is compared for equality with 2 097 152 0 the result will indicate that the two floats are equal even though it s obvious they are not The reason is that t
307. h and an asterisk and be followed by the same two elements in reverse For example This is a block comment that goes beyond one line Use the Bookmark buttons in the toolbar as needed to set or clear temporary bookmarks within the code and to move between them Bookmarks mark lines of code so you can easily find them and jump from one bookmark to the next Bookmarks remain only while the editor is open they are not saved when the dialog box is closed When you have finished entering all the code for an OptoScript block click the Test Compile button in the toolbar to compile the code for this block The code is compiled and the results appear in the bottom part of the OptoScript window PAC Control User s Guide 343 TROUBLESHOOTING UNABLE TO FIND ERRORS 1 OptoScript Dough_Chip_Control Start Conveyor Actions Conditions C Variables lt Test Compile OptoScript Code nl 0 repeat ri epeat ntTable nl nl set the table element to be equal nl nl 1 increment the counter until nl X 10 break out of the loop every 10 10 20 30 etc ntTable nl ni until nl 100 su Results after code Output is compiled s NOTE The next time the chart is compiled all OptoScript code within the chart will be compiled again If errors are found you can fix them now or later Begin with the first one the one on the lowest numbered line since
308. h four of an integer table named My Int 32 Table include the following text 10 0 My Int 32 Table TABLE 20 1 My Int 32 Table TABLE 30 2 My Int 32 Table TABLE 40 3 My Int 32 Table TABLE 50 4 My Int 32 Table TABLE Integer 64 Table Example To set initial values of 10 20 30 40 and 50 for elements zero through four of an integer table named My Int 64 Table include the following text 10 0 My Int 64 Table 2TABLE 20 1 My Int 64 Table 2TABLE 30 2 My Int 64 Table 2TABLE 40 3 My Int 64 Table 2TABLE 50 4 My Int 64 Table 2TABLE Float Table Example For a float table the initial values must include a decimal point To set initial values of 1 1 2 2 3 3 44 and 5 5 for elements zero through four of a float table named My Float Table include the following text 0 My Float Table TABLE My Float Table TABLE My Float Table TABLE My Float Table TABLE My Float Table TABLE Hn OF WN mp 1 2 3 4 Ui FWD String Table Example To set initial values of zero one two three and four for elements 0 4 of a string table named My String Table include the following text Make sure you turn off download compression and use new lines as shown 0 My String Table STABLEG SINN zero 1 My_String_Table TABLE INN one 2 My_String_Table TABLE INN two 3 My_String_Table TABLE INN three 4 My_String_Table TABLE INN four Pointer Table Example Each index in a poin
309. h is not considered to be a number For the following examples assume that ni 37 fl 9 2 sl test 123 Using the amp Character to Point to a Tag s Address A pointer variable or pointer table element contains the address of the object tag it is pointing to this is different than the tag itself In OptoScript the amp means address of It is used as a prefix to a tag in OptoScript when moving the address of a tag into a pointer PAC Control commands were designed to act on tags and not just the address of the tags The amp prefix tells the controller to use the address of the tag and not the tag itself Set the pointer The types must match or the control engine will generate an error pni null pni amp nl pfi amp f1 psi amp S1 pcht1 amp Powerup Using the amp Character To Move a Pointer When moving a pointer to pointer use the amp prefix To move a value from a pointer to another pointer pVariableO amp pVariable1 To move a value from a pointer to a pointer table ptlable 0 amp pVariable4 Using the Character To De reference a Pointer Use to de reference a pointer It will then behave just like the variable to which it is pointing The following two statements are equivalent n2 pn1 pf1 n22nl f1 PAC Control User s Guide 331 OPTOSCRIPT DATA TYPES AND VARIABLES 332 The character has to be used as a prefix to a pointer in Op
310. h or case statement also offers branching logic and can be used in place of if statements when the expression can match one of a number of numeric values The value for each case can be a numeric constant or a mathematical expression only Comparisons and logical operators cannot be used in cases nor can strings If a case involves a float the float is converted to an integer before use Notice that only one case can be tested at a time PAC Control User s Guide 337 OPTOSCRIPT CONTROL STRUCTURES 338 Here s an example of a switch statement switch nNumber break While Loops The value of the expression in parentheses nNumber is compared I 1 toeach of the cases If the case matches the value of nNumber the case 1 ell action is taken f1 ak brea P Make sure you use a colon after each case Ifa case matches the value of nNumber the break statement after citation immediately exits the switch Notice that a semicolon is not used after break f1 20 break i You can use a mathematical expression as a case m If no case matches the default action is taken Using a default is optional if you use it it must be at the end of the list endswitch 4 A switch statement must be followed by endswi tch The while loop is used to execute a list of statements while a given condition is true The condition is tested at the beginning of each loop For example this loo
311. hanging cross reference window 189 cutting block 211 command instruction 240 241 connection line 211 text block 211 o data IEEE float format 296 data format IEEE float 296 data types in subroutines 348 data sorting in a dialog box 63 date commands 314 PAC Control User s Guide Debug mode definition 53 inspecting control engine 101 inspecting I O 140 debug mode toolbar 55 debugging changing speed 176 choosing level 176 follow stepping 176 strategy 176 subroutines 358 when using OptoScript 346 delay commands 315 deleting chart 214 chart elements 211 command instruction 239 command temporarily 240 control engine association with strategy 100 control engine from strategy 100 I O point 134 I O unit 121 PID loop 140 variable 229 designing basic rules for strategies 76 steps for 69 dialog box sizing columns 63 sorting columns 63 digital adding digital point 122 changing I O while strategy is running 142 copying I O point 131 counter 282 I O unit commands 287 latches 282 point commands 326 point definition 45 pulse commands instructions 283 quadrature counter 283 totalizer 283 directory listing 265 disabling I O 284 docking Strategy Tree 59 watch window 159 down timers 315 downloading files using FTP 263 files using PAC Terminal 110 initialization file for table variable 228 strategy 166 170 changing compression 174 without using PAC Control 172 drawing toolbar 203 dupl
312. hart gt New or right click the Charts folder on the Strategy Tree and select New from the pop up menu The Add New Chart dialog box appears T Add New Chart Description PAC Control User s Guide 201 WORKING WITH CHART ELEMENTS 2 Enter a name for the new chart The name must start with a letter but may also include numbers and underscores If you type spaces they are converted to underscores All other characters are ignored 3 Optional Type a description 4 Click OK The new chart is listed on the Strategy Tree under the Charts folder and the new chart window appears Block 0 the starting block is shown automatically No matter how many other blocks you add or where you place them block 0 is always the first block to be executed in the chart New_Chart DER 3 Shortcuts NOTE Because chart windows show a small portion of a potentially large chart a small movement with the scroll bar can mean a big change in what you see If you lose your flowchart in the window select View gt Center on Block and choose the block you want to see in the middle of the screen Working with Chart Elements 202 Chart Components Charts can contain five kinds of flowchart blocks lines connecting the blocks and text Action Blocks are rectangles that contain one or more commands instructions that do the work of the strategy such as turning things on or off setting variables and so
313. hart starts the program and all other charts The hatch marks on the Start block indicate that this command block was about to be executed when we clicked Pause Apparently the program isn t getting past this block Notice that the False exit routes right back to the top of the Start block while the True exit moves on to Start Charts We can see that if the start flag had been true non zero the program would have gone right into the Start Charts block Since we didn t get that far the start flag must be Zero And in fact it is We planned it that way because we wanted someone for example a factory operator to start the process intentionally We can simulate this ourselves in PAC Control by manually setting the flag to a non zero value Double click the bStartFlag variable on the Strategy Tree A little box appears Ma CT a STO scanning X Value 0 Maximize button In this dialog box you can view the variable value but you cannot change it unless you maximize the dialog box Click the Maximize button As bStartFlag scanning Name bStartFlag Value Apply 3 More Info This dialog box displays current information on the variable bStartFlag You can see that the variable is initialized to zero on strategy download PAC Control User s Guide RUNNING THE STRATEGY 7 Highlight the value zero in the dialog box and type 1 to replace it The field turns purple indica
314. he PID put into manual mode but if the PID is already in manual mode the output will not be forced You can use the command Get PID Status Flags to determine current settings If neither box is checked and the PID input goes out of range as defined by E Low High Range then the output will freeze but only while the input is out of range K Algorithm Choose algorithm Velocity ISA Parallel Interacting For details on algorithms see Algorithm Choices PID on page 301 L Mode Choose the Mode you want the PID to be initialized to The main difference between Automatic and Manual mode is that in Manual mode the PID loop stops its mathernatical calculation In both modes the PID s output value is still copied to the analog output e Auto mode The PID makes calculations based on the difference between the input and the setpoint resulting in changes to the output which causes the input to move toward the setpoint e Manual mode The PID stops making changes to the output but continues to write the PID output to the analog point or configured destination for the PID output Manual mode allows PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O PAC Control logic or an operator to control the PID output which in turn is written by the PID loop to the analog point or configured destination of the PID output NOTE If the value of the analog point or configured destination is changed it will be overwritten by the P
315. he data Notice that the Instruction column at right shows the line number the operand appears in when it is in OptoScript code 3 To print the data click the Print button on the toolbar To save it to a text file click the Save button To search the data click the Search button When finished close the window Viewing and Printing a Bill of Materials You can view and print a bill of materials BOM that lists all the I O units and I O modules analog and standard digital required to run the strategy Special purpose modules such as serial and high density digital modules are not included in the BOM 1 To produce a BOM for a strategy open it and select File gt View Print gt Bill of Materials PAC Control processes the data and puts it in the Bill of Materials window 190 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Save Search Dnr TITLE Bill of Materials STRATEGY Cookies DATE 02 15 05 TIME 11 15 13 Brains l SNAP Mixed Ultimate I 0 SNAP UP1 ADS Digital Input Modules 1 SNAP IDCSD 2 5 28 VDC Digital Output Modules l SNAP ODCSSRC 5 60 VDC Source Analog Input Modules l SNAP AICTD l SNAP AIV Analog Output Modules l SNAP A0V 27 Totals Total Brains 1 Total Modules 5 NOTE Controllers power supplies and mounting racks are not specified Contact your local distributor or Opto 22 for help or to purchase products You may need to resize the window and use the
316. he difference between the two values is 1 0 and 1 0 compared to one of the compared values 2 097 151 0 is too small it is less than one part per million In this case 2 097 152 0 divided by 1 000 000 is 2 1 If the difference between the two values is at least 2 1 then the equality comparison is guaranteed to be correct So if 2 097 152 0 and 2 097 149 0 were compared for equality the result will indicate they are not equal because the difference 3 0 is greater than one part per million 2 1 Any time the difference is at least one part per million the result is guaranteed to be accurate If the difference is less than 1 PPM it may or may not be accurate One method that programmers use to work around this issue is to subtract one float from the other and then compare the absolute value of the result to a limit For example Float Diff Floatl Float2 If AbsoluteValue Float Diff 1 0 then SetVariableTrue EqualityFlag Else SetVariableFalse EqualityFlag Endif Helpful Links for More Information From Wikipedia the free encyclopedia http en wikipedia org wiki IEEE_754 Real numbers http en wikipedia org wiki Real_number Good example http en wikipedia org wiki Single_Precision Rounding error http docs sun com source 806 3568 ncg_goldberg html Comparing floating point numbers http www cygnus software com papers comparingfloats comparingfloats htm Mixing and Converting Integers and Floats An
317. he drop down list In the Replace With Type and Name fields choose the operand you want to use instead To search for an instruction click Instruction Click Action or Condition and choose the instruction you want to replace from the Find drop down list In the Replace With drop down list choose the instruction you want to use instead To search for a substring within tag names click Tag In the Find what text box under Substrings enter the substring you want to replace In the Replace with text box enter the replacement text For example if you have several tag names that contain the substring Generic such as nGenericCount fGenericTemperature and diGenericInput you could replace Generic with Station and the tagnames would become nStation 1 Count fStation1Temperature and diStation 1 Input 4 Click Find Next When the first occurrence of the operand or instruction is found the Instructions dialog box it appears in is displayed 5 To replace this occurrence click Replace To skip it and find the next one click Find Next If you are replacing operands you can replace all occurrences at once by clicking Replace AII If you are replacing instructions you must verify each one 6 If the Edit Instructions dialog box appears make any necessary changes and click OK to save them before moving on 7 When replacements are finished close the Find and Replace dialog box Legacy Options 196 Because our focus i
318. he new strategy To turn off a PID loop open PAC Manager and use Inspect mode to change the PID s algorithm to None Each PID loop must be individually configured and tuned Configuration steps start in Adding a PID Loop on page 135 and tuning steps are described in Inspecting and Tuning PID Loops on page 146 For additional information see PID Ethernet Commands on page 300 and Opto 22 form 1641 OptoTutorial SNAP PAC PID Adding a PID Loop 1 With the strategy open and in Configure mode double click the I O Units folder not the individual unit s icon on the Strategy Tree The Configure I O Units dialog box opens I Configure I O Units Name Type Port Address Watc Enabled Add Mixed ID Unit SNAP PAC R1 Ethem 10 255 Disabled Enabled Sprinkler_B SNAP PAC R1 t Disabled Enabled Modify Sprinkler Control SNAP PAC R1 Ether Disabled Enabled Delete 120 Points PID Loops 2 Select the I O unit the PID will be on and click PID Loops I Configure PID Loops 10 Unit B rinkler B v Type SNAP PAC R1 Name Input Set Out Mode En Ref Desc Not mg Not Not Not Not Not Not Not 3 Double click the lowest unused number The Add PID Loop Dialog appears PAC Control User s Guide 135 136 CONFIGURING PID LOOPS Complete the fields as described in Add PID Loop Dialog Box below Click OK The new PI
319. he strategy Now compile and debug the strategy See Chapter 7 Working with Strategies for more information and step by step procedures If you have problems see Appendix A Troubleshooting If you have PAC Control User s Guide BASIC RULES multiple charts debug each one separately and then debug the strategy as a whole It is easier to find errors in one flowchart than in a group of interrelated ones Make sure the connections between charts are accurate For example is a chart started at the correct block in another chart Use the debugging tools discussed in Chapter 6 to find errors by stepping through a chart and setting breakpoints to discover which block or line contains the problem And if you ve tried everything and it still doesn t work contact Opto 22 Product Support See page 4 Using and Improving the Strategy Any strategy is one of several possible ways to solve a control problem One way may be more efficient under some circumstances another way may be better for others As you use the strategy over time as control needs change and as you become more knowledgeable about PAC Control you ll find ways to make the strategy better Basic Rules The sprinkler strategy we just created is a simple example This section gives basic rules to keep in mind when you re solving more complex control problems When you create a new PAC Control strategy a Powerup chart is automatically included You add all the other char
320. heel there are several other ways to zoom out too You can right click on the chart and select Zoom from the pop up menu You can select Zoom Out from the View menu You can press the or keys on the keyboard After zooming out the chart looks something like this Til c ohartdrop c the dough and ohlp c on te conveyor belt The beltmuctbe running between 60 and 8636 ofmax rpm The Powerup ohart cirte dicohart Tic ohartrune ice fie program hac been chried Brea or 0 You can zoom back in if you wish by holding down the CTRL key and moving the mouse wheel down or one of the other methods The chart s status bar indicates that it is running but we can t see much happening PAC Control User s Guide RUNNING THE STRATEGY 7 Click the Pause Chart button i One of the command blocks appears with hatch marks 8 Now click the Step Over button tr The next command block is hatched 9 Continue clicking and watch how the program proceeds from Speed OK to Drop Dough to Drop Chips to Back to 5peed OK and back up to Speed OK A pulsating green border appears around a block when the commands inside the block are being executed While you are stepping through and anytime the Pause Chart button is clicked the chart status indicates Step On 10 Click the Pause Chart button again to run the strategy at full speed Step Off now appears in the chart status bar Auto Stepping The final steppi
321. her variables later if necessary Variable Needed Type Name in PAC Control Hour of the day Numeric 32 bit integer Time_of_Day Day of the week Numeric 32 bit integer Day_of_the_Week Humidity Numeric float Humidity Down timer Timer Timer Creating PAC Control Charts and Adding Instructions If you have already drawn the process in a flowchart this step will go faster PAC Control is based on flowcharts because they are a natural way to show a control process And the block names and instructions you add to charts just like the names of variables are in normal everyday language For more information and step by step procedures see Chapter 8 Working with Flowcharts and Chapter 9 Using Variables and Commands The difference between the flowchart you drew before and the chart you create in PAC Control is that the flowchart was designed for human beings but the PAC Control chart must be more detailed so the computer can follow it Because the chart is more detailed and because most control processes are far more complex than our sprinkler system you will usually create multiple charts for a PAC Control strategy Break the process down into logical chunks or modules and then create a chart for each module A modular design makes it easier to test and to update your strategy PAC Control User s Guide STEPS TO DESIGN Even for a simple process like our sprinkler control there is no single co
322. her under one name One or both target addresses primary and secondary can be enabled but only one address the active address will be used by the controller at one time For link redundancy both the primary and secondary addresses must be enabled When an I O unit is configured with two IP addresses the default is for both to be enabled and the primary address to be active One address is always active If communication fails through the primary address the control engine automatically switches to the secondary address It continues to use the secondary address until communication fails through the secondary address or until you change the active address using Set Target Address State for one I O unit or Set All Target Address States for all I O units on the control engine You may also want to use these commands to disable one address for example if you are doing maintenance or repair on a network segment and need to switch communication to another segment temporarily Disabling one address of course means that you no longer have link redundancy PAC Control User s Guide 287 I O UNIT COMMANDS 288 If both addresses are disabled or unavailable then communication is not possible and communication to the I O unit becomes disabled If both addresses are disabled and you want to bring the I O unit back online you must first enable one or both of the addresses and then enable communication to the I O unit You can find ou
323. his block first resets the on latch triggered by the bad cookie so that the next cookie won t be marked bad too The block then turns on the reject valve The valve stays on for two seconds before being shut off Let s decrement the counter after the cookie is gone and the valve is shut Scroll down and click on the open spot below the other instructions The highlighted line marks the position of the next command to be added Click Add 1 Add Instruction Instruction Absolute Value Comment Type Name of All Valid Types lap oughVesselPressure Put Result in All Valid Types vl aoConveyorS peedControl You can use PAC Control without a mouse and to demonstrate how we ll use only the keyboard to enter data in this dialog box Type dec in the Instruction field The Decrement Variable command appears since it s the first command that starts with that text pattern This is the command we want to use Press TAB twice to move to the Comment field Type in a comment Press TAB again to move to the Type field Press the down arrow on your keyboard twice to select Integer 32 Variable Press TAB again to advance to the Name field and then press the down arrow until you see nCookie Counter Press TAB again and notice that an outline appears on the OK button PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL An outlined button means that pressing the space bar or ENTER is equivalent t
324. ht mouse button and choose Detail from the pop up menu The Select Continue Block Destination dialog box appears listing all blocks in the chart I Select Continue Block Destination x Block Id 2 Condition Block 0 Action Humidity lt 100 Condition Read Hygrometer Action Sprinklers off Condition Sunday or Wed Condition Timer expired Condition Tum off sprinklers Action Turn off sprinklers Action Turn on sprinkle Action Wait 23 hrs Action Wait 24 hrs Action Wait 5 sec Action Wait 60 sec Action 2 Click the destination block and click OK Viewing and Printing Chart Instructions To view or print commands in a chart see Viewing and Printing Strategy or Subroutine Commands on page 187 PAC Control User s Guide 241 VIEWING AND PRINTING CHART INSTRUCTIONS 242 PAC Control User s Guide 10 Programming with Commands Introduction Commands or instructions in PAC Control are roughly grouped by function This chapter tells you what you need to know about each group in order to program your PAC Control strategy effectively For detailed information on using a command see the PAC Control Command Reference In this Chapter Analog Pot Combpmabitis ies PR NANA ON E cae Remeras Communication Commands Control Engine Covmmateds eene Digital Point CTAN S cia Error Handling Commands I O Unit Commands s 1 0 Unit Event Message Commands s 1 0 Un
325. ic PID Loop Disable Event Reaction Group Disable Mistic PID Output Tracking in Manual Mode Disable Mistic PID Output Disable Mistic PID Setpoint Tracking in Manual Mode Disable Scanning for All Events Disable Scanning for Event Disable Scanning of Event Reaction Group Enable Communication to Event Reaction Enable Communication to Mistic PID Loop Enable Event Reaction Group Enable Mistic PID Output Tracking in Manual Mode Enable Mistic PID Output Enable Mistic PID Setpoint Tracking in Manual Mode Enable Scanning for All Events Enable Scanning for Event Enable Scanning of Event Reaction Group Event Occurred Event Occurring Event Scanning Disabled Event Scanning Enabled Event Reaction Communication Enabled Event Reaction Group Communication Enabled Get Analog Filtered Value Get Analog Square Root Filtered Value Get Analog Square Root Value Get Analog Totalizer Value Get amp Clear Analog Filtered Value Get amp Clear Analog Totalizer Value Get amp Clear Event Latches Get amp Restart Off Time Totalizer Get amp Restart On Time Totalizer Get amp Restart Period Get Event Latches Get Frequency Get Mistic PID Control Word Get Mistic PID D Term Get Mistic PID Term Get Mistic PID Input Get Mistic PID Mode Get Mistic PID Output Rate of Change Get Mistic PID Output Get Mistic PID P Term Get Mistic PID Scan Rate Get Mistic PID Setpoint Get Off Time Totalizer Get On Time Totalizer
326. icate object names 373 E editing See changing EEPROM See flash elapsed time 181 email 269 276 error cannot delete item 362 copy compile errors 167 queue 103 372 status codes 373 TCP IP cannot connect 365 types 371 See also troubleshooting error handling commands instructions 286 programming example 80 error lookup 371 Ethernet connections 256 link redundancy 94 commands for 287 ports 256 Ethernet I O units and commands 197 example case statements 82 323 complex operations 325 control system 44 creating messages to display on screen 79 error handling chart 80 File communication handle 259 flag lock 83 FTP communication handle 263 if statements 324 loops 322 mathematical expressions 319 pointers indexing 85 repetitive actions 81 serial Communication handle 267 string building 310 320 string data extraction 309 string formats 308 string table 308 subroutine parameters 353 TCP communication handle 253 timer 83 exiting See closing exporting chart 215 I O configuration 115 F File communication handle 257 examples 259 file system on the brain moving files via FTP 263 saving files to flash 280 finding a block in a chart 62 flag lock example 83 flash memory 141 saving files to 280 saving strategy to 165 float IEEE 296 floating point converting to integer 297 converting to string 312 definition 49 in logic 294 variable definition 218 flowchart See chart flow through logic 76 follow debugger step
327. iew Print I O Point Mappings dialog box select the report style either Formatted or Comma separated and select the position and mappings types then click OK A report window appears Bi Cookies Point Mappings TITLE I 0 Point Mappings STRATEGY Cookies DATE 04 07 08 TIME 12 36 50 Point mappings for I O Unit Mixed IO Unit I O POINTS diDoughLevelSwitch diChipLevelSwitch dilnspectionPassFailSwitch diEStop doDoughPressureControlValve doDoughDispenseValve doChipDispenseValve doRejectValve aoOvenTemperatureControl aoConveyorSpeedControl aidvenTemperature aiboughVesselPressure OCOOrFOWNFOWNFO ANWOTHA Qo OI lO BR What the columns mean MOD The module number on the rack CH The channel number within the module 4 4 channel mapping 8 8 channel mapping Searching and Replacing You can search a chart subroutine or strategy for missing connections empty condition blocks or any command or operand An operand is anything that can be affected by a command including charts I O units analog points digital points and all kinds of variables Searching includes OptoScript code within OptoScript blocks You can also replace instructions or operands with similar items Searching You can search a strategy or one of its charts or you can search a subroutine 192 PAC Control User s Guide 1 CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Open the strategy or subroutine and select Edit gt F
328. il statement at the end For Loops For loops can be used to execute a list of statements a certain number of times The for line sets up a predefined initial value and a predefined final value for the counter that counts the repetitions The line also includes the steps by which the counter gets from its initial value to its final value step 1 counts by ones step 2 counts by twos and so on The step is required The counter can be any numeric variable or O point but its value will always be a whole number The initial value final value and step can be any numeric expression they are converted to integer 32s CAUTION A step value of zero creates an infinite loop A float step value between 0 5 and 0 5 also creates an infinite loop since it is rounded to zero when converted to an integer 32 This example results in nVariable equaling 6 nVariable 1 The counter starts at zero and its final value is 4 for nCounter 0 to 4 step 1 4 It will count up one step at a time nVariable nVariable 1 next lt The for loop must end with next 339 PAC Control User s Guide USING THE OPTOSCRIPT EDITOR Other step amounts can be used including negative The forloop counter can be used in the loop ps i aps steps Do not use a zero step which creates an infi This example sets the first five elements of table nite loop This example sets elements 0 2 and 4 of ntTable to 10 Ind TET A nt
329. ile name field Then click Open The watch window name appears in the Add Watch dialog box and the new watch window appears behind it 7 Inthe Add Watch Entry dialog box click OK Close the nCookie Counter view variable dialog box The new watch window looks something like this PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL Watch window Docking icon IPAC Control Professional nCookie Counter DER 60 File Edit Control Engine Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help ax Bin grim s Cookies me Type amp B Cookies nCookie Counter Integer 32 Variable amp j C5 Control Engines Subroutines Included amp amp Chats 3 B Alarms E 95 Dough Chip Control E B Dough_Vessel_Pressu I RB Interrupt E Q5 ven Inspection Conl I B Powerup Variables E E Numeric Variables Oa bStartFlag PE diCookieMotionTir TMR bal fDoughPressureSe bal fRamp alue Eur fSetpointMinusDe iE nChartStatus pal nCookie Counter pal nCookieCounter s a gt v T Next 4 Prev Ge ven Inspection Control nCookie Counter PAC Control Ready e Since we want to be able to see chart windows as well as the watch window let s dock the watch window at the bottom In the watch window click the docking icon 8 in the upper right corner The watch window moves to the bottom of the main window PAC Control User s Guide USING A WATCH WINDOW I
330. ilnspectionPassF ailS witch a bad cookie open reject uu diEStop valve for 0 5 second x doDoughPressureControlV x doDoughDispenseValve in doChipDispenseValve T doRejectValve zu ao venTemperatureContrc EA anfinnveunrSneedControl I gt lt rm v db Next F Prev Integer 32 Variable 472 ail Digital Taput TT State OFF OFF On Latch On OFF Off Latch OFF OFF C Program Files Opto22 PAC Project 8 1 Control Pro Examples ioCookies Cookies idb 20 Click the Step Over button as many times as it takes to get the hatch marks to the Blow Off block Now watch the nCookie_Counter IVAL value in the watch window as you click the button again A bad cookie was found so the counter was decreased by one At the same time the on latch was reset to Off as you can also see in the watch window PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL IPAC Control Professional Oven Inspection Control DER i File Edit Control Engine Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help Te A er se Cookies OU pec y Gm Ponts temperature to 20 B O ER p degrees EI Event_01 EN i Wig ven Set oven temperature to wb Mixed ID Unit 450 degrees amp amp Points T diDoughLevelS witch W diChipLevelSwitch m dilnspectionPassFailSwitch If inspection station sees Te diEStop 3 bad cookie open reject im doDoughPressureControlV valve for 0 5 second im doDoughDisp
331. imes it runs at high speed sometimes at low speed but before a box can be put on the conveyor the conveyor must be stopped And it can only be stopped from low speed not from high speed Here5 a portion of a chart showing the case statements that control this process l Instructions Conveyer_Operation Get conveyor s Conveyor speed is checked and moved Conveyer_Operation Conveyor_Speed_Sensor Conveyor_Speed copied into a variable Each condition block checks for a particular speed This one checks for high speed 3 If speed is too high it is shifted down to the next level until the conveyor is finally stopped and the box can be put on 2 Conveyor_Speed Next Block Previous Block The example above shows three cases because there are three possible speeds and each speed demands a different action If you had only two possibilities for example if the box could also be put on the conveyor at low speed you could handle both possibilities within one condition block For example you could put two Equal commands in the same condition block and check the Or operator as shown at right PAC Control User s Guide Instructions Conveyer_Operation Conveyor stopped Is Conveyor_Speed Equal To 1 Is Conveyor Speed Equal To 2 Next Block Previous Block Operator AND OR Or operator CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Using a
332. in Add Variable Dialog Box below 6 Click OK The Add Variable dialog box closes and the new variable appears in the Configure Variables dialog box Add Variable Dialog Box This dialog box varies depending on the type of variable Add Variable Name Description Type String w String Width Initialization O Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run O Persistent Initial Value Field at D varies D depending on variable type The figure above shows the Add Variable dialog box as it appears for string variables Fields are Slightly different for other variables A Name Enter a name for the variable The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores B Description Optional Enter a description of the variable C Type In the Type drop down list select the type of data for the variable Possible types are shown in the following table For more information see Types of Data in a Variable on page 218 Numeric Numeric table Integer 32 integer 64 floating point up or down timer Integer 32 integer 64 or floating point String String String table String Pointer Pointer to any data type Pointer table Pointer to any data type and the data type may change over time Communication handle Communication handle D
333. ind The Find dialog box appears Search Scope f O Local Search For Operand Instruction Missing Connections Empty Cond Blocks Type Name Digital Output v doRejectValve Or if the item you want to find is listed in the strategy tree such as a variable table or point right click the item and select either Find in the pop up menu 3 Points T diD oughLevelS witch Te dilnspectionPassF w diEStop x doDoughPressure uu doD oughDispense T doChipDispenseV Replace 5 Point name Configure Delete The item appears in the Find or dialog box automatically Search Scope f Q Local Search For S perand O Instruction Missing Connections Empty Cond Blocks Type Name Digital Input v diChipLeyelSwitch Point name Under Search Scope to search the entire strategy click Global To search one chart only click Local and choose the chart name from the drop down list If you are searching a subroutine the search is Local and the subroutine s name is shown Under Search For choose one of the following To search for a chart an O unit or point or a variable click Operand In the Type and Name fields choose the operand you want from the drop down list To search for an instruction click Instruction Click Action or Condition and choose the instruction you want from the drop down list PAC Control User s Guide 193 SEARCHING AND REPLACING
334. ing I O unit configuration 140 scratch pad commands 291 searching 192 secondary address 118 segmenting control network 93 selecting block or text block 210 connection line 210 Send Email timeouts 276 279 send email 269 276 serial Communication handle 266 serial communication module communicating with 249 253 255 configuring 130 serial devices communicating with 266 serial I O unit changing baud rate 119 changing baud rate and mode Pro 119 setpoint for PID 134 setting hex display mode 65 shortcuts keyboard 67 Simple I O units and commands 197 simulation commands 305 sizing columns in a dialog box 63 SNAP PAC redundancy option 99 SNAP PAC S2 RTS CTS 268 SoftPAC adding a control engine 23 archiving strategies 106 compatible I O units 6 file storage 257 link redundancy 95 saving files to flash 280 PAC Control User s Guide software launching from PAC Control 66 sorting columns in a dialog box 63 starting a strategy 175 status codes 373 step into 178 step out 178 step over 178 stepping inside blocks 178 one block at a time 178 through a chart 178 within a block 176 stopping strategy 175 strategy archiving to computer 166 to control engine 106 dosing 163 164 compiling 24 166 compiling without downloading 169 creating 161 debugging 176 debugging when using OptoScript 346 definition 51 161 deleting control engine 100 designing 69 76 disassociating control engine 100 downloading 166 170 downloadin
335. inside the current block so youcan step one command at a time The red arrow indicates the command that will be executed next 10_Enabler_Chart e w w ee a s P c 4 4 Check pointer table element to see JN W we if ptIO Units nIO EnablerIndex nui ok d ow eS yok es 4 No I O unit is loaded in the ptIO ntIO UnitCommEnableStatus nIO Enablei else IO Unit pointer is valid at th Soc om es Yo NumberToString nIO EnablerIndex sIO 4 4 Get pointer to IO Unit plO_UnitEnetPAC ptIO Units nIO Enal H Check to see if the user wants tl m nt10 UnitUserDisable nIO Enabler TeTalini tCeammRnsh led fant ni p SS gt Ln 86 Col 1 141 4 gt ef Chart A OptoScript Block 10 EnableritEnet amp PAC Id 2 n The small gray tabs at the left The white tab shows you where ofthe white tab show how you are inside a chart a block or a you got to where you are subroutine called by a chart 6 To move from line to line click either the Step Into or the Step Over button If a command within the block calls a subroutine Step Into takes you into the subroutine Step Over skips over the subroutine 7 To step from a command inside a block and go to the next block click Step Out IF Clicking Step Out when you are on a block rather than inside it unpauses the chart In a subroutine clicking Step Out takes you out of the subroutine Aut
336. instructions are sufficient but you can use Comment Single Line if you need more room for explanations e Comment Block comments out instructions In other words it tells the strategy to temporarily ignore certain instructions within a block It can be useful in debugging or for saving work when a strategy is temporarily changed To use it place one Comment Block command at the beginning of the area you want to ignore and place another Comment Block command at the end of the area If you do not place the second Comment Block command all the remaining instructions in that block are ignored Areas that are commented out appear in the Instructions dialog box as gray PAC Control User s Guide 299 PID ETHERNET COMMANDS PID Ethernet Commands The following commands are used with PID loops on SNAP PAC I O units Since PID loops are configured and tuned in Configure Mode while creating your PAC Control strategy you may not need to use these commands PID commands are typically used to change input or output location for example if the input is on another I O unit or to change tuning parameters based on a change that occurs while the strategy is running such as a recipe change 300 For steps to configure and tune PIDs see Configuring PID Loops on page 134 For more information about PID loops how to tune them and how to use them in PAC Control see Opto 22 form 1641 OptoTutorial SNAP PAC PID Get PID Configurat
337. ion Flags Get PID Current Input Get PID Current Setpoint Get PID Feed Forward Get PID Feed Forward Gain Get PID Forced Output When Input Over Range Get PID Forced Output When Input Under Range Get PID Gain Get PID Input Get PID Input High Range Get PID Input Low Range Get PID Max Output Change Get PID Min Output Change Get PID Mode Get PID Output Get PID Output High Clamp Get PID Output Low Clamp Get PID Scan Time Get PID Setpoint Get PID Status Flags Whatis a PID Get PID Tune Derivative Get PID Tune IntegralSet PID Configuration Flags Set PID Feed Forward Set PID Feed Forward Gain Set PID Forced Output When Input Over Range Set PID Forced Output When Input Under Range Set PID Gain Set PID Input Set PID Input High Range Set PID Input Low Range Set PID Max Output Change Set PID Min Output Change Set PID Mode Set PID Output Set PID Output High Clamp Set PID Output Low Clamp Set PID Scan Time Set PID Setpoint Set PID Tune Derivative Set PID Tune Integral A proportional integral derivative PID control systern often referred to as a PID loop monitors a process variable compares the variable s current value to a desired value a setpoint and calculates an output to correct error between the setpoint and the variable Because the calculation is complex it is done by a mathematical formula that is adjusted tuned for each PID loop The mathematical formulas vary but all PID systems share
338. ion Technical Note Saving and Closing CAUTION Once a strategy is opened in PAC Control Professional it can no longer be opened in PAC Control Basic Saving the Strategy and All Charts To save all your work quickly choose File gt Save All The strategy and all modified charts and subroutines are saved Saving the Strategy and Some Charts NOTE You cannot save changes to a subroutine this way To save a subroutine use File gt Save All or use Subroutine gt Save or Subroutine gt Save All 1 To save changes to some charts but not others click the Save Strategy button laf on the toolbar or choose File gt Save Strategy or press CTRL S The Save Strategy dialog box appears highlighting all charts modified since the last save In this example two charts have been modified PAC Control User s Guide 163 SAVING AND CLOSING I Save Strategy Save strategy and selected charts Digital Control Select All Flag Example Chart Clear All 2 To save some charts and not others press CTRL and click any charts you don t want to save You can also click Clear All to select none of the charts or click Select All to select all of the charts 3 When only the charts you want to save are highlighted click OK The strategy and the highlighted charts are saved Saving the Strategy to a New Name 1 To save the strategy and all its charts under a new name choose File gt Save Strategy As 2 Inthe
339. ion handles Communication is defined when the I O unit is configured NOTE Be sure to use a single communication handle for each of a controller s physical serial ports used with the subroutines If two charts were to run simultaneously while sharing an open communication handle it is possible for one serial port to transmit data on the wire at the same time the remote device is transmitting a response Serial Communication Handle Examples To enter a serial communication handle you can use either of the following two methods for SNAP PAC controllers Method 1 With this method the value for the serial communication handle is in the format ser lt port number gt lt baud rate gt lt parity gt lt data bits gt lt stop bits gt SNAP PAC S1 0 1 or 2 port number SNAP PAC S2 0 1 2 or 3 SNAP PAC R1 and R2 0 230400 115200 76800 57600 38400 paud rate 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 or 300 parity n O or e none odd or even data bits 8or7 stop bits 1or2 Here is an example of a serial communication handle value ser 0 115200 n 8 1 port 0 baud rate of 115 200 no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit To add a communication handle see the steps starting on page 248 In the Add Variable dialog box enter the communication handle value in the Initial Value field PAC Control User s Guide 267 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 268 Add Variable Name Serial_D evice Communication Handle zm
340. ion in a strategy such as the parameters for communication temperature reported by a thermocouple the name of a chart or a group of words and numbers to be sent to a display The information a variable represents is called the value of the variable As a strategy runs the variable s name remains the same but its value may change For example the value of a variable named Oven_Temperature may change several times while its strategy is running but its name remains Oven_Temperature A variable stores one of six types of data floating point integer timer string pointer or communication handle When you create the variable you designate the type of data it contains The instruction shown below is for the condition block Button D3 On This block contains only one instruction As you look at the chart you can see that the answer to the question in the instruction determines whether the process flows to Turn LED D7 On or to Turn LED D7 Off PAC Control User s Guide PAC CONTROL MAIN WINDOW Digital_Control Instruction for the bloc named Button D3 On Previous Block Operator AND Oor PAC Control Main Window With a strategy open the main window in PAC Control Basic and PAC Control Pro looks similar to this PAC Control title bar PAC Control Professional Menu bar File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help Toolbar Di confio oebuo Cion ino prega 0 5050 085 Sprinkler Contro
341. ion that came with your controller 230400 115200 76800 baud 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 or 300 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS parity E e O o N n 9 A value of 9 is used for RS 485 multi drop communications data 8 7 The number of data bits stop 1 2 The number of stop bits mode 0 522 522 enables I O mode 0 should be used for everything else 0 turns rts cts off 1 enables symmetrical rts cts flow control 2 enables asymmetrical rts cts flow control By default the sys tem waits up to one second for cts to be asserted rts cts 0 1 2 timeout float seconds If a parameter is not specified the current value is used so you should include any parameter whose current value you are not sure of IMPORTANT As described earlier in this section be sure to use PAC Manager to set the control function of any port you want to use to None Otherwise you will get a 20 Resource Busy error For more information see the PAC Manager User s Guide Using Serial Communication Handles in Your Strategy To use a serial communication handle in your strategy first use the command Open Outgoing Communication Verify that the communication handle opened by using the condition Communication Open Then use Transmit Transfer and Receive commands to send or receive data as necessary Remember to check for any errors When you hav
342. it Memory Map Commands e 290 I O Unit Scratch Pad Commands s 291 Logical Commands Mathematical Commands Miscellaneous Commands tts PID Ethernet Commands Pointer CommPri litis eee ttis SUTTON COTAN secet tee ettet reete String Commands Tire Db COATED eee ttes TEANG COMA E M PAC Control User s Guide 243 ANALOG POINT COMMANDS Analog Point Commands The following commands are used with analog points Offset and Gain Others Calculate amp Set Analog Gain Get HART Unique Address Calculate amp Set Analog Offset Receive HART Command Set Analog Gain Receive HART Command Burst Set Analog Offset Send Receive HART Command Set Analog Filter Weight Minimum Maximum Values Set Analog Load Cell Fast Settle Level Get Analog Maximum Value Set Analog Load Cell Filter Weight Get Analog Minimum Value Set Analog TPO Period Get amp Clear Analog Maximum Value Get amp Clear Analog Minimum Value Offset and Gain Commands The easiest way to set offset and gain is to do so when you configure analog points in PAC Manager using the Calibrate button in the Configure I O Points dialog box You can also set offset and gain in PAC Control If you already know the offset and gain for a point you can use the commands Set Analog Offset and Set Analog Gain If you do not know the offset and gain you can use the commands Calculate amp Set Analog Offset and Calculate amp Se
343. iustto 00 normal size OB i t s Page Print Header In the Graphics Scaling area choose whether you want each flowchart to print at a fixed percentage of normal size or to span a specific number of pages To print at a fixed percentage click the Adjust To option and specify any scaling from one percent to 1 000 percent You can type in a number or click the arrows to go up or down to the next increment of 25 percent Typically percentages between 50 percent and 200 percent work the best To print to a specific number of pages click the Fit To option and select the number of pages wide and tall you would like each chart to print If you choose one for each dimension each chart prints to a single page For each dimension you can specify any integer between one and 255 but be careful Selecting values of five and five for example would cause each chart to print five pages wide and five pages long a total of 25 pages Recommended To print a header on each page put a check mark in the Print Header box The header lists the strategy name chart or subroutine name date and time of printing page number and column and row of the page with respect to the full chart printout Click OK to save your settings Previewing a Flowchart Printout 1 To see how a chart or subroutine will print before actually printing it open the chart or subroutine window From the Chart or Subroutine menu select Print Preview Graphic
344. ived on the control engine J Run Stop Start or stop the active strategy K Store to Flash Click to store either the active or alternate strategy to flash memory Only one strategy at a time can be stored in flash memory This button is enabled if there is a strategy strored in RAM even if the strategy is currently stored in flash See Burned in flash N on this dialog box L Alternate Name of the alternate strategy and the date and time it was downloaded M Switch and Run Switch Click Switch and Run to make the alternate strategy the active strategy and run it in the control engine Click Switch to make the alternate strategy the active strategy without running it N Stored in flash Shows whether a strategy is currently stored in flash memory O Autorun Click to indicate whether the strategy should automatically run when the control engine is restarted The strategy must be stored to flash to autorun See Store to Flash above Saving a Strategy to Flash on page 165 P Loop Time Time required to gather the inspection data from the control engine the average time taken for a single transaction Q Comm Errors Any communication errors Viewing the Message Queue The message queue holds error information and warning messages All may be helpful in troubleshooting When a message is placed in the queue a blue INFO yellow WARNING or red ERROR box appears in the PAC Control status bar as shown in the following diagram
345. jeot valve fbr 0 6 ceoond 3 Shortcuts Oven_Inspection_Control Set oven temp 350 degrees 3 Shortcuts Panning a Chart The pan tool allows you to easily pan around a flowchart 1 Using the pan tool click and hold to grab a portion of a chart You can access the pan tool either from the toolbar or by holding down the space bar and clicking the left mouse button PAC Control User s Guide WINDOWS AND DIALOG BOXES IN PAC CONTROL wnire is out of spec set oven temperature to 200 Pan tool degrees Set oven temperature to 450 degrees If inspection station sees a bad cookie open reject valve for 0 5 second 2 Movethe pan tool to a new position and release The chart moves to a new position 4 This chart maintains the oven temperature and re cookies that do not pass visual inspection The Powerup chart starts this chart Pan tool Redrawing a Chart or Subroutine Window If you want to move quickly to a particular block you can redraw a chart or subroutine window with any block at its center 1 With a chart or subroutine open in the active window select View Center On Block or right click in the chart or subroutine window and choose Center On Block from the pop up menu The Center On Block dialog box appears listing all blocks in the chart PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL I Center On Block Block Id I
346. jooq q JON Ajuo sueajooq q 1oN 0 lt gt X ON 0 lt gt X JON 5p LON Papa rere ageneso MO A sox OX IBIBO Kore AT C kmx on 0 Ajuo sueejooq quo e Kllx Ajuo sueejooq quo e sa eioN ees YO 122160 0 lt gt A 10 0 lt gt X 0 lt gt A 10 0 lt gt X K gt X z x K gt X z x jenbe 10 uey 1918946 x x x x uey J9jeo46 z X z X gt X gt X jenbe Jo uey sso X X X X uey SSO Ke gt X K j X lt gt X lt gt X jenbe jou K xX A K X zz jenbo u Ju2 oljeu s u 9 o 9y s guuds uu Olay S u u2 Oly s zs sjeas SuoissaJdxo Bus S ZS Olly S ojeu s Kdous S ZS O0 9U S S ZS Olay S v 2 3 O Nn D N I B o UO U amp OPTOSCRIPT COMPARISON WITH STANDARD PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES G lt i oy ns ILI s lt 1 gun doo X6 lt 1 pun Md Z a l eigeL Aw b t y 30N ees doo 3eedaJ Za ijeiqerA H cs i Z x NaIgeLAW Z 1 ijeiqeL AW op og jeedei pue bel l MESES PUAN poe ATA ae EIE L l Zal i ejqer A z 12 JaqeLA y 30N ees doo a IyYM eee pe eels RRR i Z JelqelAw Z 1 HeiqeL Aw Bi op G gt 1 alym 6 gt 1 enum S gt SUM S gt eium pue X9N xeu a A gn o c Helden m
347. k a connection that was locked by a dif X with the current lock on that port Communication command didn t find the driver described in 203 Driver could not be found or loaded the communication handle Make sure driver name is not X misspelled for example tcp must be lower case 407 File not found Attempted to save a strategy to flash but there was no strat egy in RAM to save 412 TCP IP Cannot connect error Ethernet connect failed See page 365 x 417 Cannot open file File does not exist or filename may be incorrect Invalid data range Verify high value is Invalid data passed to driver for example a point number 430 X greater than low value larger than the maximum number of points on the rack 433 Object device already locked Couldn t set the state of a chart running suspended etc because it s already locked by something else 437 No acceptable socket interface found Ethernet accept attempted but no more sessions are available 32 total 377 LIST OF COMMON MESSAGES 438 Could not create socket This error is generated when the controller has run out of available TCP sockets a limited resource This is most likely caused when the strategy is overaggressive when try ing to establish TCP communications to other devices When sockets are opened and fail or are closed there is a time period that must expire before the socket resource may be reused Sockets that are rapidly opened and closed will
348. l 13 Adding an I O Unit T Adding I O Points Configuring a Serial Module 30 Changing Point Configuration sess 30 Configuring PID Loops 34 Inspecting I O in Debug Mode 40 Inspecting and Tuning PID Loops 46 Using Watch Windows for Monitoring 57 Choosing a Configuration Tool Configuring I O is one of your major planning steps in developing a PAC Control strategy Generally it s best to configure all I O units points and PID loops at once before you start building flowcharts There are two tools you can use for configuration PAC Control and PAC Manager These two tools serve different purposes but they overlap when it comes to configuring I O The graphic on the next page compares their functions PAC Control User s Guide 113 CHOOSING A CONFIGURATION TOOL PAC Manager Tasks PAC Control Tasks Assign and change 3 Configure 1 0 Configure Program and IP address C ivi cust tn debug Load firmware EH A UO Station 1 So PC running PAC control logic Configure communications t Control can and events EH Point communicate with the SNAP controller I O can be configured in PAC Control Ethernet based I O can also be configured in PAC Manager and imported into PAC Control I O units and points must be configured to match the PAC Control strategy you will run You can configure most I O units and point functions either in P
349. l BAE Strategy Tree Bree C3 Control Engines Ey Subroutines Included Charts C variables Numeric Variables String Variables Pointer Variables C3 Communication Handles Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables Yo units m D Mixed IO Unit v db Next 4 Prev Sprinkler Control Mode Status bar PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL Since PAC Control uses standard Microsoft Windows conventions you ll recognize the title bar and menu bar and already be familiar with some of the menus such as File Edit View Window and Help This section discusses some things that may not be familiar Status Bar The status bar at the bottom of the window shows you information about PAC Control When you move your mouse over the toolbar a description of the button you re pointing to appears in the status bar The status bar indicates the mode PAC Control is in and indicates messages or errors helpful in debugging To hide or show the status bar choose View gt Status Bar A check mark next to the menu item means the status bar will show no check mark means it is hidden Mode You can run PAC Control in three modes Configure Debug or Online The current mode is shown in the status bar on the right Toolbars and menus change depending on the mode e Configure mode is used to create modify save and compile strategies flowcharts and sub
350. l on page 94 for more information In this case you can also choose whether the primary or secondary IP address will receive the strategy To change the control engine that receives the downloaded strategy follow these steps 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure or Online mode 2 On the Strategy Tree right click the name of the control engine you want to set as the active engine If its name does not appear in the Strategy Tree follow the steps in Configuring Control Engines on page 89 3 Fromthe pop up menu choose Set Active The active engine moves to the top of the list in the Strategy Tree 4 If the control engine is configured for Ethernet link redundancy right click the name of the control engine on the Strategy Tree again From the pop up menu choose Use Primary IP Address or Use Secondary IP Address Removing a Control Engine s Association with a Strategy If you no longer want to use a control engine with a strategy you can remove its association with the strategy This action does not delete the control engine s definition on your PC CAUTION Do not delete the control engine from within the Select Control Engine dialog box Doing so will delete it from the PC as well as the strategy 1 Make sure the strategy is open in Configure mode or Online mode 2 Onthe Strategy Tree right click the name of the control engine you want to remove From the pop up menu choose Delete The control engine is no l
351. le commands When you do the following commands become available in the strategy Clear HDD Module Off Latches Get All HDD Module On Latches Clear HDD Module On Latches Get All HDD Module States Get amp Clear All HDD Module Off Latches Get HDD Module Counters Get amp Clear All HDD Module On Latches Get HDD Module Off Latches Get amp Clear HDD Module Counter Get HDD Module On Latches Get amp Clear HDD Module Counters Get HDD Module States Get amp Clear HDD Module Off Latches Set HDD Module from MOMO Masks Get amp Clear HDD Module On Latches Turn Off HDD Module Point Get All HDD Module Off Latches Turn On HDD Module Point Enable mistic 1 O Units and Commands If you re using legacy mistic hardware with a SNAP PAC S series controller and PAC Control Professional you should enable mistic I O units and commands When you do the following I O unit types and commands will become available in the strategy I O Units Types G4D16R Mistic PID Loop G4D32RS Digital Event Reaction G4A8R G4RAX Analog Event Reaction B200 Event Reaction Group B3000 Digital B3000 Analog B100 SNAP BRS PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Commands Clamp Mistic PID Output Clamp Mistic PID Setpoint Clear All Event Latches Clear Event Latch Convert Mistic I O Hex String to Float Convert Number to Mistic I O Hex String Disable Communication to Event Reaction Disable Communication to Mist
352. ler It includes three attachments two JPG images and this strategy CRLF CRLF Sincerely CRLF Opto Controller LL This blank denotes end of body This is not included in the body My image file jpg List of files to attach Another image file jpg A zip file zip This blank ends the attachment list Attachment jpg This attachment will be ignored A Server Information The server table must have each of these five entries in the order shown in the example Make sure all server information table elements are filled in Here are the ways that you can specify the account and from names in element 0 No user account and no from arrstrServer 0 User Account only from uses the arrstrServer 0 MyAccount account name Account only no from arrstrServer 0 MyAccount from only no user account arrstrServer 0 FromName Separate account and from names arrstrServer 0 MyAccount FromName If you want to change the timeouts for transmitting receiving and connecting you need to add a sixth element 5 The default is 10 000 milliseconds 10 seconds for each For more information see Setting Timeouts for the Send Email Commands on page 276 For a corporate email account use the server port and security values for the email server you obtained previously from your network administrator PAC Control User s Guide 9 CHAP
353. les and charts You cannot add subroutine parameters or variables that are local to a subroutine Depending on which element you add and how you add it it may appear immediately in the window as shown here PAC Control User s Guide 157 USING WATCH WINDOWS FOR MONITORING ys Watch 2 o DER For some elements the Add Watch Entry dialog box appears so you can specify what to watch tAdd Watch Entry Name Digital Control Select Portions To Watch Items in this area vary diss Select All depending on the element Bros you are watching This Block Paused At example shows a chart Select Watch Window 4 If an Add Watch Entry dialog box appears click to place or remove the check mark next to any item When all the items you want to watch are checked click OK The element is added to the watch window The watch window is automatically saved Opening an Existing Watch Window If a watch window was open when you exited Debug mode it will automatically open again when you re enter Debug mode To open other watch windows follow these steps 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Debug mode 2 Choose Watch gt Open 3 Navigate to the watch window you want to open and double click its name The window opens in the position you left it PAC Control User s Guide Docked watch window Expand or collapse the item by clicking the or sign in the box CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O Worki
354. line 1 is equivalent to line 3 not to 2 ni n2 n3 n4 nl n2 n3 n4 nl n2 n3 n4 Using Comparison Operators All OptoScript comparison operators return an Integer 32 value of zero false or of non zero true OptoScript supports the following comparison operators for comparing two numeric values NOTE Except for the equal operator the comparison operators can be used only with a numeric expression They cannot be used with a null which is not considered to be a number Operator and Meaning Example equal nVarl nVar2 fFloat3 lt gt not equal nVarl nVar2 lt gt fFloat3 lt less than nVarl nVar2 lt fFloat3 lt less than or equal nVarl nVar2 lt fFloat3 gt greater than nVarl nVar2 gt fFloat3 gt greater than or equal nVarl nVar2 gt fFloat3 More complex examples nVarl nVar2 2 fFloat3 9 5 nVarl nVar2 2 lt fFloat3 9 5 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT You can also use a comparison operator to test whether two strings are equal For example nVarl sStringl sString2 nVarl sStringl abc nVarl sStringl stStrT1 0 nVarl stStrT1 0 stStrT1 1 When you use a comparison operator in an if statement it isn t necessary to put the result in a variable because the result is used consumed by the if if fICTD Input Avg Temp then Fan A 0 endif Using Logical Operators All OptoS
355. load and test a new or updated strategy but still keep the original strategy available You can bring back the original very quickly either by manually switching from one strategy to the other or if the original is still burned to flash by cycling power You can use background downloading as an alternative to Online mode which also allows you to make changes while a strategy is running The following table describes the differences between Online Mode and Background Downloading No Yes Can you add variables I O and charts Can you add and change blocks change instructions Yes Yes and edit existing charts F Only the edited charts are The entire alternate strategy is down What is downloaded in downloaded All other charts loaded while the entire active strategy Debug mode keep running continues to run If you switch to the alternate strategy after download the strategy restarts with the Powerup chart Where does the strategy The affected charts restart at restart after download block 0 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES When a chart is downloaded the old one is not deleted so How is the controller mem this consumes additional mem ory affected ory To clear memory the strat egy should be stopped and then compiled and downloaded Controller memory is cut in half when background download is set it in PAC Manager Also one chart is
356. lowing original string and the examples that follow 012 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 String 1 S N A P PAIC Move String From OPTO string literal To String 1 string variable a Results in note that Move String erased the previous contents of the string 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 String 1 O P T O lt Length is gt Append Character to String From 32 integer literal represents a space To String_1 string variable Results in note the space character in position 4 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 String 1 O P T O Length is s Append String to String From 22 string literal To String_1 string variable Results in 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 String 1 OJ P T O 2 2 lt Length is gt Append Character to String From 13 integer literal carriage return To String 1 string variable Results in 012 34 5 6 7 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 String 1 OJ P T O 2 2 lt Length is PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Comparis
357. lse ElselfStatement gt elseif NumericExp then StatementListOrEmpty Elselfl ist gt ElselfStatement gt Elselfl ist ElselfStatement EndifStatement endif CaseList gt CaseStatement gt CaseStatement DefaultStatement gt CaseList CaseStatement gt CaseList CaseStatement DefaultStatement DefaultStatement gt default StatementListOrEmpty PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX E OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE break CaseStatement gt case NumericExp StatementListOrEmpty break SwitchStatement gt switch NumericExp CaseList endswitch ForStatement for NumericVariable 2 NumericExp to NumericExp step NumericExp StatementListOrEmpty next WhileStatement while NumericExp StatementListOrEmpty wend RepeatStatement repeat StatementListOrEmpty until NumericExp PAC Control User s Guide 401 OPTOSCRIPT GRAMMAR SYNTAX REFERENCE PAC Control User s Guide Index A action block definition 202 action command definition 49 active address 287 adding analog point 125 command 235 in OptoScript 341 communication handle 221 digital point 122 I O unit 116 numeric variable 221 PID loop 135 pointer 221 pointer variable to watch window 232 string variable 221 table variable 224 table variable to watch window 233 235 text to chart 209 variable 221 variable to watch window 230 algorithms for PID loops 301 analog adding I O point 125 changing I O while strateg
358. ly access the Web site using the Help menu in PAC Control Select Help gt Opto 22 on the Web and then select an online resource from the submenu Product Support If you have any questions about PAC Control you can call fax or email Opto 22 Product Support Phone 800 TEK OPTO 800 835 6786 NOTE Email messages and phone 951 695 3080 calls to Opto 22 Product Support Hours are Monday through Friday are grouped together and 7 a m to 5 p m Pacific Time answered in the order received Fax 951 695 3017 Email support opto22 com Opto 22 website www opto22 com When calling for technical support be prepared to provide the following information about your system to the Product Support engineer e Software and version being used e Firmware versions e PC configuration type of processor speed memory and operating system e A complete description of your hardware and operating systems including type of power supply types of I O units installed third party devices installed for example barcode readers e Specific error messages seen Installing PAC Control PAC Control installation is easy and quick Insert the CD containing PAC Control in your CD ROM drive and the installation wizard should appear If the wizard does not appear start Windows Explorer and navigate to your CD ROM drive Double click Setup exe to begin installation NOTE If you run PAC Project applications in Microsoft Windows XP make sure to us
359. m file storage using the File Transfer Protocol FTP e To move files to and from file storage using another device such as a PC use any standard FTP software See instructions in Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager Users Guide A maximum of five devices can FTP files to a control engine simultaneously e Tomove data to and from file storage programmatically a strategy can request or send a file using an FTP communication handle explained in this section A maximum of 16 communication handles can be used simultaneously to move data via FTP FTP also allows you to get a directory listing of files on a remote server or in the local file storage area In addition if your SNAP PAC controller has a microSD card slot in the top of the controller s case you can use the FTP communication handle to manipulate files on a microSD card FTP Communication Handle Examples The value for the FTP communication handle is in the format ftp IP address port username password optional timeout ftp Use all lowercase letters IP address IP address or URL of the destination device where the file will go port Default port is 21 with 20 for the data port Enter the username and password set up for the destination username NE dud device If the destination device is another control engine or password the local server use anything except an empty string Specify a communication timeout value in seconds or leave
360. mary connection route becomes unavailable If that happens the controller uses a secondary communication route There are two types of link redundancy in PAC Project which you can use individually or combined e Controller to 1 0 When link redundancy is configured from the controller to O if communication to the primary I O unit IP address fails communication switches automatically to the secondary I O unit IP address which usually is the second Ethernet network interface on a SNAP PAC R series controller See Commands for Ethernet Link Redundancy on page 287 for more information on primary and secondary I O units NOTE If your system has redundant controllers in order to use link redundancy from the controller to the I O you must connect ETHERNET 2 on the controllers and on the I O units to the same switch No other devices can be connected to that switch e PAC Display Pro to controller When a PAC Display Professional project is installed on a PC with two network interface cards NICs the project can be configured to use the primary and secondary IP addresses to access data from the PAC Control strategy running on the control engine One address is always active If the primary address is unavailable then the secondary address becomes the active address and the PAC Display scanner automatically shifts to the secondary address If the secondary address fails then the primary address becomes the active address and automaticall
361. me Block Type Sprinklers Read Hygrometer Action 2 To delete a breakpoint highlight it and click Remove To delete all breakpoints in the strategy at once click Remove All 3 When you have finished making changes click OK Interpreting Elapsed Times As you debug your strategy you may notice elapsed time readings appearing in a chart s or subroutine s status bar as shown below PAC Control User s Guide 181 VIEWING AND PRINTING Sprinklers Elapsed time Elapsed time readings can help you determine how much time a chart a subroutine or a single block takes to execute The readings have slightly different meanings depending on what you did to make them appear as described in the table below Run a chart or subroutine and pause it Time since the chart or subroutine started or was last paused Single step by line or block Time to execute the previous block Auto step Time to execute the most recently executed block Hit a breakpoint Time since the last pause or if the chart or subroutine was not paused elapsed time since it started running Viewing and Printing You can view and print several helpful things in a strategy as described in the following topics 182 Viewing Strategy Filename and Path below Viewing an Individual Chart or Subroutine on page 183 Viewing All Charts in a Strategy on page 183
362. me will be in one of the following formats Manual archive or archive when strategy is closed Path Filename Archive D02282007 T114351 zip Archive on download PathYFilename Download D02282007 T114351 zip Archive when downloading from online mode PathYFilename Online D02282007 T114351 zip The date stamp D is in the format mm dd yyyy In the examples above the date is February 28 2007 The time stamp T is in the format hh mmy ss In the examples above the time is 51 seconds past 11 43 A M Compiling and Downloading 166 Before your strategy can be tested or run it must be compiled and then downloaded to a control engine When a strategy is compiled all the commands OptoScript code charts and variable and I O definitions it contains are verified and converted into a format that the control engine can understand Then the strategy can be sent downloaded to a control engine Only compiled strategies can be downloaded NOTE Before you can download your strategy make sure you have downloaded the latest firmware to your control engine For instructions see the controller s user s guide PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Compiling and Downloading in One Step NOTE If you are using Ethernet link redundancy in PAC Control Professional make sure you are downloading through the IP address you want to use either the primary or secondary address See Using Ethernet Link Redundancy i
363. n Alarm 1 Set the oven alarm else Oven larm 0 Glear the oven alarm endif i Shortcuts OptoScript code OptoScript block When To Use OptoScript 318 You ll want to use OptoScript for some common programming tasks that can be more difficult to do using standard PAC Control commands than using a procedural language Extensive math calculations or complex loops for example can be done with standard commands but take up a lot of space on a flowchart When you use OptoScript however be aware that it is not self documenting Make sure you frequently use comments to explain what the code does so that when you come back to it a year later or when someone who is not as familiar with the code or the strategy must change it it can be easily interpreted This section shows examples of using OptoScript e for math expressions e for string handling e for complex loops e for case statements e for conditions PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT e for combining math expressions loops and conditions For Math Expressions OptoScript is especially useful for mathematical computations Math expressions are simpler and easier and many of them are built right into the language instead of requiring commands such as Add or Multiply OptoScript has no limitations on the number of parentheses you can use in math expressions Heres an example of a mathematical expression i
364. n Enter Text All Valid Types PAC Control User s Guide 357 VIEWING SUBROUTINES 5 Choose the Type and Name for each prompt from the drop down lists You can configure variables on the fly as you would with any command Remember that the Type was chosen when the parameters for the command were configured so your Type choices may be limited 6 When the Add Instruction dialog box is completed click OK 7 Click Close to close the Instructions dialog box and return to the chart The chart is now set up to call the subroutine Debugging Subroutines Debugging a subroutine is just like debugging a flowchart When you are debugging a strategy that calls the subroutine make sure the debug level is Full Debug see page 176 Then use the Step Into button to step inside the block that calls the subroutine The subroutine window automatically opens and you can continue to step through blocks or lines inside the subroutine As you step through blocks subroutines and charts the tabs at the bottom of the window let you know where you are see Using Tabs to View Open Windows on page 57 You can also set breakpoints on any subroutine block as needed See Setting and Removing Breakpoints on page 180 for more information Viewing Subroutines Since subroutines appear on the Strategy Tree it is easy to view information about them A subroutine appears in two places on the Strategy Tree in the Subroutines Included folder and in
365. n OptoScript integerl integer2 2 floatl float2 2 3 To accomplish the same computation using standard PAC Control commands you would need to create at least two intermediate variables and use five instructions as shown below I Instructions Math Expressions Block 16 Add Add integer2 Plus 2 Modif Put Result in tempintegerA Subtract float2 Next Block Minus 2 Put Result in tempfloatA Divide float By tempfloatA Put Result in tempfloatA Subtract tempfloatA Minus 3 0 Put Result in tempfloatA Multiply tempfloatA Times tempintegerA Put Result in integer1 As you can see the OptoScript version of this math expression is not only simpler to create but also easier to understand once created PAC Control User s Guide 319 WHEN TO USE OPTOSCRIPT For String Handling If your strategy transmits and receives serial data you will want to try using OptoScript code In standard PAC Control forming and parsing decoding serial data can take several blocks In OptoScript string handling can be easier The following figure shows a flowchart designed to send the string request What type of plane and parse the response F14 into a classification F and a model number 14 Compare these blocks and instructions with the ones on the following page done in OptoScript l Instructions String Handler Build new request ll Move String From EXHI p UTC T del To
366. n PAC Control on page 94 for more information 1 With the strategy open in PAC Control click the Debug mode button REI on the toolbar or choose Mode gt Debug Changing to Debug mode automatically saves and compiles the strategy including all code in OptoScript blocks If you see a Powerup Clear Expected message click OK A download warning message may appear Download Warning A Strategy Mismatch The strategy to be downloaded does not match the strategy already in the control engine Strategy To Download 3 Name Sprinkler Control Checksum A4DCB CBSCOECB13D789F123F5148EB11 Timestamp 07 02 09 10 56 05 Strategy in the Controller Name Sprinkler Control Checksum B2FF383D7F7BC284EA7DDAAC30845024 Timestamp 06 30 08 12 53 24 If vou choose to continue the strategy that is in the control engine will be replaced by this strategy Do you want to continue the download This message tells you that the strategy to be downloaded doesn t match the strategy already loaded on the control engine either because it is a different strategy or because it has been changed since the last download To continue the download click Yes As the strategy is compiled the Compile Progress dialog box appears This dialog may appear only briefly However if there are errors or warnings the dialog box will stay open You can copy the errors and warnings by clicking the right mouse button and selecting Copy All as Text PAC Cont
367. n PAC Project is on the SNAP PAC System PAC Control initially shows only SNAP PAC I O units and the commands used with them When you re using the SNAP PAC system only hiding legacy I O units and commands makes it simpler and less confusing to build your strategy However the legacy capabilities are still there and can be made visible in a specific strategy as needed NOTE If you enable legacy I O capabilities in PAC Control see the legacy versions of the PAC control guides for information on how to use them forms 1710 and 1711 Existing Strategies When you open an existing ioControl strategy in PAC Control either Basic or Professional PAC Control will automatically show the I O units and commands appropriate to that strategy For example if you have been using SNAP Ultimate I O SNAP Ultimate I O units will be visible in the strategy In addition commands used with SNAP Ultimate I O but now deprecated because they are not needed with SNAP PACs such as High Density Digital commands uwill also be available Similarly if you open an existing strategy that contains mistic serial O units all the mistic I O unit types and commands such as event reaction and mistic PID commands will automatically be shown PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES New Strategies When you create a new strategy in PAC Control either Basic or Professional the strategy will show only the SNAP PAC System This means
368. n Pulse Measurement Get On Pulse Measurement Complete Status Get amp Restart On Pulse Measurement Start Continuous Square Wave Start Off Pulse Start On Pulse Some digital point commands are available in PAC Control Professional only Some commands are available only on some I O units For details see specific information for each command in the PAC Control Command Reference or online Help States Latches and Counters The following diagram illustrates states latches and counters While states and latches apply to digital points on all I O units counters depend on the capability of the brain See the brain s data sheet for specifications PAC Control User s Guide 281 DIGITAL POINT COMMANDS 282 States Latches and Counters State is ON Off latch is true 1 State is ON ON when value changes from ON to OFF On latch is true 1 when value changes from OFF to ON OFF State is OFF State is OFF State OFF ON OFF ON On Latch OFF ON ON nochange ON no change Off Latch OFF OFF ON ON no change Counter 0 1 1 no change 2 Latches Latches are an extremely high speed digital function Both on latches and off latches are available Latches are automatic and do not have to be configured When the value of a digital input point changes from off to on an on latch is automatically set While the value of the point may return to off the on latch remains set until cleared as a record of the
369. n Station Our freshly baked cookies then move to the inspection station where someone inspects them If the cookie does not fall within normal tolerances for example it doesn t have enough chips or is shaped oddly the inspector closes a switch XS 103 signalling the bad cookie A valve SV 103 then opens to allow plant air to blow the reject cookie into a waste bin If the cookie passes the inspection it moves on to packaging and shipping Conveyor The conveyor and its motor continuously move the cookies from the dough vessel to the inspection station The conveyor speed is controlled through an analog output SY 104 from a speed controller SC 104 Emergency Stops Wired at key locations around our bakery are emergency stop buttons If something goes wrong with the process an operator can press any of these E STOP buttons PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX D SAMPLE STRATEGY The buttons are wired in series and are normally closed so pressing any E STOP button breaks the circuit One digital input can monitor all the buttons The system can be restarted by resetting the button Required I O Here s the list of analog and digital I O modules required for the cookie factory Analog I O PT 100 Dough Vessel Pressure Input SNAP AIV 10 to 10 VDC 0 15 psig TT 102 Oven Temperature Input SNAP AICTD ICTD 50 350 C TY 102 Oven Temperatur
370. n a strategy or used in more than one strategy Subroutines are built using the same tools and logic used to create charts Once built you can call them at any time from any chart in any strategy You cannot call a subroutine from another subroutine however Like charts subroutines start at one block and proceed sequentially through command blocks to the end They use variables inputs and outputs They can use OptoScript code Fach subroutine is displayed in its own window and you can open and view several subroutine windows at the same time Unlike charts however subroutines are independent from a strategy You don t need to have a strategy open to create or change a subroutine And if you do have a strategy open creating a subroutine has no effect on the open strategy unless you specifically link them together Debugging a subroutine however requires that it be called from a strategy A second important difference between subroutines and charts is that subroutines offer two ways to work with variables and other logical elements they can be passed in or they can be local to the subroutine e Passed in items are passed into the subroutine by the strategy They are referenced when the subroutine is executed If a parameter is passed by reference the subroutine will pass the value back to the strategy For example you could create a subroutine to add 3 0 to a passed in float PAC Control User s Guide 347 CREATING SUBROUTINES
371. n addition we recommend not using a timeout value that is less than 0 1 seconds For example if the value is 0 1 seconds then communication to an unresponsive I O unit will be disabled within 0 3 seconds If the network connectivity is very slow you may need to use a significantly longer timeout value such as 3 to 5 seconds or longer Changing Configured I O Units 1 To change a configured I O unit make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode 2 Find the I O unit s name on the Strategy Tree Double click it to open the Edit I O Unit dialog box See Add I O Unit Dialog Box on page 117 3 Make the necessary changes and click OK You can also change an 1 0 unit from the Configure I O Units dialog box by double clicking the unit s name or highlighting it and clicking Modify Deleting Configured I O Units You cannot delete an I O unit if it has I O points configured or if the I O unit is referenced in a PAC Control command CAUTION Be careful when deleting I O units You cannot undo a deletion 1 To delete a configured I O unit make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode 2 Find the I O unit s name on the Strategy Tree Right click it and choose Delete from the pop up menu The I O unit is deleted from the strategy You can also delete an I O unit from the Configure I O Units dialog box by highlighting the unit s name and clicking Delete PAC Control User s Guide 121 ADDING 1 0 POINTS Adding I
372. n window is blank indicating that no messages are being monitored between the PC and the active control engine In some cases for example when PAC Control launches PAC Message Viewer messages should appear immediately To start monitoring or change the level of monitoring choose View gt Monitor Levels The Monitor Levels dialog box lists all the possible levels to monitor You can click Refresh to make sure the list is up to date amp Monitor Levels ioCom high level comm 1 user handle 00000004 ioMwd low level 1 user handle 00000002 All ioMwd mid level 1 user handle 00000001 None Refresh Highlight one or more of the monitor levels in the list and click Close You return to the PAC Message Viewer window where the changes you made are reflected at once To stop monitoring click Pause To start monitoring again click Resume To erase all messages from the window click Clear By default communication messages in PAC Message Viewer are automatically saved to a log file named IOSNIELOG You can toggle saving on and off by choosing File gt Log to File Also by default messages are temporarily stored in system cache memory before being saved to the log file If you are having trouble with system crashes and need to capture messages just before a crash however you can choose File gt Flush File Always to send messages directly to the log file To view or edit the log file choose File gt Edit Log File The fil
373. name Prevent response messages from printing to the DOS screen Append the DOS switch q This example shows lines included in a batch file that will define the control engine download the cdf file to it and then run the strategy termcl a MyCE tcp 10 20 30 40 22001 0 2000 termcl d MyCE c MMy ProjectMMyStrategy MyCE CDF termcl r MyCE Changing Download Compression If you have a very large strategy short timeouts and slow connections on your network you may need to decrease the compression level to download the strategy successfully When you decrease compression the strategy takes longer to download because it is sent in smaller chunks If you are having difficulty downloading your strategy follow these steps to decrease compression 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode choose File gt Strategy Options 2 Inthe Strategy Options dialog box click the Download tab Strategy Options Archive Download Legacy Serial 1 0 Ports acy Flash Memory C Save strategy to flash memory after download Set autorun flag after download Background Downloading C Use background downloading and fast strategy updating The controller must be configured for this feature using PAC Manager Download Compression None Full Q Slider 3 Move the slider to the left to reduce compression and then click OK You may need to experiment with the setting until the strategy downloads suc
374. name but a different table length are noted in a log file that appears when the paste is complete Deleting Elements 1 2 Make sure the chart is open and the strategy is in Configure or Online mode Click the Select tool 4 Click the element s to select them CAUTION Make sure you have selected the element you want You cannot undo a deletion Press DELETE You can also select the element s right click them and select Delete from the pop up menu Block 0 cannot be deleted PAC Control User s Guide 211 OPENING SAVING AND CLOSING CHARTS Changing Element Color and Size You can change the colors and sizes of blocks connections and text in your chart To change one element for example the color of one block use the steps in this section To change more than one at a time see Changing the Appearance of Elements in a Chart Window on page 203 Start with the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode Resizing Blocks or Text Blocks 1 Click the Select tool L and click the block to select it 2 Click one of the handles then drag it in the direction you want To resize horizontally and vertically at the same time drag a corner handle Changing Block Colors 1 Click the Select tool L and click the block to select it 2 Right click the block and choose Color from the pop up menu 3 Pickthe color you want and click OK Changing Text You can change the size font font style or color
375. nd put a space between each one The following example sets the transmit timeout to 20 seconds and the receive timeout to 15 seconds The connect timeout is not changed arrstrServer 5 to tx 20000 to rx 15000 Table name Element 5 Transmit timeout Receive timeout Retrieving a Webpage Use the HTTP Get command to retrieve non secure HTTP or secure HTTPS content from a web page The example provided here uses the HTTP Get command in OptoScript to retrieve secure content from www google com For more information on this command see form 1701 the PAC Control Command Reference PAC Control 5 File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Compile Mode Tools View Window Help E o 50550055 8 x GoogleHttps 9 a intent pa a 5 Ge Variables S gea Slt BIN a tle A A A a e B Ej Numeric Variables E nhttpStatus OptoScript Code D nPortssL MoveToStrTableElements 0 1 HTTP SrcStrTblBody Dal nSendStatus MoveToStrTableElements 0 1 DstStrTblHdr 3 Ej String Variables MoveToStrTableElements 0 1 DstStrTblBody strCmd StrURL www google com strURL strCmd x wai nPortSSL 443 Pointer Variables amp Communication Handles amp Numeric Tables amp String Tables nSendStatus HttpGet DstStrTblBody Return body data dest string table DstStrTblHdr 7 Return header data dest string table HTTP SrcStrTblBody Source body data string
376. nd Exiting 42 TEE o E E 42 Opening the Strategy A strategy is a complete control program developed in PAC Control Our sample strategy controls a cookie factory The sample strategy is described in detail on page 383 but for now let s just open and explore it PAC Control User s Guide OPENING THE STRATEGY 1 Start PAC Control by clicking the Start button and selecting Programs gt Opto 22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt PAC Control The PAC Control main window opens IPAC Control Basic File Edit Configure Chart Subroutine Tools View Help Dicono EEA taex ALA Gm ero sa PAC Control Ready 2 Click the Open Strategy button amp on the toolbar or choose File gt Open Strategy 3 Inthe Open Strategy dialog box navigate to C Users Public Public Documents Opto 22 PAC Project 9 2 Control Pro or Basic Examples NOTE For Windows XP go to C Documents and Settings All Users Documents Opto 22 PAC Project 9 1 Control Pro or Basic Examples 4 In the Examples directory double click the ioCookies subdirectory to open it The strategy file Cookies idb appears Save Strategy As Save in CJ ioCookies Fil Cookies idb File name Save as type PAC Control Strategy Files idb i j 5 Double click the Cookies idb file to open it NOTE Ifa File Format Change dialog opens warning that you are about to open strategy saved using an earlier version o
377. nd of the process This kind of loop is guaranteed to execute at least once e For loops repeat a process for a specified number of times Below is an example of a while loop as it would appear in standard flowchart commands contrasted with the way it could be handled in an OptoScript block OWHILELOOP s C testforthehou se AA In standard PAC Control commands the ABE S loop takes several blocks each JEEP containing one or more instructions In OptoScript the loop is in a single block that contains one condensed instruction Script Powerup Test Hour C9 Actions 4 Conditions Variables Test Compile me d pis ptoScript Code AN while GetHours gt 8 and GetHours lt 17 do something vend ij Iv PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT For Case Statements Case or switch statements create multiple decision points They can also be easier to do using OptoScript Here is an example of a case statement In standard PAC Control commands the case statement requires several sets of condition and action blocks each containing commands In OptoScript the code is all in one block switch GetDayOfWeek 1 7 Monday Using OptoScript for case statements saves space in the flowchart and lets you see all the possible cases in one dialog box PAC Control User s Guide 323 WHEN TO USE OPTOSCRIPT For
378. nd on and off pulses to an output point The availability of pulsing depends on the brain see the brain s data sheet for specifications Generate N Pulses The command Generate N Pulses is frequently used to flash a light or sound an alarm For example you could sound a two second alarm four times In the arguments you set the number of times the on pulse is sent the length of the on pulse and the length of the off pulse Generate N Pulses always starts with an off pulse If you resend this command make sure to leave sufficient time in between so it does not interfere with itself Start On Pulse and Start Off Pulse The commands Start On Pulse and Start Off Pulse send a single pulse cycle e Start On Pulse starts with an on pulse of a length you determine and ends with an off pulse e Start Off Pulse starts with an off pulse of a length you determine and ends with an on pulse Both of these commands can be used as time delays For example if a light is on and you want to turn it off after 30 seconds you can send a Start On Pulse command setting the on pulse to be 30 seconds long At the end of that time the off pulse is sent to turn off the light You can also use this type of command in a loop to turn a digital point on or off for short intervals For example you could create a loop that checks the level of liquid in a tank and pulses on a drain if the level is too high The advantages of using a pulse command are that the point do
379. ne command hold down the SHIFT key while you click all the commands to be cut or copied at once NOTE To cut and paste all commands in a block copy and paste the entire block and then change its name if necessary Press CTRL X to cut the command s or CTRL C to copy them You can also click the right mouse button and choose Cut or Copy from the pop up menu The command is cut or copied to the Windows clipboard PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS Pasting a Command Once you have cut or copied a command you can paste it into any block in the same strategy Choose one of the following and then press CTRL V e o paste the command in the same block click where you want to insert the command To paste the command at the end of the instruction block move the cursor just below the last instruction and click to highlight the empty space e o paste the command to another block click Close to exit the current Instructions dialog box and double click the block where you want to place the command Click where you want to insert the command Configuring a Continue Block Continue blocks do only one thing jump to another block Thus the only information you need to provide in a continue block is the name of the block to jump to 1 With the strategy in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the continue block you want to configure You can also click the block click the rig
380. ne mode click the Select tool L and click the block to select it Right click the block and choose Name from the pop up menu I Name Block Cancel In the Name Block dialog box type the name and click OK Renaming Blocks 1 206 With the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode click the Select tool and click the block to select it Right click the block and choose Name from the pop up menu In the Name Block dialog box change the name Click OK PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 8 WORKING WITH FLOWCHARTS Connecting Blocks To connect blocks start with the chart open and the strategy in Configure or Online mode Remember that action blocks and OptoScript blocks have only one exit and condition blocks have two Action Blocks and OptoScript Blocks 1 To connect an action block or an OptoScript block to the next block in a program sequence click the Connect tool 4 First click the source block and then click the destination block Although you can click anywhere inside the blocks to make a connection the connection is attached at the side closest to where you clicked In the figure below Block 0 is the source block and Block 1 is the destination block New_Chart 3 Shortcuts To keep your charts neat try to draw the most direct connections possible To do so after clicking the source block move your cursor out of the block at a point closest to its destination
381. ne module Any of the digital input or output devices shown in the diagram could be wired to HDD modules rather than standard 4 channel digital modules Key Features See the following topics for some of PAC Control key features Copying I O Configurations on page 115 A configuration file allows you to copy an I O configuration from one strategy to another Or using PAC Manager you can send the configuration to multiple I O units at the same time Using Network Segmenting in PAC Control on page 93 Using the two independent Ethernet network interfaces on a SNAP PAC controller you can segment the control network from the company network Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Control on page 94 Pro only If you are using SNAP PAC controllers and PAC Control Professional you can use Ethernet link redundancy to set up alternate network links Persistent Data on page 220 You can configure the data in most variables to be persistent The variable s value is saved in the controller s memory it does not change when the strategy is run stopped or started and it does not change if the strategy is changed and downloaded again Pointer Commands on page 303 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 3 WHAT IS PAC CONTROL For advanced programming you can create pointers that store the memory address of a variable or some other PAC Control item such as a chart an I O point or a PID loop You can perform any op
382. ne of the command you want to change You can also click the command to highlight it and click Modify In the Edit Instruction dialog box make the necessary changes For help see Adding Commands on page 235 Click OK to return to the Instructions dialog box where you can see the changed command Deleting a Command You can delete a command permanently or you can comment out a command so it is temporarily skipped usually for debugging purposes Permanently Deleting a Command 1 With the strategy in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block containing the command you want to delete NOTE To delete commands in OptoScript blocks see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 340 In the Instructions dialog box click any line of the command you want to delete CAUTION Make sure you select the correct command You cannot undo a deletion Click Delete or press DELETE on the keyboard PAC Control User s Guide 239 CUTTING OR COPYING A COMMAND Commenting Out a Command You can mark certain commands so that the strategy temporarily ignores them Commenting out one or more commands can help you pinpoint problems in a strategy 1 With the strategy in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block containing the command s you want to comment out NOTE To comment out commands in OptoScript blocks see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 340 In the Instruc
383. net mask that are incompatible with those on the computer Subnetwork numbers and netmasks must be identical on the control engine and the computer If you see the message No response from host check the following e Are the computer and control engine correctly connected Is the control engine turned on e Arethe IP address and subnet mask on the control engine compatible with those on the computer If your host computer has more than one Ethernet card check your route table to make sure packets are routed to the correct adapter card If all else fails connect the PC and the control engine using an Ethernet crossover cable and retest the connection If you still cannot ping the control engine contact Product Support See page 4 Other Troubleshooting Tools 366 Checking Detailed Communication Information Using PAC Message Viewer For detailed information about each communication transaction use the PAC Message Viewer utility 1 Inthe Start menu choose Programs gt Opto 22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt Tools gt PAC MessageViewer You can also start PAC Message Viewer from PAC Terminal by choosing Tools gt Start PAC Message Viewer or from PAC Control in Debug mode by choosing Debug gt Sniff Communication The PAC Message Viewer window appears PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING amp PAC Message Viewer File View Help Pause F Clear Messages sniffed In most cases the mai
384. ng COMMAS eaea d eerte tr de eet eran ats derer alive als Soe hve 315 Delay COMMANGS sue seo sesto cadonene eset va enit tan CIR Haeret ee PE LAE IER 315 Using TIMES ee 315 Down Timer Operation s3 5 cccemacdiadaas spere aden cagwraanknid aer Erant 315 Up Timer Operation x4 teeth VeRerho bI re hp RI vetd bbe MISERE Sum 316 Chapter 11 Using OptoScript os icccccecnceis ics re rara en EE ERI dese 317 HMO oj TNT 317 lenis Chapter cocotte ertet ppt eR I S eE a Ie e Rb ea qn er URS 317 AbOUEODLOSCHBLU 4 epe iea BEER ir mnogu uto Eier ede 317 When Tolse ODtOSCIIDLIe tee dde e dida iu SOR Dat dan uin ire UU eq 318 FOP Math EXBTESSIONS es castes an e red oes catu iiec qoedas e eut tdi ar E fannie dd 319 OR SERIO Handling ERR PEE 320 For Complex WOODS x54 55d da edo tide veg ede eee idee dE bre or dde PE Q be Dd Qd 322 Fore ase statements cues oy und o empate ma PRU dide bat Nae et 323 FOF COMGILIONMS EET 324 For Combining Expressions Operators and Conditions 0 00 02 c cece ees 325 OptoScript Functions and Commands 60 c eect eee eee ene 326 PAC Control User s Guide Standard and OptoScript Commands 0 cece cece eect teen eee ees 326 Using Oil OPLOSCHDE quiso eivedae ore b bere pora coin dene Ped bir weis 326 OptoScript Syntax use ressens neriie rctewer E rq a E O ee mE he 327 More About Syntax with Commands sisse ee 328 OptoScript Data Types and Variables 0 00 0 c
385. ng Control Engines from One PC to Another 109 Downloading Files Using PAC Terminal ss 110 Configuring Control Engines Before you can use a control engine to run a strategy you must first define the control engine on your PC and then associate the control engine with your PAC Control strategy See Defining a Control Engine on Your PC below to identify the connection through which the PC and the control engine communicate Because this process writes to the Windows Registry on your PC you must define control engines for each computer that uses your strategy If your computer can boot to two operating systems you must configure control engines for each OS You can define control engines in PAC Control or in the software utility PAC Terminal See Associating the Control Engine with Your Strategy on page 93 to identify which defined control engine is the active control engine Although you can associate several control engines with the same strategy if necessary the strategy can be downloaded to only one at a time The PAC Control User s Guide EJ CONFIGURING CONTROL ENGINES control engine set to receive the download is called the active engine You must use PAC Control for associating the control engine with your strategy Defining a Control Engine on Your PC 1 Choose one of the following Using PAC Terminal Choose Start gt Programs gt Opto 22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt Tools gt PAC Terminal From the
386. ng in Watch Windows Watch windows are flexible You can dock the window where you want it in the PAC Control main window You can also move delete and inspect elements in the window e To dock the watch window click the docking button lin its title bar The window moves to its own frame PAC Control Professional Oven Inspection Control i File Edit Control Engine Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help Tas gt ll m s Cookies pl IP amp E Cookies amp G Control Engines amp E Subroutines Included a 3 Variables amp E Numeric Variables amp C3 String Variables Pointer Variables E Communication Hanc E Numeric Tables String Tables Pointer Tables amp c 1 0 Units c SA Mixed IO Unit C3 Points E PIDs iil 9 JL Next 4r Prev Count Watch Name nCookieCounter Integer 32 Variable Digital Input 713 02 dilnspectionPassFail On On Latch Off Latch See Docking Windows on page 59 for more information To expand or collapse watch window you have added to an I O unit PID loop chart or table click its plus or minus sign Watch 2 o DBR XVAL 272 8985 Name Type 12 Temperature Analog Input Deg O J Sprinkler Control SNAP Mixed Ultimat PAS anes eine 00 Switch DO 05 Sprinkl 12 Tempera Digital Control
387. ng limitations in mind as you use the file communication handle with the controller s file system see below for microSD card Maximum length for filenames and directory names 127 characters Filename characters allowed All ASCII characters except null and Path name component separator Maximum number of files and directories that can be open simultaneously 16 Maximum directory depth Limited only by available memory Maximum number of files Limited only by available memory Each file uses 516 bytes of overhead plus its number of bytes rounded up to the nearest multiple of 516 bytes Maximum number of directories Limited only by available memory Each directory uses 516 bytes Maximum amount of memory available in the control engine s file system Approximately 4 MB on a SNAP PAC S1 or 2 MB on a SNAP PAC R series controller varies slightly depending on the control engine firmware version If power to the control engine is turned off files are destroyed unless they have been saved to flash memory See Commands Relating to Permanent Storage on page 280 for information on saving files to flash using PAC Control commands Using a File on a microSD Card If your SNAP PAC controller has a microSD card slot in the top of the controller s case you can use PAC Control commands with files on a microSD card just as you would with any other file in the controller s file s
388. ng option is auto stepping You can select this option whether or not the chart is currently paused 1 Click the Auto Step Chart button 3 and watch the program move from block to block At one time or another your chart looks like this this chart This chart runs continuously once the program has been started Drop the dough Drop the chips Notice that in the PAC Control toolbar the Run and Auto Step Chart buttons are depressed The chart status bar shows us the chart is running and in Step Auto mode The time indicator to the right of Break Off shows the time it took for the most recent block to execute 2 Clickthe Auto Step Chart button again to end auto stepping Step Off appears indicating the program is again running without interruption PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL Now let s see how many cookies we ve produced to this point On the Strategy Tree double click the numeric variable nCookie Counter s nCookieCounter scanning The Value field should increase every time a cookie is produced adding to the total number of cookies produced since the strategy run began The nCookie Counter above shows this figure as 42 Yours may be different But nCookie Counter tells us the total number of cookies put on the conveyor belt without considering that some of them may be rejected by the inspection station We need to subtract
389. ngines in the list 4 Click Add Configured Control Engines 5 Click Add again to add a control engine PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL The Control Engine Configuration dialog box appears Configure Ethemet Connection Configure control engine name and parameters Control Engine Name System Type Standard Redundant Networks PRO only Redundant Controllers PRO only Settings IP Address Hostname 0 0 0 0 Controller Port 22001 Software Retries 0 Software Timeout 5000 Enter Cookie Controller as the control engine name The name can contain letters numbers spaces and most other characters except colons and square brackets Spaces cannot be used as first or last characters Under System Type make sure Standard is selected Enter the control engine s IP address On hardware such as a SNAP PAC R series controller the IP address is usually written on a sticker on the side of the unit If an IP address has not been assigned to the control engine see Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide for configuration instructions On a SoftPAC controller if PAC Control and SoftPAC are on the same PC use the loopback IP address 127 0 0 1 However if SoftPAC is on a different PC use the address for that PC s network interface card NIC In this case the SoftPAC PC s NIC must be configured with a static IP address NOTE In PAC Control Professional a
390. nspect dialog box Protecting a Running Strategy If you want a strategy to run automatically without interruption you can protect the strategy by disabling all host communications to the control engine To protect the strategy first make sure the strategy is saved to flash and that the autorun flag is set To disable host communication open PAC Manager and set the Control Engine port to 0 and then save that change to flash For more information on setting this port see form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide NOTE This action also disables communication between PAC Display and the control engine Stopping a Strategy To stop the strategy click the Stop Strategy button mi or press F3 or select Debug gt Stop You can also stop a strategy from the Inspecting dialog box see Inspecting Control Engines in Debug Mode on page 101 PAC Control User s Guide DEBUGGING Debugging 176 Once the strategy is running if it doesn t appear to be working correctly you can use several tools in Debug mode to figure out what the problem is You can pause a chart or subroutine step into over or out of each block watch it slowly step through the blocks or add a breakpoint to a block to stop the strategy just before it executes that block The chart s or subroutine status is shown in the lower left hand corner of its window This corner shows whether the chart or subroutine is running stopped or suspended and whether the debuggin
391. nt G Open Parent Click Apply The On Latch IVAL field turns green after a second or two indicating the latch is on Click Add Watch We ll add the variable to our watch window so we can see what happens In the Add Watch dialog box leave all portions checked Click OK to add the variable to the Cookie Watch window Close the view point dialog box PAC Control User s Guide USING A WATCH WINDOW 17 In the Cookie Watch window click the plus sign next to 02 dilnspectionPassFailSwitch Your screen may show only part of the words 18 Move your cursor over the right side of the Name column until the cursor changes shape Then click and drag the column to make it wider until you can see all the words Watch Window Name Type nCookie Counter Integer 32 Variable 5 02 dilnspectionPassFail Digital Input State On Latch Off Latch 19 Click in the Oven Inspection Control chart to make it active and move the scroll bars until you can see the Blow Off block at the bottom Your window now looks something like this PAC Control Professional Oven_Inspection_Control E File Edit ControlEngine Debug Chart Subroutine Mode Tools View Watch Window Help Ciconio Sh debus I 0m 55 70559 Cookies degrees Paints a Ems 7 1 Set oven temperature to Ele Event 01 Sos Oven Ones 450 degrees AA Mixed ID Unit ISSIS amp Ej Points 323 diD oughLevelSwitch T diChipLevelSwitch If inspection station sees um d
392. nt gt All Chart Instructions NOTE Subroutine instructions are not included you can print them separately PAC Control processes the information and displays it in the Instructions window Save Search Print Bi Cookies All Chart Instructions TITLE Block Instructions for Every Chart STRATEGY Cookies DATE 02 05 10 TIME 10 39 55 CHART Alarms ACTIONS Action Block Powerup Id Z5 Exit to Goto Start Id 28 Restart Powerup chart This will get system going agaim Start Chart Chart Powerup Put Status In nChartStatus Action Block Set Devices Id 2 Exit to Stop Conveyor Id 36 Lower oven temperature while conveyor is stopped Move From 200 0 To ao venTemperatureControl Close all valves Turn Off AnChinhi cnenceVelre PAC Control User s Guide 187 VIEWING AND PRINTING You may need to resize the window and use the scroll bar to see all the data Blocks and their instructions are listed in alphabetical or ID number order by type of block action blocks first then OptoScript blocks then condition blocks and finally continue blocks 3 To print the data click the Print button on the toolbar To save it to a text file click the Save button To search the data click theSearch button When finished close the window Viewing and Printing Strategy or Subroutine Elements You must be in Configure mode 1 Toview a summary of I O elements and variables configured in a strategy select File
393. nt all points in Building A to appear together PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Instruction Examples This section includes examples of common instructions you may want to use See Chapter 10 Programming with Commands for additional information on programming with PAC Control If you need to use math calculations strings or complex loops and conditions in your strategy also see Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for examples of OptoScript OptoScript is a procedural language within PAC Control that can make programming easier especially if you are an experienced programmer Creating Messages to Display On Screen You may need to create messages to display on screen for example to give data to operators Typically these messages consist of some specific literal words and symbols followed by a variable value and maybe some additional literal words or symbols Current temperature 86 3 F Literal words Variable Literal words amp symbols value amp symbols You can create the message in a single block in your PAC Control chart like this To enter the literal text use the command Move String Remember to include spaces Move String I Instructions Message_Display Create Message where you want them to appear 9 Current temperature j To Current_Temp_Message such as after the equal sign Convert Float to String Delete Convert Current_Temp 2 Add the variable value by
394. nt can be used directly wherever a float variable can be used For example you can assign an analog point a value or use points directly in mathematical expressions and control structures For more information see Using I O in OptoScript on page 326 Reading or Writing Analog Points The Move command is the main command used to read or write analog points PAC Control User s Guide CHART COMMANDS Chart Commands 246 The following commands control charts in the strategy Call Chart Continue Calling Chart Calling Chart Running Continue Chart Calling Chart Stopped Get Chart Status Calling Chart Suspended Start Chart Chart Running Stop Chart Chart Stopped Suspend Chart Chart Suspended For information about charts in a PAC Control strategy see PAC Control Terminology on page 47 About the Task Queue How do subroutines fit into the task queue Whenever a chart calls a subroutine the subroutine temporarily inherits the task in use by the calling chart along with its priority Does a task always use all of its allocated time Not always If a chart or subroutine runs in a loop all allocated time is used If a chart or subroutine does not need all of its allocated time to complete its job all remaining time including any portion of a time slice is given up The following conditions cause a chart to use less than a full time slice e The chart or subroutine stops e he chart or subroutine is s
395. ntinuously once the program has been started Drop the dough Drop the chips 3 Shortcuts 9 Connect the Drop Chips block to this new block by clicking the connection tool amp in the toolbar Click once in the block the connection is coming from Drop Chips If you move your cursor around the screen you see a connection following your movements If you move the cursor to the top of Block 19 the connection becomes a short line from the bottom center of Drop Chips to the top center of Block 19 10 Click inside the upper part of Block 19 to complete the connection Click the right mouse button or press ESC to release the tool returning your cursor to an arrow Let s name Block 19 something more descriptive 11 Click Block 19 once to select it then right click it and select Name from its pop up menu The Name Block dialog box appears PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL I Name Block 12 Type Back to Speed OK right over the selected text then click OK The chart now looks like this The Powerup chart starts this chart This chart runs continuously once the program has been started Drop the dough Drop the chips 3 Shortcuts Now let s give the continue block its instructions 13 Double click the continue block to see a list of all the blocks in the chart Select Continue Block Destination Block Id Name Drop Chips Drop
396. ntrol strategy Remember to save PID parameters to the I O unit s flash memory too see Inspecting I O Units and Saving Settings to Flash on page 140 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O Using Watch Windows for Monitoring While the strategy is running you can monitor several strategy elements at once in a watch window I O units digital and analog points PID loops variables even charts You cannot monitor subroutine parameters or variables that are local to a subroutine in a watch window Unlike inspection windows watch windows can be created the way you want docked in a position most convenient for you and are saved with your strategy You cannot change strategy elements in a watch window but you can open the inspect dialog box from the watch window and change the element there Creating a Watch Window 1 2 With the strategy open and in Debug mode choose Watch gt New In the Create New Watch Window dialog box navigate to the location where you want the watch window file to be kept usually in the same folder as the strategy Enter the watch window file name and click Open The empty watch window appears Watch 2 Add elements you want to watch in this window by clicking them on the Strategy Tree and dragging them into place in the watch window or by right clicking them and choosing Watch from the pop up menu You can add I O units digital and analog points PID loops variab
397. nveyor J Actions Conditions C Variables Test Compile ptoScript Code 7 loop through elements 1 16 of the tables for FanCtrlIndex 1 to 16 step 1 nove the AI and DO to the pointers pMotor ptMotors FanCtrlIndex pTenp ptTemps FanCtrlIndex compare the values and act if pTemp ftSetpoints FanCtrlIndex then x xpMotor 1 Turn on motor else pMotor 0 Turn off motor endif next Optimizing Throughput For tips on how to design your PAC Project system and program your PAC Control strategy to ensure optimum system performance see form 1776 Optimizing PAC Project System Performance For additional information see form 1702 the PAC Display User s Guide PAC Control User s Guide OPTIMIZING THROUGHPUT PAC Control User s Guide 5 Working with Control Engines Introduction This chapter shows you how to configure and work with control engines See Compatible Control Engines and I O Units on page 5 In this Chapter Cong arms Control ENGINE setiembre ttdboste sont 89 Using Network Segmenting in PAC Control 83 Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Control 94 Using Redundant Controllers ttc 99 Changing or Deleting a Control Engine ss 99 Inspecting Control Engines and the Queue siisii 101 Archiving Strategies on the Control Engine ss 106 Restoring Archived Strategies from the Control Engine 108 Movi
398. ny different hardware components switches pumps tanks valves furnaces conveyors photo sensors thermocouples and so on All the components communicate with the control engine in the controller by way of input output I O points Input points are wired to hardware that brings information into the control engine from the process Examples of devices that can be wired to input points are thermocouples switches and sensors The control engine takes the information from the input points such as whether a switch is on or what temperature is registered on a sensor processes it using the software instruction set and returns information to the process through output points Output points are wired to hardware that receives information from the control engine and uses this information to control components of the process For example lights motors and valves are all devices that can be wired to output points Using an output point the control engine might turn on a light or open a valve There are two types of I O points digital and analog e Digital points can be either on or off True or False Push buttons and LEDs are examples of digital devices An LED is either on or off it has no other possible state In the Control System Example on page 44 the photo sensor is an example of a digital input device The photo sensor is either on or off When it turns off as the sheet passes through its PAC Control User s Guide KEY FEATURES
399. o Stepping Auto stepping lets you watch a chart s or a subroutines logic in slow motion one block at a time A chart or subroutine does not have to be paused before auto stepping can begin To begin auto o stepping click the Auto Step button press r8 or select Debug gt Auto Step Chart Step Auto appears in the status bar The hatch marks move from block to block as each block s commands are executed When you reach a block whose code is currently being executed the highlight around the block becomes changing shades of green instead of solid red unless the block is executed very quickly A chart that contains flow through logic stops when it has been stepped through In a chart that contains loop logic the auto stepping continues until you stop it by pressing the Auto Step button again PAC Control User s Guide 179 DEBUGGING Setting and Removing Breakpoints Sometimes you want to see the action at one or two blocks without having to step through an entire chart or subroutine You can use a breakpoint to stop a running chart or subroutine just before a block is executed You can set a breakpoint at any block in any chart or subroutine whether it is running or stopped paused or auto stepped The strategy does not need to be running You can set up to 16 breakpoints in one chart or subroutine However you cannot set a breakpoint inside a block To set a breakpoint follow these steps 1 With the chart or subroutine
400. o clicking the button Now the dialog box looks T Add Instruction Instruction like this Decrement Variable Comment Decreases cookie count by one to account for a rejected cookie Type Integer 32 Variable 14 Press ENTER v nCookie_Counter The dialog box closes and the new command appears in the Instructions window l Instructions Oven_Inspection_Control Blow Off Leave reject valve on for 2 seconds Delay Sec 2 0 Turn off reject valve New command doRejectValve ccount for a rejected cookie nCookie_Counter Modify Delete Next Block Previous Block 15 Click Close to return to the Oven_Inspection_Control chart Compiling and Downloading the Change Now we ll compile and download the modified strategy 1 Click the Debug mode button SER on the toolbar A message box appears warning you that changes have been detected and asking if you want to save them before downloading 2 Click Yes to continue Another warning notes that the strategy name check sum or timestamp differs from that in the control engine and asks if you want to continue PAC Control User s Guide COMPILING AND DOWNLOADING THE CHANGE Break On Oven Inspection Control 11 12 Click Yes On the toolbar click the Run Strategy button p In the Strategy Tree double click the bStartFlag variable Maximize the dialog box change the value to 1 and click Apply
401. o relock host port in QUIT Host port needed relocking Destination string too short In string manipulations a string was requested that is longer than the string it will be put into or destination string length lt Q Port not locked Attempted to transmit or receive on a connection that wasn t locked or to unlock a connection that wasn t locked Unknown response from device OptoMMP based protocol packet returned by the device was invalid Wrong object type Most likely caused by moving a pointer table element to a pointer of the wrong type An object was passed to a command that doesn t handle that object type Invalid I O command or invalid memory loca tion Contact Product Support See page 4 PAC Control User s Guide LIST OF COMMON MESSAGES I O Point mismatch The Object field speci fies the point name board name module number and point number A point is incorrectly configured for example an output For example point is configured as an input point or the point type is not 333 supported by the I O Unit s firmware Check BadPoint AIARMS Point Analog R1 2 1 PP y www opto22 com for firmware updates Point name Board Module Point i gt Feature not yet implemented for this hardware command Invalid command or feature not imple S 36 combination or command may not apply to the type of com mented Mer
402. o the computer with lower level non administrator privileges the application may not recognize control engines that have been previously configured If this problem occurs you can modify the permissions to let specific users access previously configured control engines without having administrator access This is done using the Registry Editor utility Follow the steps below CAUTION Use the Windows Registry Editor carefully It is strongly recommended that you make a backup copy of your Windows Registry before continuing with this procedure Without a backup copy if you deletethe wrong properties and cannot return the Registry to its original state application and system files can become unusable and will have to be reinstalled 1 Make sure you are logged on as an administrator 2 From the Windows Start menu select Run The Run dialog box appears 3 Enterthe following command in the Open field and press ENTER regedt32 NOTE This is NOT regedit exe which is a similar tool The Registry Editor main window appears with several open windows inside it 4 Select the HKEY LOCAL MACHINE window to make it active Navigate to Computer HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software 6 Dooneofthe following vi Fora 32 bit operating system select the Opto22 folder Fora 64 bit operating system navigate to Wow6432Node Opto22 7 Doone of the following Fora 32 bit operating system select Security gt Permissions Fora 64
403. o with increasing a counter Counting sounds like math so let s try the Mathematical group Click Mathematical on the left to highlight it then scroll down the list on the right until you find the command Increment Variable Click it once I Select Instruction Groups Instructions Digital Point Clamp Integer 32 T able Element Error Handling Clamp Integer 32 Variable Event Reaction Complement High Density Digital Module Cosine 170 Unit Decrement Variable 1 0 Unit Event Message Divide 1 0 Unit Memory Map Generate Random Number 1 0 Unit Scratch Pad Hyperbolic Cosine Logical Hyperbolic Sine Hyperboli Miscellaneous PID Ethernet PID Mistic Minimum Pointers Modulo Simulation __ Multiply String Natural Log Time Date Raise e to Power Notice that if you need information about any command you can click the Command Help button Click OK and this command is entered in the Add Instruction dialog box The cursor is automatically moved to the next field which is Comment Comments are optional they can help someone else understand the purpose of the instruction In the Comment field type Increment a counter of cookies produced Next click the arrow in the Type field the one that currently reads AII Valid Types This list shows what those valid types are a float variable an integer 32 variable and an integer 64 variable Counters are integers so select Integer 32 Variable
404. ocks can have many entrances but only one exit analog point Analog points have a range of possible values Temperature and pressure are examples of analog information Temperature might be any number in a range 2 or 31 65 or 70 1 or many other possible numbers Analog points can be either inputs such as a tank level sensor or outputs such as a fuel pump PAC Control User s Guide PAC CONTROL TERMINOLOGY blocks Dough Chip Control DE A chart is made up of action blocks condition blocks continue blocks and Action block OptoScript blocks connected by arrows which show how the process flows A chart used with redundant controllers Condition block also has sync blocks sync block OptoScript block The sync block tool is only visible when controller redundancy support is Checkpoint bloc enabled A sync block is used to synchronize redundant controllers at strategic locations in a transactional chart a chart that contains sync blocks Continue block For more information see form 1831 G Shoteus 100 the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option User s DETTO Chart Guide condition block Condition blocks are diamond shaped blocks in a flowchart that contain questions conditions that control the logical flow of a strategy Condition blocks can have many entrances but only two exits True and False The block can contain more than one condition and you can use AND or OR to indicate whether all conditions must
405. od by Cherti N Previous Block Gets the ength of Get Length of Table Table Int_Table the table and puts it Put in Int Table Index in Int Table Index Using the numeric variables Modified by Chart and Modified by Chart2 from Chart 2 a watch window can track the number of times the table has been modified by each chart For more information see Using a Watch Window on page 35 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Modified by Charti Integer 32 Variable 91 Modified by Chart2 Integer 32 Variable 49 Int Table Index Integer 32 Variable LT B Decrement Table Index The table has 100 elements numbered from 0 to 99 This instruction block starts at element 99 and on each loop decrements by 1 to go to the next element This continues until it reaches index 0 C Index gt 0 If the index is greater or equal to zero the chart proceeds to D If the index equals 1 the chart goes to E D Add 2 or 3 to Table Element Adds two or three to the value of the current table index E Release Table Lock This block uses a Force unlock of zero which means it will only unlock for the chart that locked the flag In this case if Chart 1 locked the flag only Chart 1 can unlock the flag Flag Lock Timeout Values The following chart shows the effect of different Timeout values used with the Flag Lock command Wait until success The application will wait block as long 1 as it take
406. of the resulting string is too long for its space PAC Control User s Guide ASCII Table The followin equivalent c a CTRL M sh CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS g table shows ASCII characters with their decimal and hex values For characters 0 31 ontrol codes are also listed for example a carriage return character 13 is equivalent to own in the table as M PAC Control User s Guide Dec Hex CC Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char 0 00 NUL 32 20 Space 64 40 96 60 1 01 A SOH 33 21 65 41 A 97 61 a 2 02 B STX 34 22 66 42 B 98 62 b 3 03 C ETX 35 23 67 43 C 99 63 e 4 04 D EOT 36 24 68 44 D 100 64 d 5 05 E ENQ 37 25 96 69 45 E 101 65 e 6 06 F ACK 38 26 amp 70 46 F 102 66 f 7 07 G BEL 39 27 71 47 G 103 67 g 8 08 H BS 40 28 72 48 H 104 68 h 9 09 HT 41 29 73 49 105 69 i 10 OA J LF 42 2A E 74 4A J 106 6A j 11 0B K VT 43 2B 75 4B K 107 6B k 12 0C AL FF 44 2C 76 4C L 108 6C 13 OD M CR 45 2D 77 4D M 109 6D m 14 OE N SO 46 2E 78 4E N 110 6E n 15 OF O SI 47 2F 79 4F O 111 6F o 16 10 AP DLE 48 30 0 80 50 P 112 70 p 17 11 Q DC1 49 31 1 81 51 Q 113 71 q 18 12 R DC2 50 32 2 82 52 R 114 72 r 19 13 S DC3
407. og Box Add Digital Point Type Module Features None Defaut No Watchdog No Enable communication A Name Enter a name for the point The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores B Description Optional Enter a description of the point C Type Module For non SNAP 1 0 units choose the module type and the exact module from the drop down lists For a G4EB2 all 32 digital points are addressed as a single I O unit if you are using the G4EB2 with Quad Pak modules make sure you configure each group of four points as either all inputs or all outputs For SNAP I O units Type and module are already filled in for you as shown in the example above D Features 1o use a feature of the module choose it from the drop down list You can configure some input modules with a counter totalizer or other feature Inputs automatically have both on latches and off latches E Default To set a default state for the point when the strategy is run click Yes and choose the state Off or On To leave the point in the state it was before click No F Watchdog Output modules only To set a Watchdog click Yes and choose On or Off from the drop down list G Enable Communication Select whether you want communication to this I O point enabled or disabled on startup Enabled is the default Adding an Analog I
408. ol Main Window on page 52 For programming information see 4 Designing Your Strategy For steps to create charts see 8 Working with Flowcharts Opening a Strategy Only one strategy at a time can be open in PAC Control If you currently have a strategy open it must be closed before another is opened You are prompted to save changes before it closes Opening an Existing Strategy 1 To open an existing strategy select File gt Open Strategy or press CTRL O or click the Open Strategy button on the toolbar 2 Inthe Open Strategy dialog box navigate to the strategy you want to open and click Open The strategy opens in Configure mode with the windows in the same position they were when the strategy was closed Opening an ioControl Strategy If you have been using ioControl Basic or Professional with a SNAP PAC controller migration to PAC Project Basic or Professional is simple Because the individual programs within the suite are essentially the same although they have new features and hardware support you can simply open a strategy in PAC Control and then save it For safety we recommend you back up all ioProject files before opening them in PAC Project See also Opening Strategies in PAC Control Basic and PAC Control Professional below For more information on migrating your system to SNAP PAC see form 1680 the SNAP PAC System Migration Technical Note Opening a Recently Used Strategy To open a strategy you have
409. omputer has two NICs I O units are all controlled by the controller Each I O unit is connected to its own group of sensors and actuators but both are connected to the same two networks For more information on using Ethernet link redundancy with PAC Display see form 1702 the PAC Display User s Guide EJ PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES Ge ee COME CNN cM MM CMM MEC 75 00 undant Network Two PCs each with two NICs ec A running PAC Display Pro Two PCs each with two NICs running OptoOPCServer as PAC Display scanner Ethernet switch Ethernet switch i S SNAP PAC S series controller network 1 HE oum network 2 controls all O units SNAP PAC R series SNAP PAC R series Example 3 Ethernet Link Redundancy with Serial I O Units This third example of link redundancy shows a SNAP PAC S series controller with serial I O units The redundancy is in the Ethernet networks between the controller and computers running PAC Display Professional and OptoOPCServer This example provides link redundancy for the Ethernet network Again note that the computers all have two NICs PAC Control User s Guide USING ETHERNET LINK REDUNDANCY IN PAC CONTROL Opto 22 Redundant Network PC with two NICs running PC with two NICs running PAC Display Pro PAC Display Pro si lt j gt L s oz CA a I z PCs with two NICs running OptoOPCServer as PAC Display scanner
410. on 116 info viewing 103 initialization file 110 225 creating 226 downloading 228 input point definition 45 disabling 284 input output See I O inspecting control engine 101 control engine using PAC Terminal 106 I O 140 I O using watch window 157 PID loop 146 See also viewing installing PAC Control 4 instruction See command integer converting to float 297 definition 49 295 in logic 294 variable definition 218 interacting algorithm for PID 301 IO Enabler 286 IP address control engine 92 loopback 117 250 254 primary and secondary 117 SA algorithm for PID 301 IVAL 284 K keyboard shortcuts 67 L lag time for PID 147 latch commands instructions 282 launching See opening legacy options enabling 196 link redundancy 95 287 SoftPAC controller 95 literal constant 221 in OptoScript 394 load last mode at startup 162 load last strategy at startup 162 local subroutine parameter 348 local variable 348 log file 382 logic in charts 76 logical commands instructions 293 logical operator in OptoScript 335 logical true and false 294 look up an error 371 loop logic 76 loopback address 117 250 254 looping 322 338 339 M mathematical commands instructions 295 mathematical expressions 319 in OptoScript 334 memory 363 memory map commands 290 message on screen programming example 79 message queue 103 microSD card 258 263 minimal debug definition 176 minimum maximum value 244 245 mistic I O uni
411. on page 241 To add commands to an action or condition block follow the steps below To add commands to an OptoScript block see OptoScript Functions and Commands on page 326 and Using the OptoScript Editor on page 340 1 With the strategy open in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block to which you want to add a command The Instructions dialog box appears The highlighted area shows where the new command will be added PAC Control User s Guide ADDING COMMANDS tInstructions New Chart Block 1 Highlighted area Modify Delete Next Block Previous Block Operator The Operator group AND appears in the dialog box Caci Heo OOR only for condition blocks not for action blocks 2 Click Add to open the Add Instruction dialog box T Add Instruction Instruction AND Comment Type Name All Valid Types Button_D3 All Valid Types bStartFlag 3 If you know the command you want enter its name in the Instruction field by typing it in or by choosing it from the drop down list Skip to step 7 4 If you don t know the command name click Select to open the following dialog box 236 PAC Control User s Guide Arguments CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS I Select Instruction Groups Instructions Analog Point Chart Add 3 Communication Arccosine Control Engine Aresine Deprecated Arct
412. on to Visual Basic and C The following table lists PAC Control string commands and their equivalents in Microsoft Visual Basic and C If you are using OptoScript see E OptoScript Language Reference for additional comparisons i 7 strlen str Append Character to String S S Chr MyChar str i MyChar str i 1 0 Append String to String S S Hello strcat str Hello Convert Hex String Number 196 2 amp h S sscanf str ox amp iNum Convert Number to Formatted Hex String Convert Number to String S Hex 1 S CStr 1 sprintf str 96x iNum sprintf str d iNum sprintf str 9of fNum Convert String to Float F CSng S sscanf str 9of amp tNum fNum atof str Convert String to Integer 32 1 Cint S sscanf str d amp iNum iNum atoi str Get Nth Character MyByte ASC MID Str n 1 MyByte str n Get String Length MyLENGTH LEN Str iLEN strlen str Get Substring SubStr MID Str i n strncpy subStr amp str i n subStr n 0 Move String STR Hello strcpy strDest Hello Test Equal Strings Equal STR Hello i strcmp str1 Hello String Equal if STR Hi then if stremp str1 Hi String Equal to String Table Element if STR n Hi then if stremp str1 n Hi
413. onfiguration but once they are configured you use the same commands such as Start Counter and Clear Counter for them as for regular counters NOTE You can use counters on high density modules with SNAP PAC R1 controllers and SNAP PAC EB1 and SNAP PAC SB1 brains with firmware 8 1 or newer Before using a counter you must configure the point as a counter See Adding a Digital I O Point on page 122 or use PAC Manager Counters do not need to be started and they cannot be stopped Therefore do not use the Start Counter and Stop Counter commands However you can use Get Counter and Get amp Clear Counter A positive value means that phase A leads phase B See additional details in the PAC Control Command Reference or online Help Totalizers Digital totalizers track the total time a specific input point has been on or off For example you could track how long a pump fan or motor has been on Digital totalizers are useful for periodic maintenance Before using a totalizer you must configure the point with this feature See Adding I O Points on page 122 for help The availability of totalizers depends on the brain see the brain s data sheet for more information To check total time and leave the totalizer running use Get Off Time Totalizer or Get On Time Totalizer To check total time and reset the totalizer to zero use Get amp Restart Off Time Totalizer or Get amp Restart On Time Totalizer Pulses Pulsing commands se
414. onfigure and click Add 10 Complete the fields as described in Add Analog Point Dialog Box below 11 When you have completed the fields click OK The new point is added NOTE If you need to add several similar points see Copying a Configured I O Point on page 131 Add Analog Point Dialog Box Add Analog Point A Name B Description B C Scaling D Full Range Clamping Actual Scaled F Units VDC VDC vDC VDC Lower 10 10 10 Upper 10 10 Clear G Default No O Yes H Watchdog No O Yes Se l Enable communication PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O A Name Enter a name for the point The name must start with a letter and may contain letters numbers and underscores Spaces are converted to underscores B Description Optional Enter a description of the point C Type Module For non SNAP 1 0 units choose the module type and the exact module from the drop down lists For SNAP I O units Type and module are already filled in for you You may be able to choose a different range or a scalable module from the drop down list D Full Range Full range and units for this module If the module is scalable use F to change scale E Clamping Outputs only optional Enter upper and lower clamp if necessary to limit output to the device attached to the point If fields are left empty no clamp is applied To
415. onfigured on your system File Tools Configure View Help Control Engines Controller Name System Type Address 1 Address 2 Configure Control Engines Cookie Controller Standard 4127 0 0 1 ie Q Add R1 Controller Standard 4 10 195 55 111 Status Scan amp Scan Al 435 Scan Selected 2 If no control engine is listed configure one by choosing Configure gt Control Engine and following directions on the screen See Configuring Control Engines on page 89 for help 3 o verify that a control engine in the list is communicating double click the control engine s name The Comm Loop Time communication time in the Inspect Control Engine dialog box indicates how long it takes to gather the information in the dialog box and is a good relative indicator of communication time This dialog box also shows the status of the current strategy and any errors in communication with the control engine For further explanation see Inspecting Control Engines and the Queue on page 101 4 If you receive an error indicating a communication problem go on to the next section PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING Resolving Communication Problems Matching PAC Control Configuration to the Real World O unit and point configuration in PAC Control must match actual I O units and points with which the control engine is communicating See brain and I O module data sheets for specifications and information
416. onger associated with your strategy Deleting a Control Engine from Your PC If you are sure that a control engine will no longer be used with your PC you can delete it using the PAC Terminal utility Deleting the control engine removes its definition only on the PC you are using 1 Choose Start gt Programs gt Opto 22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt Tools gt PAC Terminal PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES 2 Right click the name of the control engine in the list CAUTION Make sure you are highlighting the right one You cannot undo a deletion 3 From the pop up menu choose Delete The control engine is no longer defined on the PC Inspecting Control Engines and the Queue You may want to inspect or change control engines while you are running the strategy in Debug mode See the following topics to view control engine information and the engine s message queue either from PAC Control in Debug mode or from the PAC Terminal utility e Inspecting Control Engines in Debug Mode below e Viewing the Message Queue on page 103 e Inspecting Control Engines from the PAC Terminal Utility on page 106 Inspecting Control Engines in Debug Mode With the strategy running in Debug mode choose Control Engine gt Inspect You can also double click the active engine the first one under the Control Engines folder on the Strategy Tree or right click the control engine and choose Inspect f
417. onnections link the blocks together and show how the program logic flows Action blocks exit through just one connection since they always go in one direction Condition blocks exit through two connections one for a true evaluation and the other for a false evaluation Opening a Block Let s see what s in a block 1 Double click the Drop Dough block The Instructions dialog box appears PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL tinstructions Dough_Chip_Control Drop Dough nCookieMotionPreset Modify dtCookieMotionTimer For animation in ioDisplay Caa Open the dough valve Turn On Next Block doDoughDispenseValve Previous Block Keep the dough valve open for 2 seconds Delay Sec 2 0 Close the dough valve Turn Off AaNnannhNinnnannntinhken This block contains four instructions Move Turn On Delay Sec and Turn Off Each one has a description above it Double click the Turn On instruction to see more about it You could also click it once and click Modify The Edit Instruction dialog box for the Turn On command appears T Edit Instruction Instruction umm Comment Open the dough valve Type Name Digital Output v doDoughDispenseValve Here we see the details of the command which simply turns on the digital output Dough Dispense Valve In other words it opens the valve Close the Edit Instruction dialog box by clicking OK or Cancel B
418. onnectors are located on the top of SNAP PAC controllers These ports can be used for maintenance such as loading new firmware or for Point to Point Protocol PPP communication via a modem They can also be used to send or receive data directly from a serial device such as barcode readers weigh scales O or any intelligent device Serial communication handles are used to communicate with these intelligent devices see examples below First the serial port must be set to None in PAC Manager as follows 1 Open the Inspect window in PAC Manager and enter the IP address for your device 2 Click Communications and choose Communication Port Control 3 In the Value field for the Control Function of the serial port you want to use select None from the drop down menu PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS NOTE For a SNAP PAC S2 you can configure any of the serial ports as a either RS 232 or RS 485 by changing the Value field for the Mode for Communication parameter For more detailed information on setting serial communications see the PAC Manager Users Guide IMPORTANT Serial communication handles are used only for direct connection to serial devices Ifyou are connecting to serial devices through serial communication modules on the I O unit use a TCP communication handle instead See page 249 NOTE Serial I O units are wired to an RS 485 port on the controller and do not require serial communicat
419. onvert Number to Hex String Convert Number to String Convert Number to String Field Convert String to Float Convert String to Integer 32 Convert String to Integer 64 Convert String to Lower Case Convert String to Upper Case Find Character in String Find Substring in String Generate Checksum on String Generate Forward CCITT on String Generate Forward CRC 16 on String Generate Reverse CCITT on String Using Strings Generate Reverse CRC 16 on String Get Nth Character Get String Length Get Substring Move from String Table Element Move String Move to String Table Element Move to String Table Elements Pack Float into String Pack Integer 32 into String Pack Integer 64 into String Pack String into String Set Nth Character String Equal to String Table Element String Equal Test Equal Strings Trim String Unpack String Verify Checksum on String Verify Forward CCITT on String Verify Forward CRC 16 on String Verify Reverse CCITT on String Verify Reverse CRC 16 on String NOTE All numbers in this discussion of strings are decimal unless otherwise stated A PAC Control string is a sequence of characters that can be grouped together Characteristics of strings include the following e Strings area e Each charac e Each charac lways referred to by name and if in a table by index ter is represented by one byte ter is represented by its ASCII code 0 to 255 e A string con taining no charac
420. open and in Debug mode click the Breakpoint tool y The pointer turns into a hand 2 Clickthe target block to mark it with the breakpoint hand Sprinklers Breakpoint hand Break On in status bar Running step On DEE se 0 ov 180 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 3 Click other blocks to set additional breakpoints or click blocks currently marked with a hand to remove the breakpoint 4 When you have finished marking or removing breakpoints click the Breakpoint button again or click the right mouse button within the window When the chart or subroutine runs it pauses just before executing the breakpoint block You can inspect variables or I O points disable strategy elements change values and so on to see the effect the block has 5 To single step past the breakpoint click the Step Block or Step Line button Or to run the chart or subroutine at full speed after the breakpoint click the Pause Chart button Managing Multiple Breakpoints You can see all the breakpoints you have set and you can remove breakpoints one at a time or all at once See also Setting and Removing Breakpoints on page 180 to use the breakpoint tool 1 Press CTRL Bor select Debug gt Breakpoints The Breakpoints dialog box appears showing all the breakpoints set in the strategy I Breakpoints Chart Sub Name Block ID Block Na
421. open strategy only choose File gt Strategy Properties to open the Configure Strategy Properties dialog box PAC Control User s Guide 203 WORKING WITH CHART ELEMENTS To change new elements in the open chart or subroutine only choose Chart gt Properties or Subroutine gt Properties to open the Configure Chart Properties or Configure Subroutine Properties dialog box The dialog box that opens looks like this except that its title may be different 2 Complete the fields as described in Configure Chart Properties Dialog Box below 3 When you have made all the changes click OK Configure Chart Properties Dialog Box Configure Chart Properties Flowchart Parameters Background Color Grid Color MEM Display Block IDs Smooth Scrolling Action Block Parameters T XM tion Width 96 Height 48 Color BE Fon Ana Opoint i Condition Block Parameters tL c penn 1 rue Mmmm OptoScript Block E tion width 96 Height Color Fort Arial 10 point mma Checkpoint Block Width 96 Height 48 Color 1 Font Arial 10 point Continue Block Parameters Also Apply To D Width 96 Height 48 Color fea Font Arial 10 point C PAC Control Strate Text sy Al charts Width 192 Height 128 Font Arial 10 point E A Flowchart Properties Specify general chart display in this area To apply these changes to
422. or Serial I O Units This section is for PAC Control Professional users If you have the Basic version see Changing the Baud Rate for Serial I O Units on page 119 NOTE Once you have configured a serial port for use with an I O unit do not configure a communication handle on the same port PAC Control User s Guide 119 ADDING AN I O UNIT If the default baud rate shown in the Add I O Unit dialog box is not correct you can change it This baud rate is for communication through the RS 485 port to serial I O units It does not affect other serial ports on the controller or communication handles using these ports In addition you can also choose Binary or ASCII mode The controller will talk to all I O units on that port in the same mode NOTE There is no ASCII version of OptoMMP protocol which is used on SNAP PAC SB brains so if a port is set to ASCII you won t be able to mix mistic and SNAP PAC SB brains as you can in Binary mode 1 Make sure the strategy is open and in Configure mode 2 Choose File gt Strategy Options then click the Serial I O Ports tab Strategy Options Archive Download Legacy Serial 1 0 Ports The SNAP PAC S1 and SNAP PAC S2 controllers may use serial 1 0 units such as the B3000 or SNAP PAC SB1 The port type must first be set to RS 485 either by using default ports or by PAC Manager You must also configure which ports will be used for 1 0 within this strategy C Use port 0 for 1 0 using 2
423. or ignore any breakpoints set in the chart click an arrow in the Breakpoints field to select Break On or Break Off Click Apply This action does not clear or set breakpoints but just determines whether the chart stops at breakpoints when it is running Chart changes occur as soon as you click Apply To add the chart to a watch window so you can monitor it with other strategy elements click Add Watch In the dialog box choose what to watch Select an existing watch window to add this chart to or create a new watch window See Using Watch Windows for Monitoring on page 157 for more information on watch windows When you have finished making changes click Close to return to the View Chart Status dialog box Printing Chart or Subroutine Graphics You can print a chart or subroutine just as it appears on screen You can also print all charts within a strategy When printing a single chart or subroutine you can preview the image to make sure it s what you want before you print it NOTE If you have trouble printing graphics set your printer for PostScript emulation Setting Up the Page Before printing graphics you should verify your page setup which determines how each graphic appears on a page 1 In Configure mode select File gt Page Setup The Page Setup dialog box appears PAC Control User s Guide 4 CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 1 Flowchart Graphics Page Setup Graphics Scaling Ad
424. ords If a naming conflict is found you may need to rename an object or perform some other housekeeping procedures When converting to a newer PAC Project make sure to update PAC Control strategies first and then PAC Display projects so that PAC Display projects are updated based on changes to the strategy database List of Common Messages The following messages may appear in PAC Control They are listed in numeric order If an X appears in the Q column the code number appears in the message queue If an X appears in the I O column the message is an I O unit error and may appear either in the message queue as a status code in a variable or both For more information on handling O PAC Control User s Guide 373 LIST OF COMMON MESSAGES unit errors see Error Handling Commands on page 286 and form 1776 Optimizing PAC Project System Performance 0 Operation performed successfully NOT AN ERROR Indicates the command was successful 1 Undefined command An unknown command was sent to the PAC Control engine When comparing DVFs Data Verification Fields a mis 2 Checksum or CRC mismatch match occurred Examples of DVFs include checksum and CRC In string manipulations a string was requested that is longer 3 Buffer overrun or invalid length error than the string it will be put into or the destination string length lt 0 d Device has powered up Powerup clear NOT AN ERROR The de
425. ors switch endswitch case break default while do wend ei null repeat until The following table lists operators in order of highest to lowest precedence negation not logical not bitnot bitwise not multiplication division modulo division subtraction addition string append assignment lt lt bitwise left shift gt gt bitwise right shift PAC Control User s Guide 395 OPTOSCRIPT LEXICAL REFERENCE 396 equality lt gt non equality lt less than lt less than or equal to gt greater than gt greater than or equal to bitand bitwise and bitor bitwise or bitxor bitwise exclusive or and logical and or logical or xor logical exclusive or not logical not parentheses no precedence brackets no precedence colon no precedence semi colon no precedence comma separator no precedence assignment no precedence amp address of no precedence Comments OptoScript has two kinds of comments single line and block Single line comments are indicated by two slashes followed by any sequence of characters until the end of the line Examples i a b this is a comment i a b determine i by adding a and b together i a b This whole line is commented out Block comments are indicated by a slash and an asterisk followed by any sequence of characters
426. ost power or network connection When communicating with I O Units retries are logged in the mes sage queue PID Loop has been configured outside of this strategy and could conflict with this strat egy s logic 700 You are trying to download a new strategy but a PID loop is currently running on the brain Open PAC Manager and turn off the loop in Inspect mode by changing its algorithm to None 8607 Invalid protocol Attempted to set a port to an unknown mode 8608 Port initialization failed While starting up a chart or task the default host port could not be created 378 PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX B ERRORS AND MESSAGES Each command sent by the PAC controller has a sequence ID Each response from an I O unit includes the sequence ID of the command it is responding to This allows the con troller to verify that a response from an I O unit matches the most recent command sent to that I O unit An out of sync error would occur and be posted in the PAC controller s message queue if the response received by the controller is for a previous command rather than the current command It usually occurs like this Controller sends a command and waits the timeout period for the response If no response is received it sends a re transmit of the same command but with a new sequence ID The controller receives a response to the original com 8612 Old response to new command mand
427. ou want to stop the strategy Click Stop Strategy To close the strategy select File gt Close Strategy or select File gt Exit to quit PAC Control If dialog boxes ask whether you want to remove breakpoints and take charts out of stepping mode click Yes Your introduction to PAC Control is now complete Using the sample Cookies strategy you have learned how to Open save and close a strategy Work with the Strategy Tree Work with charts and add commands in blocks Configure a control engine Compile run step through and add breakpoints to a strategy Make an online change Use a watch window to monitor variables and I O points The rest of this book expands on the knowledge you ve just acquired Now may be a good time to look at the table of contents or thumb through the book and familiarize yourself with its contents Some sections you may want to read others you ll probably just refer to as needed PAC Control User s Guide 3 What Is PAC Control Introduction The tutorial in Chapter 2 introduced you to PAC Control without explaining much about it In this chapter we ll learn more about PAC Control and see its main windows and toolbars In this Chapter About PAT Control 43 General Control COnCept ettet 45 PAC Control Terminology s 47 PAC Control Main Window 52 Windows and Dialog Boxes in PAC Control 57 Customizing PAC Control for Your Needs 65 Online Help
428. ough a chart one block at a time The Step Over button may be all you need to find any problems If necessary go back to Configure mode and change to full debug see Choosing Debug Level on page 176 so you can step into blocks and execute one line at a time 1 Pause the chart or subroutine to be stepped through by pressing the Pause Chart or Pause Subroutine button Ill 2 lostepto the next command block click the Step Over button tr or press F10 or select Debug gt Step Over The commands in the highlighted block are executed the hatch marks move to the next command block and the chart pauses again Compare the chart below to the one on page 177 The hatch mark has moved to the next block Dough Chip Control Drop the dough Drop the chips EZ EX i Shortcuts 99 v PAA 3 Ifyou need to step inside flowchart blocks and move through them one command at a time or in OptoScript blocks one line of code at a time make sure you have downloaded your strategy at the full debug level See Choosing Debug Level on page 176 for help 4 Ifthe chart or subroutine is not already paused press the Pause Chart or Pause Subroutine button Il PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES 5 To step inside the block you are on the one with the hatch marks click the Step Into button Ti or press F11 or select Debug gt Step Into The Step Into button takes you
429. ounter scanning Communication handle variables Name nCookie Counter show slightly different fields Value 42908 3 More Info Minimize button Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost If you do not want to change the value of the variable you can click the Minimize button to shrink the dialog box back to its original size To view the configuration information about the variable click More Info 230 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS bStartFlag NAME bStartFlag DESCRIPTION TYPE Integer 32 Variable SCOPE Global Q INITIALIZED Download INITIAL VALUE 0 Name bStartFlag Value O j Decimal Binary A numeric variable can appear as decimal hexadecimal or binary A string variable can appear as ASCII or hexadecimal To change the value of the variable type the new value in the Value field and click Apply The field turns magenta until you click Apply For a string variable if your change lengthens the string beyond its maximum width the string is truncated to fit For a communication handle variable changing the value of the variable here has the same effect as using a Set Communication Handle Variable command If the communication handle is currently open the value
430. out of range e Feed forward gain e Square root of input In the SNAP PAC the derivative is applied only to the process variable the input and not to the setpoint This means you can change the setpoint without causing spikes in the derivative term These PIDs also prevent integral windup by back calculating the integral without the derivative term The feed forward term bias is added before output clamping and has a tuning factor If desired you can cascade PIDs by simply using the output point of one PID loop as the input point for another Algorithm Choices PID When you configure a PID loop in PAC Control choose one of the following algorithms e Velocity Type C available only for PAC R EB and SB with firmware version 8 5e and higher e Velocity Type B e ISA e Parallel e Interacting The only difference between Velocity Type C and Velocity Type B is the Term P equation see equations below The ISA Parallel and Interacting algorithms are functionally equivalent the only difference is the way the tuning constants are factored The identical and differing equations for all algorithms are shown in the following sections PAC Control User s Guide 301 PID ETHERNET COMMANDS Key to Terms Used in Equations F Derivative tuning parameter In units Process variable the input to the PV PID TuneD of seconds Increasing magnitude increases influence on output SP Setpoint Output O
431. p 22004 Ethernet TCP from another control engine tcp 22005 To add a communication handle see the steps starting on page 248 In the Add Variable dialog box enter the communication handle value in the Initial Value field PAC Control User s Guide 251 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 252 Add Variable Name TCP Comm Handle Incoming Description Type Communication Handle e Initialization O Initialize on strategy download Initialize on strategy run Persistent Communication handle value Initial Value tcp 22004 Cancel Help Opening and Closing TCP IP Communication Handles When using TCP IP communication handles a communication handle s value that begins with tcp keep in mind that the controller has a limited amount of TCP IP resources and so you need to be careful about how frequently these communication handles are opened and closed TCP IP handles are meant to be left open as long as possible Per the TCP IP specification each time one of these resources are closed they are unavailable for 120 seconds Rapidly attempting to open and close TCP IP communication handles quickly places all available resources in the unavailable condition Once this unavailable state occurs a communication handle will be unable to gain a resource upon the next Open Outgoing Communication command This effectively causes a lock out of any new TCP IP connections to be made
432. p sets the first five elements elements 0 through 4 of a table ntTable to a value of 10 nIndex 0 4 ntTable nIndex 10 nlIndex nIndex 1 j wend matching wend at the end For example Initialize the counter while nIndex lt 5 4 Execute loop if condtion is true Set the table element Increment the counter hile loops can be nested and can contain other kinds of program statements Fach while needs a ni 0 while n1 100 nti n1 ni 100 ni n1 1 wend nti n1 nl nil nl 1 wend while n1 gt 50 and n1 lt 60 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT Repeat Loops Repeat loops in contrast to while loops are used to execute a list of statements until a given condition is true Because the condition is tested at the end of each loop the content of the loop will always be executed at least once This example sets the first five elements of ntTable to 10 Compare this example to the example for while loops to see the difference nIndex 0 Initialize the counter repeat ntTable nIndex 10 Set the table element nlIndex nIndex 1 4 Increment the counter until nIndex gt 5 Fxit loop if condition is true Repeat loops can be nested and can contain other kinds of program statements Fach repeat statement needs a matching unt
433. pad 7 Move to Bottom Numeric Keypad 2 Move to Top Numeric Keypad 8 Move to Bottom Right Numeric Keypad 3 Move to Top Right Numeric Keypad 9 Zoom to Fit and Center F Move to Left Numeric Keypad 4 Zoom to 100 Z Move to Center Numeric Keypad 5 Pan Space Left Mouse Button Move to Right Numeric Keypad 6 Block Preview Middle click on a block Online Help To open online Help choose Help gt Help Topics or click the Help button in any dialog box Help buttons in dialog boxes are context sensitive and provide help specifically on that dialog box Buttons labeled Command Help give specific information on the command instruction you are currently using For brief explanations of buttons move your mouse over the button and look in the status bar In Action and Condition Instructions dialog boxes let your mouse rest for a second on an instruction command and you ll see a list of the variable types used in that command To show or hide the variable types list in Configure mode choose PAC Control Options gt Show Hide Instruction Type Information To open online copies of PAC Control manuals and quick reference cards choose Help gt Manuals You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader to open these files You can also find information documents and support on the Opto 22 website by choosing Help gt Opto 22 on the Web PAC Control User s Guide ONLINE HELP E PAC Control User s Guide 4 Designing You
434. pe Pointer Variable Item Pointed To nLoopCounter 2 To view the status or value of the item pointed to click the Inspect button PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS If you need help follow the steps in Viewing Numeric String and Communication Handle Variables on page 230 Viewing Numeric and String Tables 1 Make sure the strategy is running in Debug mode On the Strategy Tree double click the table variable you want to view The View Table dialog box appears showing the table s name length maximum number of entries width for a string table initialization method and security level It also lists the index and value of each table entry The title bar includes the name of the variable and indicates whether scanning is occurring Here s an example for a string table 3 4 Days Table scanning Mame Days Table Index Value 0 Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday B Saturday Met Scanning for an individual table element stops whenever you select an element in the table It resumes for that element if no changes are made and another table element is selected or when you click Apply A magenta background indicates that scanning is stopped To change the format of the elements click the button to the right of the Watch button Hexadecim l For string tables you can select either ASCII or Hex
435. peed 176 digital I O while strategy is running 142 I O points 134 I O unit configuration 121 I O while strategy is running 140 numeric variable 230 PID loop 139 pointer table 235 pointer variable 232 scale of a chart 60 strategy download compression 174 string table 233 string variable 230 text color or size 203 212 text in chart 209 variable 229 chart adding text to 209 auto stepping 178 179 breakpoints 180 calling a subroutine 356 changing background 203 changing name or description 214 changing scale 60 dosing 213 commands 246 contents 202 copying 213 RES DAC Control User s Guide creating 201 definition 48 deleting 214 designing 73 exporting 215 finding a block 62 flow through logic 76 guidelines for design 76 importing 216 loop logic 76 looping 322 monitoring in watch window 157 naming 77 214 opening 212 pausing 177 printing commands instructions 187 printing graphics 184 replacing elements 194 saving 163 213 searching 192 status 48 183 stepping through 178 viewing 57 183 zooming in or out 60 chart element changing color or size 212 cutting copying and pasting 211 moving 210 selecting 210 closing chart 213 strategy 163 164 command adding 235 adding in OptoScript 341 arguments 75 changing 239 commenting out 240 cutting copying and pasting 240 241 definition 49 deleting 239 deleting temporarily 240 for continue block 241 groups analog point commands 2
436. ping 176 for loop 322 339 format File communication handle 257 FTP communication handle 263 IEEE float 296 serial communication handle 267 TCP communication handle 249 FTP directory listing 265 FTP communication handle 263 full debug definition 176 functions in OptoScript 326 PAC Control User s Guide 407 G gain and offset 244 in PID loops 151 grammar in OptoScript 397 H hardware requirements for PAC Control 5 help See also troubleshooting help online 67 hex display mode 65 high density digital enabling commands 198 high density points 288 host task definition 50 hostname control engine 92 Hungarian notation 78 329 I O changing configured point 134 configuring 122 copying configured point 131 deleting configured point 134 disabling 284 exporting configuration 115 importing configuration 116 in strategy design 70 72 monitoring in watch window 157 moving configured point 130 naming points 78 point numbers 116 point definition 45 saving configuration 140 segmenting I O from host network 93 using in OptoScript 326 viewing all in a strategy 188 189 I O unit adding 116 changing 121 commands 287 289 290 291 configuring 113 definition 113 deleting 121 PAC Control User s Guide exporting configuration 115 importing configuration 116 monitoring in watch window 157 point numbers 116 IEEE float 296 if statements in OptoScript 337 if then statements 324 importing chart 216 I O configurati
437. plies These products include but are not limited to OptoTerminal G70 OptoTerminal G75 and Sony Ericsson GT 48 see the product data sheet for specific warranty information Refer to Opto 22 form number 1042 for complete warranty information Wired Wireless controllers and brains are licensed under one or more of the following patents U S Patent No s 5282222 RE37802 6963617 Canadian Patent No 2064975 European Patent No 1142245 French Patent No 1142245 British Patent No 1142245 Japanese Patent No 2002535925A German Patent No 60011224 Opto 22 FactoryFloor groov Optomux and Pamux are registered trademarks of Opto 22 Generation 4 groov Server ioControl ioDisplay ioManager ioProject ioUtilities mistic Nvio Nvio net Web Portal OptoConnect OptoControl OptoDataLink OptoDisplay OptoEMU OptoEMU Sensor OptoEMU Server OptoOPCServer OptoScript OptoServer OptoTerminal OptoUtilities PAC Control PAC Display PAC Manager PAC Project SNAP Ethernet I O SNAP I O SNAP OEM 1 0 SNAP PAC System SNAP Simple I O SNAP Ultimate I O and Wired Wireless are trademarks of Opto 22 Activex JScript Microsoft MS DOS VBScript Visual Basic Visual C Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Unicenter is a registered trademark of Computer Associates International Inc ARCNET is
438. plus one host task can run at once On a SNAP PAC S series controller 32 charts plus one host task can run at PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY once On a SoftPAC controller 64 charts plus one host task can run at once For more information see Optimizing Throughput on page 87 In general follow these chart guidelines e Use the Powerup chart just to set initial values for variables perform setup commands and start the main charts Use flow through logic so the Powerup chart will stop as soon as the other charts begin e Create a few charts to monitor essential or time critical pieces of your process such as emergency stops on dangerous equipment or I O that must be monitored continuously These charts should use loop logic so they are constantly running e Ifa set of operations is used multiple times in your strategy or is used in more than one strategy you can put that logic in a subroutine and call the subroutine when needed Calling a subroutine doesn t require as much time as calling a chart or starting a new chart In addition a subroutine starts as soon as it is called in the context of the chart that is calling the subroutine A Start Chart command is simply placed in the task queue and started in turn See Chapter 12 Using Subroutines for more information e Usethe text tool to type a descriptive title in each chart and add any necessary explanations Keep blocks far enough
439. ptions Archive Download Legacy Serial 1 0 Ports C Archive strategy to disk when strategy is downloaded 2 On the Archive tab in the Strategy Options dialog box select Archive strategy to disk when strategy is downloaded Also select During download save archive to the control engine and save strategy to flash memory Strategy Options Archive Download Legacy Serial 1 0 Ports C Archive strategy to disk when strategy is closed Archi i 3 Click OK The strategy will be archived to the computer and to the control engine when it is downloaded Any archive already on the control engine will be replaced by the new archive In addition the strategy will be saved to flash memory so it will still be available if power to the controller is turned off PAC Control User s Guide 107 RESTORING ARCHIVED STRATEGIES FROM THE CONTROL ENGINE Restoring Archived Strategies from the Control Engine If original strategy files are lost or damaged you can use PAC Terminal to restore the strategy archive from the control engine to a computer 1 Click the Windows Start menu and choose Programs gt Opto22 gt PAC Project 9 2 gt Tools gt PAC Terminal The PAC Terminal window appears File Tools Configure View Help Control Engines Controller Name System Type Address 1 Address 2 G re Control Engines 4 Cookie Controler Standard 4127 0 0 1 E iQ Add PR1 Controller Standard 410 195 5
440. r click any column heading 4 Toemailthe information to Opto 22 Product Support click E mail The utility saves the list to a file named Version bd in the same directory that contains OptoVersion exe If you use Microsoft Outlook as your email program a new message automatically appears addressed to Product Support with the version file attached 5 If you use Microsoft Outlook add comments to the new message and click Send 6 Ifyou use another email program attach the Version bd file to an email message and address the message to support opto22 com along with an explanation of the problem you re experiencing 7 To save the file click Save As Give the file a name and save it in the location you want OptoVersion also creates a tab delimited file with the same file extension and in the same directory This file has the same name you gave it but with _Delimited added For example if you name the saved file opto software txt the tab delimited file is named PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING Opto software Delimited txt This file can be opened in Microsoft Excel or other programs to easily sort and view its contents Problems with Permissions in Windows When you set up controllers on a computer running the Microsoft Windows operating system typically you are using the computer with top level administrator privileges If someone later uses this same computer to run PAC Control or PAC Display but logs in t
441. r Strategy Introduction This chapter introduces you to PAC Control programming how to design a PAC Control strategy to control your automated process For additional important information on using PAC Control commands instructions to program your strategy effectively see page 243 and the individual command information in the PAC Control Command Reference NOTE Because our focus in PAC Project is on the SNAP PAC System PAC Control initially shows only SNAP PAC I O units and the commands used with them When youre using the SNAP PAC system only hiding legacy I O units and commands makes it simpler and less confusing to build your strategy However the legacy capabilities are still there and can be made visible in a specific strategy as needed For information see Legacy Options on page 196 In this Chapter EES EO DIEI te FSFE iT M P Instruction Examples Optimizing Throughput Steps to Design How do you get from your real world control problem to a working PAC Control strategy that solves it Here s an outline of the basic approach we ll fill in the details on the following pages First solve the problem e Definethe problem What am trying to do What inputs and data do have to work with What do the outputs have to be How many times does the process have to be repeated e Design a logical sequence of steps to solve the problem PAC Control User s Guide 69
442. r a controller or an I O unit In the case of a controller brain they can refer to the devices own memory map or a memory map on another device Read Number from I O Memory Map Read Numeric Table from I O Memory Map Read String from I O Memory Map Read String Table from I O Memory Map Write Number to I O Memory Map Write Numeric Table to I O Memory Map Write String Table to I O Memory Map Write String to I O Memory Map Memory map commands make it possible for advanced users to read from or write to any Opto 22 memory mapped device such as a SNAP PAC controller or brain You can use these commands to read or write to any address within the memory map The commands are especially useful for reading data from a SNAP device using newer features that may be available in the memory map but are not yet incorporated into PAC Control NOTE If you are reading or writing to the devices Scratch Pad area use the I O Unit Scratch Pad commands instead see page 291 If you are changing event messages use the I O Unit Event Message commands instead page 289 In order to use these commands with a SNAP PAC S series or SoftPAC controller first you need to create an I O Unit of the type Generic OptoMMP Device to represent the controller Use the controller s IP address or the loopback address 127 0 0 1 When you use these commands make sure that you read or write the correct type of data integer float string to match the specified memory map
443. r each chart in a strategy If two charts were to run simultaneously while sharing an open communication handle each chart would be able to read and write data from the communication handle as ifthe other running chart didn t exist Because these reads and writes are not synchronized between the charts it is possible for one chart to read the other chart s data Incoming and Outgoing Communication TCP communication is normally requested by the device that needs the data For example a PAC Control strategy running on SNAP PAC I O unit A might need the value of a set of variables from another strategy running on SNAP PAC I O unit B Unit A would request communication using the command Open Outgoing Communication Unit B would Listen for Incoming Communication and then Accept Incoming Communication to establish the connection Once connected data could be transmitted and received in both directions This scenario is similar to the way we use the telephone If Joe Wong needs information from Saul Garcia he requests communication by calling Saul on the phone opening outgoing communication If Saul is there listening for incoming communication he answers the phone accepts incoming communication and the connection is completed Once connected both Joe and Saul can talk and listen to transmit and receive information Depending on the situation you may want to have both peers request communication and establish two connections between them
444. r example File gt Open Project means to select the Open Project command from the File menu e Numbered lists indicate procedures to be followed sequentially Bulleted lists such as this one provide general information Documents and Online Help To help you understand and use PAC Control systems the following resources are provided e Online Help is available in PAC Control and in most of the utility applications To open online Help choose Help Contents and Index in any screen e PAC Control User s Guide shows how to install and use PAC Control e PAC Control Command Reference contains detailed information about each command instruction available in PAC Control PAC Control User s Guide INSTALLING PAC CONTROL e Aquick reference card located in the front pocket of the PAC Control Command Reference lists all PAC Control commands plus their OptoScript code equivalents and arguments e PAC Manager User Guide and other guides provided with specific hardware help you install configure and use controllers and I O units Online versions Adobe pdf format of PAC Control documents are provided on the CD that came with your controller or purchase of Professional software and are also available from the Help menu in PAC Control To view a document select Help gt Manuals and then choose a document from the submenu Resources are also available on the Opto 22 Web site at www opto22 com You can convenient
445. r select Debug gt Pause Chart or Debug gt Pause Subroutine Here s an example of a paused chart Powerup NECS 3 Wait until start flag is set true non zero Start the alarm monitoring dough chip control pressure control and oven inspection charts EX SU NEUES i Shortcuts 100 v Hatch marks and a red outline appear on the Start block indicating that this block is to be executed next The status bar shows Step On which means you can step through the chart or subroutine if you wish PAC Control User s Guide 177 DEBUGGING 178 Stepping Through a Chart or Subroutine When you step through a chart or subroutine you control the timing and execution of its commands in a running strategy You can see what commands are being executed when and you can monitor the status of variables and I O that are affected by the commands There are two types of stepping single stepping and automatic stepping Use single stepping to go through flowchart blocks at your own pace Use auto stepping to watch the flowchart step automatically CAUTION Since stepping through a running chart or subroutine even auto stepping slows down execution be cautious if your strategy is running on real equipment For example stepping through a strategy might leave a valve open much longer than it should be Single Stepping When you are debugging a strategy start by using the Step Over button to go thr
446. rage See flash memory permissions in Windows 369 persistent data 220 persistent RAM 363 PID loop algorithms 301 changing 139 configuring 134 301 definition 300 deleting 140 determining system lag 147 inspecting 146 tuning 151 PID Ethernet commands 300 pointer adding 221 commands 303 331 definition 49 219 303 in OptoScript 331 programming example indexing 85 pointer table 304 adding 224 port Ethernet 256 peer to peer communication 250 Powerup chart 49 uses 77 precedence for operators 395 primary and secondary addresses for I O unit 118 printing bill of materials 190 191 chart commands instructions 187 chart graphics 184 chart instructions 241 page setup 184 subroutine commands 187 problems see troubleshooting Product Support 4 programming comparing OptoScript with other languages 387 examples 79 in PAC Control 69 pulse commands instructions 283 Q quadrature counter commands instructions 283 queue checking messages 103 372 quotation marks in strings 330 R RAM 363 redundant communication links 94 287 redundant controllers 99 repeat loop 322 339 repetitive actions programming example 81 replacing elements 194 resolution timer 315 retrieving a directory listing 265 RTS CTS 268 running a strategy 26 automatically 175 manually 175 S saving chart 163 213 configurations to flash memory 141 files to flash memory 280 strategy 163 strategy to flash 165 subroutine 355 sav
447. re nStatus Variable Increase Notification bCondition nValue Outputl PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 12 USING SUBROUTINES For more information on entering a command instruction in OptoScript see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 340 3 In the Instructions dialog box click where you want the instruction to be placed and then click Add The Add Instruction dialog box appears T Add Instruction Instruction Absolute Value E Comment Type Name OF All Valid Types aiD oughVesselPressure Put Result in AI Valid Types aoConveyorS peedContral 4 Inthe highlighted Instruction field enter the subroutine name or choose it using the drop down list or click the Select button and locate it in the command group you chose NOTE If you click Select you will find subroutines located in the Subroutine group by default If you want subroutines in a different group you can change group when configure the Subroutine s parameters See Configuring Subroutine Parameters on page 350 The subroutine command appears in the dialog box just as any command would and the prompts you entered when you configured the parameters appear also tAdd Instruction Instruction Variable Increase Notification Comment Type It Al Valid Types It Greater Than All Valid Types Prompts Then Enter Text All Valid Types The
448. re all required elements are present For example every if must have a then and an endif See OptoScript Control Structures on page 336 for more information Type Conflicts Type conflicts are caused when different data types are incorrectly mixed For example you cannot assign an integer to a string Make sure data types are correct It is easier to keep track of data types if you use Hungarian notation when naming variables See Variable Name Conventions on page 329 for help PAC Control User s Guide 345 DEBUGGING STRATEGIES WITH OPTOSCRIPT Debugging Strategies with OptoScript Before trying to debug strategies containing OptoScript code make sure the code has been compiled within each block or choose Compile All to do all blocks at once When you begin debugging the strategy start by stepping through whole blocks If you run across a problem then step within that block Stepping within the block is discussed in Choosing Debug Level on page 176 346 PAC Control User s Guide 12 Using Subroutines Introduction This chapter shows you how to create and use subroutines In this Chapter About Subroutines s 347 Creating SuDIoUtines ueit c 348 Using Subroutines Viewing Subroutines Printing Subroutines About Subroutines A subroutine is a custom command that represents a series of commands Subroutines are useful anytime you have a group of commands that is repeated i
449. re changed for the strategy or subroutine Enable Ethernet Ultimate and Simple I O Units and Commands If you re using any of the I O unit types shown in the following table you should enable Ethernet Ultimate and Simple I O units and commands When you do both the I O unit types and the commands shown in the table will become available in the strategy IVAL Set Digital 64 I O Unit from MOMO Masks DEPRECATED IVAL Set Mixed 64 I O Unit from MOMO Masks DEPRECATED IVAL Set Mixed I O Unit from MOMO Masks DEPRECATED IVAL Set Simple 64 I O Unit from MOMO Masks DEPRECATED Set Digital 64 I O Unit from MOMO Masks DEPRECATED Set Mixed 64 I O Unit from MOMO Masks DEPRECATED Set Mixed I O Unit from MOMO Masks DEPRECATED Set Simple 64 I O Unit from MOMO Masks DEPRECATED SNAP ENET D64 SNAP B3000 ENET SNAP ENET RTC SNAP UP1 D64 SNAP UP1 ADS SNAP UP1 M64 SNAP ENET S64 PAC Control User s Guide 197 LEGACY OPTIONS 198 Enable High Density Digital Module Commands All SNAP high density digital modules are fully supported by the SNAP PAC System using regular digital point commands However three of our older HDD modules can also be used with analog capable SNAP Ultimate SNAP Ethernet and SNAP Simple I O units if you use the older deprecated HDD commands If you are using SNAP ODC 32 SNK SNAP ODC 32 SRC or SNAP IDC 32 HDD modules with these older I O units you should enable High Density Digital modu
450. re pieces of information you must enter in the instruction You can also press F1 to open online help for commands which gives you the same information as in the printed Command Reference For example one of the commands shown above Set Down Timer Preset Value has two arguments The Command Reference and online help tell you that the first argument the target value or the value from which the timer counts down can be a float variable or a float literal entered in either decimal or hexadecimal form and that the second argument is the name of the down timer variable You need this information when you enter the instruction in the Add Instruction dialog box T Add Instruction Instruction Set Down Timer Preset Value Comment Type Float Literal Arguments lt 1 The sample flowchart we ve shown uses standard PAC Control commands only If you have a programming background you may wish to incorporate OptoScript blocks in your flowchart OptoScript is a procedural language that can simplify some programming tasks including string handling math calculations and complex loops and conditions See Chapter 11 Using OptoScript for more information Compiling and Debugging the Strategy When all charts are completed and their instructions added the next step is to compile and debug the strategy But first check your hardware Check cabling and connections and make sure the actual I O matches the configured I O in t
451. recently used choose its name from the list at the bottom of the File menu The ten most recently opened strategies are listed Loading a Strategy or Mode at Startup To have PAC Control automatically start up with the strategy that was open when you exited choose Configure gt Options and click to put a check mark next to Load Last Strategy at Startup To have PAC Control open strategies in the same mode as when you exited PAC Control choose Configure gt Options and click to put a check mark next to Load Last Mode at Startup 162 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 7 WORKING WITH STRATEGIES Opening Strategies in PAC Control Basic and PAC Control Professional A strategy saved in ioControl version 6 1 or less can be opened in either PAC Control Basic or Professional A PAC Control Basic strategy can also be opened in PAC Control Professional However PAC Control Professional strategies cannot be opened in Basic or in any earlier version of PAC Control CAUTION Once a strategy is opened in PAC Control Professional it can no longer be opened in PAC Control Basic Opening an OptoControl Strategy If you are moving a strategy from OptoControl to PAC Control Professional PAC Control will open it and help you convert it Although many things will convert without difficulty planning ahead is essential to make the job easier Before opening an OptoControl strategy in PAC Control read form 1692 the FactoryFloor to PAC Project Migrat
452. reren Printing All Charts ima SUategy sso iere di deeedia tise dies ia Eo Ee ene dads tose Yd Viewing and Printing Strategy or Subroutine Commands 0 6 e eee Viewing and Printing Strategy or Subroutine Elements 000 cece eee Viewing and Printing a Cross Reference sss Viewing and Printing a Bill of Materials 0 0 0 0 occ c cece Viewing and Printing I O Point Mappings ssssssssssssR eens Searching and Replacing reet qantas rtr cereo Urol eem tehes bed E THES Searching were S REDIACING ensani cada auumdennnadhed acagatanen ch Reaneega ven ne maramnegnoiaanage nein LEGACY OPTIONS ass cnet avothes MUT ky dae thes Im ead hotles ine BMdanet oo Gade dues EXISTING SIAC OES Rc New Strategies ix ee dent ves te ehe dass tuta rho abd tp reta telae etie dd a dd dart Enabling Legacy Options soe eee ee tete tx hee doe e ende erede Enable Ethernet Ultimate and Simple I O Units and Commands Enable High Density Digital Module Commands sss Enable mistic O Units and Commands 000 c ccc eee eee e eee e eens Chapter 8 Working with Flowcharts ccc eceec cece cece ne PAC Control User s Guide JIE Gl OST ON ERE EET E EET aa tty etree Greece talk ane rE 201 UNIS CHAPIENs oreet bro dcr ey tre prebere debe ape ebbe ena dle 201 Creatingia New Chalt uoce sorte teret OOIEOE ebledev ot be venti Bu 201 Working with Chart Elem
453. riable A PAC Control timer stores elapsed time in units of seconds with resolution of milliseconds Down timers continuously count down to zero and up timers continuously count up from zero Timers can be paused and continued To create a timer in PAC Control configure a numeric variable and select the type Up Timer or Down Timer You can use any PAC Control command for example Move that references a numeric variable to access a timer You can view the current value of a timer at any time in PAC Control Debug mode Since the timer is independent from the control engine s clock over thousands of seconds the timer and the control engine s clock will not match Timers do not place any additional load on the CPU Down Timer Operation The Set Down Timer Preset Value command sets the time the down timer will start from but does not start the timer Use the Start Timer command to start the timer counting down to zero Since the default preset value for a down timer is zero nothing will happen if you use the Start Timer command before setting a value Alternatively you can use the Move command to set the time the down timer will start from If you use Move the down timer begins counting down immediately If program execution speed is a PAC Control User s Guide TIMING COMMANDS priority use the Move command and put an integer value rather than a float into the timer This action eliminates the float to integer conversion time Not
454. rned by commands such as Transmit Numeric Table and Receive Numeric Table and close communication if there are errors If your PAC Control application opens sessions but does not close unused or bad sessions the maximum number of sessions could be used up Note that communication should not be closed for timeout errors from Receive commands error numbers 37 and 39 however because these errors simply mean that there was no data waiting in the receive buffer for the specified session To save time before using a Receive command such as Receive String or Receive Numeric Table TCP IP charts should use the command Get Number of Characters Waiting If there are zero characters waiting then there is no reason to use the Receive command It is also a good idea to start a down timer and then loop on the Get Number of Characters Waiting command until either there are more than zero characters waiting or the timer expires The following chart is also an example of TCP IP communication on controller COM ports but with three differences in this case another device is requesting communication the peer will both transmit and receive and error checking is shown for the commands Get Number of Characters Waiting and Receive Numeric Table Similar error checking should be used for transmit commands which in this strategy are in another chart PAC Control User s Guide COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 256 EEK gt s Shortcuts 100
455. rol User s Guide 167 COMPILING AND DOWNLOADING 168 Compile Progress Compiling tags WARNING Serial port 2 is being used by 1 0 Unit Mixed IO but has not been configured for 1 0 Compiling charts Condition Delay Conveyer peration Powerup Shipping Area Timer Example Chart Compiling subroutines Building run file Done D error s 1 wamina s Progress ULL LLLI Eo t A Wamings 1 Close If there are errors the strategy will not compile Click Close to continue in Configure mode If there are only warnings click Close to continue in Debug mode If no errors or warnings occur the Strategy Download dialog box appears I Strategy Download x Downloading your strategy Download strategy NENREBRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRNN Store to flash memory 888 The Strategy Download dialog box will vary somewhat depending on your settings NOTE Ifyou are using background downloading see Background Downloading on page 170 while the strategy is downloaded there may bea very slight degradation in performance This is due to the overhead on the controller to process the strategy download 4 Optional If there is already an active strategy which is set up to have an alternate strategy and you want to switch strategies click Switch amp Run to stop the active strategy and run the strategy you just downloaded Or you can click Switch to stop the active strategy and make the new strategy
456. rollers can run up to 32 charts plus one host task simultaneously a SoftPAC controller can run up to 64 charts plus one host task simultaneously The host task is an invisible chart used to communicate to a PC which may be running PAC Control in Debug mode or PAC Display Each chart in a running or suspended state counts toward the total that can run simultaneously Charts that are stopped do not When the Powerup chart is running it also counts The actual order and timing for running tasks is not deterministic that is it is not always the same but depends on priorities at any given time For example communication may sometimes take a higher priority than a running chart OptoScript block OptoScript blocks are hexagonal blocks in a flowchart that contain OptoScript code OptoScript is a procedural language that can simplify tasks such as math computations string handling and complex loops and conditions OptoScript blocks can have more than one entrance but only one exit output point Output points are wired to hardware that receives information from the brain and uses this information to control components of the process For example lights motors and valves are all devices that can be wired to output points Using an output point the control engine in the brain might turn on a light or open a valve pointer A pointer does not store the value of a variable instead it stores the memory address of a variable or some other
457. rom the pop up menu The Inspecting dialog box opens PAC Control User s Guide 101 INSPECTING CONTROL ENGINES AND THE QUEUE 102 Qo Ir amo o Inspecting Cookie Controller Control Engine SNAP PAC R2 at 10 192 54 115 Firmware Version R8 3a 12 23 25 September 18 2008 Volatile RAM 4 98 MB free Battery backed RAM 1023 96 KB free File Storage RAM 1 90 MB free Up Time 12 days 19 hours 27 minutes 25 seconds Device Time 12 23 59 June 22 2009 Sync time to PC F Message Queue messages Strategy information Active Cookies 17 39 19 June 17 2008 5 chart s running Archive No l p Run E Stop 4 Store to Flash K Alternate Not Enabled Stored in Flash strategy is stored in flash memory Autorun O Enabled Disabled Communication Loop Time 7 59 msec Comm Errors None Close Here you see data relating to the control engine If you are using Ethernet link redundancy in PAC Control Professional remember that the information shown is for the IP address you chose before entering Debug mode See Using Strategies with Link Redundancy on page 99 for more information A Control Engine Type of device the control engine is running on and the devices IP address B Firmware Version Version number of the firmware kernel loaded on the device and the date the firmware was released C Memory Available Amount of memory RAM available on the control engine For example
458. routines and to configure control engines I O and variables e Debug mode is used to download run and debug strategies and to view control engine and communication status and errors while the strategy is running e Online mode is a scaled down version of Configure mode used to change a strategy while it is running You cannot add variables and I O in Online mode but you can change ones that already exist NOTE When you change a chart in Online mode a new copy of that chart is downloaded to the control engine but the old one is not deleted After you have made a few online changes the additional chart copies begin to take up memory To avoid memory problems be sure you stop the strategy after making several online changes and completely compile and download it to clear out old chart copies To change modes choose the mode you want from the Mode menu or click its button in the toolbar Toolbars Toolbars give you shortcuts for doing many things that also appear on menus Toolbars in PAC Control include standard Windows buttons like New and Save as well as special buttons for PAC Control functions The tools that you can use depend on which mode you re in Tools not currently available are grayed out The following toolbars are standard in PAC Control Mode Selection Toolbar Configure Mode and Online Mode Toolbar Debug Mode Toolbar PAC Control User s Guide PAC CONTROL MAIN WINDOW Mode Selection Toolbar The mode s
459. rrect way to solve the control problem and build the strategy Instead there are many possible ways The following chart shows one example Sprinklers 3 Shortcuts One difference between this chart and the human level chart on page 72 is that several delays have been added to the chart There is one before rechecking the hour of the day one before rechecking the day of the week one before rechecking whether the timer has expired and finally one before starting the flowchart over again This sprinkler system is not time critical If the sprinklers turn on at a little past 6 00 a m or the grass is watered an extra few seconds it doesn t matter Delays give the control engine time to do other things For more information on delays and using control engine time effectively see page 87 Each block in the chart contains the PAC Control commands instructions that do the work in the system For example here are the instructions for the block Turn on sprinklers set timer PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY VInstructions Dough_Chip_Control Start Turn On Sprinkler Switch Set Down Timer Preset Value Target Value 900 0 Down Timer Timer Next Block Start Timer Timer Previous Block As you create charts and enter instructions keep referring to the PAC Control Command Reference The Command Reference describes the arguments for each command which a
460. s The preview window appears showing the image as it will print The cursor becomes a magnifying glass PAC Control User s Guide VIEWING AND PRINTING IPAC Control Professional Dough _Vessel_Pressure_Control BAE Di config l ocbuo Cioni 002 0550 55 This chart maintains the pressure In the dough vessel tank x Magnifying glass Cursor The Powerup chart starta this chart Thila chart runi continuouwy once the Calculate the current program has been started ponure setpoint minus a deadband When pre siure 1 greater than or equal to setpoint clove the pressure valve When pre iure H less than the setpoint minus the deadband open the pressure valve Configure 3 To zoom in at 200 percent click where you want to see more closely Click again to zoom in at 400 percent Click a third time to return to 100 percent view You can also use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons at the top of the window to zoom in or out with respect to the top left corner of the image 4 If the image spans more than one page click the Next Page or Prev Page buttons to view the next or previous page To switch between a single page view and a double page view click the Two Page One Page button 5 To print click the Print button to open the standard Windows Print dialog box To change settings before printing click Close and see Setting Up the Page on page 184 Printing One Chart or Subroutine 1 To print on
461. s 169 170 sync block definition 203 syntax common errors in OptoScript 345 in OptoScript 327 393 397 system requirements for PAC Control 5 T table commands 288 299 in OptoScript 333 numeric table as alternative to strings 307 table variable 219 adding 224 changing 233 235 configuring 224 initializing during strategy download 226 monitoring in a watch window 233 235 tabs using to view windows 57 target address 287 task queue 246 TCP communication handle 247 249 TCP IP cannot connect error resolving 365 text block deleting 211 moving 210 selecting 210 text changing color or size 203 212 time date commands instructions 314 timeouts Send Email 276 279 timer commands instructions 315 definition 49 down timer 315 programming example 83 resolution 315 up timer 316 variable definition 219 timing a process commands used for 314 toolbar 53 drawing 203 OptoScript 341 toolbars configuration mode and online mode 54 debug mode 55 totalizer commands instructions 283 TPO 244 transfer control engine 109 trigonometry commands instructions 295 troubleshooting how to begin 361 in OptoScript 344 memory problems 363 memory problems from Online mode changes 53 PAC Message Viewer utility 366 Product Support 4 Windows permissions 369 tuning PID loop 151 types of OptoScript commands 328 U Ultimate I O units and commands 197 up timers 316 V variable adding 221 changing 22
462. s 387 complex loops 322 conditions 324 control structures 336 debugging strategies 346 definition 317 editor 340 for loop 339 functions 326 if statements 337 language reference 387 literals 394 logical operator 335 math expressions 319 334 notes for programmers 392 numeric literals 329 numeric variables 329 pointers 331 precedence for operators 395 repeat loop 339 string handling 320 strings 330 switch statements 337 syntax 327 393 397 tables 333 toolbar 341 troubleshooting 344 types of commands 328 when to use 318 while loop 338 OptoVersion utility 368 order of precedence for operators 395 output point definition 45 disabling 284 P PAC Control definition 43 PAC Control User s Guide designing a strategy 69 directory list of files in 382 errors 371 files list of 381 installing 4 main window 52 mode 53 opening other applications 66 programming 69 317 System requirements 5 PAC Display 50 PAC Manager 113 PAC Message Viewer utility 366 PAC Terminal utility downloading files 110 inspecting control engines 106 testing communication with control engine 364 PAC Utilities 106 110 364 366 368 page setup for printing graphics 184 panning 61 parallel algorithm for PID 301 parameters subroutine 347 350 passed in subroutine parameters 347 pasting block 211 command instruction 240 241 connection line 211 text block 211 pausing chart 177 peer to peer communication 219 249 256 291 permanent sto
463. s as specified in D Any positive integer is valid For Ethernet 3 5 seconds 3000 5000 milliseconds is a good starting point PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES Associating the Control Engine with Your Strategy After you have defined the control engine on your PC see page 90 it can be associated with your Strategy 1 If you are in PAC Terminal close PAC Terminal Open the strategy in PAC Control Configure mode or Online mode and choose Configure gt Control Engines In the Configure Control Engines dialog box the engine s name appears in the list Active Engine Active engine R1 Controller Engines Associated with Strategy List of control engines Cookie Controller 2 Check to make sure the correct control engine appears in the Active Engine field If not highlight the one you want and click Set Active Only one control engine can be active If only one control engine is listed it automatically becomes the Active Engine Your control engine configuration is complete Using Network Segmenting in PAC Control You can take advantage of the two independent Ethernet network interfaces on a SNAP PAC controller to segment the control network from the company network Because the two network interfaces are completely independent and have separate IP addresses they can be set up on two separate networks Host traffic can communicate on one while the controller communica
464. s but for the field PAC Control User s Guide APPENDIX E OPTOSCRIPT LANGUAGE REFERENCE technicians and maintenance personnel who will use it in the field While you could write an entire chart or conceivably an entire strategy in one block doing so would eliminate most of the advantages of using PAC Control Consider limiting your use of OptoScript to math operations complex string manipulation and other logic most suited to scripting so you retain PAC Control s advantages for non programmers Language Syntax In the same way OptoScript syntax is meant to be simple enough for a beginner to understand but also easy for an experienced programmer to learn quickly Some programmers may wonder why OptoScript is not modeled after just one existing language such as BASIC or C Instead one can clearly see influences from Pascal BASIC and C PAC Control s target audience is one reason internal consistency with PAC Control commands and the capabilities and limitations of Opto 22 control engines are another Some aspects of OptoScript were designed to be consistent with PAC Control commands For instance the bitwise and operator was named bitand in OptoScript because there is a command in PAC Control named Bit AND OptoScript provides all the functionality of Opto 22 control engines but is subject to their limitations For instance OptoScript provides some convenient ways of working with strings but only to a certain point For e
465. s moved to the IVAL as part of reading the input point H Watchdog Outputs only To set a Watchdog on this point click Yes and define the value to be assigned to the output if the Watchdog is triggered A Watchdog is triggered if no communication activity is detected on the bus for the amount of time specified in the Watchdog field of this point s I O unit For no Watchdog click No I Enable Select whether you want communication to this I O point enabled or disabled on startup Enabled is the default Configuring a Serial Module Use PAC Manager to configure SNAP serial communication modules including the Profibus module See the PAC Manager User s Guide Opto 22 form 1704 for instructions Changing Point Configuration 130 Moving a Configured I O Point You can move most configured I O points to an empty point on the same I O unit or on a different unit 1 With the strategy open in Configure mode double click the I O Units folder on the Strategy Tree 2 In the Configure I O Unit dialog box highlight the unit the point is on and click I O Points The Configure I O Points dialog box opens For a SNAP I O unit it looks something like this PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O I Configure 1 0 Points 1 0 Unit Sprinkler Control Type SNAP PACRT Modules and Points Features Subty Add 5 00 SNAP IDC5D 2 5 28 VDC Digital Input Ld sues is l a EEE es NN
466. s target value use the condition Up Timer Target Time Reached This condition tests the timer to see if it is greater than or equal to the target time The Stop Timer command forces the timer to stop and resets it to zero If you want to halt the timer and have it maintain its value at the time it was stopped use the Pause Timer command instead After you use Pause Timer you can then move the timer s value at the time it was stopped to a variable You can also use the Continue Timer command to resume the timer where it left off 316 PAC Control User s Guide 11 Using OptoScript Introduction This chapter shows you how to create and use OptoScript an optional programming language that can simplify certain types of operations in PAC Control Modeled after computer languages such as C and Pascal OptoScript code gives you an alternative to using standard PAC Control commands In addition to the examples provided here see the Control Basic Examples directory on your hard drive for a fully annotated example strategy OptoScript information is also provided in form 1638 the SNAP PAC Learning Center User s Guide You will find OptoScript easy to use if you already have computer programming experience Beginning programmers may also want to try it for control operations involving extensive math calculations string handling or complex loops and conditions This chapter assumes that you have some programming experience Experienced programmers
467. s the Open Outgoing Communication and Communication Open commands to establish a connection PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS The control engine s TCP IP flowcharts should open communication once and then continue to transmit or receive using the communication handle Constantly opening and closing communication for each transaction wastes time and is inefficient As a simple example the flowchart at right is designed to receive data from a serial device such as a barcode reader through a serial communication module on the same rack as a SNAP PAC R series I O unit Communication with serial modules is done via TCP IP It can be done from the SNAP PAC R system itself as in this example or from another TCP IP device on the network Serial_Comm In this example the R series I O unit establishes communication through the serial module using the communication handle tcp 127 0 0 1 22507 The loopback IP address is used since the serial module is on the same rack When characters are detected in the receive buffer the I O unit receives the string and processes it and then after a short delay checks for another message Communication remains open for additional messages 4 Shortcuts This simple flowchart illustrates the basics of handling communication without any error checking However while receiving and transmitting TCP IP control charts should also monitor the status value retu
468. s to lock the flag Since it never gives up the only value that can be returned is 0 Don t wait at all Succeeds only if the flag is available to be locked immediately Makes this a non blocking call If the flag is not already locked a return of 0 Suc cess is returned If the flag is locked a 17 Already Locked error is returned Wait maximum of value milliseconds to lock the flag If it succeeds within the specified time 0 is returned otherwise a 37 Timeout on Lock error is returned Value greater than 0 Value less than 0 Produces a 8 Invalid Data error Pointers and Indexing The following examples show three possible ways to control 16 fans based on setpoints Without Pointers The first way shown below uses individual fan outputs and setpoint variables to determine whether to turn off or on the appropriate fan It s a simple way to solve the problem but takes a long time to PAC Control User s Guide INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES program and produces a large repetitive section in the flowchart It also consumes more control engine memory due to the large number of conditional and action blocks Instructions FanCtrl 01 Too Warm Tempo1 SP01 I Instructions FanCtrl Turn Fan On Motor01 Each fan output Motor01 Motor16 uses a separate temperature input Temp01 Temp16 and a separate setpoint variable SPO1 SP16 The flowchart cycles through them all to control
469. second IP address field is available so you can designate a secondary communication path to the control engine should the primary one fail For more information see Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Control on page 94 Make sure that you have not changed the values in the Port Retries and Timeout fields and then click OK The newly configured control engine appears in the Select Control Engine dialog box PAC Control User s Guide COMPILING THE STRATEGY Configured Control Engines Cookie Controler 10 Click the new Cookie Controller control engine to select it and then click OK The new control engine appears in the Configure Control Engines dialog box Active Engine Cookie Controller Engines Associated with Strategy yokie Cont Since you have only one configured control engine at this point it is automatically set as the active control engine If there were more than one control engine you would have to select it and click Set Active to load it into the Active Engine field 11 Click OK to close the Configure Control Engines dialog box On the Strategy Tree the new control engine appears as the first entry in the Control Engines folder Compiling the Strategy The simplest way to compile a strategy is to enter Debug mode The strategy is saved and compiled before changing modes NOTE The remainder of the tutorial is designed to work with the controller and I O on a SNAP PAC Le
470. seconds 10 seconds If you want to change one or more timeouts from the default specify the value in element 0 of the table for Argument 2 as follows Set transmit timeout to tx nnnn Set receive timeout to rx nnnn Set connect timeout to cx nnnn Fach timeout command is independent of the others so you can use one two or all three of the commands in any order If you use more than one command put a space between each one The following example sets the transmit timeout to 20 seconds and the receive timeout to 15 seconds The connect timeout is not changed HTTP SrcStrTblBody 0 to tx 20000 to rx 15000 Table name Element 0 Transmit timeout Receive timeout PAC Control User s Guide 279 CONTROL ENGINE COMMANDS Control Engine Commands The following commands refer to the control engine Calculate Strategy CRC Get Firmware Version Erase Files In Permanent Storage Load Files From Permanent Storage Get Available File Space Retrieve Strategy CRC Get Control Engine Address Save Files To Permanent Storage Get Control Engine Type Start Alternate Host Task Commands Relating to Permanent Storage The term Permanent Storage in three of the commands listed above refers to the control engine s flash memory Files that are saved to flash memory remain in the control engine even when power to it is turned off On a SoftPAC controller files are saved to the PC s hard drive These commands do NOT affect
471. select Hexadecimal Here s how the integers appear in hex Hex view The Ox before 3 nCookie Counter scanning the number indicates that Meme nCookie Counter the number is in hex Value 0x00000 20 Mare io To return to decimal view click HEX and then select Decimal Setting Hex String View You can also set strings to appear in hex notation Here is the View Variable window showing a string in regular notation 3 String Variable scanning Name String Variable Width 10 max width O current width Value Item price 116 101 109 Item 112 114 105 price 101 32 61 G More Info PAC Control User s Guide CUSTOMIZING PAC CONTROL FOR YOUR NEEDS To change to hex notation click the ASCII button on the dialog box Heres how the string appears in hex s String Variable scanning Name String Variable Width 10 max width 0 current width Value 49 74 65 6D 20 70 72 69 63 65 20 3D 112 114 105 price 99 101 32 61 116 101 109 Item 32 OMe F Setting Up Applications to Launch from PAC Control You may find it useful to launch other software applications directly from PAC Control For example you may want to launch PAC Display Notepad or the Calculator from PAC Control You can set up PAC Control so that these applications appear in the Tools menu NOTE Ifyou launch an application from within PAC Control when that application is already running a second instan
472. series O Device A IP address 10 192 59 45 IP address 10 192 59 31 a Request communication z 9 9 I ri i Communicate R 4 Ds Id Communication Handle value tcp 22004 Sends communication to 10 192 59 45 on port 22004 Communication Handles for Serial Communication Modules For communication with serial devices through a serial communication module the communication handle value consists of the IP address of the brain the module is attached to plus the serial module5 port number according to its position on the rack NOTE For port number information see Establish an Ethernet Connection in Opto 22 form 1191 the SNAP Serial Communication Module User s Guide PAC Control User s Guide 253 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS Here are two examples of communication handles for communicating with serial modules the first showing communication through a module on the same rack as a SNAP PAC R series controller and the second showing communication through a module on a different rack To a Serial Module on the Same Rack For a serial module on the same rack use the loopback IP address 127 0 0 1 which tells the brain to gt alk to its own rack You can also use port 22507 he brain s own IP address in this IWA example 10 192 59 45 but the qe oopback address allows you to change the IP address of the brain without having to change the communication handle SNAP R series I O IP address 10 192 59 4 T SN
473. similar items together in the way you expect to use them Names have a maximum length of 50 characters They can be all upper case characters or they can be mixed case In chart names for example you might include a few letters indicating whether the chart monitors critical tasks is a master chart calling others or is periodically called e Mntr Tank Leak constantly running chart that monitors a critical situation Mstr Conveyor Process master chart that calls others for a sub process PAC Control User s Guide BASIC RULES Call Message Display chart called by a master chart for a specific purpose Block names should tell what the block does so you can understand a chart without needing additional explanations Block names should describe the purpose of the instructions within them Use a question for the name of a condition block with a true exit reflecting the answer yes e Read Thermometer action block e emperature Too High condition block e urn On Pump 1 or Pump 1 On action block e Pump On condition block Variable names can include Hungarian notation to indicate the type of variable since the variable type is not always apparent in its name For example a variable named Month might be either a string or an integer However using Hungarian notation sMonth indicates a string and nMonth indicates an integer Another good practice is to identify variables used in a single chart differ
474. sistent variable s value remains the same until one of the following events OCCUIS e A strategy with a different name is downloaded he RAM memory on the controller is cleared e Anew firmware kernel is downloaded to the controller e The persistent object is changed as follows PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS A persistent table s length integer 64 bit integer float and string was modified Apersistent string variable s length was modified Apersistent string table element s string length was modified A persistent variable s type has changed For example a persistent float variable is deleted and a new persistent integer variable is created with the same name Persistent data can be very useful in certain situations For example suppose you have a PID setpoint that is fine tuned as your process runs If the setpoint is configured as persistent its value won t be lost if you must re download the strategy after making a program change Pointer variables pointer tables and timers are not allowed to be persistent but all other variables and tables can be Persistent variables cannot be configured on the fly Literals A literal is used like a variable but it is constant data that never changes A literal has no variable name only a fixed value which may be a floating point number an integer or a string If you are using subroutines see the information on literals
475. ssible upgrades are available in the drop down list D Primary Address For Ethernet O units type the IP address of the brain attached to the I O unit If the unit is local the same SNAP PAC brain on which the strategy will run select Local loopback This sets the address to a loopback address 127 o o 1 This tells the brain to talk to itself so if you change the brain s IP address you don t have to change the address for the I O unit For serial units type the unit s address valid range is 0 255 PAC Control User s Guide 117 ADDING AN I O UNIT 118 E Secondary Address Optional Pro only Ethernet based 1 0 units only To designate a secondary I O unit for communication if this I O unit is unavailable enter the secondary unit s IP address Note that both I O units use the same port number F Port For Ethernet based I O units communication with the control engine is Ethernet and the default port number is 2001 If you have changed this port for security purposes also change it here See the controller s user guide for details For serial based I O units the communication port and parameters are shown for you binary CRC settings on your hardware are required For more information see Changing the Baud Rate for Serial I O Units G Enable Communications Select whether you want communication to the I O unit enabled or disabled on startup Enabled is the default Disabling communication to an I O uni
476. step reference for working with strategies in all three strategy modes Configure Debug and Online In this Chapter Creating a New Strategy 61 Opening a Strategy 62 Saving and Closing s 63 Saving a Strategy to Flash 65 Archiving Strategies on the Computer 66 Compiling and Downloading 66 Running a Strategy Manually 75 SUING E 76 Viewing and Printing n Hd Searching and Replacing s 192 legacy ODDS ceret 96 Creating a New Strategy Each PAC Control strategy must be located in its own directory When you create a new strategy you must create a new directory or use an empty one Having each strategy in its own directory keeps all its files in one place and makes it easy to copy a strategy to another location for modification or backup 1 To create anew strategy select File gt New Strategy or press CTRL N or click the New Strategy button 3 on the toolbar 2 In the New Strategy dialog box navigate to the directory where you want the strategy to be placed Create a new folder if necessary 3 Type the strategy name PAC Control User s Guide 161 OPENING A STRATEGY As you can see in the Files of type field PAC Control files have an extension of idb 4 Click Open The new strategy is created Its Strategy Tree and Powerup charts appear in the PAC Control main window For information on the main window see PAC Contr
477. structed in more than one step may require more than one time slice to complete For example if a string is being constructed in two steps such as Move String Hello and Append String to String World after the first step a task switch could occur and another chart looking at the resulting string might see Hello rather than Hello World If another chart is relying on a completed string you can use a temporary string for building the string and then move it to the final string This idea is illustrated in the following example where a string variable named MSG String is built in two steps using a temporary string 1 Move the string literal The pressure is to a temporary variable named sTemp PAC Control User s Guide 307 STRING COMMANDS 2 Append a string variable sPressure to sTemp 3 With the complete string now built move sTemp to MSG String Adding Control Characters to a String You can input most control characters in a string by typing a backslash X followed by the two character hex value of the character For example to add an ACK CTRL F character enter N06 as part of the string This technique works for all control characters except null 00 carriage return NOD line feed 0A backspace 08 and CTRL Z M A To add these characters to a string you must use the Append Character command To input a single backslash in a string type in a double backslash Sample String Variable
478. t Details on the optional scripting language available in PAC Control for complex loops string handling and mathematical expressions 12 Using Subroutines How to use subroutines to streamline your strategy development A Troubleshooting Tips for resolving communication problems and other difficulties you may encounter B Errors and Messages Types of errors where you ll see them and the causes of common errors C PAC Control Files A list of all PAC Control files located in the PAC Control directory and in any strategy directory D Sample Strategy An illustration and description of the sample Cookies strategy used in Chapter 1 E OptoScript Language Reference Details about OptoScript code including comparisons to other languages lexical reference and notes to experienced programmers Index Alphabetical list of key words and the pages where they are located PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 1 WELCOME TO PAC CONTROL Choosing Documentation This user s guide contains the latest information you need to use PAC Control with your SNAP PAC system However if you are using Opto 22 legacy products designed to work with pre SNAP PAC systems see form 1710 PAC Control User Guide Legacy Edition The legacy version includes references to pre SNAP PAC devices and commands which are not included in this guide form 1For information on what we mean by legacy and how to migrate from an older system to a SNA
479. t Analog Gain to have the brain calculate them Calculate offset first and then calculate gain By setting offset and gain you make sure that values read are accurate Offset is the difference between the minimum input of an analog input point and the actual minimum signal received from a field device For example if a 4 20 mA input receives a minimum signal that is slightly off not exactly 4 mA the difference between the two minimums is the offset Reading Offset Actual Value For example If minimum input 4 000 mA and zero scale reading 4 003 mA then offset 0 003 mA Gain is the difference in the full scale reading but expressed differently Measured Value Gain Actual Value For example If maximum input 20 00 mA and measured value 20 50 mA then gain 0 9756097560976 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Minimum Maximum Values The Opto 22 brain automatically keeps track of minimum and maximum values for analog input points Min max values are often used to monitor pressure or temperature To read the minimum or maximum value and leave it as is use Get Analog Minimum Value or Get Analog Maximum Value To read the minimum or maximum value and clear it for example to record the minimum pressure in each 24 hour period use Get amp Clear Analog Minimum Value or Get amp Clear Analog Maximum Value Analog Points and OptoScript Code In OptoScript code an analog I O poi
480. t be aware that the computer may require more details PAC Control User s Guide STEPS TO DESIGN Here is a possible flowchart for the simple sprinkler control problem Simple Sprinkler System Process Flowchart At 6 00 a m read the day of the week Is it Sunday or Wednesday Read the hygrometer Yes Ishumidity less than 10096 Sprinklers off Turn sprinklers Turn sprinklers off on and set timer for 15 minutes Timer expired wo Yes Turn sprinklers off Building the Strategy Once you have the control problem solved in detail you can begin building the strategy in PAC Control Now you ll add all the logical details the computer needs Configuring Hardware The first step in building your strategy is to configure your control engine I O units and I O points For more information and step by step procedures see Chapter 5 Working with Control Engines and Chapter 6 Working with I O You can add more I O units and points later if needed but it saves time to configure them now When you solved this control problem some of the inputs and outputs you defined were physical I O such as the hygrometer and the switch to turn on the sprinklers You configure these physical inputs and outputs as the I O points PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY Here are the I O points you might configure for
481. t is the same as disabling communication to all points on the unit H Timeout Enter the number of times the control engine should try to communicate with the I O unit and enter the length of time the control engine should wait for a response when communicating with this I O unit If after the first communication attempt there is no response within the timeout period the control engine retransmits If there is no response within the timeout period it transmits again This repeats according to the number of tries specified If no response is received within the final timeout period communication to the I O unit is disabled The default number of tries is 3 The default timeout period is 1 second In most cases it is a good idea to start with the default values and only make changes if your system has problems using the defaults CAUTION If the timeout is long and the I O unit is turned off or unreachable the control engine could take quite a while to execute a command that talks to I O See also Tuning the I O Unit Timeout Value for Ethernet I O Units on page 120 I Fahrenheit Celsius Analog and Mixed units only Choose whether temperatures will be handled in Fahrenheit or Celsius J Watchdog Select whether you want a Watchdog on the unit not available on remote simple I O units The default is No disabled If you select Yes a new field appears enter the Watchdog timeout value in seconds The default timeout is 0 5 secon
482. t match the variable pntl which is defined as an integer 32 pni ptPointT 1 pfi ptPointT 2 pni ptPointT 3 Expressions and Operators OptoScript includes mathematical expressions as well as comparison logical and bitwise operators Because expressions and operators are built into the OptoScript language several standard PAC Control commands such as Multiply Bit Shift and Greater Than or Equal are not used PAC Control User s Guide 333 OPTOSCRIPT EXPRESSIONS AND OPERATORS Using Mathematical Expressions Addition nCount nLast Count 2 fPressure 1 5 fReading nTotal nMonday nTuesday 10 Subtraction nNumber A nNumber B 250 fRange fMax Temp fMin Temp Multiplication nQuantity nBoxes 12 nHours nSeconds 60 60 fMax Speed fSpeed 16 52 Division nBoxes nCount 6 fConversion fLimit 2 0 Modulo division If any argument is a float it is rounded to an integer before the division occurs Mixture of operators nVarl nVar2 2 nAvg nHrs A nHrs B 2 nVarl 2 nVar2 nVar3 nVarl fFloat2 nVar3 4 fFloatil fFloat2 2 5 Use parentheses to clarify groupings and meaning You can use an unlimited number of parentheses nVarl nVar2 fFloat2 2 0 nVarl nVar2 2 nVar3 fFloat1 fFloat2 2 3 The and operators have greater precedence than and See page 395 for the order of precedence In the following lines
483. t which addresses are enabled for an I O unit and which address is currently active by using Get Target Address State If an address is enabled but is not functional when a strategy is started or when communication for an O unit is changed from Disabled to Enabled an error is posted in the controller s error queue To use these commands you must have already designated primary and secondary IP addresses when configuring I O units For steps see Adding an I O Unit on page 116 For additional information about link redundancy see Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Control on page 94 Table Commands The table commands for I O units affect the states or values of all points on the I O unit at once For example you can use the command Move I O Unit to Numeric Table to read the states of all digital points and the values of all analog points on one I O unit and place them into a table for easy retrieval Table commands move data very quickly for faster throughput Three of the table commands IVAL Move Numeric Table to I O Unit Ex Move I O Unit to Numeric Table Ex and Move Numeric Table to I O Unit Ex provide support for high density points A Points per Module parameter lets you specify the number of points required For example if you are using 32 channel modules you would pass a 32 But if you are only using 8 channel modules you could pass an 8 instead This allows table sizes to be as small as possible Other commands rela
484. t www opto22 com 1 Determine two significantly different output settings that are within the capabilities of your system 2 With the strategy running in Debug mode double click the PID on the Strategy Tree w 2 pid0 View PID Loop scanning Name Input Setpoint Output Plot pid Error None 73 2753 Gain 15 ScanRate 3 78 Tunel 0 05 Scan Counts 112783 2 252521 Tune D 0 02 120 Details Misc Details VAL Velocity Algorithm Type B os DS Q 0 0 0 0 Data p InputAxis gt Output Axise Time Axis gt Set the Mode to Manual if not set already and click Apply In the Output field type one of your two output settings and click Apply Use an output value typical of your system but low enough to allow you to change output by 20 Reset your time axis if necessary by clicking the Time Axis and choosing from the pop up menu Then choose Reset Scale Tracking from the same menu The span setting varies according to your system a 3 minute span is often suitable Until you are familiar with the PID plot it is recommended that you avoid using the shortest settings 10 seconds or 1 second After you ve observed a change in the input you can zoom in on the graph which is described later 6 Wait for your system to stabilize PAC Control User s Guide 147 INSPECTING AND TUNING PID LOOPS Astable system exhibits little change in the Input value which is shown n
485. tab to see or change additional data Setpoint and Input plot Adjust resolution using the Input Axis button below the plot Click and drag on the scale to move the line Output plot Adjust resolution using he Output Axis button Click and drag on the scale to move the line Q Time axis Adjust resolution using the Plot Data p InputAxis gt Dutput Axis p HER View PID Loop scanning pid0 Error None 79 2753 Gain 15 Scan Rate 3 sec Mode aj 79 Tune I 0 05 Scan Counts 112783 Enable comm Yes 2 252521 Tune D 0 02 120 Details Misc Details VAL Velocity Algorithm Type B 0 30 0 09 44 00 0 09 Time Axis button Click and drag left or right to see other times Close View or change PID parameters as necessary Click the other tabs to see additional data To tune the PID see page 151 menu 146 PAC Control User s Guide To add the PID to a watch window click Add Watch and see page 157 To save copy or print the current plot click the Data button and choose from the pop up To save changes to any of the PID configuration parameters click Save Tuning CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O Determining System Lag You can directly control the PID output to determine system lag which is essential to setting the PID scan rate Also see Opto 22 form 1641 OptoTutorial SNAP PAC PID available for download from our website a
486. tch or Case Statements on page 337 e While Loops on page 338 e Repeat Loops on page 339 e For Loops on page 339 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT If Statements If statements offer branching in logic if statement A is true then one action is taken if statement A is false or statement B is true a different action is taken f statements are very flexible here are several examples of ways you can use them Since a comparison operator returns an Any numeric value can be tested by the if statement NOTE The Integer 32 value it can be used as the value is first converted to an Int32 test value if n1 then if nl gt 3 then fl 22 0 fl a 2 0 endif 2 5 257 endif An optional else statement can be Complex logical operations can also be used added np M P i if nl gt 3 then if n1 3 and not n1 6 then fl ze 2 05 fi e 2 05 ye e Es f2 6 5 Bon endif STEE 3 8 8 endif Multiple elseif statements can be used to chain together sev eral tests The else statement is still allowed at the end if nl gt 3 then If statements can be nested Each if requires an endif if nl gt 3 then fi 2510 fl 2 2 05 f2 6 53 e elseif n1 lt 3 then men f3 8 8 pipi if nl 10 then elseif n1 0 then fl f1 2 f3 f1 2 f2 f2 35 else EM fa 0 f3 x 2 OF endif zc endif endif Switch or Case Statements A switc
487. te eee beet be ee bpwvacig eel ente epi vat cdd 47 Toning PUD EOD s ast ete d tl e ete dee oet eee d REPRE ARARE d 51 Using Watch Windows for Monitoring 0 0 2 2 cece t ttt 57 Creating a Watch Window 0 c ccc ccc cece I ne 57 Opening an Existing Watch Window 06 6 cece cece cette e 58 Working in Wate WINdOWS esse vester One ERROR PUR EXE PERSE EEE ERE 59 Chapter 7 Working with Strategies cece cece cece cece nnne 161 MOGUO ins dus REEL 6 Bins Sero EEUU 6 Credtirig a New Strategy serei debere ia RR REPE ee VERE POR ORE I Re ewe dd 6 OPENING a Sta lOO mv 62 OPENING an EXIStING Strategy ssec be nds pee eun Co ru eere verd qued ees 62 Opening an ioControl Strategy 0 0 2 0c cette ence ett enn nett tenes 62 Openinga Recently Used Strategy ccictsca cass did suesd ere dade dee ede Red e be dean 62 Loading a Strategy or Mode at Startup 0 e ence tees 62 Opening Strategies in PAC Control Basic and PAC Control Professional 63 Opening an OptoControl Strategy 2 2 c eee ett tenn nett teens 63 Saving and CloSing cats hae rorem eee eee E cage t Peas e PR RAUM EORR ed 63 Saving the Strategy and All Charts 00 0 0 ccc cece cece eect eet ete n nee es 63 Saving the Strategy and Some Charts 0 0 c cece eet eeet teen eect tenes 63 Saving the Strategy to a New Name 00 0 cece e eee e n 64 Saving Before Debugging 6 cece cece cece s 64 dosing a Strategy c oss aids d
488. te of the controller s interval value IVAL for this I O point when the strategy is run click Yes and define the value To leave the IVAL at its last state click No If communication to the point is disabled only the internal values IVALs are accessed or updated by the control engine The real world external values XVALs for inputs don t change because they PAC Control User s Guide 129 CONFIGURING A SERIAL MODULE are controlled by external devices The IVALs for inputs are set and will be overwritten by the XVALs unless communication to the I O unit or point is disabled The default value is available for both inputs and outputs It sets the IVAL for the point in the strategy in the controller when the strategy is run This can be useful when the I O unit is not accessible or communication to the I O unit is intentionally disabled when the strategy first starts When communication to an I O unit is disabled any l O related commands in the strategy will act only on the I O point IVALs because the controller is not able to access the XVALs at the I O unit when communication to that I O unit is disabled Once communication to the I O unit is enabled and the I O unit is accessible then the first command to access that point will update the IVAL For example if you use the Move command to write a different value to an output both the IVAL and XVAL are updated with the new value If you use a Move command to read an input the XVAL i
489. teps to the next command block Since there are no more blocks in this chart we are actually exiting this chart and moving on to new instructions in another chart The Powerup chart has stopped and you can see the word Stopped at the bottom left of the chart In the View Variable dialog box the bStartFlag value reverts to zero because the Start Charts block set the flag back to zero 3 Close the bStartFlag View Variable dialog box In the Powerup chart window click the Pause Chart button to turn stepping off PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 2 PAC CONTROL TUTORIAL Then close the Powerup chart Double click the Charts folder on the Strategy Tree The View Chart Status dialog box appears ey View Chart Status Name Status Mode Breakpoint Status Paused At Alarms Running Step Off Break Off Dough_Chip_Control Running Step Off Break Off Dough Vessel Pre Running Step Off Break Off ven Inspection Running Step Off Break Off Powerup Stopped Step Off Break Off This dialog box shows us all the charts in our strategy As you can see four of the charts are running and one Powerup is stopped Powerup is stopped because it has already done its job Let s check the running charts Close the View Chart Status dialog box and click inside the Dough Chip Control chart again If your mouse has a wheel hold down the CTRL key and move the mouse wheel up or down to change the zoom If your mouse doesn t have a w
490. ter table points to another item within the strategy for example an I O point a variable or a chart Setting initial values for pointer tables means designating the items the pointer table initially points to For example you would include the following text to have a pointer table named My_Ptr_Table initially point to Oven_Temperature a variable Alarm_Handler a chart Thermocouple an analog input Fuel_Pump an analog output and Fan_1 a digital output Oven Temperature 0 PTBL My Ptr Table TABLE amp Alarm Handler 1 PTBL My Ptr Table TABLE Thermocouple 2 PTBL My Ptr Table TABLE Fuel Pump 3 PTBL My Ptr Table TABLE Fan 1 4 PTBL My Ptr Table TABLE PAC Control User s Guide 227 SETTING INITIAL VALUES IN VARIABLES AND TABLES DURING STRATEGY DOWNLOAD Special Characters in the Initialization File Note that the initial character on each line of the initialization file is a special character that identifies the object type Possible characters include the following Pa eee float integer or timer string PTR_ pointer variable ias I O point amp chart float table or integer table string table PTBL_ pointer table I O unit Saving the Initialization File When you have finished modifying the file save it as a text file txt file extension to your strategy directory You can name the file anything you like You can also save it to any directory you like but it is good pr
491. ters is referred to as an empty string Strings are frequently used in serial communication as a container for moving numeric characters from one device to another e Although a string may appear to contain numeric values it does not Digits 0 through 9 are characters just as much as A through Z they do not represent numeric values To illustrate As 22 306 PAC Control User s Guide let s look at the number 22 This is a decimal number representing a quantity of 22 The number 22 can be represented in a string in several ways here are two of them two character 50 s The ASCII code for 2 is 50 CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS As 16 a character 49 1 and a character 54 6 The hex value of 22 is 16 Note that the string representation of the number 22 is no longer a number It is simply one or two ASCII characters The string representation of a number must be converted to a numeric value if it is to be used in calculations Several Convert commands are available for this purpose e In standard PAC Control commands do not use double quotes around string literals You can use single quotes but they are not required e n OptoScript code you must use double quotes for string literals See 11 Using OptoScript for more information String Length and Width The width of a string is the maximum length a string can be length is the actual number of characters contained in the
492. tes with the I O units on the other To segment networks start by assigning a secondary IP address to the controller in PAC Manager following instructions in the PAC Manager User s Guide The secondary IP address is used for communication through the controller s Ethernet 2 interface Remember that this interface must be on a completely separate network segment You don t need to do anything special in PAC Control Configure only one control engine using the IP address of the Ethernet interface to be used for host communication The control engine will direct communication to I O units through the other interface based upon the I O unit s IP address The IP addresses of the I O units must be compatible with the secondary IP address of the controller PAC Control User s Guide USING ETHERNET LINK REDUNDANCY IN PAC CONTROL NOTE PAC Display Basic and other hosts on the company network cannot communicate with I O units when they are on a separate network To solve this problem you can purchase PAC Project Professional or PAC Display Professional and OptoOPCServer version 7 0 and newer separately these applications support network segmenting by communicating with I O units through the controller Also you can add a second network interface card NIC and assign it an IP address compatible with the I O unit network Using Ethernet Link Redundancy in PAC Control Ethernet link redundancy provides a backup network connection in case the pri
493. tg 2 Navigate to the configuration file you created and saved in PAC Manager Double click it to open it The configuration information is imported You can expand the I O units folder to see the imported units and their points If you need to configure additional I O units from within PAC Control see Adding an I O Unit on page 116 To tune PID loops see Inspecting and Tuning PID Loops on page 146 Copying I O Configurations If you have two strategies that use similar I O units and points you can export an I O configuration from one strategy into a file and then import it into the other strategy If you need similar configurations for several I O units you can use PAC Manager to send it to multiple I O units at once You cannot use PAC Manager for serial based I O units For more information on using PAC Manager see Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide Creating the Configuration Export File 1 Open the strategy you are copying from in PAC Control In the Strategy Tree right click the I O Units folder and choose Export from the pop up menu The Export I O Units to an Opto Tag Database dialog box appears PAC Control User s Guide 115 ADDING AN I O UNIT 2 Navigate to the location where you want to place the export file Type the file name and click Save The export file is created It is a comma delimited ASCII file If you wish you can open it in Notepad or Excel Importing the
494. the amount of memory available in the control engine A chart can be running suspended or stopped A running chart is actively performing its assigned task A suspended chart is temporarily paused A stopped chart is inactive Every chart in a PAC Control strategy can change the status of any other chart in the strategy yet every chart is independent of every other chart Any combination of charts can be running simultaneously up to the maximum limit allowed on the control engine See also multitasking Every strategy automatically contains a Powerup chart The Powerup chart is automatically started when the strategy begins running so it starts other charts All other charts you create based on the needs of your process input point Input points are wired to hardware that brings information into the brain from the process Examples of devices that can be wired to input points are thermocouples switches and sensors The control engine in the brain takes the information from the input points such as whether a switch is on or what temperature is registered processes it using commands in the strategy and returns information to the process through output points e A floating point or float is a numeric value that contains a decimal point such as 3 14159 1 0 or 1234 2 A good example of a float variable is one that stores readings from an analog input such as a thermocouple e An integer is a whole number with no fractional part E
495. the command Set Communication Handle Value to change the value of a specific communication handle during the operation Sets the value for the communication handle chAFile SetCommunicationHandleValue file r ProductRequest txt chAFile Opens the communication handle and checks to make sure it opened status OpenOutgoingCommunication chAFile if status 0 then Sets the end of message erminator to a comma SetEndOfMessageTerminator chAFile because the file to be read is comma delimited Reads the contents of the file Product_Names into a status ReceiveStrTable 4 0 Product_Names chAFile string table Loops through the items in Product_Names table and places the values they index 0 represent into another while index lt 4 and status 0 string table Product_Info status GetValueFromName Product Names index Note thatthe numbers in Product_Info index the Product_Info table are index index 1 not true numbers but wend string representations of numbers Closes communication status CloseCommunication chAFile Changes the value of the communication handle it is now set to write to the SetCommunicationHandleValue file w ProductInfo txt chAFile file Productinfo txt on the control engine Opens the communication handle and checks to make sure it opened status OpenOutgoingCommunication chAFile if status 0 th
496. the number of bad cookies so that nCookie Counter keeps track of the number of cookies sent out the door not just sent to the oven Close the nCookie Counter View Variable window and click the Configure mode button on the toolbar Double click the Oven Inspection Control chart on the Strategy Tree to open it The chart window looks something like this The Powerup chart starts this chart While conveyor speed is out of spec set oven temperature to 200 degrees Set oven temperature to 450 degrees If inspection station sees a bad cookie open reject valve for 0 5 second G Shortcuts 100 v Near the bottom of the chart the Reject Cookie block determines whether a bad cookie has been found If one has the strategy moves to the next block Blow Off which is where the bad cookie gets blown off the conveyor When that happens we want to decrement the nCookie_Counter variable Double click the Blow Off block to open its instructions window PAC Control User s Guide RUNNING THE STRATEGY 10 11 12 13 Instructions Oven_Inspection_Control Blow Off Reset the on latch after it has been t Clear On Latch On Point dilnspectionPassFailSwitch Modify Turn on reject valve to blow away bad cookie Turn On doRejectValve Next Block Leave reject valve on for 2 seconds Previous Block Delay Sec 2 0 This command block is executed only when a bad cookie has been found T
497. the process Each block in a chart contains one or more instructions such as Convert Number to String or Start Counter or Chart Running Commands are in two forms Actions and Conditions PAC Control User s Guide PAC CONTROL TERMINOLOGY e Action commands do something in the process for example Convert Number to String and Start Counter are both action commands On the flowchart they appear as instructions in action blocks which are rectangular in shape They may also appear in hexagonal OptoScripts e Condition commands check a condition and are in the form of a question Chart Running and Variable False are examples of condition commands They appear as instructions in condition blocks which are diamond shaped or in hexagonal OptoScript blocks Condition commands are questions that always have two possible answers either yes or no true or false The answer determines the flow of logic and what happens next in the chart internal value The internal value IVAL is the value read or written by the PAC Control strategy Internal values are transferred to external values only when communication to the I O unit is enabled multitasking The control engine can run several charts seemingly at once each performing a different task through a time slicing technique called multitasking also called multicharting Opto 22 SNAP PAC R series controllers can run up to 16 charts plus one host task simultaneously SNAP PAC S series cont
498. the sdcard you must put sdcard0 temp in front of the filename Any kind of file may be attached so long as there is room in the file system However be cautious about file size many Internet service providers still have a 10 MB attachment limit Add code to the SMTP Send OptoScript block This block invokes the Send Email with Attachments command to send the email with attachments Send email with attachments using the tables set up previously nResult SendEmailWithAttachments arrstrServer Table with server info arrstrRecipients List of recipients arrstrBody Body text arrstrAttach List of attachments Click Debug and then click Run Strategy The email and attachments are sent to the recipient s in your list PAC Control User s Guide COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 276 Setting Timeouts for the Send Email Commands The default Send Mail commands timeout for transmitting receiving and connecting is 10 000 milliseconds 10 seconds when you have filled in elements 0 4 of the Server Information table see page 274 If you want to change one or more timeouts from the default add an element 5 and specify the value as follows Set transmit timeout to tx nnnn Set receive timeout to rx nnnn Set connect timeout to cx nnnn Each timeout command is independent of the others so you can use one two or all three of the commands in any order If you use more than one comma
499. the simple sprinkler system Physical I O Type I O Point Name Hygrometer Analog Input Hygrometer Sprinkler status Digital Input Sprinkler_Status Sprinkler switch Digital Output Sprinkler_Switch Determining and Configuring Variables Some of the inputs and outputs you defined when you solved the problem were not physical 1 0 but information For example the day of the week is not a physical input it s a piece of information you can get using a command in PAC Control These inputs and outputs become variables You also need variables to store the information that input points give you And you may need variables for manipulating information To determine the variables you need think about the pieces of information your process requires Then look at the PAC Control commands in the PAC Control Command Reference Find the commands you need and check them to see what types of variables each command requires For example you need to know what day of the week it is Will the control engine give you this information as a string for example Wednesday or in some other format When you check the command Get Day of Week you discover that the day is returned as a number Wednesday 3 so you set up this variable as a numeric integer Here are some variables you may need See Chapter 9 Using Variables and Commands for more information and step by step procedures to add variables You can change them or add ot
500. the subroutine by selecting Subroutine gt Save Configuring Subroutine Parameters Before you can call a subroutine from a strategy you must configure the variables and other logical items that are passed into it These passed in items called subroutine parameters are the only information that is shared between a subroutine and the calling strategy Twelve parameters can be 350 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 12 USING SUBROUTINES passed into a subroutine and since a table can be a parameter those 12 parameters can include a large amount of data An item passed into a subroutine may be called by one name in the strategy and by another name in the subroutine In fact if a subroutine is used for more than one strategy it is good practice to select generic names in the subroutine For example if you create a subroutine to average values in any float table the table might be named Float_Table in the subroutine You could use this subroutine to average pressures in a table named Pressure_Values from a strategy and Pressure_Values would be referred to as Float_Table in the subroutine 1 With the subroutine open select Subroutine gt Configure Parameters The Configure Subroutine Parameters dialog box appears I Configure Subroutine Parameters BAR Subroutine Name Group Variable Increase Notification Subroutines Subroutine s OptoS cript Name Variable Increase Notification Comment t Prompt
501. these fundamental concepts e hey evaluate a process variable against its setpoint e hey control an output to correct the process variable e The output comprises proportional integral and derivative calculations e The effect of proportional integral and derivative calculations is modified by user determined P and D constants e The Pl and D constants need to be tuned for each system PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS PID Loops on I O Units SNAP PAC controllers and brains provide 96 PID loops per I O unit Because PIDs run on the I O side of the SNAP PAC R series controller not on the control side these PIDs will keep running on the SNAP PAC R series I O unit even if the PAC Control strategy stops In PAC Control you can configure each of the PID loops with unique settings for a large number of parameters For a simple PID loop you must configure at least the following e Input the process variable being monitored e Setpoint the desired value e Output the I O point that effects change in the system Scan time how often the input is sampled e PID algorithm used four algorithms are available see Algorithm Choices PID on page 301 e Valid range for input e Upper and lower clamps for output e Minimum and maximum change for output You can also configure the following parameters if necessary e Forced output value or use of manual mode if input goes
502. ting a change has been made but not implemented 8 Click Apply to implement the change Click the Minimize button in the bStartFlag View Variable dialog box and move it out of the way Click the Powerup tab to make the Powerup chart the active window Inspecting Messages 1 Lookfor a light blue MEO box in the status bar at the bottom of the window The status bar in the main PAC Control window tells you when an information warning or error message has been placed in the message queue Messages can help in troubleshooting your strategy In this example an Information message is in the message queue 2 Click the IMFO box or select Control Engine gt Messages to view the View Message Queue dialog box View Message Queue for Cookie Controller e Refresh 23 Copy All Pop Top Message gt lt Clear All Messages Code Severity Description Chart Block Line Object Time Date 4 Info Device has powered up Powerup clea system l N A N Mixed 13 13 09 25 This message tells you that the I O unit has powered up 3 Close the dialog box to return to the Powerup chart Stepping Through the Chart Now let s step through the chart to see what s happening 1 Click inside the Powerup chart and then click the Step Over button tr The hatch marks move from Start to Start Charts We ve just moved stepped to the next block 2 Clickthe button again PAC Control executes the Start Charts block and s
503. ting to tables can be found in the following topics Miscellaneous Commands on page 299 Logical Commands on page 293 Mathematical Commands on page 295 Pointer Commands on page 303 String Commands on page 306 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS I O Unit Event Message Commands The following commands refer to event messages sent from SNAP PAC I O units Get I O Unit Event Message State Get I O Unit Event Message Text Set I O Unit Event Message State Set I O Unit Event Message Text A SNAP PAC I O system can send a message as a response to an event that occurs within strategy logic For example if pressure in a pipe reaches a certain level the system can send a warning email message to a technician Or data about a process can be streamed to a computer every 30 seconds for monitoring CAUTION Events and reactions including event messages that are processed separately from your strategy can conflict with strategy logic If you are using PAC Control use strategy logic instead of local events and reactions on the I O unit or be very careful that local events and reactions do not conflict Use PAC Manager to configure event messages following the steps in Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide You can configure the following types of event messages e Email or paging messages sent to a person Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP traps sent to an enterprise management System
504. tions dialog box click the first command you want to comment out Click Add In the Add Instructions dialog box choose the instruction Comment Block Click OK You return to the Instructions dialog box and all the instructions in the block from that point on are grayed out indicating that they will be ignored when the strategy runs Click just beyond the last command you want to comment out Add another Comment Block instruction When you return to the Instructions dialog box all commands between the two Comment Block instructions are grayed out When you no longer want the strategy to ignore the command s delete the two Comment Block instructions NOTE The Comment Block command is used for this purpose The Comment Instruction command just places an explanatory comment in the Instructions dialog box It does not affect any commands Cutting or Copying a Command For commands in action condition and continue blocks you can cut or copy commands to the Windows clipboard and then paste them in the same block or in another block or even in a block of another chart within the same strategy For OptoScript blocks see Using the OptoScript Editor on page 340 240 1 With the strategy in Configure or Online mode and the flowchart open double click the block containing the command you want to cut or copy In the Instructions dialog box click any line of the command you want to cut or copy To cut or copy more than o
505. to an integer yields 555444352 note the error starting in the 7 digit Float Issues and Examples Accumulation of Relatively Small Floating point Values When adding float values the relative size of the two values is important For example if you add 1 0 to a float variable repeatedly the value of the float variable will correctly increase in increments of 1 0 until it reaches 1 677722e 7 16 777 220 Then the value will no longer change because 1 0 is too small relative to 1 677722e to make a difference in the significant digits The same thing will occur if you add 0 0001 to 2 048 0 or add 1 000 0 to 1 71 7987e The key is the relative size of the numbers Here s another way to think of it Suppose your bank could only keep track of seven digits If you were fortunate enough to have one million dollars 1 000 000 in your account and tried to add 10 cents 0 10 to it you would not be able to because the 10 cents is not big enough relative to the total to be significant Since the bank has only seven digits to keep track of your money in this example one digit has to fall off the end either the 10 cents falls off the right side or the million digit falls off the left side Which would you rather see in your bank account Seven digits available 1 213 4 5 6 7 Amount in account 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add 10 cents 0 10 digit falls off on right 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add 10 cents 0 10 di
506. to be applied a negative gain constant turns this error into a positive output for the heater Alternatively a cooling system reports a positive error when the input exceeds the setpoint a positive gain constant maintains the positive output to the chiller Optional depending on your system Minimum and maximum changes to Output and Output forcing when the Input is out of range 2 Download and run your strategy The current PID configuration is written to the I O unit You can stop your strategy at this point if you wish as the PID will continue operating 3 In Debug mode double click the PID on the Strategy Tree PAC Control User s Guide 151 INSPECTING AND TUNING PID LOOPS 3 pid0 View PID Loop scanning Name pid0 Error None Input 79 2753 Gain 15 Scan Rate 3 Setpoint 79 Tunel 0 05 Scan Counts 112783 Enable comm Yes Y Dutput 2 252521 Tune D 0 02 Plot 1 0 Details Misc Details IVAL Velocity Algorithm Type B 5 oint Dutput 09 44 00 0 09 Data p InputAxis gt Dutput Axis Time Axis gt 4 Setthe PID Mode to Auto if not set already and click Apply 5 Change the Setpoint if desired by typing a new setpoint and clicking Apply Setpoint must be configured as Host Depending on the type of system your PID may maintain a setpoint or respond to changes in setpoint Experiment with setpoint changes again after tuning the P and D constants 6 Adjust the
507. toScript command equivalent GetMonth has no arguments and places the result in the variable In most cases you will use the value a function command returns by placing it in a variable a control structure or a mathematical expression Occasionally however you may not need to use the result For example the command StartChart returns a status If you do not need to track the status you can ignore it by not placing the result anywhere for example StartChart Fan Control Data Types and Variables Unlike most procedural languages PAC Control maintains a database of all declared variables which is shared with PAC Display Variables are not declared in OptoScript code but are created declared within PAC Control See 9 Using Variables and Commands Variables are not declared in OptoScript because local variables are not allowed All variables are global for the strategy or global within a subroutine PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 11 USING OPTOSCRIPT If you use a variable in OptoScript code that does not currently exist in the strategy you ll receive an error message when you test compile the code and can add the variable then Variable Name Conventions With OptoScript and in PAC Control generally it s a good idea to get into the habit of indicating the variable type in each variable s name Some variable types may be obvious in the name itself but others are not For more information see Naming Conventions on pag
508. toScript so that the tag that is pointed to will be used instead of the address of the tag When using a pointer with normal PAC Control commands you need to de reference the pointer because PAC Control commands are designed to use tags instead of the address of the tags Using the Comparison Operator To see if a pointer is pointing to something use the comparison operator see page 334 to compare it to null This use is similar to standard PAC Control condition commands such as Pointer Equal to NULL For example n2 pnl null n2 null pnl if pt1 0 null then Determining Which Variable To Use Pointers are very useful when you don t know what variables need to be used until runtime For instance the next example uses a switch statement see page 337 to determine which variable to use based on the day of the week It then uses a pointer to perform a calculation using the correct variable switch GetDayOfWeek case 0 Sunday pni n2 break case 6 Saturday pni n3 break default Monday Friday pni 5 n4 break endswitch Use the pointer to set the chosen variable pnl n5 f1 5 For More Information For more information and examples of using pointers in OptoScript see the following e Pages Pointer Commands on page 303 and Pointers and Indexing on page 85 e See Appendix E OptoScript Language Reference e Download the OptoScript Examples Either click here
509. tring pointer or communication handle When you create the variable you designate the type of data it contains It is always best to choose the most appropriate data type for the information you are storing PAC Control can store an integer in a floating point variable but it has to convert the data first Unnecessary data conversions take up processor time e Numeric data stores numbers and can be one of the following types A floating point or float is a numeric value that contains a decimal point such as 3 14159 1 0 or 1 2342 A good example of a float variable is one that stores readings from an analog input such as a thermocouple PAC Control uses IEFE single precision floats with rounding errors of no more than one part per million Aninteger is a whole number with no fractional part Examples of integer values are 1 0 1 999 or 4 568 The state of a switch for example could be stored in an integer variable as 1 on or 0 off Most integers used in PAC Control are 32 bit signed integers which can range from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 These 32 bit integers should be used for general integer use such as status variables mathematics and indexes 64 bit integers address the entire I O unit at once but are slower than integer 32 commands PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS Atimer stores elapsed time in units of seconds with resolution in milliseconds Up Timers count up from
510. trol the setpoint select PID Output and choose the PID from the drop down list G Output Choose the destination for the PID output I O Point or Host To use the output for controlling the setpoint or input of another PID choose Host H Lower Clamp Upper Clamp Enter upper and lower clamp values to prevent the output from exceeding a desirable range These values should equal the range of the output point if used Or choose values to make sure that the output device doesn t shut off for example keeping a circulation pump running regardless of the PID output or that the output never reaches a destructively high setting for example keeping a motor below maximum I Min Change Max Change Optional Enter minimum and maximum change values The output wont respond until the minimum change is reached for example you may not want a heater to turn on to correct a 1 degree error Maximum change prevents too drastic a change in output for example you could limit the increase in a pump5 output to prevent pipe breakage The default for both minimum and maximum is zero which disables the feature J Output Options Choose how the PID should respond if the input goes out of range To have PAC Control logic or an operator respond check Switch to manual mode To force the output to a specific value check that option and type the output values NOTE If both boxes are checked forced output and manual mode the output will be forced and t
511. troller Using PAC Manager use the Upload File to I O Unit command to place the root certificate in pki root certs on the SNAP PAC controller Then make sure to execute the Save Files to Flash command and restart the device For more information see Moving Files to the SNAP PAC Controller or I O Unit in form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide In PAC Control create a new strategy Create the following numeric Integer 32 variables set to Initialize on strategy run For more information see Adding Variables on page 221 nHttpStatus Integer32 nPortSSL Integer32 nSendStatus Integer32 Create the following string variables strCmd String 100 strURL String 256 Create the following string tables For more information see Adding Tables on page 224 DstStrTbIBody String 100 1024 DstStrTblHdr String 100 1024 HTTP SrcStrTblBody String 10 256 Add an Action Block named Begin and an OptoScript Block named Get Content to the Powerup chart PAC Control User s Guide 277 COMMUNICATION COMMANDS 8 Connect the Begin block to the Get Content block 9 Add the following code to the OptoScript Block MoveToStrTableElements 0 1 HTTP SrcStrTblBody A 3 MoveToStrTableElements 0 1 DstStrTblHdr MoveToStrTableElements 0 1 DstStrTblBody B StrURL www google com C strCmd D nPortSSL 443 nSendStatus HttpGet
512. ts 114 mistic I O units and commands 198 mode Configure definition of 53 Debug definition of 53 Online definition of 53 modifying See changing monitoring See inspecting and viewing moving block 210 connection line 210 control engine definitions 109 files via FTP 263 I O point 130 text block 210 to another window or chart 57 moving control engines 109 multitasking 50 and strings 307 N naming block 78 206 chart 77 214 conventions 77 78 329 I O points 78 variables 78 329 naming conflicts 373 network segmenting control network 93 etwork redundancy 94 umber converting to string 312 urneric literals in OptoScript 329 umeric table adding 224 as alternative to strings 307 numeric variable adding 221 in OptoScript 329 my x 4e O offset and gain commands instructions 244 offset definition 244 online help 67 Online mode avoiding memory problems 53 definition 53 online mode toolbar 54 opening applications from PAC Control 66 chart 212 strategy 162 watch window 158 operator bitwise in OptoScript 336 comparison in OptoScript 334 in standard commands AND OR 238 logical in OptoScript 335 order of precedence 395 OptoScript bitwise operators 336 PAC Control User s Guide Eie block example 318 block definition 202 bookmark 343 case statements 323 337 command types 328 commands 326 comments 396 communication handle 260 comparison operators 334 comparison with other language
513. ts you need and the total number of charts in the strategy is limited only by the control engines memory Be aware however that the maximum number of charts that can be running at any one time is based on the control engine you are using e 16 charts on a SNAP PAC R series controller e 32 charts on a SNAP PAC S series controller e 64 charts on a SoftPAC controller Program logic moves through a flowchart in one of two ways flow through or loop e Achart with flow through logic performs a set of specific commands and then stops It has a beginning and an end and at the end is a condition or action block that has no exit Subroutines the Powerup chart and any other chart that does not need to run continuously should always have flow through logic In complex strategies be careful when using delays and condition looping waiting for something to occur in charts with flow through logic e A chart with loop logic has no end It loops through a set of actions and conditions continuously A loop logic chart can have several paths through which the direction of the logic may flow depending on certain criteria Use loop logic for a chart that needs to run continuously The simple sprinkler chart has loop logic it runs continuously Chart Guidelines As you design your strategy put each sub process of your overall control problem into a separate chart within the strategy On a SNAP PAC R series controller a maximum of 16 charts
514. u track changes during development and provides a backup in case of a failure on the control engine Archive files are date and time stamped and zipped for compact storage that you can copy to another computer or disk for backup Archives are always placed in the same folder as your strategy Since a new archive file is created each time you archive a strategy remember to manually delete any old archive files you do not want to keep We recommend you archive both to the computer during strategy development and to the control engine when the strategy is completed Archiving to the control engine as well as the computer makes sure that an older strategy can always be found and updated even after personnel changes occur and years pass See also Archiving Strategies on the Control Engine on page 106 PAC Control offers three ways to archive strategies to the computer e To make an archive at any time choose File gt Archive Strategy A dialog box shows you the name and location of the archive file e To have an archive automatically created whenever the strategy is closed choose File gt Strategy Options In the Strategy Options dialog box click Archive strategy to disk when strategy is closed e To have an archive automatically created whenever the strategy is downloaded choose File gt Strategy Options In the Strategy Options dialog box click Archive strategy to disk when strategy is downloaded The archive file na
515. u would normally use for a string variable such as Append String to String or Convert String to Float Pointer Tables A pointer table contains a list of objects of different types each of which can be pointed to For example the object at index 0 could be a chart the object at index 1 a digital point and the object at index 2 a string variable An example of using a pointer table for indexing is shown on page 85 When you create a pointer table no initial values are set You can use the Move to Pointer Table command to set individual values in the table A pointer table element cannot be directly referenced It must be copied to a pointer variable first using the command Move From Pointer Table Element Once it is in the pointer variable you can reference it as you would any object of that type For example if index 3 in a pointer table points to a counter input use Move From Pointer Table Element to put the counter input address in a pointer variable Then you can use any command for the pointer variable that you would normally use with a counter input such as Start Counter or Clear Counter PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Simulation Commands The following commands are used for simulation and program testing Communication to All I O Points Enabled Communication to All I O Units Enabled Disable Communication to All I O Points Disable Communication to All I O Units Disable Communication to
516. uch as tables integers or I O units until the task is complete For example if you want two different charts to change the values in the same table it is important for one chart to complete its task before allowing the second chart to access the table To demonstrate the following charts show how to construct two charts in a strategy so that each chart can access the same table without interference from the other chart PAC Control User s Guide INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES Chart 1 and Chart 2 are very similar The main difference is that one block D in Chart 1 adds 2 to each table element while in Chart 2 it adds 3 Here s what each block accomplishes A Get Table Lock Uses the following instructions to wait until Chart 2 unlocks the flag before it locks the flag on the table It also tracks the number of times Chart modifies the table and it gets the length of the table The Timeout value of 1 makes the chart wait the other chart has successfully unlocked the flag on the table See also Flag Lock Timeout Values on page 85 Flag lock will wait until Chart 2 unlocks the flag I Instructions Chart1 Get Table Lock on the table See also Flag Lock Timeout 1 Timeout yait until lock succeeds Values on page 85 pens Flag Int Table Flag Timeout 1 Tracks the number of Put Result in Int Table Flag Result times the table has been Increment Variable Next Block modified by Chart1 Modifi
517. ues for individual table elements on strategy download only see Setting Initial Values in Variables and Tables During Strategy Download on page 226 1 Click the Windows Start menu and choose Programs gt Opto22 gt PAC Project 92 gt Tools gt PAC Terminal The PAC Terminal window appears File Tools Configure View Help Control Engines Controller Name System Type Address 1 Address 2 f Cookie Controller Standard 4127 0 0 1 3 R1 Controller Standard 410 195 55 111 110 PAC Control User s Guide pa CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES Right click the control engine and choose Download gt Forth File from the pop up menu In the Download File dialog box click Browse In the Open dialog box locate the file you want to download When the full path appears click OK If necessary to find the file choose All Files from the Files of Type drop down menu The download begins and a dialog box shows its progress PAC Control User s Guide 111 DOWNLOADING FILES USING PAC TERMINAL 112 PAC Control User s Guide 6 Working with I O Introduction In addition to configuring a control engine to run your strategy you also need to configure input output hardware to do the work turning things on setting temperatures monitoring controls and so on This chapter shows you how to configure and work with I O units I O points and PID loops In this Chapter Choosing a Configuration Too
518. ugh_Chip_Control B Dough_Vessel_Pressure_ 1 B ven Inspection Control a Powerup a 2 vewner This chart runs amp C3 Numeric Variables continuously once the ng bStartFlag program has been started 24 dtCookieMotionT imer E fDoughPressureS etpc FLT E fFlampValue Drop the dough ex fSetpointMinusDeadb H FLT White tab shows B nChartStetus this is a chart QE nCookieMotionPreset ga nLoopCounte Gray tab shows chart name PAC Control Ready Configure Let s take a closer look at what this chart does Even without its descriptive comments it s easy to see that this program segment begins by starting a conveyor belt If the belt is not running at the correct speed the process goes into a loop until the speed is correct When it is correct dough is dropped on the belt and then chips are dropped on the dough The process then loops back to re evaluate the conveyor speed waiting if it s incorrect and dropping more dough and chips if it s correct The rectangular shaped blocks are called action blocks They do things The diamond shaped blocks are condition blocks They decide things Charts may also contain other blocks including oval shaped continue blocks which route the program logic back to another block in the same chart and hexagon shaped script blocks which contain instructions and logic written in PAC Control s built in OptoScript programming language C
519. uide 329 OPTOSCRIPT DATA TYPES AND VARIABLES 330 Using Strings As noted in the section on syntax a string in OptoScript must be in double quotes An individual character can be used either as a string in double quotes or as an integer value representing that character in ASCII in single quotes When you assign a single character to a string use double quotes to avoid a syntax error sString a To change a single character integer into a string use the chr keyword as shown below sString Chr a sString Chr 97 foc O73 sString Chr 97 NOTE If you intend to retrieve the string data in either PAC Display or OptoOPCServer to avoid an error do not use the Chr keyword character to insert an embedded null e g Chr 0 Strings can be used in the following ways String literals must be all on one line sGreeting Hello world When you use the Chr keyword to assign a character value to a string variable you can either quote a character or give its ASCII value For example the following two statements are equivalent sStringl Chr A sStringl Chr 65 Clear a string using empty quotation marks sStringl String variables sOutgoing sIncoming A string can be thought of as a table of characters The number in square brackets is the character s index Note that the index starts with the number zero The following code would result in sGreeting equaling Hello
520. umerically and graphically Adjust resolution of the Input Axis by clicking the Input Axis button 10 11 The system is stable when the Input value does not vary significantly some drift can be expected Stabilization may take several minutes depending on the system 3 TemperatureControl View PID Loop scanning E n x Name pid f Emor None 77 32614 Gan 5 Scan Rate 1 sec Mode Manual Setpoint 90 Tunel 0 Scan Counts 249642 Enable comm Yes Output 30 Tune D 0 4 4 Plot 120 Details Misc Details VAL Velocity Algorithm Type B Input Setpoint Dutput Reset Scale Tracking View 500 Span View 200 Span View 100 Span View 50 Span View 25 Span View 10 Span View 5 Span View 1 Span Center on Input Center on Setpoint Increase the resolution of the Input Axis by clicking the Input Axis menu and choosing a span setting of 1 or 5 percent Center the Input Axis if necessary by clicking the red line at its left end and dragging it up or down until the plot is visible Under the Time Axis menu choose Reset Scale Tracking This is a precautionary step as changing settings on the plot can fix the plot at a certain point in time Resetting the time axis ensures that you are viewing the real time values In the Output field type the other of your two output settings and click Apply A 20 percent increase is a moderate detectable change
521. unication Handle Command delete getpos or setpos Set Communication Handle Value Set End of Message Terminator To work with files in your strategy first use the command Open Outgoing Communication Writing to a File For example suppose you have data in your strategy in a string table Product_Table that you want to write to a file Products txt in a directory Company Data on the control engine Here s how you would do it 1 Use Open Outgoing Communication to open a file communication handle The value of the handle would be ile w Company Data Products txt 2 Usethe condition Communication Open to make sure the communication handle opened 3 To put the data from the string table into a comma delimited file which is easy to open in database software use the command Set End Of Message Terminator to indicate that a comma should be used as the delimiting character Or if you want each line of your data to end with a LF line feed set the EOM end of message terminator to 10 decimal which is the ASCII code for LF See ASCII Table on page 313 for other EOM characters 4 Use the command Transmit String Table to transmit data from Product Table directly into the Products txt file Items from the string table are separated by commas in the file Strategy ee Control Engine File System Product_Table Company Data Products txt 0 Bats 1 Baseballs j CU Bats Baseballs B
522. used for the alternate download port so there is one less chart that can run To enable Background Downloading NOTE Controller memory is cut in half when background downloading is set it in PAC Manager Also one chart is used for the alternate download port so there is one less chart that can run 1 Open PAC Manager and do the following steps a Clickthe Inspect button to open the Inspect window b In the IP Address field on the Inspect window type the IP address for the SNAP PAC controller c Click Status Write then scroll down to Strategy Download Method d Click on the Value field for Strategy Download Method select Background from the drop down menu then click Apply e Under Operation Commands highlight Store configuration to flash and click Send Command The configuration is stored to flash memory and a Success message appears For more information see the PAC Manager User s Guide form 1704 2 Turnoffthe power to the control engine and then turn it back on again In Configure mode in PAC Control choose File gt Strategy Options 4 On the Download tab under Flash Memory select Use background downloading and fast strategy updating 5 Optional Under Flash Memory select Save strategy to flash memory after download w Strategy Options Archive Download Legacy Serial 1 0 Ports Flash Memory Save strategy to flash memory after download Set autorun flag after download B
523. uspended e A Delay command is used Using the command Delay mSec with a value of 1 millisecond is a handy way to give up the time slice while waiting in a loop for a condition to become True For more information see form 1776 Optimizing PAC Project System Performance When does the requested change to a chart or task status take effect Not immediately In any multitasking system timing and synchronization issues are always a concern The time required for a particular request to be implemented depends on the number of tasks currently running and the specified chart s location in the task queue We recommend using commands such as Calling Chart Suspended and Chart Running to determine the status of a chart PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Communication Commands The following commands refer to moving data among entities that store and transfer data Accept Incoming Communication Clear Communication Receive Buffer Clear Receive Buffer Close Communication Communication Open Get Active Interrupt Mask Get Communication Handle Value Get End Of Message Terminator Get Number of Characters Waiting HTTP Get HTTP Post Calculate Content Length HTTP Post From String Table Listen for Incoming Communication Open Outgoing Communication Receive Character Receive N Characters Receive Numeric Table Receive Numeric Table Ex Receive Numeric Variable Receive Pointer Table Receive String
524. ut scanning XVAL 61 44073 Maximize 2 To change the value or to view more information click the Maximize button PAC Control User s Guide The title bar shows the name of the analog point and whether scanning is occurring NOMS CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O 24 PID_Input scanning Name PID Input Type Analog Input IAL 0 XVAL 60 57773 B Communication Point 170 Unit Enabled 1 amp 3 Open Parent Scanning stops whenever you click a changeable field It resumes once you click Apply another button or an unchangeable field If scanning resumes before you click Apply any changes you made are lost Asterisks in a field indicate an out of range value Dashes in an XVAL field indicate a communication error Change the fields as necessary A IVAL The point s current internal value You can change it to any value within the valid range ofthe analog point For an input the valid range may exceed the apparent range that is you may be able to enter a value lower than the zero scale value or higher than the full scale value For an output however you cannot enter a value outside of the range defined by the zero scale and full scale values After you change it click Apply B XVAL The point s current external value You can change it to any value within the valid range of the analog point then click Apply C Enable comm Current point status Yes on a green background me
525. ut Data the input provides Hygrometer Humidity percentage from 0 10096 Day Day of the week Sunday through Saturday Time Hour of the day 24 hour clock Sprinkler status Whether sprinklers are currently running on or off Input from timer Length of time sprinklers have been on in minutes PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 4 DESIGNING YOUR STRATEGY What do the outputs need to be List all the outputs Describe the results that are needed Check for any outputs you need but don t have Output What it does Sprinkler switch Turns sprinklers on or off Timer control Sets timer How many times does the process have to be repeated Our example is a simple sprinkler system in which the process happens twice a week on certain days In a more complex system however you might have one section of the sprinklers turn on followed by other sections repeating the process several times in different areas and then repeating the whole pattern on certain days Designing a Logical Sequence of Steps to Solve the Problem Now that you ve determined what you re trying to do and what your inputs data and outputs look like you re ready to outline the steps needed to solve the control problem Think about how you would do the job if you were doing it by hand Again work from the top down starting with big steps and then breaking those big steps into smaller steps Sprinkler Control System Every day at 6 00
526. utput from the PID TnLo Range of the input P The Error PV SP from the previ InHi ous scan OutLo Integrator Anti windup is applied D ae Range of the output Integral after the output is determined to be ius within bounds Cain Proportional tuning parameter PV1 PV2 PV from the previous scan and the Unitless May be negative scan before that integral tuning parameter In units s Actual scan time time since previ Tunel of seconds Increasing magnitude ScanTime j ous scan increases influence on output Equations Common to All Algorithms Err PV SP Span OutHi OutLo InHi InLo Output Output FeedForward TuneFF Velocity Type C Algorithm TermP PV PV1 TermI TuneIl ScanTime Err TermD TuneD ScanTime PV 2 PV1 PV2 Aoutput Span Gain ATermP Atermt ATermD Velocity Type B Algorithm TermP Err Err 1 TermI TuneI ScanTime Err TermD TuneD ScanTime PV 2 PV1 PV2 Aoutput Span Gain ATermP Atermt ATermD Non velocity Algorithms These equations were derived from the article A Comparison of PID Control Algorithms by John P Gerry in Control Engineering March 1987 These three equations are the same except for the tuning coefficients converting from one equation to another is merely a matter of converting the tuning coefficients Equations common to all but the velocity algorithm Integral Integral
527. ves and memory cards their use is not recommended They are better suited for transferring files rather than directly accessing them ES PAC Control User s Guide 2 PAC Control Tutorial Introduction In this chapter we ll start with a sample strategy a control application for a simple cookie factory You ll learn how to work with strategies open and manipulate flowcharts work with variables and I O points configure a control engine compile and download a strategy run it in Debug mode make an online change and more The tutorial can be used with either PAC Control Basic or PAC Control Professional PAC Control Basic is shown in the graphics The best way to use the tutorial is to sit down at your computer and follow it through To start all you need is PAC Control which allows you to do everything up to the point of downloading your strategy To do the complete tutorial you will need the controller and I O included in a SNAP PAC Learning Center For more information go to the Opto 22 website www Opto22 com and search on the part number SNAP PACLC In this Chapter Opening the Strategy ss 7 Saving the Strategy 9 Examining the Strategy 10 Opening Cart siete 13 Opening a Block Adding a Command 18 Configuring a Control Engine uses 22 Compiling the Strategy Running the Strategy Compiling and Downloading the Change 33 Using a Watch Window s 35 Closing the Strategy a
528. vice has been turned off and then expected message received on again since the last communication and is now ready An attempt to store the strategy to flash failed or an attempt 5 Operation failed to do something with a chart failed like call continue sus pend start initialize threads Invalid year entered must be between 2000 and 2099 or 6 Data field error invalid data read from memory when attempting to read the strategy from flash memory 7 Watchdog timeout has occurred See Add I O Unit Dialog Box on page 117 Invalid data read when attempting to read a strategy from 8 Invalid data flash or an invalid character number was passed to a string function Valid range for Ethernet is 0 65535 For a communication 10 Invalid port number handle serial port format may be incorrect A Transmit or Transfer command fails when using a comm 11 Could not send data handle For example an attempt is made to send a file to a remote ftp server that has gone off line 42 Invalid table index Mn an index greater than the number of elements in the PAC Control User s Guide 13 APPENDIX B ERRORS AND MESSAGES Overflow error Typically a math result too big to fit in the value passed while doing number conversion functions such as con verting a float value to engineering units a float to an unsigned integer a float to an integer a 64 bit integer to a 32 bit integer a floating point value to a 64
529. will be changed but will not affect the connection To monitor the variable in a watch window click Watch If you have only one watch window and it is already open the variable appears immediately in the window for monitoring Otherwise the Add Watch Entry dialog box appears PAC Control User s Guide 231 VIEWING VARIABLES IN DEBUG MODE 232 T Add Watch Entry Name Time of Day Select Portions To Watch Value Select Watch Window Sv New 0 Check the items you want to watch Items to watch vary depending on the variable type In the Add Watch Entry dialog box do one of the following Ifthe watch window you want to use to monitor the variable is open choose it from the Select Watch Window drop down list Ifthe watch window you want is not open click Open Navigate to it and double click it to open it Ifyou want to monitor the variable in a new watch window click New For help see Creating a Watch Window on page 157 When the Add Watch Entry dialog box shows the correct items to watch and the watch window you want click OK The variable appears in the watch window Viewing Pointer Variables 1 Make sure the strategy is running in Debug mode On the Strategy Tree double click the pointer variable you want to view The View Pointer dialog box appears showing the pointer s name type and item pointed to 3 Pointer A scanning Name Pointer Ty
530. with a carriage return If you add comments to the file they must be preceded by a backslash V and a space Text Examples NOTE Variable names are case sensitive and can include both upper and lower case letters Integer Example To set an initial value of 123 for the variable INTEGER VARIABLE you would include the following text in the initialization file 123 INTEGER VARIABLE Float Example To set an initial value of 456 789 for the variable FLOAT VARIABLE you would include the following text in the initialization file 456 789 FLOAT VARIABLE String Example To set an initial value of String Variable Test String for STRING VARIABLE you would include the following text in the initialization file The spaces and newline are very important STRING VARIABLE SINN String Variable Test String Communication Handle Example To add the parameters of a communication handle named COMM Handle you would include the following text in the initialization file The spaces and newline are very important COMM Handle SINN tcp 10 0 0 1 1000 PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 9 USING VARIABLES AND COMMANDS Pointer Example To have the pointer PTR_POINTER_VARIABLE point initially to INTEGER_VARIABLE you would include the following text in the initialization file INTEGER VARIABLE MoveToPointer PTR POINTER VARIABLE Integer 32 Table Example To set initial values of 10 20 30 40 and 50 for elements zero throug
531. with the controller whether from the strategy or externally The lock out affects applications such as PAC Control PAC Display PAC Manager OptoOPCServer and PAC Terminal These applications will either have intermittent or no connectivity with the controller The solution to this dilemma is to control the rate at which TCP IP communication handles are opened and closed When a TCP IP communication handle is closed whether a result of a prior successful or unsuccessful opening it should be reopened no sooner than 3 seconds If this reopening fails to succeed double the delay to 6 seconds If this subsequent reopening fails double the delay to 12 seconds And thereafter subsequent reconnections should be performed no shorter than every 24 seconds This throttling of the opening allows several TCP IP resources to expire their closing timer PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS TCP Communication Handle Examples The following diagram shows an example of a communication handle value for outgoing communication Outgoing Communication SNAP R series I O Device A IP address 10 192 59 45 IP address 10 192 59 31 Request communication ag E i i M Receives communication DI da on port 22004 E Communication Handle value tcp 10 192 59 31 22004 l d IP address Port number For incoming communication the communication handle value could be Incoming Communication SNAP R
532. xample in an assignment statement strings can be added together like this strDate strMonth strDay strYear It would certainly be nice to use the same kind of string addition in a procedure call TransmitString strMonth strDay strYear nPort However due to the current abilities of control engines this type of string addition inside a function call is not possible PAC Control User s Guide 393 OPTOSCRIPT LEXICAL REFERENCE OptoScript Lexical Reference Token Syntax Legend Tokens are the smallest units that the OptoScript compiler processes bold character parenthesis brackets opt subscript no subscript 0 subscript 1 subscript 1 subscript specific character content is treated as a unit set of possible items item is optional item is not allowed 0 or more items may be chosen one item must be chosen one or more items must be chosen Literals and Names Int32Literal 0 xX jyhex digit letter any character any character a through z upper or lower case T one of 0123456789 digit non zero diait 998 of 12345678 9 bid one of 0123456789ABC hex digit DEFabcdef Hexadecimal Integer 32 bit Good examples Ox12AB OX12aB 0x0 Bad examples x123ABC 0123ABC 0 non zero digit Decimal Integer 32 bit Good examples 0 123 7890 digito Bad examples 123ABC Single Character tola Good examples A 1 Bad exampl
533. xamples of integer values are 1 0 1 999 or 456 The state of a switch for example could be stored in an integer variable as 1 on or 0 off e A timer stores elapsed time in units of seconds with resolution in milliseconds Up timers count up from zero and down timers start from a value you set and count down to zero For example you could set a down timer to make sure a value is updated at precise intervals e A string stores text and any combination of ASCII characters including control codes and extended characters For instance a string variable might be used to send information to a display for an operator to see A string variable can contain numeric characters but they no longer act as numbers To use them in calculations you must convert them into floating point or integer numbers And a numeric value to be displayed on a screen must be converted into a string first e A pointer does not store the value of a variable instead it stores the memory address of a variable or some other PAC Control item such as a chart or an I O point e Communication handles store parameters needed for communication with other devices You can use variables that are individual pieces of information and you can also use table variables which are groups of related information in the form of a table instructions commands PAC Control commands or instructions tell the control engine what to do at each step in the flowchart to control
534. y is running 144 copying I O point 131 I O unit commands 287 minimum maximum value 244 245 offset and gain commands instructions 244 point commands 244 326 point definition 46 TPO 244 applications launching from PAC Control 66 archiving strategies restoring archives 108 to computer 166 to control engine 106 argument 75 237 in OptoScript 328 ASCII decimal and hex values of characters 313 auto stepping through a chart 178 179 automation 45 autorun 175 B background downloading 169 170 baud rate and mode for serial I O units Pro 119 baud rate for serial I O units 119 bill of materials 190 191 bit commands 293 bitwise operator in OptoScript 336 block block 0 202 changing color or size 203 212 connecting blocks 207 definition 202 deleting 211 drawing 205 finding in a chart 62 moving 210 naming 78 206 OptoScript 318 selecting 210 stepping through 178 BOM 190 191 bookmark 343 PAC Control User s Guide 403 breakpoints in a chart 180 C calling a subroutine 356 case statement 323 337 programming example 82 changing active control engine 100 analog I O while strategy is running 144 baud rate and mode for serial I O units Pro 119 baud rate for serial I O units 119 block color or size 203 212 chart background 203 chart name or description 214 column width in a dialog box 63 command instruction 239 connection line color or size 212 control engine definition 99 debug level 176 debugger s
535. y logic controller with an SB brain Exception Use You are not using PAC Control PAC Manager for E1 or E2 I O units The strategy handles all logic you are not also configuring events and reactions on I O units Whichever tool you use for configuring I O be aware of the impact if you later change configuration For example if you configure I O in PAC Manager download the configuration file to I O units and then later add a point in PAC Control remember that your configuration file doesn t contain that point PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH I O If you use PAC Manager follow instructions in Opto 22 form 1704 the PAC Manager User s Guide When you have finished configuration and saved the configuration file you can import it into PAC Control following the steps in Importing I O Configuration into PAC Control below If you use PAC Control follow the steps beginning with Adding an I O Unit on page 116 Importing I O Configuration into PAC Control If you have configured all I O units points and PID loops in PAC Manager follow these steps to import the configuration file into a PAC Control strategy 1 Open the strategy in PAC Control In the Strategy Tree right click the I O units folder From the pop up menu choose Import Import 1 0 Units from an Opto Tag Database Look in C3 Samples x Q eam File name Files of type Opto Tag Database Files o
536. y tries the primary address again For details see from 1702 the PAC Display User s Guide bl PC with two NICs running OptoOPCServer H PC with two NICs running PAC Display Pro SNAP PAC S series PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 5 WORKING WITH CONTROL ENGINES NOTE If your system has redundant controllers you cannot use link redundancy between PAC Display Pro and the controller For more information on using redundant controllers see from 1831 the SNAP PAC Redundancy Option Users Guide System Architecture for Ethernet Link Redundancy As shown in the examples below you can set up your system in several ways to take advantage of the link redundancy capability in PAC Control For additional information see the SNAP PAC controllers user s guides For details on how PAC Display works with link redundancy see form 1702 the PAC Display User s Guide Using a SoftPAC Controller In examples 1 and 2 below the PAC S series controller can be replaced by a SoftPAC controller The PC running SoftPAC must have two network interface cards NICs configured with static primary and secondary IP addresses on different subnets Example 1 Ethernet Link Redundancy In this example the primary concern is that the Ethernet network may need maintenance or may fail leaving the computer running PAC Display Professional the computer running the OptoOPCServer as the PAC Display scanner the controller and the I O
537. y various gains to see how well the system stays at setpoint and responds to setpoint changes In the example below the white arrows added for the example show where gain constants of 2 5 10 and 20 were applied PAC Control User s Guide 153 INSPECTING AND TUNING PID LOOPS Name TemperatureControl Error None Input 87 5283 Gain 20 Scan Rate 1 4 sec Mode Auto Setpoint 90 Tunel 0 Scan Counts 112783 Enable comm Yes Output 61 7775 Tune D Plot 1 0 Details Misc Details IVAL Velocity Algorithm Type B 30 00 Input Setpoint Output Data p InputAxis gt Output Axis Time Axis gt Close Add Watch Save Tuning Help mr In this example a gain setting of 30 revealed an offset error Plot 20 Details Misc Details IVAL Velocity Algorithm Type B With only a gain constant 30 00 applied the input often Mao stabilizes at an incorrect eae value In this heating example a gain setting of 30 drove the input close to the setpoint bu subsequent increases 100 failed to eliminate the offset It is time to try integral constants to eliminate the offset error Data gt Input Axis p Output Axis Time Axis gt 9 Experiment with the integral constant in the Tune field type a number between 0 and 1 and click Apply Your PID may require larger numbers PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WORKING WIT
538. yping in each control engine on the new computer you can open the ControllerNames ini text file and merge the control engine names from a source PC with those on a target PC NOTE 1 Use this procedure only ifyou have PAC Control version R9 4a or newer For versions prior to R9 4a see the OptoKnowledgeBase article KB80603 on the Opto 22 website http opto22 com However the best method is to install the newest software and use the method described here NOTE 2 When PAC Control version R9 4a or newer is first used it automatically migrates the control engine definitions from older versions If you then use an older version of PAC Control to add another control engine the new control engine will not automatically be available in the R9 4 or newer version because it only checks the older versions of control engine definitions the first time it is run To move all the control engines from a source PC to a target PC 1 On the source PC locate the Controller ini file This file can be found in the following location C ProgramData Opto 22 PAC Project ControllerNames ini 2 Send the file by email or other means so that it can be opened on the target PC 3 Onthetarget PC open the ControllerNames ini files for the source and target PCs with a text editor such NotePad Source File Edit Format View Help R2 Control Engine 0 0 0 0 10 195 55 112 R1 Control Engine 0 0 0 0 10 195 55 111 Cookie Controller 0 0 0 0 127 0 0 1 Target Ej
539. ystem Just remember two things e Include the card s directory name in the path in the file communication handle for example file a sdcard0 VoltLog txt e Filename length See your controller s user s guide for card compatibility information Filenames up to 127 characters can be used on higher capacity microSDHC cards However on lower capacity standard microSD cards 2GB or less formatted with FAT16 all files you store on the card must be named with a maximum of eight characters in the name plus three characters in the extension 8 dot 3 format for example data ile txt For more information on using the microSD card see the controller s user guide PAC Control User s Guide CHAPTER 10 PROGRAMMING WITH COMMANDS Working with Files in Your Strategy The commands you use with a communication handle vary according to the action the open mode defined in the handle s value To change actions from read to write for example you can use Set Communication Handle Value to change the handle s value Close Communication Communication Open Transfer N Characters Receive Numeric Table 3 Get Available File Space Receive Pointer Table Transmit Character Get Number of Characters Waiting Transmit NewLine Receive String Receive String Table Send Communication Handle Command find Transmit Numeric Table Transmit Pointer Table Transmit String Transmit String Table Open Outgoing Communication Send Comm

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

pf 46 french - service navigator  PGI Tools Guide  DOSSIER PERMANENT  AOC L32W781A 32" HD-Ready Black LCD TV  Melissa Steel Series 253-002 User's Manual  DM-D001-SC Rev 4.01.11A OpInst Manaul for DL850 540kHz  Wirand FS3N  Tracer X6  MANUALE DELL`UTENTE LETTORE HARD DISK UNITISERVE  GA-E7AUM-DS2H Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file